_NCf SjFIED

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

RIFLE COMPANY
INFANTRY REGIMENT
REGDED UNCLASSIFIED ay
AnJQRITYOF DOD DIR. 5200. 1 R

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OCTOBER 1949

RE ) lUNCLASSIFIED
 FM 7-10
C1
FIELD MANUAL
RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT
CHA-NGES1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 1 | WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 16 October1950
FM 7-10, 3 October 1949, is changed as follows:

24. THE ADVANCE PARTY

The advance party ' 'I paces between men.
Reinforcements to the advance party may include at-
tached 60-mm mortars, 57-mm rifles, machine guns,
and tanks. Observers from the * * * the ad-
vance party.

143. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PER-

SONNEL
a. (Superseded.) The platoon leader is respon-
sible for the training, discipline, control, and tactical
employment of his platoon. He recommends the use
of his platoon to the company commander and con-
trols its actions through appropriate orders to his
sections. He goes where he best can influence the
action of his platoon. However, since the 57-mm
rifle and 60-mm mortar squads usually. operate with
the rifle platoons, he acts principally as an advisor
to the company commander and rifle platoon leaders
on the tactical employment of the weapons platoon.
He also supervises the resupply of ammunition by
vehicle and hand carry to those weapons of his pla-

AGO 1248D-Oct. 900066SO--50

NUCASSIIED
toon which are with the rifle platoons. When ele-
ments of the 57-mm rifle section or 60-mm mortar
section are in general support, or in direct support
of assault rifle platoons, he supervises their employ-
ment.
* * * * * * *

144. DUTIES OF SECTION AND SQUAD LEADERS

The section and squad leaders train and lead the
men in their units. They deploy their unit according
to the platoon, section, or squad mission.
: * * * * * *

b. The 60-mmn MortarSection.

(1) (Superseded.) When the section occupies
a section position, the section leader assigns
general locations and targets or target areas
for his squads; controls the displacement
of weapons and supply of ammunition; and
controls the fire of the squads. When a
squad is in direct support of or attached to
a rifle platoon, he assists in its ammunition
supply. He goes where he can best control
the most appropriate portion of his section.
When the section is divided, he will usually
accompany the rifle unit receiving the great-
est amount of support, or he may accompany
any one of his squads, according to the tac-
-tical situation. He must always keep in
contact with the weapons platoon leader.
(2) (Superseded.) The squad leadermoves his
squad to its position area, selects and super-
vises the preparation and occupation of

tU W2LASSI FED AGO 1248D

 exact firing positions, and uses his ammuni-
tion bearers to supply ammunition. When
the squad is in direct support of, or attached
to a rifle platoon, the squad leader super-
vises the employment of the squad and con-
trols, observes, and adjusts its fire. When
a squad, as part of the mortar section, is in
general support of the company, the squad
leader either supervises the operation of his
squad, or acts as an observer for the section.

145. CONTROL
* * * * * *

b. (Superseded.) In attack, the 57-mm rifle sec-

tion and the 60-mm mortar section may be used in
general support of the company to increase the flexi-
bility of fires and to insure continuity of supporting
fires during the displacement. However, because of
limitations of terrain and difficulty in maintaining
control, squads of both the 57-mm rifle section and
the 60-mm mortar section usually are placed in direct
support of, or are attached to, the assault rifle pla-
toons. When a squad of the weapons platoon is
attached to a rifle platoon, it comes under the com-
mand of the rifle platoon leader. The weapons pla-
toon leader and the section leaders 'aid the rifle
platoon leaders in supplying the squads attached to
rifle platoons.
c. (Superseded.) In defense, 57-mm rifle squads
are usually placed in direct support of the rifle pla-
toons and occupy positions within platoon defense
areas. When sectors of fire and observation are not

AGO 1248D 3LASI

limited, the most effective fire and control in defense
situations are obtained by employing the 60-mm
mortars in a section position under company control.
Then the firing positions normally are in the vicinity
of the support platoon. When limited sectors of
fire and observation from a section position prevent
coverage of the company front, the 60-mm mortar
section may be divided, and one or more mortars
placed within each front-line platoon area.
146. CONDUCT OF FIRE
* * * * , *

b. (Superseded.) The 60-mm mortar squads are

given definite targets. Planned mortar fires in the
attack consist of concentrations. A concentration is
the fire of one or more mortars delivered at a located
or suspected target. These concentrations cover an
area 50 yards in diameter. In devising a plan of
fires to support a particular attack, concentrations
may be planned in advance to be fired on call as
needed. When a 60-mm mortar squad is operating
with an assault rifle platoon, the squad leader desig-
nates the targets and conducts the fire of his squad
as required by the supported rifle platoon. The
number and type of targets and target areas are
limited to those that one squad can effectively engage.
When the 60-mm mortar section is in general support,
squads are assigned and engage targets or target
areas as directed by the section leader.
147. OBSERVATION
* * * * *
b. (Superseded.) Observation for the squads of
the 60-mm mortar section is obtained by the use of

4 _ AGO 1248D
 squad or section observation posts. A suitable ob-
servation post is the chief requirement for a mortar
position; hence, the observation post is selected first.
A mortar position that is within 100 yards of the
observation post is preferable. However, if the
mortar position cannot be located this close to the
observation post, the observation post should be lo-
cated within 100 yards of the mortar-target line. In
either case, this allows the observer to make adjust-
ments as though he were on the mortar-target line.
When the observation post is more than 100 yards
from the mortar-target line the mortar should be
moved to another position to correct this situation.
When the terrain or the situation prevents the ob-
servation post being within 100 yards of the mortar-
target line, the observer adjusts along the observer-
target line (target-grid method) or he attempts to
visualize the mortar-target line and adjust with re-
spect to it. The observation post should give ob-
servation over the supported units' zone of action,
provide cover and concealment and have a covered
route of approach. When a mortar squad is operat-
ing with a rifle platoon, the squad leader establishes
his observation post where he can watch the action of
the rifle platoon, and observe and adjust fire on tar-
gets in the platoon zone of action. Communication
between the mortar squad leader and the rifle platoon
leader is by voice, signal, or radio. Communication
between the mortar squad leader and his squad is by
voice, signal, or may be by sound-powered telephone.
When the mortar squads are in general support of
the company, their fires are controlled by the section

AGO 1248D 5
leader from a section observation post that provides
observation of the company zone of action. Com-
munication between the section leader-observer and
the mortar squad leaders at the mortar positions is
by voice, signal, sound-powered telephone, or radio.

148. AMMUNITION SUPPLY

a. (Superseded.) Three of the four 1/4-ton weap-
ons carriers assigned to the company may be used to
transport weapons and ammunition. These three
vehicles normally carry identical mixed loads of
ammunition. They operate from the company am-
munition supply point. Two weapons carriers nor-
mally supply the assault platoons and their attached
elements with all types of ammunition. The third
weapons carrier may be available to supply the 60-mm
mortar section and the 57-mm rifle section when they
are employed in general support.
b. (Superseded.) In the assembly area or in the
attack position, the weapons and the initial ammuni-
tion supply for the 57-mm rifle section and 60-mm
mortar section are usually unloaded from the platoon
weapons carriers for hand carry in the attack. In
defense situations, the weapons and the initial sup-
ply of ammunition are unloaded at the firing po-
sition. Ammunition is resupplied by ammunition
bearers who return to a company supply point and
hand carry the ammunition forward to the firing
position. Often ammunition can be delivered by ve-
hicle to the vicinity of the firing position.
e. (Delete.)

6 * *1248D
6 _ AGO 124SD
152. APPROACH MARCH
The company commander * * * the rifle
units. A 60-mm mortar squad and a 57-mm rifle
squad accompany the advance party of the support
company of the advance guard.

155. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE

* * *

b. The weapons platoon * * * of the platoon.

Unless the company commander has specified the
off-carrier position for the weapons, the platoon
leader selects this position while on reconnaissance.
c. (Superseded.) When elements of the weapons
platoon are attached to rifle platoons, each section
leader supervises the attachment of his squads. For
squads not attached, he selects position areas, as-
signs targets or sectors of fire, and provides for am-
munition supply.
d. (Superseded.) When the 60-mm mortars are
in general support, the 60-mm mortar section leader,
after receiving the platoon leader's order, goes ahead
of his section to the position area. He notes the lo-
cation of the front-line troops and his targets or
target areas. When he has selected the general lo-
cation for his weapons and cover positions, he moves
the squads and their weapons from the off-carrier
position to the firing positions.

156. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

* * * * * *

b. (Superseded.) In attack, the 60-mm mortar

squads are usually placed in direct support of, or at-

AGo 1245D D 7
tached to, the assault rifle platoons. A squad not
allocated to an assault rifle platoon may be kept
under company control ill general support and used
with the support platoon when it is employed. When
observation and fire from one position area can cover
the entire company zone up to and including the
initial objective, the 60-mm mortar section may be
employed as a unit in general support of the company.
During the attack, the mortars fire, on call, at targets
holding up the advance of the assault platoons. Each
mortar usually displaces when its fires no longer
can give close support. After the objective is cap-
tured, the mortar squads protect the reorganization
of the company, and aid in breaking up hostile coun-
terattacks with their fires.

157. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS

* * * * * * *

b. Desirable characteristics for 60-mm mortar fir-

ing positions include-
* * i * * * *

(4) Dispersion between mortars occupying a

section position to prevent two mortar
positions from being hit by one enemy shell.
Dispersion is limited by voice or visual
control.

(6) (Added.) Close proximity to a suitable ob-

servation post (preferably located so that
the mortar position is within 100 yards of
the observation post).

8 R~U~lrr~R AGO 1248D

159. ORDERS
* * * *
* * *

c. Each squad leader * * * the first target.

Squad leaders of the 57-mm rifle squads and 60-mm
mortar squads attached to rifle platoons get their
orders from the rifle platoon leader.

160. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS

a. The weapons, ammnnition, and accessories of
the 57-min rifle section and the 60-mm mortar sec-
tion are moved by weapons carrier from the assembly
area to the attack position, if practicable. Other-
wise, the weapons * * " covered and concealed.
When not resupplying ammunition, ammunition
bearers remain under cover near the firing position.
b. (Superseded.) Since 60-mn mortars normally
are fired from defilade, they usually move by vehicle
from the assembly area to an off-carrier position lo-
cated as close to the position area as the situation
permits. The weapons, accessories, and initial sup-
ply of ammunition are unloaded and hand-carried
to exact firing positions selected by the squad leaders.
The squad leaders supervise the preparation and oc-
cupation of the firing position. Ammunition bearers
are dispersed near the firing position when'not re-
supplying ammunition.

161. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK

* * * * *

b. (Superseded.) The squads of the 60-mm mor-

tar section do not normally participate in prepara-

AGO 1248D O
tory firing unless the fires of other supporting weap-
ons are insufficient. Targets may be assigned to be
engaged on call. When a mortar squad is in direct
support of, or attached to, an assault rifle platoon,
the squad occupies an initial firing position near the
line of departure where it can cover the platoon zone.
The squad engages targets as requested or directed
by the rifle platoon leader. When the fires of the
mortar squad endanger the rifle platoon as it nears
the target area, the fires are lifted to more distant
targets or shifted to targets located on the flanks.
Mortar squads, in general support of the company,
fire at suitable targ as directed by the company
commander, the weapmor platoon leader, or the sec-
tion leader. During the assault, the fires are de-
livered at appropriate targets to the flanks or beyond
the objective.

162. DISPLACEMENT
* * * * * * *

e. (Superseded.) The 60-mm mortar section and

squad leaders continuously make plans for displace-
ment. They closely observe the progress of the as-
sault rifle platoons, and anticipate the need to dis-
place in order to furnish adequate fire support. New
positions and covered routes thereto are selected by
visual and personal reconnaissance. A displacement
is made as rapidly as possible. When a squad is op-
erating with a rifle platoon, the supported platoon
leader may direct the displacement. Often the squad
leader, on his own initiative, displaces his squad when
adequate fire support is no longer possible from the

10 _ AGO 1248D
old position or more effective fire support can be de-
livered from a new position. WVhen squads are in
general support of the company, they displace by
squad echelon, one or two at a time, under supervision
of the section leader. If possible, weapons and am-
munition are moved by vehicle; however, when there
is no other choice, they are moved by hand-carry,

163. REORGANIZATION
a. (Superseded.) As soon as the hostile position
is captured, or the attack is halted for any reason,
weapons are placed in positions which protect the
front and flanks of the assault rifle platoons against
a counterattack. Squads in direct support of, or
attached to, the assault rifle platoons occupy posi-
tions in the platoon areas. Squads in general sup-
port of the company are placed to cover the most
likely avenues of approach in the company zone of
action (fig. 43). The mortars are registered imme-
diately and concentrations are recorded.
* * * * *; *

165. SELECTION OF POSITIONS

* * : * * **

c. When sectors of * * the support platoon.

-* * * * * *

168. POSITION OF LEADERS

* * * **
*

c. Squad Leaders.
* : * * * * *

AGO 124SD 11
 (2) (Superseded.) When a mortar squad is in
direct support of, or attached to, a front-
line rifle platoon, the squad leader super-
vises the employment of the squad and con-
trols, observes, and adjusts its fires. When
the mortar squads are in a section position
in general support of the company, the
mortar squad leaders assist in fire control.

210. NIGHT ATTACK FORMATION

* * * *

b. (Superseded.) A rifle company may make a

night attack alone or as one of the assault companies
of a battalion attack. In either case, its assault is
usually made with all three rifle platoons abreast in
order to obtain maximum fire power and shock ac-
tion. However, when a support is held out, it moves
as directed by the company commander. It may
follow closely the assault echelon or it may be left
in rear of the line of departure to be brought forward
by guides or on a signal. It may have the mission
of mopping up or giving normal support. If no
support is held out, one is designated immediately
after the objective is captured.

230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS

a. If the company is in the battalion assault eche-
lon, enough assault or storm boats or other crossing
craft are provided to move the entire company with
attachments in one trip (fig. 52).

12 AGO 124SD
 4 'h l .. . I.

/. ', 4 ' 4/ r ) ,, ' , ;-

.... RIVER

BOAT BOAT ._ BOAT BOAT

NO 4 NO S NO 2 NO I

RIFLE RIFLE_ WP9I RIFLE

SQ UAD SQUAD SQUAD -
57-MM - S7-MM PLAT LDR PLAT SOT -
RAGO R SD
1248D MR AN
ASST PLAT
SOT

AGO 12SD1

AGO 1248D) I lll 13

 140ENEMY

BOATGROUP BOAT GROUP BOATGROUP

NO 3 NO 2 NOI

RIFLEPLATUN RIFLE PLATOON RIFLEPLATOON

7-MM SQUAD O
57-MM SQUAD 5-MM so

[[ l\; ,. . ' HO4+"TNLAOON (-) · L 'I

, ,,, : t_ -, ~ ATTACHMENTS HV WPNS Co

NO I

IGo
I\ AOIVIDED
INTO BOAT
GROUPSAND SUBDIVIDED
INTO BOAT TEAMS PRIOR
TO LEAVING ASSEMBLY
AREA

LEGEND
I ASSAULT BOATWITH CREW

BOAT GROUP FROM

Figure 52. (Superseded.) Movement to a river, showing at-

tack position and a typical organization of boat groups.

14 AGO 1248D
 b. Tactical unity within * * * is as follows:
(1) Leading zwave. Assault platoons (with at-
tachments) and forward observers from the
81-mm mortar p]atoon.
* * * * *

232. FORMATION FOR THE CROSSING

(Superseded)
The rifle company usually crosses with the three
rifle platoons abreast, each reinforced with a 57-mm
rifle squad. Company aid men are attached to each
platoon. The remainder of the weapons platoon,
the company command group, and all attachments
to the company normally cross in the second wave.
Immediately after crossing, the squads of the 60-mm
mortar section are usually placed in direct support
of, or attached to, assault-rifle platoons.
243. PLANS
* * ** * * u

o. Supporting Fires. (Superseded.) Because of

control, coordination, and observation difficulties,
weapons, such as heavy machine guns, 57-mm and
75-mm rifles, 60-mm mortars, and tanks, frequently
are attached to the assault rifle platoons. Effective
use of tanks depends primarily on the visibility in
the woods and the presence of roads and trails. In
this type of combat, tanks are protected closely by
foot elements. Limited observation and the presence
of tree masks reduce the effectiveness of close support
by artillery. Consequently, the use of 60-mm and
81-mm mortars from open spaces in the woods as-
sumes added importance.
*
1 * _ * *
*

AGO 1245D W ED 15
 ·eo 4-so

SOUNDPOWERED
TELEPHONE
ON
TYPE RIFLE COMPANY WIRE NET WITH MORTARS
ATTACHED TO RIFLE PLATOONS

4o .4.60

MORTARSIN GENERAL SUPPORT

Figure 71. (SuType rifle company wire net.
16 R RS SUPPORT AG SGENERL
16 RE m GO 12o48D
Al[ImI-
404. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

f. (Superseded.) As in any attack, supporting

weapons give continuous close support to the assault
echelon. They also are prepared to fire on danger-
ous approaches into the flanks and rear. Artillery
and 81-mm mortar observers move with the company

AGO 1245D3·P
1248D I 17
to coordinate and adjust the fires requested by the
company commander. The 60-mm mortar squads
usually accompany the assault platoons. To sim-
plify control during the landing, the reorganization,
and the initial attack, battalion supporting weapons
may be attached to the company for these periods,
and company supporting weapons may be attached
to assault platoons.
* * * * * * *

APPENDIX VI

TRAINING PROGRAM

* * * * * *

Section II. SQUAD PHASE

1. GENERAL
(Superseded)
The training program for the rifle squad is out-
lined in paragraph 2, this section. A program is
not outlined for the other squads of the company
(weapons, 57-mm rifle, and 60-mm mortar) because
they ordinarily are not used as independent units.
The rocket launcher team and the light machine
gun team of the weapons squad usually operate
with elements of the rifle platoon and on divergent
missions; the 57-mm rifle squad and the 60-mm mor-
tar squad ordinarily are placed in direct support of
or attached to a rifle platoon. In the squad phase,
these elements are given training which prepares
them to operate efficiently during the platoon phase.

18 1 Caaa248D
This training includes as much of the following as
is applicable to the various squads:
a. Selection, occupation, and organization of po-
sitions in normal terrain, in woods, and in towins.
b. Preparation of range cards.
c. Establishment of observation posts.
d. Use of communication.
e. Ammunition supply.
f. Displacement.
g. Night occupation of positions.
h. Night movement.

Section III. PLATOON PHASE

1. GENERAL
** * * :*:

b. (Superseded.) The squads of the 60-mm mor-

tar section train with the rifle platoons in their
normal role of direct support or attachment. A
training program for the 60-mm mortar section is
outlined in paragraph 3, this section. Of its total
time (64 hours), 32 hours are allotted to the section
for independent training, and 32 hours are allotted
for combined training with. rifle platoons. The
squads of the 60-nmm mortar section function in direct
support of rifle platoons or are attached to rifle pla-
toons during specified field exercises.
[AG 300.7 (29 Se1 50)]

AGO 1248D 1.
l9
 BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF TIIE ARMY:

OFFICIAL: J. LAWTON COLLINS

EDWARD F. WITSELL Chief of Staff,
Major General, USA United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:
Tech Svc (2); Arm &.Svc Bd (1); AA Comd
(2); OS Maj Comd (2); MDW (2); A (20);
CHQ (2); D (10) except 17 (2) ; B (2); R 7,
71 (10) ; Bn 7, 71 (5) ; C 7, 71 (3) ; Sch (10)
except USMA (50); PMS&T (1); Tng Cen
(3); T/O & E 7-17N (10); 7-37N (10).
For explanation of distribution formula, see SP,
310-90-1.

20 AGO 124SD
U. S. GOVERNMENT
PRINTINGOFFICE: 1950
 UNCLASSIRED
REccurity Infortmy
jl
FM 7-10
C3
FIELD MANUAL
RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT
CHANGES DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 3 I WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 3 December 1952
FM 7-10, 3 October 1949, is changed as follows:
The term "reserve squad" or "reserve platoon" is
substituted for the term "support squad" or "support
platoon" throughout this manual in all instances in
which the term is used as a designation for one of
the rifle squads or rifle platoons of the rifle company.

4. ORGANIZATION
(Superseded)
a. The rifle company (T/O&E 7-17) is the basic
infantry fighting unit with tactical, administrative,
and supply functions. Its organization (fig. 1) is
characterized by its triangular structure. There are
three identical rifle platoons which can be employed
in different combinations to find and fix, to maneuver,
and to close with the enemy and destroy or capture
him. In addition to these three elements, there is a
weapons platoon which furnishes close fire support
to the rifle platoons and a company headquarters.
b. The company headquarters is organized for
combat into a command group and an administrative
group. The command group consists of the com-
pany commander, executive officer, first sergeant,
company clerk, communications sergeant, radio op-
TAGO 1814C-Dec. 200482°-52,O-1

UNCLASSIFRED
 I llLe c urity infio on
erators, messengers, and an orderly. The adminis-
trative group consists of a warrant officer administra-
tor, mess personnel, supply sergeant, and an armorer.
Filler personnel are distributed as needed.
9. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT
(Superseded)
a. Upon receiving the battalion order, the rifle com-
pany commander makes his own plan. This plan
is based upon his mission, his evaluation of the enemy,
and a detailed study of the terrain from a map, on
the ground and, when practicable, from the air.
Critical terrain features such as ridges and high
ground are seized at the earliest opportunity and
utilized to further the operation. Frontal attacks
are avoided whenever possible. As a general con-
cept, a commander must seize the dominant terrain
if he expects to impose his will on the enemy.
b. Attacks to secure dominating terrain should
generally be made along the ridge lines running into
the dominating position rather than up the draws
or ravines leading into the position. By attacking
up the ridge lines, the attacker gains successively
higher ground for observation and for the location
of his fire support units.
c. Zones of action or sectors indicated by bound-
aries between units must be established in such a
maimer as to favor maneuver and to insure that the
dominating terrain or other key feature, such as a
small village, lies within the boundaries of a single
unit.

2 l v TAGO 181iC
 RE _1-Security I 1Mf
d. The company commander coordinates the ac-
tions of his platoons, and plans the fires of his organic
and attached weapons. He requests fires from other
supporting weapons to assist the advance of his
maneuvering elements and to destroy the enemy in
his zone of action or area of responsibility. He
notifies the battalion commander of major decisions
and frequently reports his company location and
progress.

11. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS

a. Conmmand Group.
* * * * *

(7) (Rescinded)
(8) (Superseded) The company messengers are
trained to install, operate, and maintain all
items of communication equipment in the
company. They must be capable of operat-
ing switchboards and serving as linemen.
One messenger drives a company headquar-
ters vehicle, one is stationed at the company
command post, and one operates from the
battalion command post.
(9) (Superseded) The orderly drives the com-
pany commander's vehicle and is also
trained to operate company communication
equipment.
* * * * *

TAGO 1814C fl''s-L4%aE

 AR•D--Seourity InfWiron
14. GENERAL

c. (Added) During all ground movement in the

combat zone, the company should be prepared for
enemy ground and air action. The disposition of a
column often decides the outcome of an engagement.

37. ASSEMBLY AREAS

e. In the assembly area, individuals and units use

natural cover and concealment for protection
from aerial and ground observation. Individuals
use existing holes or ditches, or they dig slit
trenches. The primary activity * * * rations
are issued. (See fig. 7).

38. ATTACK POSITIONS

(Superseded)
a. The attack position is the last covered and con-
cealed position occupied by the assault units before
crossing the line of departure. The assault company
commander selects the attack position after the bat-
talion commander prescribes the line of departure.
He bases his selection on the terrain and the plan of
attack. When the need for special coordination
makes it necessary, the battalion commander, rather
than the company commander, may select the attack
position. In addition to providing cover from small
arms fire and concealment from both ground and
aerial observation, the attack position should facili-
tate the movement to the line of departure and, where

4 WIND TAGO 1814C

 lgll 9-security Infiyujla
possible, be large enough to accommodate the entire
company in the initial formation which the company
commander intends to adopt for the attack. Assault
platoon attack positions and the initial position of the
reserve platoon are located within this area and are
designated by the company commander in general
terms to conform to his plan of maneuver. The exact
location of each platoon within the designated area
is selected by the platoon leader.
b. Attack positions are occupied for the minimum
time required for deployment, coordination, and last
minute preparations for the attack. When the situ-
ation and the terrain permit, vehicles may be brought
forward to the attack position with any required
heavy equipment or weapons, However, vehicles
should remain in the assembly area, initially, if their
movement forward will jeopardize secrecy. The
movement forward to the attack position by the as-
sault elements may be under either battalion or
company control.

47. SNIPING
(Superseded)
a. Snipers are specially trained riflemen, who are
expert marksmen as well as expert infantrymen.
Their mission is to kill key enemy personnel, weaken
the enemy's resistance and morale, and assist intelli-
gence agencies by timely reports of enemy activities.
For data on the equipment and training of snipers,
see FM 21-75.
b. The unit commander may employ the snipers in
his unit as a group, in pairs, or individually.
TAGO 1814C 5
 AbCR D--Securit lJ~Wnvwg
Snipers may continue sniping and intelligence tasks
during darkness when they are equipped with elec-
tronic night firing and viewing equipment.
c. Snipers are best used in pairs, especially when
operating from a stationary post. Thus they are
able to alternate as killer and observer. When large
sectors must be covered and frequent movement is
necessary, it may be more practical for snipers to
operate singly. Firing positions should be selected
that take advantage of available cover and conceal-
ment with particular attention to fields of fire. The
routes to these positions must be considered in rela-
tion to the visibility at the time the routes will be
used. Snipers engage such profitable targets as
enemy officers and noncommissioned officers, observ-
ers, snipers, weapons crews, and communication per-
sonnel. Targets will be most plentiful when the
enemy relaxes his guard, such as at dawn, at dusk,
on moonlight nights, and at mealtimes.
d. In the attack, snipers normally operate as mem-
bers of their organic squads, but at times it may be
desirable for the company commander or platoon
leader to use them singly or in pairs. They may be
used to the rear of or on the flanks of the assault
rifle platoons. When so employed, they seek any
appropriate target which is holding up the attack.
In the assault phase, snipers select such targets as
key personnel, pillbox or bunker embrasures, and
weapons crews. During reorganization they occupy
positions from which they can kill the leaders of
the enemy counterattack.

6 TAGO 1814C
 _iijD-sSecuri jrit
e. In the defense, snipers normally occupy pre-
pared and camouflaged positions and operate in pairs
as stationary observers and snipers. When observa-
tion is restricted or large areas of responsibility are
assigned, it may be more desirable for them to operate
as mobile snipers. In such cases, they usually operate
singly.
f. When snipers are operating under company
control, their positions and activities are coordinated
with the rifle platoon leader in whose area they op-
erate. Snipers operating under company. control
are assigned definite sectors of responsibility, with
the size of the .sector depending upon the unit front-
age, the presence of dangerous avenues of approach,
likely enemy observation posts and firing positions,
and suitable sniper positions. In retrograde move-
ments, snipers remain on the position as long as pos-
sible to cover the withdrawal of their unit.
g. Snipers may accompany patrols whenever it
is considered necessary by the unit commander.
Normally they are used for the protection of the
patrol. The snipers operate within the patrol for-
mation, and in the event the enemy engages the
patrol, the snipers assist the patrol in breaking con-
tact by moving away from the vicinity of the patrol
and taking the enemy under fire, thus allowing the
patrol to continue with its mission. The snipers re-
join the patrol as soon as the resistance is neutralized.
h. Because of his special training and the obser-
vation afforded by his firing position, the sniper can
make a valuable contribution to intelligence agen-
cies. He can also call for and adjust other fires on

TAGO 1814C 77
 %LFTlW--Security11 t
profitable targets. Intelligence officers should assist
in the briefing of snipers prior to their movement
into position, and it may be appropriate at times
to interrogate them after they are relieved. How-
ever, the primary mission of the sniper is to kill
the enemy, and his use as an intelligence agent is
secondary.

61. GENERAL
Before the attack * * and enemy fire. Men
use existing holes or ditches or they dig slit trenches.

67. DUTIES OF SQUAD MEMBERS

* * * * *

b. The r/flemen move * * them by fire.

The squad sniper acts as a rifleman in the squad
unless he is given a special sniping mission.

73. REORGANIZATION
As soon as * * * the platoon objective. The
squad leader checks his squad for casualties, the con-
dition of weapons, and the status of ammunition.
He redesignates key * * * continuing the attack.

79. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS

* * * * *

c. (Added) The squad sniper may function as a

member of his squad or of a special sniping team
under the control of a platoon leader or the company
commander. In the absence of special instructions,

8 TAGO 1814C
 t clul~lCSecurity 1nratifo
the squad leader employs the sniper in the same
manner as the other riflemen.

79.1 CONCEALMENT
(Added)
a. Each firing position (including alternate and
supplementary positions) must be concealed and
camouflaged by the individuals occupying the posi-
tion. For additional information, see FM 5-20 and
FM 5-20A. The squad leader must supervise his
men closely to make sure that unnecessary noise
or movement does not disclose their position. Take
the following actions to facilitate concealment:
(1) Stay within shadowed areas whenever pos-
sible.
(2) Utilize branches and leaves to break up the
outline of individuals, weapons, and equip-
ment.
(3) Break up solid areas of color and blend
them with the natural surroundings.
(4) Conceal mess gear, range cards, and all
other light-colored or glittering objects.
Darken faces and hands to avoid detection
by enemy snipers.
(5) Hide fresh earth uncovered while digging
foxholes and weapon emplacements.
Change the regular outline of foxholes and
emplacements by camouflaging them with
natural material.
b. Enforce strict camouflage discipline at all times
to make sure that positions remain concealed. Give
particular attention to the following:

TAGO 1814C
-AGO
200482°-52-2
1814C 9
 -- IU$E Security NW
(1) Use existing paths and roads if possible.
If it becomes necessary to move across
country, remove or conceal all evidence of
the movement.
(2) Fresh earth and refuse should be buried or
hidden. Constant supervision by squad
leaders is necessary to make sure that
refuse, such as ration and ammunition con-
tainers, does not disclose the location of the
position.
(3) The over-all appearance of the ground
should not be changed.
82. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE
* * * * *

d. When the attacking * * * of the tanks.

Men resume their firing positions as soon as the
tanks pass, and they fire on approaching foot troops.
Maximum effort is * * * from the tanks.
84. ORGANIZATION
(Superseded)
The weapons squad consists of two light machine
gun teams under the command of a squad leader.
Each team consists of a gunner, an assistant gunner,
and two ammunition bearers.

85. DUTIES OF LEADERS

a. The weapons squad leader * * * from the
platoon leader. The rocket launcher * $ *
which it operates.
* * * * *

10 TAGO 1814C
 _jiiS ecurity I
93. GENERAL
Before the attack ** observation and fire.
Men use holes and ditches or dig slit trenches. When
an enemy * * leader's attack order.

98. TARGETS
a. Appropriate targets for the light machine gun
are crew-served weapons, small groups of enemy,
pillbox embrasures, and lightly armored vehicles.
Enemy whose general * * * machine gun fire.
In built-up areas, light machine guns are used
against definitely located targets in buildings and
to deny the use of streets to the enemy.
* * * * *

110. ORGANIZATION
(Superseded)
The organization of the rifle platoon, like the rifle
company, is characterized by its triangular struc-
ture' It has three identical rifle squads and, in addi-
tion, there is a weapons squad and a platoon head-
quarters. The platoon is commanded by a lieutenant
(platoon leader) who is assisted by a platoon ser-
geant, an assistant platoon sergeant, and two mes-
sengers. A rocket launcher team of four men is also
in the platoon headquarters and an aid man is nor-
mally attached. The organization of the platoon is
designed for maximum efficiency in fixing the enemy
by fire, closing with him by maneuver, and killing
or capturing him by a combination of fire, maneuver,

-
and shock action.
TAoO 1814C I1
 _(gJl) - 3-Securit, M
124. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE
* * * * *

c. Reconnaissance.
* * * * *

(5) Avenues of approach. Studies the ter-

rain * * * of the platoon. He avoids
a route which prematurely masks direct fire
supporting weapons but strives to select an
approach along a dominant terrain fea-
ture (ridge, high ground). Determines
which avenues * * * provides better
cover.
d. Estimate of the Situation.
* * * * *

(2) Decides upon his method of attack which

will include how, when, and where he will
employ his fire support, his maneuvering
force and his reserve.
* * * *

125. METHOD OF ATTACK

a. (Superseded)
(1) In any attack the first thing the platoon
has to do, unless it is already in close con-
tact with the enemy, is to find the enemy and
to pin him down or fix him in position. One
element of the platoon must find and fix
the enemy in place and hold his attention so
that a second element can maneuver against
him. While this is being done, the maneu-

12 TAGO 1814C
 _(Jij -SSecu url
ver can be against one or the other flank of
the enemy; or, if the enemy is widely dis-
persed, the platoon leader may decide to
hit him in the middle. Usually, however,
this maneuver should be around one flank
or the other. A reserve squad is designated
for the purpose of exploiting the maneuver
or to drive home the attack. Each squad
is given a specific mission and is committed
at the proper time by the platoon leader to
further the attack of the platoon. The
platoon leader must be prepared at all times
to counter any unexpected enemy action.
(2) The platoon advances from the line of de-
parture to the assault position by fire and
maneuver. In addition to the heavy in-
direct fires furnished by the artillery and
mortars, the platoon is supported by its own
weapons and by many others. These in-
clude the 57-mm rifles from the weapons
platoon, the machine guns and 75-mm rifles
from the heavy weapons company, and at
times the fires of a tank platoon.
* * * * *

f. Timely coordination of * * * in infantry

combat. The termination of supporting fires is in-
dicated to the riflemen of the assault echelon by a
visual signal fired by the assault squads or by the
supporting unit. Squads not already * * * en-
danger friendly troops.

TAGO 1814C 13
126. ORDERS
(Fig. 36.)
a. The platoon leader * * * includes the
following:
· $ * * *

(3) Line or area * * * on the objective.

The platoon leader may also include spe-
cial instructions to the sniper teams
ordered by the company commander to
operate in his area.
* * * * *

128. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK

a. The principles outlined * * * and move
rapidly. When the assault elements are within as-
saulting distance of the objective, the supporting
fires are lifted on call by the platoon leader, or the
company or battalion commander. Then the ad-
vance * * * direct-fire weapons.
* * * * *

c. Advance Against Short-Range Firesa

(2) Specific targets holding up the advance are

pointed out to the leaders of supporting
weapons units, accompanying forward ob-
servers, the snipers, and to the company
commander. At the same * * * the
other elements
· * . * * *

14 i _ TAGO 1814C
 lg-llll be-Seouri ~
129. ASSAULT
* * * *

b. As the supporting * * * and recoilless

rifles. Snipers will select targets such as key per-
sonnel, pillbox or bunker embrasures, and weap-
ons crews. Snipers should operate to the rear or
flanks of the assault rifle platoon. Ammunition is
used * * * the next objective.

130. REORGANIZATION
a. The platoon leader's * * * their assigned
locations. Snipers are placed in a position that
will enable them to kill the key enemy personnel
leading a counterattack. The platoon leader
* * * meet enemy resistance.
* * * * *

135. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH

* * * * *

c. (Superseded) Platoons should endeavor to

achieve maximum depth possible to add strength to
the position and aid in limiting penetrations. Sup-
plementary positions are usually necessary in order
to provide all around defense. Therefore, dependent
on the terrain and any need for supplementary posi-
tions, the depth of the platoon area may vary from
50 to 200 yards.

TAGO 1814C
 a~, ii JLecu
mcrity ]NIqAR IW
137. FIRE PLAN
a. The rifle platoon leader * * * of his area.
He also procures a map or overlay which shows
mortar and artillery concentrations by positions
and designating numbers. When time and * * *
of the platoon.
* * * * *

139. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND

a. The organization of * * * permit effective
fire. The company order states the sequence and
time limit in which the tasks are done. This
sequence is-
* * * * *

140. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE

* * * * *

d. It usually is * * * local security elements.

Once contact is gained, movement within the
position at night is held to the minimum.

181. SUPPORTING FIRES

(App. IV.)
* * * * *

f. (Added) Close Air Support. The infantry

regimental and battalion commanders, with forward
air controllers, will include the use of close air sup-
port, if available, in the fire support plan. Weather
limitations may deny a commander the use of air
support even though it is available and included in
the planning. The control of air strikes is accom-

16 I' TAGO 1814C

 !our!
--- Seurittl
lllll
plished by the ward air controller. Because the
forward air controller is normally located in, or in
communication with, the battalion or regimental fire
support coordination center, he may be assisted in
the control of air strikes by artillery forward ob-
servers with front line rifle companies. For details
pertaining to close air support, see section VI,
appendix IV.
185. ORDERS
a. The company commander * * * company
order includes-
* * * * *

(3) Specific instructions for each assault rifle

platoon, for the weapons platoon, for at-
tached elements, and for snipers.
* * * * *

199. COMMITTING THE RESERVE

(Superseded)
When the battalion commander decides to com-
mit the reserve company and it is impractical for
him to assign a line of departure, he will prescribe an
area from which the reserve company is to launch its
attack and have the company commander select and
report a line of departure. The battalion comman-
der also prescribes the objective, a tentative time of
attack, the direction or zone of attack, and any
changes in the battalion plan of fire support. He co-
ordinates other elements of the battalion so that the
reserve will not have to wait in the area of departure
once it has arrived there, and so that its attack coin-

TAGO 1814C 200482°-- 17

 surity lp
Mpm
cides with the effort that is to be made by the re-
mainder of the battalion. When the reserve arrives
in the forward area, the company commander re-
ports that fact to the battalion commander and pre-
pares to launch the attack.
206. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A NIGHT ATTACK
(Superseded)
Daylight reconnaissance by all leaders is highly
desirable before all night operations, and is essential
for a night attack against a well-organized defensive
position. It is supplemented by reconnaissance pa-
trols during darkness, and by the study of maps and
aerial photographsa To preserve secrecy, it may be
necessary to limit reconnaissance
212. NIGHT ATTACK POSITIONS
The last minute * * * in an attack position.
This position is usually selected by the assault
company commander during his daylight recon-
naissance but may be designated by the battalion
commander if the need for coordination with other
friendly forces in the area dictates this pro-
cedure. The attack position * * * and pre-
serve secrecy.
214. ROUTES TO OBJECTIVE
(Superseded)
Routes to the objective are carefully selected. The
commander weighs the advantage of ease of control
gained by selecting a route which follows easily
18 TAGO 1814C
 .Seurity I
recogni (roads, fence4 streamlines,
and similar terrain features) against the disadvan-
tages of the possibility that the enemy's locations
and prearranged fires cover these landmarks or other
obvious routes of approach.
230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS
* * * * *

b. Tactical unity within * * * is as follows:

(1) (Superseded) Leading wave. Assault
platoons (with attachments).
(2) (Superseded) Second wave. Company com-
mand group, weapons platoon (less detach-
ments), support platoon (if any), attach-
ments from the heavy weapons company;
and artillery, heavy mortar company, and
81-mm mortar platoon forward observers.
236. SUPPORT OF CROSSING
a. Air, artillery, heavy * * * the far side.
The commander's order may include the organi-
zation and tactical employment of special sniper
teams. Snipers may be employed either as a
group, in teams, or individually. They should
occupy their positions prior to the crossing and,
upon completion of the crossing, rejoin their
units.

TAGO 1814C 19
 l~llSe'uriyurity
241. GENERAe
* * * * $'

b. (Superseded) When woods are attacked fron-

tally, the attack consists of three phases:
(1) Attack of and reorganization within the
near edge.
(2) Advance through the woods.
(3) Exit from the far edge.
244. CONDUCT OF ATTACK
a. Seizure of the * * * any other attack.
While the reorganization in the near edge of the
woods takes place, the company commander issues
any necessary additional instructions for the ad-
vance through the woods. The company starts
* * * on an azimuth.
* * * * *

251. ORGANIZATION FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID

The company commander * * * with auto-
matic weapons. Snipers, if equipped with night
viewing and firing devices, should be employed
with the assault party. Support parties nor-
mally * * * of the company.
263. GENERAL

d. The size of * * * a large group. On the

other hand, units as large as a rifle company may be
directed to infiltrate through the enemy lines and

20 TAGO 1814C
attack the rear of the hostile position. A coordi-
nated frontal assault by another unit may be used
in this type of operation.
* * * * *

273. RIFLE COMPANY DEFENSE ORDER

g. Priority of construction and time limit in

which tasks are to be completed.
* * * * *

n, (Added) Patrol plan.

276. BOUNDARIES
The battalion commander * * * responsi-
bility, or depth. Boundaries must be established
so as to favor the defense and to insure that
critical terrain features (ridges, high ground)
and avenues of approach are the responsibility
of a single unit.
279. LOCATION OF FRONT-LINE PLATOON
The width of * * * blocks that approach, To
provide sniper coverage for the entire area, snipers
are assigned definite sectors of responsibility.
The size of the sector depends on the frontage
covered by a unit, the presence of dangerous ave-
nues of approach, terrain suitable for enemy ob-
servation posts and suitable sniper positions.
Snipers select positions which provide best avail-
able cover and concealment, and they pay special
attention to fields of fire. The routes to these
4.l ~~ t21r
TAGO 1814C 200482-5 ---- 4
 our!
positions must be considered in relation to the
conditions of visibility that will prevail when
these routes are used.
280. DISPOSITION OF RESERVE PLATOON
a. The primarymisson * * * the battle posi-
tion. Snipers of the reserve platoon may be de-
tached from their squads and employed as teams
within the battle position.
* * * * *

284. COMMAND POST

The company command * * * battalion com-
mand post. The command post is so organized
that it will function as a coordination center with
or without the presence of the commanding offi-
cer.
285. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND
a. The 'organization of * * * and facilities
available. The battalion order gives the sequence
and time limit in which the tasks are executed.
These may include-
* · * * *

c. Organization of exposed * * * postponed

until darkness. Overhead cover is constructed for
foxholes and emplacements for protection against
enemy fire and friendly close-in artillery and
mortar fires.

22 TAGO 1814C
 R sourecur
289. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE
a. As the enemy * * * the outpost positions
The snipers employed with the general and com-
bat outposts remain on position as long as prac-
ticable, covering the withdrawal of these outposts
into the battle position.
* $ * $ *

c. When the massed * * * the battalion com-

mander. Snipers can often prepare and camou-
flage adequate primary and secondary positions
from which they can operate to prevent removal
of obstacles in front of the main line of resis-
tance and to kill the leaders in the enemy attack.
* * * * *

e. When the attacking * * * crushing action

of the tanks. They resume their firing positions as
soon as the tanks pass and fire on the rear of the
tanks. Defenders also fire * * * other attack-
ing tanks.
* * * * *

A. The conduct of a night defense resembles that

of a day defense except that it is characterized by
more close-in fighting and less movement within
the position. It can be * * * locating these
targets.

290. RELIEF
a. If the defense is prolonged or if units on the
battle position have suffered heavy casualties,
periodic relief of units in the line may be made. The
front-line * * * executed at night.
·* * *

TAGO 1814C 23
312. DEFENSE IN WOODS
Defense in woods * ** * infiltratetheposition.
A distinct advantage can be gained when snipers
are employed in woods. Because of their spe-
cialized training they can deny to the enemy the
use of certain areas, disrupt his communications,
and act as observers
335. COVERING FORCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL
a. The strength and * * * forward rifle com-
panies. Snipers, if equipped with the night view-
ing and firing devices, operate in the same manner
as for a daylight withdrawal (par. 342d). As soon
as * * battalion rear area.

342. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL

d. Supporting weapons in * * * platoons for
the withdrawal. Snipers are employed in the
same manner as described in defensive operations
(par. 279). Because their accurate fires can be
utilized to cover the withdrawal of a unit from
a position, they remain on the position as long
as possible. Their principal targets are enemy
officers and noncommissioned officers leading the
attack.
343. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONS
Since a delay * * * with automatic weap-
ons. Because of their ability to deliver accurate
fire, snipers may to an advantage in de-
24 TAGO 1814C
- il~i '
laying actions. They are employed in much the
same manner as for a daylight withdrawal (par.,
342d).
346. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL
* * * * *

c. The comrvuication noncommissioned officer

* * * in the company. He transmits informa-
tion contained in extracts of current communica-
tion orders; for example, signal operation instruc-
tions (SOI) and standing signal instructions (SSI).
He makes recommendations * * * pertaining
to communication 4
d. Rescinded
e. The radiotelephone operatorsoperate and main-
tain the man-packed radio sets in the company.
Their training includes * * * to the company.
* * * * *

g. The orderly and other men designated by the

company commander are trained to install, operate,
and maintain the company communication system.
These men are * * * packed radio sets.

347. EQUIPMENT
* * * * *

b. (Superseded) Radio equipment includes low-

powered portable voice sets. Two types are issued;
one type is hand-carried and the other is man-packed.
Man-packed radios have a range of three to five
miles. Hand-carried radios have a range of approxi-
mately 1 mile. Both radios are frequency-modulated

TAGO 1814C 25
 _Fdurity _n
(f-rm) and will net with radios mounted in all tanks.
Frequencies (channels) on the man-packed radios
can be changed by the operator.
* * * * *

348. MEANS OF COMMUNICATION

a, The company commander directs the use of com-
munication available to the company. Flexibility of
communication is achieved by using as many of
the means of communication as are applicable
so that if one means of communication fails, the
company can effectively use other means. The
success or failure of a unit often depends on its
ability to communicate.
b. Wire communication depends on the time avail-
able to install and recover the wire. (See fig. 71.)
In fast-moving * * * be recovered quickly.
In an attack on a limited objective, wire is often
laid forward as the unit advances. In defensive
situations * * * control of units.
c. Radio is limited only by the characteristics of
the sets, such as range, frequency, security restric-
tions, and interference from static, jamming, or ter-
rain obstacles. (See fig. 72.) Radio is an * * *
on operator training.
* * * * *

349. COMMUNICATION COORDINATION

The company communication * * * battalion
communication plan. A man-packed radio (PRC-
10) is netted with the battalion command net. In

26 a _ TAGO 1814C
 iiLvlleourlqomo
defensive situations and in attack situations, when
circumstances permit, the battalion communication
platoon installs wire from the battalion command
post to the company command post.

350. COMMUNICATION ORDERS

The rifle company commander's order contains in-
structions for communication. Frequently, such in-
structions refer to the company SOP or indicate
the location of the company commander or his com-
mand post. Other instructions relative * * *
by pyrotechnic signal. In the attack, instructions
are given for pyrotechnic signals for prearranged
fires, lifting of supporting fires, location of units,
and for capture of objectives. Platoon leaders ac-
quaint * * * a higher commander.

371. ROLE OF THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY

The airborne rifle company is trained and equip-
ped to enter combat by parachute or assault trans-
port. It normally uses * * * of a battalion.

373. EQUIPMENT
* * * * *

c. The weapons carriers of the company can be

delivered by parachute or assault transport. They
may accompany * * * of captured transpor-
tation.
* * * * *

TAGO 1814C 27
 uri *Go ,*ESt
n

OS0U"o POWER
TELEPMWlE
MORTARS IN CNERAL SUPPORT
Figure 71. (Superseded) Type rifle company wire nets.

28 TAGO 1814C
 IlllmO' -S-:ecuTy
in mlllg ll
I
A

sob60 601 ?

X1a./co I TELEPOE

TELEPHONE

MORTARS ATTACHED TO PLATOONS

Figure 71-Continued.

TAGO 1814C 29
 EL Se0urity InfM
OOO

0*0

ARTY FOBSR
)R J/RAD1O SETS
PC- lPRC ORGANICTO
ARTY TO
OPERATE IN

,\;CC

PR CP > TO CONTROL
ELEMENTS
TKs pRC OF WEAPONS
MORT PC PLATOON
ARMY ACFT AS REQUIRED
UTIIITV IN CO NET

UTILITY

Figure 72. (Superseded) T'pe rifle company radio net.

30 TAGO 1814C
 _ Securit
--
375. SUPPORTING ARMS AND WEAPONS
a. Artillery. Light artillery landed by parachute
or assault transport accompanies or closely follows
the assault landing of the infantry troops. Forward
observers land * * * reorganization after land-
ing.
$ *
* * *

c. Tanks. Although the airborne regiment has no

organic tank units, it is normal to attach tank units
from one of the airborne division's two tank bat-
talions for sustained combat. The attachment of
these units makes the airborne regiment equivalent
to the infantry regiment in tank strength. Tank
reinforcements usually join the airborne regiment
when it contacts friendly forces after its airborne
assault landing. Tanks attached to * * * pre-
scribed in FM 17-32.
* * * * *

379. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERS

i. Rescinded.

380. ORGANIZATION FOR THE ATTACK

* * * * *

b. The assault echelon of the company consists

of the troops and equipment initially landed by para-
chute or assault transport to seize the company ob-
jective. The entire airborne rifle company, with its
organic weapons and transportation, can enter com-
TAGO 1814C 31
 ~~/NIrlSecurity iM l
bat by parachute or assault transport; however, it
may be necessary to leave some personnel and equip-
ment behind during the assault landing.

381. RECONNAISSANCE
a. The company commander's * * * his at-
tack plans:
(1) Nature of the drop zone, or landing zone if
landing in assault transport aircraft.
* * * * *

383. BRIEFING

b. Platoon leaders brief * * * the company

briefing. All troops are * * * the company
mission.
* * * * *

388. LOADING PERSONNEL

a. The movement from * * aircraft park-
ing area. Upon arrival at the aircraft parking area,
groups move to their assigned airplanes and prepare
to load.
* * * * *

e. The following principles * * * for air-

borne operations:
(1) Enough men ride in each assault aircraft
to unlash and unload the aircraft at
the destination. This prevents confu-
sion · *
* recovery of equipment.
* * * *1

32 TAO0 1814C
 in -- Security
390. AIR MOVEMENT TABLE
$ * * * *

b. Pathfinder serials precede * * * operate

navigational aids. Parachute serials normally pre-
cede transport serials. This permits the * * *
the pilot's signal.

391. ASSAULT LANDING

c. (Superseded) When a company lands by as-

sault transport, it usually lands on a single landing
zone as part of the battalion. The time required
for landing the company depends on the aircraft
type, altitude, number, speed and formation, the skill
of the pilots, the terrain, and the landing character-
istics of the aircraft. The ground dispersion of the
aircraft inside a landing zone depends on the number
of aircraft, the obstacles to landing, the landing
characteristics of the aircraft, and the skill of their
pilots.
d. (Superseded) Upon landing, personnel in the
aircraft promptly unload all equipment and supplies.
e. (Superseded) When the company enters combat
by parachute, weapons carriers may land by assault
aircraft. When this is the case, they may land on
the drop zone used by the company and battalion-
after the drop zone is cleared of personnel and equip-
ment that would obstruct assault aircraft landings.
The weapons carriers may land in separate landing
zones under the control of the regimental or higher
commander.

TAGO 1814C 33
 -Security1
396. IDENTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIP-
MENT
Positive, rapid, identification * * * identify
the contents. Assault transports may be marked to
identify the type of equipment they carry and the
unit to which the equipment belongs. The airborne
division * * * tothe enemy,

397. ASSEMBLY
a. Using assembly aids * * * respective as-
sembly areas. Parachutists may also move di-
rectly to their unit assembly area without assem-
bling on the drop zone.
b. (Superseded) Troops landed by assault trans-
port promptly unload and move by aircraft loads
directly to their assembly areas. There they are
organized into tactical units under their own officers.
They pass to regimental or higher unit control as
soon as the situation permits.

APPENDIX I
RIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FOR ATTACK
AND DEFENSE
Section I. ATTACK
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS
(Superseded)
Information or instructions to include-
a. A reference to the signal annex if issued with
the operation orr or, if no al annex is issued,
34 TAGO 1814C
 RE - -llSecurity
1111
a reference to the index to the SOI currently in effect.
This subparagraph will also include general instruc-
tions on the employment of signal communication
(wire, radio, messenger, sound, and visual).
b. The location of battalion and company com-
mand posts; the tentative subsequent locations of
the company commander during the attack; and the
axis of signal communication.
c. The location and time of opening advance mes-
sage centers, march control points, or other places
to which messages may be sent.
Section II. DEFENSE

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS

(Superseded)
Information or instructions to include-
a. A reference to the signal annex if issued with
the operation order, or, if no signal annex is issued,
a reference to the index to the SOI currently in effect.
This subparagraph will also include general instruc-
tions on the employment of signal communication
(wire, radio, messenger, sound, and visual).
b. The location of battalion, company, and platoon
command posts, and alternate locations.

TAGO 1814C 35
 _iNE -Security Il!v n
APPENDIX IV
SUPPORTING FIRES
Section I. GENERAL

3. COMBAT CONTROL
a. GeneralSupport. Supportingunitsare * * *
provide maximum support. The heavy weapons
company is considered to be in general support when
its fires are controlled by the battalion commander,
the heavy tank and heavy mortar companies by the
regimental commander, the tank battalion and the
battalions of the division artillery by the division
commander.
* s * * *

Section VI. CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

(Added)
1. MISSION
The mission of close air support units is to give
close support to ground units by attacking targets
which cannot be effectively engaged by other means,
and by augmenting the fires of other supporting
weapons.

2. CONTROL
a. Forward Air Controller. Normally, a tactical
air control party (TACP) works with an infantry
battalion. The TACP consists of a forward air
controller (FAC who isa combat-experienced
36 TAGO 1814C
 WEED-Securityi.
fighter pilot, his enlisted assistants, and equipment.
This team is organized to direct, by visual methods,
close air support strikes in the vicinity of forward
ground elements. It is a highly mobile element hav-
ing air-to-ground communication to direct aircraft
to targets, and point-to-point communcations with
the tactical air control center or pertinent tactical
air direction centers and the division air liaison
officer. At times a forward air controller may be
airborne to facilitate control and direction of air
strikes. Under these conditions the controller is
referred to as a tactical air coordinator.
b. Functions. Functions of the TACP are to-
(1) Direct offensive air support aircraft to
targets in the vicinity of friendly positions
and to direct visual reconnaissance of
specified areas.
(2) Receive information from reconnaissance
or other aircraft for transmission to in-
terested ground force elements.
(3) Report the observed results of an air strike
to the tactical air control center or to the
division air liaison officer and to the
supported unit.
(4) Advise the immediate ground commander
and his staff on matters pertaining to tacti-
cal air operations.
(5) Assist in making known the location of
friendly front line units.
c. Employment. The forward air controller
normally works in the battalion or regimental FSCC.
Frequently it will be necessary for him to accompany

TAGO 1814C _ 37
 _jvlJ~lr i security Infsyii
a command group to a forward vantage point or ob-
servation post; wherever he may be located he should
have ready access to both infantry and artillery com-
munications such as those found in the FSCC or
at an observation post. Through artillery communi-
cations, the forward air controller can frequently
utilize the assistance of the artillery forward observer
in marking targets with artillery fire or otherwise
directing the aircraft to the target.

3. TARGETS
a. The selection of targets for tactical air strikes
is governed by such factors as-
(1) Availability of tactical aircraft for close
support missions.
(2) Availability and capabilities of other sup-
porting weapons.
(3) Over-all effect to be realized from destruc-
tion or neutralization of the target.
(4) The capability of available air weapons.
(5) The potential accuracy of available air
weapons.
(6) Probable air losses compared to expected
results.
(7) Accuracy of intelligence concerning nature
and location of target.
b. Typical close air support targets are--
(1) Gun positions.
(2) Vehicles, including armor.
(3) Command posts.
(4) Concentration of troops.
(5) Strongly defended positions.

38 A L~6 TAGO 1814C

 lntliaI Security__Juii i
(6) Pill boxes.
(7) Defended road blocks.
(8) Targets which artillery may not be able to
engage effectively.

4. METHODS OF MARKING TARGETS

Close air support targets located between the bomb
line and friendly troops must be properly identified
to the striking aircraft prior to attack. The forward
air controller normally accomplishes the target iden-
tification and control for these strikes. He must co-
ordinate with, advise, and receive assistance from
ground elements. He should work closely with the
artillery liaison officer. A forward air controller
may identify a target for aircraft through any
one or a combination of the methods indicated below.
a. Reference to grids or coordinates on large scale
maps or photographic mosaics.
b. Reference to nearby landmarks or terrain fea-
tures readily discernible to the aircraft pilot.
c. Establish reference points with smoke shells,
such as artillery, mortar, grenade, recoilless rifle,
and rocket. Colored smoke is preferable.
d. Use of tracers from small arms fire.
e. Use of illuminating shells; for example, artil-
lery, mortar, and naval.
f. Use of searchlights.
g. Use of pyrotechnics.
h. Use of colored panels and other markings to
assist navigation of attacking aircraft in the target
area and to identify friendly positions.

TAGO 1814C 39
 (BijjrS ecurity ,ku i
i. Verbal description of the target radioed through
a forward air controller to the aircraft.
j. Adjustment of dry-run air attacks to guide the
pilot to the target.
k. Radio communication from friendly unit to
Army light aircraft which can in turn lead attack-
ing aircraft to the target.
1. Use of electronic equipment (radio homing de-
vices, beacons, etc.).
m. Use of any one or a combination of the above
methods to control a tactical air coordinator who in
turn, leads attacking aircraft to the target. The
tactical air coordinator should be provided a means
for marking targets, such as smoke grenades.

5. REQUESTS
a. Requests for close air support normally are sub-
mitted through air-ground operations system chan-
nels. Since this system does not include personnel
at company level, requests are forwarded by the com-
pany commander to the battalion S3 or the battalion
assistant S3 should he be designated the battalion S3
(Air). In the event infantry communcations are in-
operative, requests may be submitted through the
artillery forward observer, utilizing his artillery
communications.
b. Requests for offensive air support from a rifle
company commander should include the following
information:
(1) Exact target location.

40 b _TAGO 1814C
 I5iED-Security Inform'ln
(2) Target description, including sufficient de-
tail to permit selection of appropriate
armament.
(3) Results desired.
(4) Location of nearest friendly troops with
respect to the target.
(5) Time over target.
(6) Tactical significance.
[AG 300.7 (11 Oct 52)]

TAGO 1814C 41
 RE o-ecurity InfI_
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:

OFFICIAL:
WM E. BERGIN
Major General, USA,
The Adjutant General

J. LAWTON COLLINS,
Chief of Staff, United States Army

DISTRIBMTION:
Active Army:
Tech Svc (1); Tech Svc Bd (1); AA Comd
(2); OS Maj Comd (10) except FECOM
(200); Base Comd (2); MDW (2); Log
Comd (2); A (10); CHQ. (2); Div (10)
except 17 (2); Brig (2); Regt 7 (5); Bn
7 (5); Co 7, 57 (3); Sch (10); USMA (50);
PMS&T (1); RTC (3); Mil Mis (1); Arma
(1); Mil Dist (3); T/O&E's, 7-17N (10);
7-37N (10).
NG: Same as Active Army.
ORC: Same as Active Army.
For explanation of distribution formula, see
SR 310-90-1.

42 R· TAGO 1814C
UOYERNMENT
GOV. PahITING OFFICE, 1252
 R1D-S ecurity Informatiop

WARNING NOTICES

Authority for release of this document to a foreign

government must be secured from the Assistant Chief
of Staff, G-2, Department of the Army.
When this document is released to a foreign govern-
ment; it is released subject to the following conditions:
This information is furnished with the understanding
that it will not be released to another nation without
specific approval of the United States of America, De-
partment of the Army; that it will not be used for other
than military purposes; tjq* ndiividual or corporation
rights originating in tlihe:'f ,iation whether patented
or not will be respected.-j l;' t the information will
be afforded substantiallyT e degree of security
as afforded by the UnitedStatesbf America, Department
of the Army.

This document contains information affecting the

national defense of the United States within the meaning
of the Espionage Laws, Title 18, U. S. C., sections 793
and 794. The transmission or the revelation of its
contents in any manner to an unauthorized person Is
prohibited by law.

i
RE
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL
FM 7-10
This manual supersedes FM 7-10, 18 March 1944, including C .,
16 January 1945; and C 2. 5 September 1946; and DA TC 5, 1948

RIFLE COMPANY,

INFANTRY REGIMENT

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY · OCTOBER, z949

United States Government Printing Office

Washington: 1949
 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 3 October, 1949
FM 7-10 is published for the information and
guidance of all concerned.
[AG 300.7 (13 Jun 49)]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:
J. LAWTON COLLINS
Chief of Staff, United States Army

OFFICIAL:
EDWARD F. WITSELL
Major General
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
Tech Sv (2); Arm & Sv Bd (1); OS Maj
Comd (2) ;MDW (2); A (ZI) (20), (Over-
seas) (5); CHQ (2); D (10) except 17
(2); B (2); R 7, 71 (10); Bn 7, 71 (5);
C 7, 71 (3); USMA (50); Sch (10);
PMS&T (1); Tng Ctr (3) ; T/O & E 7-17N
(10); 7-37N (10); SPECIAL DISTRI-
BUTION.
For explanation of distribution formula, see
SR 310-90-1.
 CONTENTS

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL .......... 1- 13 1

CHAPTER 2. TACTICAL MOVEMENTS.

Section . General . ..... 14 15
II. Movement to contact. .. 15- 19 15
III. Foot marches ...... 20- 28 20
IV. Motor marches ...... 29- 34 29
V. Movement to contact during
darkness ....... 35- 36 32
VI. Assembly areas and attack
positions ....... 37- 39 35

CHAPTER 3. RIFLE SQUAD.

Section 1. General .......... 40- 50 41
II. Movement to contact .... 51- 60 45
III. Preparation for the attack. 61- 68 61
IV. Attack ..... ....... 69- 76 72
V. Defense .......... 77- 83 85

CHAPTER 4. WEAPONS SQUAD.

Section I. General ....... 84- 90 94
II. Movement to contact .... 91- 92 96
III. Preparation for the attack . 93- 99 97
IV. Attack ... 100-103 102
V. Defense .......... 104-109 105

CHAPTER 5. RIFLE PLATOON.

Section 1. General .......... 110-115 110
II. Movement to contact .... 116-121 112
III. Preparation for the attack. 122-126 118
IV. Attack ........... 127-131 131
V. Defense .......... 132-141 141

iii
 ParagraphL Page

CHAPTER 6. WEAPONS PLATOON.

Section 1. General .......... 142-150 154
II. Movement to contact .. . 151-152 160
III. Preparation for the attack. 153-159 161
IV. Attack .......... . 160-163 170
V. Defense .......... 164-170 174
CHAPTER 7. RIFLE COMPANY, OFFENSIVE COMBAT.
Section 1. Preparation for the attack. 171-173 184
II. Method of attack ..... . 174-187 188
III. Attack........... 188-194 205
IV. Reserve rifle company in the
attack .......... 195-199 214
V. Night attack . ...... . 200-225 217
VI. Attack of a river line.. 226-240 234
VII. Attack in woods ...... 241-244 245
VIII. Raids . .......... 245-262 250
IX. Infiltration ....... . 263-265 257
X. Other offensive operations. 266 262

CHAPTER 8. RIFLE COMPANY, DEFENSIVE COMBAT.

Section I. General .......... 267-269 263
II. Front-line rifle company.. 270-293 268
III. Reserve rifle company. . . 294-307 295
IV. Other defensive operations . 308-316 302
V. Security missions ...... 317-327 311
VI. Retrograde movements . . 328-344 324

CHAPTER 9. COMMUNICATION .... . 345-350 336

CHAPTER 10. ADMINISTRATION.

Section I. Personnel administration 351 344
11. Supply .......... 352-360 345
III. Medical service ..... . 361-365 353
IV. Motor maintenance . ... 366-368 355

CHAPTER 11. AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY.

Section I. General . .......... 369-377 357
II. Preparations for the
airborne attack ..... 378-388 363

iv
 Paragraph Pageq
III. Air movement, landing,
and reorganization . . . 389-402 373
IV. Accomplishment of ground
mission ......... 403-410 381

APPENDIX I. RIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FOR

ATTACK AND DEFENSE ......... 388

II. COMBAT FORMATIONS ......... 393

III. SIGNALS ................ 413

IV. SUPPORTING FIRES ........... 419

V. WEAPONS EMPLACEMENTS ....... 433

VI. TRAINING PROGRAM .......... 451

VII. FIELD EXERCISES ............ 471

VIII. REFERENCES .............. 534

INDEX ........................ 538

V
 RESTRICTED
This manual supersedes FM 7-10, 18 March 1944, including
C 1, 16 Janua)y 1945, and C 2, 5 September 1946; and
DA TC 5, 1948

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL

1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. a. This manual is a guide

to the tactical employment of the rifle company
and its elements. It covers organization, weapons,
individual duties, movement to contact, offensive
action, defensive action, retrograde movements,
operations under special terrain conditions, sup-
ply evacuation, maintenance, and communication.
Chapter 11, which pertains to the airborne rifle
company, is included as an additional guide for
the airborne rifle company commander.
b. The procedures described in this manual are
based on normal conditions. They represent the
best methods of accomplishing the mission. In
battle, ideal conditions do not exist. Battlefield
confusion and the lack of adequate time for plan-
ning and carrying out plans require positive lead-
ership, initiative, and flexibility by leaders.

2. MISSION. The mission of the rifle company in

the attack is to close with the enemy and destroy
or capture him. The mission of the rifle company

RESTRICTED
in defense is to repel the enemy assault by fire or
close combat.

3. CHARACTERISTICS OF INFANTRY. a. The in-

fantry essentially is an arm of close combat. It
fights by combining fire, maneuver, and shock ac-
tion. By fire, it inflicts losses on the enemy and
neutralizes his combat power; by maneuver, it
closes with the enemy and makes its fire more ef-
fective; by shock action, it completes the destruc-
tion of the enemy in close combat.
b. Infantry is capable of limited independent
action by the use of its own weapons. Its offensive
power decreases when its freedom of maneuver is
limited or when it is opposed by an organized de-
fense. Under these conditions or against a force
of combined arms, infantry fire power is rein-
forced by the support of artillery, tanks, and other
arms. The defensive power of infantry reaches its
maximum when it occupies an organized defensive
position or when the enemy's freedom of maneuver
is limited.
c. Infantry maneuvers on difficult ground by
moving in small, inconspicuous formations and by
taking advantage of covered routes of approach
and small irregularities in the terrain. By skilled
use of the terrain, infantry units achieve maxi-
mum fire effect, conserve personnel, conceal move-
ment, and permit the maneuver of their reserve.

4. ORGANIZATION. The rifle company is the basic

infantry unit with tactical, administrative, and
supply functions. It consists of a company head-

2
 quarters, three rifle platoons, and one weapons
platoon (see fig. 1). (For details of organization
and equipment, see the current Table of Organiza-
tion and Equipment 7-17.)
a. The company headquartersconsists of a com-
mand group and an administrative group. The
personnel of these groups help the company com-
mander perform his tactical, administrative, and
supply duties.
b. The rifle platoon consists of a platoon head-
quarters, three rifle squads, and one weapons
squad.
c. The weapons platoon consists of a platoon
headquarters, one 60-mm mortar section, and one
57-mm rifle section.

5. INDIVIDUAL WEAPONS. Individual weapons of

the company are the rifle, bayonet, carbine, pistol,
hand grenades, and rifle grenades. (For descrip-
tion and characteristics of these weapons see FM's
23-5, 23-7, 23-25, 23-30, and 23-35.)
a. Rifle. The rifle is the principal individual
weapon. Because of its range, ease of operation,
and light weight, it is well adapted for use in all
types of infantry combat. These characteristics
enable a rifleman or a group of riflemen to deliver
quickly a large volume of accurate fire on a desired
target within range.
b. Sniper's rifle. One rifle equipped with a tele-
scopic sight is furnished each rifle squad. It is used
by the sniper.
c. Bayonet. The bayonet is a weapon of close com-
bat. Skill in its use, acquired by training, gives
 0

U)
-i
b.

w 0

Uy)

-' 0
LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

-1Z

,·~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c
(L ~~0(L
w w-j

ILJ
U)
0
~~~~~U)
~ 3j
U)

0 Zo 2· it-
w~~~~~o
4
040

4
a-
~~~IL
~~~~WU) wo

40~~~

Id

Z 0Z Z

4
0 0,U LL
<Id< Id

I ~ ~ ~ ~ I
the infantryman confidence in his ability to close
with the enemy.
d. Carbine. The carbine can fire in greater vol-
ume and more accurately than the pistol. Its effec-
tive range is 300 yards. It is used to protect the
men of crew-served weapons and others who are
armed with it.
e. Pistol. The automatic pistol is used for indi-
vidual defense by men not armed with the rifle or
carbine. It is effective at ranges less than 50 yards.
f. Hand grenades. The fragmentation hand gren-
ade is used against enemy personnel, particularly
those manning crew-served weapons, who are pro-
tected from rifle fire and are within the minimum
range of the high-angle rifle grenade.
g. Rifle grenades. Rifle grenades, propelled by the
rifle or carbine from a launcher attached to it, are
more accurate than hand grenades and have a
longer range. Rifle grenades are effective against
armored vehicles, emplacements, buildings, and
personnel. Fragmentation hand grenades become
rifle grenades when used with the launcher.

6. CREW-SERVED WEAPONS. Rifle company crew-

served weapons are the 57-mm rifle, the 60-mm
mortar, the light machine gun, the caliber .50
machine gun, the automatic rifle, and the rocket
launcher. (For their description and characteris-
tics, see FM's 23-15, 23-32, 23-55, 23-65, 23-80,
and 23-85.)
a. The 57-nmml rifle is used in close support of
rifle units for direct fire against definitely located
point targets. It has a maximum range of 4,340

5
yards, but it seldom is used at ranges greater than
800 yards against moving targets and 1,900 yards
against stationary point targets. Its cartridge HE,
AT (high explosive, antitank) penetrates approxi-
mately 3 inches of armor.
b. The 60-mnm mortar is used for close-in sup-
port of rifle units. It may be used against area tar-
gets. Its maximum range is 1,985 yards. Because
of dispersion, it rarely engages point targets more
distant than 1,000 yards.
c. The light machine gun is used to supplement
rifle fires by placing short, concentrated bursts of
fire upon known or suspected enemy groups of
men.
d. The caliber .50 machine gun is mounted on a
vehicle and is used against enemy personnel, ve-
hicles, and low-flying aircraft (see par: 12). The
caliber .50 machine gun fires ball, armor piercing
incendiary (API), tracer, and armor piercing
(AP) ammunition. The machine gun can be
mounted on a tripod and fired as a ground weapon.
e. The automatic rifle provides the rifle squad
with an easily controlled and maneuverable weap-
on capable of a large volume of fire. It is used
against ground targets in a manner similar to the
light machine gun. Its light weight permits the
automatic rifleman to maintain the same rate of
advance as the riflemen.
f. The rocket launchers and high explosive rock-
ets are used primarily against armored vehicles;
secondary targets include crew-served weapons,
pillbox enbrasures, and groups of men.

6
7. TYPES OF POSITIONS FOR CREW-SERVED WEAP-
ONS. a. Firing positions. The 57-mm rifle, the 60-mm
mortar, the light machine gun, and the rocket
launcher occupy firing positions to cover assigned
sectors of fire or target areas. These firing posi-
tions are classified as primary, alternate, and sup-
plementary.
(1) A primary firing position offers the best
conditions for the accomplishment of the
assigned mission.
(2) An alternate firing position is used for
firing on primary targets when the pri-
mary firing position cannot be defended
or is unsuitable for carrying out the as-
signed mission.
(3) A supplementary firing position is used
for firing on secondary targets which
cannot be reached from the primary or
alternate firing positions.
b. Cover positions. Whenever possible, leaders se-
lect cover positions providing defilade and conceal-
ment for men and weapons not actively fighting
the enemy.
c. Off-carrier position. The off-carrier position is
the point at which the weapons and the initial sup-
ply of ammunition of the weapons platoon are re-
moved from the carrier for hand carry to the firing
or cover position. The off-carrier position provides
defilade and concealment for men and carriers, and
it is as close to the firing position as possible.

8. TRANSPORTATION. The organic transportation

of the rifle company consists of four 1/4-ton trucks,

7
four l/4 -ton trailers, one 21/z-ton truck, and one 1-
ton trailer. One 1/4-ton truck is used by the com-
pany commander for command and reconnais-
sance. Another is used during the movement phase
to transport the weapons and extra ammunition
of the weapons squads of the rifle platoons. This
vehicle also is used for supply of ammunition to the
rifle platoons, or for evacuation. One 21/2-ton
truck (with I-ton trailer) is used as a company
general utility vehicle. Two 1/4-ton trucks are
assigned to the weapons platoon to transport its
weapons and ammunition.
9. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. The rifle company op-
erates according to the battalion commander's
plan. The company commander bases his plan
on his mission, and coordinates the actions of
his platoons and the fire of all weapons at his dis-
posal. The rifle company may be assigned to the
assault echelon or to the battalion reserve. When
the company is acting alone, the company com-
mander uses his company according to his mission,
and he makes more decisions on his own initiative
than he does when operating with the battalion.
He notifies his commander promptly of major de-
cisions and frequently reports his company's loca-
tion and progress.
10. DUTIES OF THE COMPANY COMMANDER. a.
The company commander commands his company.
By his character and skill, he gives positive leader-
ship to his command and maintains its discipline,
welfare, and contentment. He actively supervises
the training of all elements of his company and in-

8
sures proper administration and the procurement
and maintenance of equipment. To assist him in
carrying out these responsibilities, he makes full
use of the company's chain of command. In assign-
ing duties to his leaders, he considers their indi-
vidual capabilities and personalities. In his lead-
ers, he develops a high degree of initiative and
personal responsibility-building his company into
a well-coordinated team.
b. He continually estimates the situation, hav-
ing in mind all practicable courses of action. By
directive, or by recommendation to his commander,
he initiates action on any matter pertaining to his
company, and follows this action through by vigor-
ous execution of the most simple effective course,
until his mission is accomplished.
c. To accomplish his mission, he uses all means
at his command and requests additional means
whenever they can be well used in his area of re-
sponsibility. Without awaiting orders, he coordi-
nates with any other unit or agency.
d. In the battle area, he uses observation, pa-
trols, liaison, and personal reconnaissance to main-
tain security and prepare for future operations.
He assigns definite missions to his leaders, and
keeps informed of their actions in order to give
assistance when needed and to insure the suc-
cess of his plan. He goes where he can best
control the action of his company as a whole, yet at
critical times he is personally present where he
can best influence the action. He alone is responsi-
ble to his commander for all that his company does
or fails to do.

9
11. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS. a. Command group.
(1) The company commander uses the com-
mand group to assist him in the control
of his company.
(2) The executive officer keeps abreast of the
tactical situation and performs duties
assigned to him by the company com-
mander. He assumes command of the
company if the company commander be-
comes a casualty. He takes charge of the
command post and maintains communi-
cation with the platoons and with the
company and battalion commanders. He
notifies appropriate commanders of the
change in the command post location. He
controls the movement of vehicles within
the company area and supervises the sup-
ply of ammunition to the platoons.
(3) The first sergeant assists the company
commander by executing any assigned
duties. His duties may vary from admin-
istrative and supply matters to command-
ing a platoon. Ordinarily he assists the
executive officer and represents him dur-
ing his temporary absence from the com-
mand post.
(4) The company clerk is the chief assistant
to the first sergeant.
(5) The communication sergeant is trained
in the use and maintenance of communi-
cation equipment in the company, and he
trains his men to operate this equipment.
He establishes the company communica-

10
 tion system and receives and dispatches
messengers.
(6) The radio operatorsoperate the two com-
pany radios which are in the battalion net
(one at the company command post and
one with the company commander), and
they receive and transmit messages to
and from the company commander.
(7) The bugler is the chief assistant to the
communication sergeant. He operates
the company switchboard.
(8) The company messengers are alternate
radio operators, linemen, and switch-
board operators. One messenger accom-
panies the company commander and
drives his vehicle; one is stationed at the
company command post; and one oper-
ates from the battalion command post.
(9) The orderlies perform duties assigned to
them by the company commander. One
may be used as a radio operator, switch-
board operator, lineman, or messenger.
The other orderly, a member of the ad-
ministrative group, assists supply per-
sonnel.
b. Administrative group. For a discussion of the
duties of the administrative group, see paragraph
352.

12. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. In defense against

an enemy air attack, the rifle company usually re-
lies on passive means of defense, such as disper-
sion, concealment, camouflage, and the use of cover.

853696 0--49 2 11
 (See fig. 2.) The success of such means depends
on an adequate warning system, closely coordi-
nated with the general aircraft warning system of
the area. In some situations, a rifle company may
be permitted to fire at positively identified enemy
aircraft. The caliber .50 machine gun is the com-
pany's most effective weapon for this purpose;
however, all small arms may be used.

13. ANTITANK DEFENSE. a. The rifle company de-

fends itself against tanks by using antitank weap-
ons to destroy the tanks and obstacles. Timely
warning is the key factor in defense against a tank
attack; maximum means of communication are
used to alert all men of the company. Antitank
weapons in the rifle company include antitank and
white phosphorous (WP) rifle grenades, rocket
launchers, and 57-mm rifles. Additional means
which may be provided by higher commanders in-
clude tanks, 75-mm rifles, and antitank mines. In
close combat with enemy tanks, white phosphorous
grenades, particularly white phosphorous rifle
grenades, are extremely effective in denying ob-
servation to tank crews and in the psychological
effect upon these crews.
b. Individual passive means of defense against
tanks include the use of all natural obstacles such
as streams, stumps, large trees, boulders, and
swampy or marshy ground. In static situations,
fox holes may be dug. When attacked by tanks,
defending riflemen continue to fire on enemy in-
fantry until forced to take cover to protect them-
selves and their weapons from the crushing action

12
Figure2. The company defends against aircraft by the
use of dispersion, concealment, camouflage, and
cover.

13
of the tanks. When enemy infantry is not present,
small-arms fire is directed against tank vision slits
and tank crews operating with open hatches.

14
 CHAPTER 2

TACTICAL MOVEMENTS

Section I. GENERAL

14. GENERAL. a. For doctrines governing troop

movements, see FM 100-5. For details of march
hygiene, see FM 21-10.
b. Tactical movements consist of-
(1) Movement to contact.
(2) Relocation of troops according to opera-
tional plans. (The principles and tech-
nique of movement, as outlined in this
chapter, are applicable to movements in-
volving the relocation of troops.)
.(3) Retrograde movement (see pars. 328 to
344).

Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

15. DEFI NITION. Movement to contact is the ground

movement in a theater of operations just before
combat to place troops in a position to close with
the enemy. It does not include troop movement by
air or by sea when security during the movement
is provided by the Air Force or by the Navy.

16. CLASSIFICATION. Movements to contact are

uncovered or covered. An uncovered movement to
contact is one made when little or no security is
provided by friendly forces. It ends when direct
ground contact with the enemy is gained. A cov-
ered movement to contact is one made behind se-
curity forces. It is used to move a unit to an as-
signed location to relieve or reinforce troops al-
ready in contact with the enemy. It ends when the
location is occupied.

17. PHASES. a. Movement to contact normally is

conducted in three phases--
(1) First phase (contact remote)--enemy di-
rect ground action is remote.
(2) Second phase (contact improbable)-en-
emy direct ground action is improbable.
(3) Third phase (contact imminent)--enemy
direct ground action is imminent.
b. These phases may or may not follow this se-
quence; the phase depends on the commander's
estimate of the situation. The commander makes
a continuous estimate of the situation in order to
adequately dispose the units of his column at the
proper time and place to meet the enemy situation.
The passage from one phase to another is made
when the commander decides that the enemy is
close enough to increase his readiness for action.

18. FORMATIONS. a. Route column. During the con-

tact remote phase of movement to contact, admin-
istrative considerations govern and the movement
is made in route column. In route Column, the com-
pany normally moves by rail or motor. Route col-

16
umn ends when the commander decides that he
must group his units tactically before continuing
the movement.
b. Tactical column. During the contact improba-
ble phase of movement to contact, both tactical and
administrative considerations govern, and the
movement is made in tactical column. Units are
grouped tactically to permit the prompt use of
combat formations or the orderly occupation of
and departure from an assembly area. The com-
pany moves as a unit, either by foot or motor.
Within the company, the grouping depends on the
probable future mission of the company. (For ex-
ample, elements of the weapons platoon may move
with the rifle elements which they support.) Tac-
tical column ends when the company deploys or
when it occupies an assembly area.
c. Approach march. During the contact imminent
phase of movement to contact, tactical considera-
tions govern and the movement is made in the ap-
proach march. Elements whose contact with the
enemy is imminent are deployed in a suitable tac-
tical formation. Other elements continue in tacti-
cal column, and they in turn move in the approach
march when their contact with the enemy is immi-
nent. Any deployed formation, including deploy-
ment in depth, may be used. For example, the lead-
ing company of an advance guard battalion nor-
mally uses the deployed formation described in
paragraph 22. Such a formation varies according
to the strength of the screening force, the terrain,
the enemy disposition and sttength, and other ex-
isting conditions. The approach march ends when

17
contact is made with the enemy or when an attack
position is occupied.

19. CONTROL. a. Control of the company during

movement to contact depends primarily on commu-
nication. All of the company's communication fa-
cilities are used to the maximum, consistent with
security, to assist in maintaining this control.
b. March objectives and phase lines assist the
commander in controlling his unit. A march ob-
jective is a recognizable place toward which the
march of a single column is directed. Frequently,
high ground, road junctions, streams, and similar
features identify usable march objectives. A phase
line is a line generally perpendicular to the direc-
tion of advance. It usually passes through the
march objectives of several columns marching
abreast. When a phase line is reached, command-
ers report the fact to the next higher commander.
Columns usually continue to the next phase line;
however, they may be directed not to go beyond a
given phase line until a specified time or until the
occurrence of a particular event. Thus the phase
line is a means of control and coordination. (See
fig. 3.)
c. Phase lines for the company ordinarily are
prescribed by the battalion commander. Distances
between phase lines depend on the type of move-
ment, the terrain, the visibility, and the imminence
of enemy contact. The company usually reports
its progress periodically.

18
 MARCH
OBJECTIVE Y
I/
OMARCH -\ I PHASE LINE
OBJECTIVEC *5

PHASE LINE

*4

MARCH MARCH
MAtH~~~R~CH / MACH X PHASE LINE

OBJt(ECTIVE BI OBJECTIVEX ) #3

PHASE LINE

M RCH > PHASE LINE

CTIVE A- \\

Figure 3. March objectives and phase lines help control

the column during movement.

19
 Section III. FOOT MARCHES

20. GENERAL. During a foot march, the company

may form a part of the main body, it may act as
security for a larger unit, or it may move as an
independent unit.

21. THE COMPANY AS PART OF THE MAIN BODY.

a. The movement is in tactical column. The com-
pany usually marches in a column of two's, one file
on each side of the road, and maintains its tactical
unity. The company's officers and noncommis-
sioned officers-enforce march discipline. The lead-
ing company maintains the rate of march pre-
scribed by the battalion commander; other com-
panies maintain their position in the column. Or-
dinarily the company commander is at the head of
his company; however, he goes wherever his pres-
ence is required.
b. Company motor vehicles march in separate
serials under regimental or battalion control.
When under regimental control, the serials usu-
ally move by bounds in rear of the regimental foot
column; when under battalion control, the serials
usually move by bounds in rear of the battalion
foot elements.
c. The march ends upon arrival in the assembly
area or attack position; however, the company
may be forced to go directly into the attack from
the tactical column.

22. THE COMPANY AS THE SUPPORT OF AN AD-

VANCE GUARD BATTALION. a. The mission of a

20
company as the support of an advance guard bat-
talion is to prevent unnecessary delay of the bat-
tallion and to protect the battalion against sur-
prise and enemy ground action from the front.
For details concerning the company as the support
of a rear guard battalion, see paragraph 327.
b. The support company usually is reinforced by
tanks, machine guns, 75-mm rifles, and 81-mm
mortars. A tank platoon (rarely a section) may be
attached; machine gun and 75-mm rifle sections or
platoons normally are attached. The 81-mm mor-
tar platoon usually is placed in direct support of
the company, and a mortar observer moves with
the advance party. Reconnaissance elements of
engineers, artillery forward observers, heavy
mortar observers, and elements of the battalion
pioneer and ammunition platoon march with the
support.
c. The advance guard battalion, less the support,
constitute the advance guard reserve. The support
marches in three groups ahead of the advance
guard reserve. From rear to front, these groups
are: the support proper, the advance party, and
the point. (See fig. 4.) The support commander
sends forward an advance party, which seldom ex-
ceeds a platoon in strength. The advance party
sends forward a point, usually a squad. Distances
between elements of the advance guard vary ac-
cording to the situation, the terrain, and the visi-
bility. These distances are great enough to allow
each succeeding element to deploy without serious
interference from the enemy when contact is made.
However, the distances are not great enough to

21.
prevent each element from rapidly assisting the
element in front of it.

SECURITY AND RECONNAISSANCE

ELEMENTS OF HIGHER 3 TO
COMMANDERS 5 MILES

POINT

200 YARDS

I_ ADVANCE

400 YARDS

SUPPORT PROPER

500 YARDS
INITIAL POINT NT,--

RJ 534

RESERVE

ASSEMBLY AREA:
MAIN BODY FOLLOWS
RESERVE AT PRESCRIBED
DISTANCE

Figure . An initial advance guard formation.

22
 d. Average road spaces and distances between
elements of an advance guard in a daylight march
are approximately as follows:

Average
Average distance to
Element Strength road space next succeed-
in yards ing element in
yards, daylight

Point ....... Squad ....... 50 200

Advance party.. Platoon (less one 75 400
squad).
Support proper . Rifle company 150 500
(less one
platoon).

At night or under conditions of poor visibility, dis-

tances may be considerably less; in open country,
distances may be greater.

23. THE SUPPORT PROPER. The support proper usu-

ally consists of a reinforced rifle company less the
platoon sent forward as the advance party. Con-
tact with the advance party is maintained by radio
and by connecting files sent forward from the sup-
port proper. The support proper usually marches
in two single-file columns, one on each side of the
road, with approximately two paces between men.
The support commander ordinarily marches at the
head of the support proper; however, he goes
wherever his presence is required. He rapidly'
informs the advance guard commander of any
changes in the situation.

23
24. THE ADVANCE PARTY. The advance party con-
sists of one rifle platoon, reinforced, less one squad
sent forward as the point. Contact is maintained
with the point by radio and by connecting files sent
forward by the advance party. The advance party
usually marches in two single-file columns, one on
each side of the road, with approximately five
paces between men. Reinforcements to the ad-
vance party may include attached 57-mm rifles,
machine guns, and tanks. Observers from the ar-
tillery, heavy mortars, and 81-mm mortars may
march with the advance party. The advance party
commander usually marches at the head of the
advance party.

25. THE POINT. The point consists of one rifle

squad, which normally is not reinforced. It is the
leading element of the advance guard. The point
marches in two single-file columns, one on each
side of the road, with at least ten paces between
men. (See fig. 5.)

26. ACTION OF THE SUPPORT. a. Conduct. Unless

otherwise ordered, the support company attacks
without hesitation to drive off the enemy or en-
velop his position. The point immediately deploys
and attacks the resistance. The advance party pla-
toon leader joins the point squad leader. After
making a rapid reconnaissance and an estimate of
the situation, the platoon leader commits the ad-
vance party if the point cannot overcome the re-
sistance. The support company commander comes
forward and, through similar action, when the

24
 SQUAD LEADER A X

AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN

ASSISTANT SQUAD LEADER

CONNECTING FILES

HEAD OF ADVANCE PARTY

Figure 5. Disposition of the point of an advance party.

25
situation warrants, commits the support. When-
ever possible, the advance party and support at-
tack by a quick envelopment rather than by frontal
attack. If the support is unable to reduce the en-
emy's resistance, it immobilizes him by fire and
locates his flanks. If the enemy withdraws or is
destroyed without requiring the advance guard
reserve to fight, the support company promptly
resumes its advance.
b. Security. The commander of each element of
the support company always is responsible for the
close-in security of his command. The security
used depends on the mission, the terrain, and the
expected enemy action.
(1) Frontalsecurity may be provided by ele-
ments of the intelligence and reconnais-
sance platoon or by motorized detach-
ments from the advance guard. The sup-
port commander usually receives infor-
mation from these advanced elements
through the advance guard commander.
(2) Flank security for the point and the ad-
vance party normally is limited to obser-
vation to the flanks. When possible, pro-
tection up to 500 yards is provided by
motorized flank guards from the support
proper. Flank guards are sent to points
which allow observation of the support or
which provide concealment for hostile re-
cohnaissance or harassing detachments.
If the terrain is such that vehicles cannot
move cross country, the flank guards
leave their vehicles on the road and go on

26
 foot to selected observation points on the
flanks. When the support proper passes,
the flank guards move rapidly by vehicle
to the head of the column.
(3) During halts, the support establishes its
own security. Each element promptly
posts observers to the front and flanks to
prevent enemy forces from approaching
undetected.

27. THE COMPANY AS ADVANCE GUARD OF A BAT-

TALION MARCHING ALONE. When a battalion con-
ducts an independent march, the battalion com-
mander designates one rifle company as the ad-
vance guard company. The mission, formation,
and operation of this advance guard company re-
semble those of a rifle company designated as the
support of an advance guard battalion.

28. THE COMPANY AS FLANK GUARD OF A LARGER

FORCE. a. The mission of a flank guard company
is to protect the main body from hostile ground
observation and surprise ground attack from the
flank. In the event of an attack from the flank, this
mission requires action which permits the uninter-
rupted passage of the main body from the area or
gives the main body time to deploy.
b. The flank guard company may be reinforced
by elements of the regimental intelligence and re-
connaissance platoon, the tank company, the heavy
weapons company, and the engineers. Forward
observers from the heavy mortar company and
artillery also may accompany the flank guard

853696 0--49 ,3 27
company. Ordinarily the flank guard company has
special materiel such as antitank mines, demoli-
tions, and means for constructing obstacles.
c. The formation used by the flank guard com-
pany depends on the terrain, the availability of
parallel routes, the expected enemy action, and the
method of travel. When the flank guard company
marches on foot, its formation usually resembles
that used by a company acting as the support of
an advance guard battalion. (See par. 22.) The
company commander maintains a centrally located
reserve which he uses to influence the action when-
ever necessary. Because of the difficulty in keep-
ing up with the main body, flank guard companies
usually are motorized.
d. Movement is made either by maintaining a
rate of march equal to that of the main body or by
occupying successive objectives. Close liaison with
the main body is maintained by patrols and radio.
e. Depending on the terrain and the expected
enemy action, the flank guard company may march
parallel to the main column or it may occupy a
series of defensive positions on the flank. When
the flank guard company maintains a rate of march
equal to that of the main body, it operates like the
support company of an advance guard battalion.
When occupying a series of defensive positions, it
covers routes of expected enemy approach until the
main body passes. It may construct road blocks
and obstacles along ridges, stream lines, and de-
files. In this type of operation, the flank guard is
partially motorized and occupies its positions by a
series of leap-frog movements. A flank guard com-

28
pany maintains ground security measures similar
to an advance guard support company. (See par.
22.)

Section IV. MOTOR MARCHES

29. GENERAL. When moving by motor, the com-

pany may form part of the main body, may act as
a security force of a larger unit, or it may move
as an independent unit. When it acts as a security
force of a larger unit, it may be detailed as an ad-
vance or flank guard or a motorized detachment.

30. THE COMPANY AS PART OF THE MAIN BODY

OF A LARGER FORCE. In tactical column when mov-
ing by vehicle as part of the main body, the rifle
company conducts its march according to orders
and standing operating procedure. The vehicles
normally move with the company. Caliber .50 ma-
chine guns are mounted for antiaircraft protec-
tion, and each vehicle maintains an air guard. Ad-
ditional antitank protection normally is provided
by elements of the regimental tank company.

31. THE COMPANY AS SUPPORT OF THE ADVANCE

GUARD BATTALION. For missions and composi-
tion, see paragraph 22.
a. The reinforced rifle company, as the motor-
ized support of the advance guard battalion, usu-
ally is preceded by the regimental intelligence and
reconnaissance platoon or reconnaissance elements
of higher commanders. These reconnaissance ele-
ments have the mission of finding the enemy and

29
are followed by the support at enough distance (3
miles or more) to allow the support to detruck and
deploy.
b. The support sends forward an advance party
(reinforced rifle platoon), which precedes the sup-
port proper by approximately 5 minutes. The ad-
vance party does not send forward a point as it
does on a foot march. However, the company com-
mander maintains contact with the advance recon-
naissance elements by patrols and radio.
c. The methods of control and operation are sim-
ilar to those used by a company on foot (see par.
22). Because of the rapid rate of movement, close
liaison between column elements is maintained to
prevent closing up at unexpected halts. Distance
between vehicles and elements within the support
depends on the visibility, the terrain, and the ex-
pected enemy action.
32. THE COMPANY AS ADVANCE GUARD OF A BAT-
TALION MARCHING ALONE. The mission, forma-
tion, composition, and operation of a motorized ad-
vance guard company resemble those of the sup-
port of a motorized advance guard battalion. (See
par. 31.)
33. THE COMPANY AS FLANK GUARD OF A LARGER
FORCE. a. When the larger force is motorized, the
mission and organization of a motorized flank
guard of a larger motorized force resemble those
of a flank guard company on foot. (See par. 28.)
This flank guard company moves on a suitable par-
allel route in a formation similar to that of a sup-
port of a motorized advance guard battalion.

30
 b. When the larger force is on foot, the mission
and composition of the motorized flank guard com-
pany resemble those of a flank company on foot.
The formation is a series of motorized detach-
ments. The control, as for a flank guard on foot,
is as described in paragraph 28. The motorized
flank guard company operates by having each mo-
torized detachment block an avenue of expected
enemy approach. Since roads are the best route of
approach, they are given priority. The occulpation
of these flank positions normally is made in ad-
vance of the march of the main body. Engineers
are used to help construct road blocks and ob-
stacles. When the tail of the main column passes a
particular flank position, the motorized detach-
ment occupying that position leapfrogs to another
position. In case of an enemy attack, the main
body commander is notified and the flank guard
delays the advance of the enemy until the main
body deploys, or passes a designated point. The
motorized flank guard company commander nor-
mally maintains a central reserve, located to rein-
force any detachment as the need arises.

34. THE COMPANY AS A MOTORIZED DETACH-

MENT. a. The rifle company detailed as a motor-
ized detachment has the mission of reconnoitering
the route of advance and protecting the main body.
The company may be reinforced by elements of
the regimental intelligence and reconnaissance pla-
toon, the tank company, the battalion heavy weap-
ons company, engineers, communication and medi-

31
cal personnel, and forward observers from the
heavy mortar company and the artillery.
b. The formation used depends on the terrain
and the expected enemy action. Elements are ar-
ranged in the column in the order of their expected
use. This arrangement allows immediate action
when small enemy detachments are met, and it
assists in the rapid development of the enemy po-
sition when resistance is deliberate. Control is
maintained by the assignment of successive march
objectives and phase lines. Radio is the principal
means of communication within the motorized de-
tachments and with the main body commander.
c. The motorized detachment operates ahead of
the advance guard at a distance prescribed by the
main body commander. Advances are made by
bounds from one terrain feature to the next. A
small element, covered by the other elements of
the detachment, moves rapidly to a selected terrain
feature. After the small element reaches the ter-
rain feature, it is followed by the remainder of the
detachment. If corps or division reconnaissance
elements are operating to the front of the motor-
ized detachment, the motorized detachment main-
tains liaision with them. A motorized detachment
maintains ground security similar to the support
of an advance guard. (See par. 22.)

Section V. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT DURING

DARKNESS
35. UNCOVERED MOVEMENT DURING DARKNESS.
a. General. Although an uncovered movement to
contact normally is made in daylight, it may be

32
necessary or desirable in some situations to make
the movement or continue it during darkness. The
movement may occur during a period of enemy air
superiority or during an envelopment, exploita-
tion, or pursuit. To preserve secrecy, to seize ter-
rain by surprise, or to deny the enemy the time to
organize delaying positions, a company may be
ordered to begin or continue its movement, either
on foot or in vehicles, during darkness.
b. March rate. On good roads, the march rate for
foot troops approximates that of the day rate of
march under the same conditions. On poor roads,
on dark nights, or in unfavorable weather, the rate
of march may be reduced considerably. If the
movement is made by vehicles, the speed is reduced
greatly.
c. Formations. The formation used for an uncov-
ered movement to-contact at night depends on en-
emy information, the method of travel, the visibil-
ity, and the terrain. Usually a compact column is
used, and the distance between elements is less
than in a daylight move.
d. Control.
(1) Measures are taken to maintain direction
and control at night. The loss of direc-
tion may split a column into several
parts, or it may result in loss of secrecy
or in failure to reach the march objective
before daylight. It may cause the com-
pany to fail to accomplish its mission.
(2) If time and the situation permit, a recon-
naissance of the route is made during
daylight. If a daylight reconnaissance is

33
 impossible, the company commander
makes a thorough map reconnaissance to
pick out march objectives and any other
definite terrain feature which assists in
maintaining direction during a night
march.
(3) During the march, leaders closely check
march discipline, maintenance of con-
tact, control, and direction. Routes are
marked carefully and guides are posted
by leading elements to assist successive
elements. Company elements are well
closed up, and the distances between men
are greatly reduced.
(4) During movement on a dark night, special
means of identification may be used to
prevent men from becoming lost. For
instance, each man can tie a white hand-
kerchief or undershirt on the rear of his
belt to guide the man to his rear.
e. Secrecy. In an uncovered movement to contact
at night, secrecy is of paramount importance.
Measures for preserving secrecy during an uncov-
ered night march include-
(1) Prohibiting smoking.
(2) Prohibiting the use of lights.
(3) Holding noises to a minimum.
(4) Maintaining radio silence until enemy
contact is made.
(5) Refraining from firing upon hostile air-
craft.
f. Security.
(1) Particular attention is paid to security

34
 during an uncovered movement to con-
tact at night. Factors determining the
strength of the security elements in-
clude-
(a) Imminence of the enemy.
(b) Strength and type of screening force
(if any) and the distance it is operat-
ing ahead of the company.
(c) Terrain.
(d) Company mission.
(2) Ordinarily, the rifle company sends out
security elements to the front and flanks.
These security detachments prevent the
enemy from ambushing or surprising the
column.
36. COVERED MOVEMENT DURING DARKNESS. a.
When made at night, the covered movement to con-
tact is conducted like that used in daylight. Night
movements are made when enemy air superiority
or artillery prevents daylight movements, or when
it is desirable to relocate troops during darkness to
maintain secrecy.
b. A covered movement during darkness usually
is preceded by a daylight reconnaissance of the
route. Guides are posted to keep the column on
the route. The rate of march, formations, control
measures, and secrecy measures resemble those
discussed in paragraph 35.

Section VI. ASSEMBLY AREAS AND ATTACK

POSITIONS

37. ASSEMBLY AREAS. a. Assembly areas are loca-

35
tions where the elements of a command are assem-
bled preparatory to further tactical action. If
possible, assembly areas are located within easy
marching time (approximately 1 hour) of the
attack position.
b. Desirable characteristics of an assembly area
include-
(1) Concealment from hostile air and ground
observation.
(2) Cover from direct fire.
(3) Enough space for the proper dispersal of
all organic and attached or supporting
elements of the unit.
(4) More than one good route of entrance and
exit.
(5) Turn-arounds and hard standing for ve-
hicles.
(6) Natural obstacles for protection against
a tank attack.
c. The battalion commander assigns the com-
pany an assembly area within the battalion assem-
bly area. He selects it after considering the prob-
able future use of the company. The company
commander similarly assigns platoon assembly
areas. (See fig. 6.)
d. To avoid confusion and to prevent delaying
other units, the company commander designates a
noncommissioned officer and guides to accompany
the battalion quartering party. The noncommis-
sioned officer is responsible for suballotting the
area to platoons and posting guides to lead them to
their respective areas.
e. In the assembly area, individuals and units

36
 z
FE w
3E
wu
U w

!Iii

~~~w
-iio9
zO
.-
I-.I w w
w IInI
w P:w3
W ~ol : W

- oov-
SaA 009 c

U 2~~~~~~~~~~~UC

37

w~ In
3
establish and maintain camouflage and security.
The primary activity in the assembly area is the
preparation for tactical action. Reconnaissance,
detailed plans, and coordination are made as com-
plete as possible, and attack orders usually are
issued while the troops are in the assembly area.
Equipment not needed for combat is collected and
stacked. Necessary vehicles join their units.
Troops are given the maximum rest consistent
with adequate briefing and preparation for the
contemplated operation. Combat loads of ammuni-
tion and rations are issued. (See fig. 7.)

38. ATTACK POSITIONS. a. The company attack

position is the last covered and concealed position
occupied by the company before crossing the line
of departure. Within the company position are the
assault platoon attack positions and the support
platoon location. Based on the plan of attack and
the terrain, the company is assigned an attack po-
sition by the battalion commander. The company
commander designates platoon attack positions
within the company position.
b. The selection of an attack position is based
on the expected use of the unit; its selection aids
the movement to the line of departure. The de-
sired characteristics of an attack position resemble
those of an assembly area. Cover from enemy
small-arms fire is available.
c. The primary activity in the attack position is
the final preparation and coordination for the
attack. When the situation permits vehicles to be
brought forward to the attack position, special

38
 r
Aw~~~~' Cs

ii~ i :
W~~~ h

~ r 41<
X' 0C

U.:

gI If
t

c-~''~~- 39 -39
t
heavy equipment for certain types of operations is
given to the troops in this position. The attack
position is occupied for a minimum time before the
attack. The movement may be made under battal-
ion or company control. Particular attention is
given to the maintenance of secrecy during the
movement to the attack position.

39. SECURITY. When the company occupies a por-

tion of the battalion assembly area, security meas-
ures are coordinated by the battalion commander.
Security measures depend on the length of time
the area is to be occupied, the expected enemy
action, the security provided by forces to the front,
the terrain, and the weapons and equipment avail-
able. Security measures may vary from the estab-
lishment of observation posts (when adequate se-
curity is provided by forces to the front) to an
elaborate perimeter defense including all weapons
(when inadequate security is provided by forces to
the front and a strong enemy attack is possible).
For antiaircraft security and antitank defense, see
paragraphs 12 and 13.

40
 CHAPTER 3

RIFLE SQUAD

Section I. GENERAL

40. ORGANIZATION. The rifle squad consists of a

squad leader, an assistant squad leader, an auto-
matic rifle team (automatic rifleman and assistant
automatic rifleman), and five riflemen.
41. DUTIES OF LEADERS. a. The squad leader is re-
sponsible for the discipline, training, control, and
conduct of his squad. His squad is trained to use
and care for its weapons and equipment, to move
and fight efficiently as individuals, and to function
effectively as part of -the fighting team.
b. The assistant squad leader performs duties
assigned by the squad leader and takes command
of the squad in his absence. The assistant squad
leader usually controls the automatic rifle team.

42. TARGET DESIGNATION. Battlefield targets gen-

erally are not clear. Point targets and area targets
are designated with accuracy and simplicity by fire
commands or by other means, such as firing tracer
rounds.

43. FIRE CONTROL. Fire control is the ability of

the squad leader to open fire when desired, adjust

41
the fire of his squad upon the target, shift the fire
of all or part of the squad from one target to an-
other, regulate the rate of fire, and cease firing
when he wishes. The squad leader designates the
target and gives the command for opening fire. He
controls the fire by oral orders and signals and by
requiring men of the squad to transmit his orders
along the front of the squad. He concentrates the
fire of the squad on the assigned target. At times,
the squad leader moves from man to man and per-
sonally directs their fire to make sure that all men
fire. On orders of the platoon leader or on his own
initiative, he shifts the fire of all or part of his
squad to new targets. Even though the exact tar-
get is not definite, a volume of fire helps closing
with the enemy and saves lives. Squad leaders ex-
ert strong leadership to produce and maintain this
volume of fire, especially in the final stages of the
attack.
44. FIRE DISCIPLINE. Fire discipline in the rifle
squad is achieved through training in the use of
weapons and the exact execution of orders. It re-
quires skill in sight setting, aiming, and trigger
squeeze; close attention to the squad leader; and
change in the rate of fire on the squad leader's
order or signal.

45. FIRE DISTRIBUTION. a. Each man fires his first

shot on the part of the target corresponding to his
position in the squad (fig. 8). (The term "target"
refers to definitely located enemy or to the area
where the enemy is believed to be located.) He
then distributes his fire to the right and left of his

42
 tss
0 o
'I.~~~~~~~I

r,
n4 r$~~~~~~~~~~~44

a a~~~~~~~~~~

853ara
049 .

853698 0-49------4 43
first shot, covering that part of the target where
he can deliver accurate fire without changing his
position. The part of the target which one man
can cover is limited by the range and the position
of the firer. Often each man can cover the entire
target with accurate fire; he does this whenever
possible.
b. The automatic rifleman distributes his fire
over the entire target or on any target which best
supports the advance of the squad. The automatic
rifleman fires rapid single shots or bursts of two
or three rounds; he does not fire longer bursts
unless he can deliver enfilade fire on a profitable
target or unless the target is at very close range.
c. The squad leader controls the squad fire so
that the entire target is kept under fire. If newy
targets appear, he changes the fire distribution as
necessary.
d. All men are trained to estimate ranges. This
lets the squad place surprise fire on a target.
Ranges can be determined by tracer or by sighting
shots when the strike of bullets can be observed;
however, this method often causes loss of surprise.

46. FIRE AND MANEUVER. Infantry fights by fire

and maneuver. One element fires while another
element moves under the cover of this fire, making
the maximum use of cover. One man may engage
the enemy by fire while another moves to a new
firing position closer to the enemy. A part of the
squad may cover by fire the movement of the re-
mainder of the squad to new firing positions. The
rifle squad may move as a unit to assault the hos-

44
tile position while other rifle elements and sup-
porting weapons fire at the enemy to limit his
movement and neutralize his fires.
47. SNIPING. Snipers shoot enemy who expose
themselves. By eliminating enemy leaders and
harassing their troops, sniping weakens enemy
morale. Snipers are expert riflemen, and they are
most effective in defensive situations. (See FM
21-75.) Sniping is not confined to specially trained
and selected men; all riflemen act as snipers when-
ever the occasion demands.
48. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Each member of the
squad carries an initial supply of ammunition for
his individual weapon. Hand grenades and extra
ammunition are issued when needed. When neces-
sary, the squad leader requests ammunition from
the platoon leader, and he sees that his squad col-
lects ammunition from casualties. The squad leader
is responsible that ammunition (including gre-
nades) is not discarded by men of his squad,
either on the march or after contact is made.
49. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraft se-
curity, see paragraph 12.
50. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Antitank defense is cov-
ered in paragraph 13. Antitank grenadiers are
placed to provide close-in antitank defense for the
squad.

Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

51. GENERAL. During the movement to contact,

45
the rifle squad generally marches as a part of the
platoon. During foot marches, the squad usually
uses a march column formation which consists of
a column of files on each side of the road. (See
app. II.) This formation provides maximum speed
and control, and it is used to move the squad from
one location to another behind friendly front lines.
Reconnaissance and security missions which may
be assigned to a rifle squad during the approach
march include the point of an advance guard, a
flank guard, or a march outpost.

52. POINT OF AN ADVANCE GUARD. a. The point is

a rifle squad sent forward by the advance party
to act as security. Motorized reconnaissance and
security elements from larger units may precede
the point.
b. The point of an advance guard moves along
the route of advance and protects the column from
enemy near the route of march. The point pre-
cedes the advance party by a distance varying
with the terrain; however, it is usually within 200
yards. The point marches in a diamond formation
or in a column of two's with one file on each side
of the road, and there is a minimum of 10 paces
between men (fig. 9). The leading two or three
riflemen increase this distance to about 20 paces.
Either of these formations provides adequate con-
trol by the squad leader, reduces the danger from
enemy small-arms fire, and permits prompt fire ac-
tion toward the front or either flank. The squad
leader goes where his presence is required, but he
is usually just in rear of his leading riflemen. The

46
assistant squad leader marches at the rear of the
point.

= E:ALE L

_.47

one file on each 8ide of the road and at least 10

paces between men.
 c. The point fires on all hostile elements within
range. Observed enemy beyond effective rifle range
are reported by the signal ENEMY IN SIGHT
(fig. 10). The point continues to advance until
within effective range and then it opens fire and at-
tacks (fig. 11). Rapid, aggressive fire and maneu-
ver by the point may drive off small enemy groups.
It also may force a large enemy group to commit it-
self and disclose its locations, thus aiding the use
of the advance party. When unable to drive off the
enemy, the point holds its position and covers the
action of the advance party. The point observes
toward the front and flanks but makes no physical
flank reconnaissance. Except to open fire, the
point stops only on the order of the advance party
commander. When the column halts, the point
sends out security to protect itself against a sur-
prise attack.

53. CONNECTING FILES. A connecting file is one

or two men placed between units on the march to
maintain contact between the units. It is fur-
nished by the larger unit to keep contact with
the smaller unit. The number of connecting files
placed between units depends on the interval be-
tween units, the terrain, and the visibility. Con-
necting files pass forward all orders, messages,
and signals received from the unit sending them
(fig. 12). They halt only on orders or signals from
that unit, or when the smaller unit halts. The sig-
nal ENEMY IN SIGHT and special signals pre-
viously agreed upon are passed back to the larger
unit. If a connecting file consists of one man, he

48
 _~- _ ~ ii..

-' 0*

Figure 10. The point signals back ENEMY IN SIGHT

when the enemy is sighted but is beyond ef-
fective range.

49
 V

· :· ::NiXt r:
il.

§1\-· Bei 0: E

Qo

~
~,'~ ~':i ~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~

:naa\ t1!
Rid \ 4r>
000j 5 0 0 \ "a
W L 2

~~~~~~~~ V
m ~~~
0f0 i t t t X

0~ ~ 8d e : · > |

i t H z c

50
50
 'A

IN-I

F PARTY.

Figure 12. Connecting files pass forward all orders, nmes-

sages, and signals received from the unit send-
ing them.

51
looks alternately to the rear and to the front for
signals. To overcome the difficulty of one man
keeping both forward and rear elements in view,
a two-man connecting file ordinarily is used. One
man watches the larger unit for signals, the other
watches the smaller unit, and they remain within
speaking distance of each other.

54. FLANK GUARD. a. A rifle squad often is used

as a motorized flank guard to protect a unit on
the march. (See par. 26.) The flank guard oc-
cupies positions to prevent the enemy from firing
on the column within midrange (400-600 yards).
It checks areas likely to conceal hostile troops or
observers. When the squad remains for a time at
one locality, the leader provides for all-around
security by selecting one or more firing positions
for each man. The squad usually posts two or
more men as observers and for local security; one
man is designated to watch for signals from the
parent unit. The remainder of the squad remains
under cover, prepared to move immediately into
firing positions. (See fig. 13.)
b. Enemy are reported by signal or messenger
and, if within effective range, they immediately
are attacked by fire. If the enemy is beyond ef-
fective range, the squad leader acts according. to
his orders or on his own initiative in the absence
of orders. Contact with the squad is maintained
by the commander of the unit sending it out.

55. MARCH OUTPOST. When a squad acts as a

march outpost during a halt and is assigned an

52
 time

i fil' 0

I - 1
B,
4 4' a
53

!e%: xo~5
 area of security, the squad leader places his men
to observe the assigned area. (See fig. 14.)

LAE AUOATIDER AND

ANC
MESSENGER

Figure14. All-around security is established during a halt.

54
56. FORMATIONS. When the platoon leaves the
tactical column to take up the approach march,
the squad marches with the platoon. Squad for-
mations used during the approach march and the
attack are squad column, squad diamond, and as
skirmishers (see app. II). The initial formation
usually is prescribed by the platoon leader; there-
after, the squad leader changes his formation to
meet changes in the situation and the terrain.
a. Squad column usually is the best formation
for movement in woods, fog, smoke, and darkness,
when control is the governing factor. It also is
used for moving along narrow trails and through
defiles. The squad column is controlled easily; it
gives observation in all directions and permits im-
mediate action toward the flanks. (See fig. 15.)
b. Squad diamond is used for situations which
require readiness for action in any direction; for
example, when a squad is acting alone, or where
a squad is the leading element of the platoon. It
is an excellent formation to use when contact is
imminent, since this formation provides good con-
trol, all-around security, flexibility, and disper-
sion. (See fig. 16.)
c. As skirmishers is an initial fighting forma-
tion, it generally is used after contact with the
enemy is gained, but before the squad leader com-
pletes his reconnaissance to determine the most
favorable location for the automatic rifle. This
formation provides flexibility and lets the squad
leader carefully place the automatic rifle team.
As soon as the squad leader determines the best
location for the automatic rifle, he directs the

55
 L-- ; " OF >y

LEAALR

SISTANT

W~~~~~_r
ASESlTANT

Figure 15. The squad column is easy to control.

56
 : mss~~~-.-

Figure
16. T h e squad
diamond
all-aroudsecuri--t=y
provides

16X
k--iu-~~~~~~.i

te
· :·---::
::::: ;:::i:

ASS
S AN 5

Figure 16S. The squad diamond provides all-aroundsecurity.

57
squad to form as skirmishers, AR right (left).
After the automatic rifle team is committed, all
squad weapons fire to the front. This formation
is used primarily during the assault. It is good for
dashing across open areas, particularly in areas
exposed to enemy fire. (See fig. 17.)

57. PASSING THROUGH LONG-RANGE FIRE. When

the enemy covers a zone across the line of advance
with long-range machine guni or artillery fire, the
squad disperses and the entire squad rushes across
this fire-swept area in a single bound. This action
is taken by the squad leader upon his own initia-
tive or when directed by his platoon leader. Troops
do not stop until they pass through the area
covered by fire; this is particularly important
when crossing crests or passing through defiles.
The squad leader leads his squad across the area
and re-forms it beyond the area.

58. POSITION AND DUTIES OF LEADERS. During

the approach march, the squad leader is where he
best can control his squad. He studies the ground
to the front to choose the best route of movement
for the squad. He varies his squad disposition ac-
cording to the circumstances. He maintains the
prescribed direction, yet .makes minor detours to
use better routes. (See fig. 18.) The assistant
squad leader usually is in rear of the squad to su-
pervise its advance.

59. SECURITY. When a squad is in the approach

march, it protects itself by using the correct for-

58
 I::?'" l '

?:-ii'ii¥ '':-i'...
::iiiiii i" " , ?

--3, , !,:. i . ::i..';.... 0

59
 mation, by observation, and by dispersion. Often
it is necessary to check dangerous localities. This
is done by sending out security elements.

_---_ POSSIBLE ENEMY

MACHINE GUN EMPLACEMENT - ...........
COVER AND CONCEALMENT SR
EUIY
FOR MY MEN -- -
WATCH THAT CREST
.-r _ _S==_S ;e'R. -. : ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.... i..
-..
, '.'ij.E
:,''

_-..., -E.E.E- . i D.._

::#;j'''9"
E'.,
gEE-Efi::
tg:;:
Amp:
ilk:g:-:-:
he:::::::
i: CEDE:-:
i >: i: :: . >:;: ::::t::ggg::-:
..f'..E i i::::i::g:

An-'-
'iiiSijjiicg.
--'i....
. ..--

Figure 18. The squad leader studies the ground and selects
his squad's route.

60. ACTION WHEN CONTACT IS ESTABLISHED. a.

When the point squad is fired upon, the riflemen
immediately move into firing position and return
the fire. (See fig. 19.) The squad leader makes a
quick reconnaissance, decides upon the best po-

60
sition for the automatic rifle team, and tells the
assistant squad leader to move it to the selected
position. Particularly at close range, instant fire
from rifles (white phosphorous, antitank, and
fragmentation rifle grenades, as well as ball am-
munition) and, from the automatic rifle, often de-
stroys or neutralizes the enemy element which
discloses its position by fire. When the enemy
strength prevents such a quick local success, the
squad leader builds up fire superiority and moves
his squad forward, using fire and maneuver. The
platoon leader may use this squad for a frontal
attack while he maneuvers with the remainder of
the platoon.
b. When a squad is protected from enemy small-
arms, fire, the squad leader may move his squad
to a firing position where he can flank or surprise
the enemy. He uses the fires of supporting weapons
and the cover and concealment provided by the
terrain, and he moves his squad as close to the
enemy as possible before opening fire. When there
is a covered route to the position, the squad leader
advances the squad as a unit, using a column or
diamond formation. He issues his fire order under
cover. The men creep or crawl to their firing po-
sitions and, when all are in position, they deliver
a surprise volume of accurate fire. Then, accord-
ing to the platoon's plan of attack, the squad moves
into the assault.
Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK
61. GENERAL Before the attack, a squad may halt
in a covered area selected by the platoon leader.

61
 :i : all~~~~~~~~~~~Qi:::::~

k w BOX~~~~:,:,T:,_
~
ts r ~ ~ AS
-S ANT

- 9 SQUAD LEADER,

Figure 19. When the point squad is fired on, the riflemen
immediately move into firing positions and re-
turn the fire.

62
This area usually is part of a company or battalion
assembly area. Immediately on arrival in this
area, the squad leader disperses his men. He
checks the condition of his squad to make sure
that the weapons are in working condition, that
each man has the required amount of ammunition
and rations, and that all special equipment is is-
sued. He uses the natural cover and concealment
to protect his squad from aerial and ground ob-
servation and enemy fire. Men use existing holes
or ditches and, in many situations, they dig slit
trenches.

62. PLATOON LEADER'S ORDER. The platoon leader

states whether the squad will be initially in the
assault or in support. If the squad is in the as-
sault, it is given a definite part of the platoon
objective to capture and a zone of action or a di-
rection of attack. The zone of action is given by
assigning the squad a particular part of the line
of departure. The time of attack or the signal for
the attack is stated. (See par. 126.)

63. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. While the squad

is in the assembly area or moving to the attack
position, the squad leader goes forward to receive
the platoon leader's attack order. After receiving
the attack order the squad leader makes his re-
connaissance, which often is an observation made
from the point where he receives the attack order.
He studies the terrain-paying particular atten-
tion to his route to the line of departure, positions
for his automatic rifle, and known or possible

63
enemy positions. During this reconnaissance he
plans his attack-deciding upon the formation, the
specific route to the objective, and actions required
to accomplish his mission.

64. METHOD OF ATTACK. a. In general, attacks by

rifle units consist of two successive phases: first,
the advance from the line of departure to the as-
sault position; and second, the advance from the
assault position to the objective.
(1) The line of departure is the line from
which the attack starts. It may be the
line along which the squad is in contact
with the enemy or the line held by other
friendly troops. Physically, it may be a
road, a stream, the crest of a hill, the
edge of a woods, or a similar terrain
feature. The squad crosses the line of
departure as a part of the platoon. (See
par. 177.)
(2) The objective is a terrain feature which
usually is part of the platoon objective.
It may be a portion of a hill, woods, or
village. The distance from the line of
departure to the objective may vary from
300 or 400 yards to 1,000 yards.
(3) The assault position is located between
the line of departure and the objective.
At this position, many of the supporting
fires (direct and indirect) which cover
the forward movement of the squad are
lifted, and the squad uses its own maxi-

64
 mum fire power for the final assault of
the enemy position. The distance from
the assault position to the objective va-
ries from 100 to 150 yards, depending on
how close the squad can move to its own
supporting fires without suffering cas-
ualties from these fires. The assault po-
sition may be in front of or to the flank
(rarely to the rear) of the objective. The
determining factors are the enemy dis-
position and the location of covered and
concealed routes of approach in the vi-
cinity of the objective. There is no de-
lay or hesitation at the assault position.
The timing of the lifting of supporting
fires is coordinated closely by higher com-
manders with the movement of the as-
sault echelon; this permits the uninter-
rupted movement through the assault
position. (See pars. 71 and 72.)
b. Squad attack as part of the platoon. The rifle
squad most often attacks as a part of the platoon
which attacks frontally as an interior unit. Under
these conditions, the squad moves forward in the
platoon formation. The advance consists of a rapid
movement under the cover of heavy supporting
fires to the assault position where the squad de-
ploys as skirmishers for the assault. When the
platoon advances with one platoon element cover-
ing by fire the movement of another platoon ele-
ment, the rifle squad may attack frontally or it
may form all or part of the platoon's maneuvering
element. If the squad attacks frontally, it advances

65
 by fire and maneuver as a unit to cover the for-
ward movement of the remainder of the platoon.
Whenever possible, the squad advances to the as-
sault position itself where it joins in the assault.
If the squad is used as part or all of the maneuver-
ing element of the platoon, it maneuvers as a unit
under covering fires of other elements. The squad
then uses any available covered route to the as-
sault position, preferable at the flank or rear of
the objective. (See par. 125.)
c. Squad attack on an independent mission. The squad
may attack frontally by fire and maneuver when
on an independent mission; for example, a com-
bat patrol or the point of an advance guard. If
the terrain permits, part of the'squad executes a
frontal attack to hold the enemy in position and
neutralizes his fires while the remainder of the
squad advances by a covered route to a position
where it assaults the enemy's flank or rear. How-
ever, since the rifle squad seldom fights at maxi-
mum strength, this method rarely is used because
reduced strength in the squad makes ineffective
either or both the frontal attack element and the
maneuver element.

65. POSITION AND DUTIES OF THE SQUAD LEADER.

a. During the attack, the primary duty of the squad
leader is to direct his squad in advancing and
placing effective fire on the enemy. To do this, he
makes the maximum use of his automatic rifle
team, thus supporting the advance of other men
of the squad. He enforces fire discipline, taking
a position from which he best can control his men

66
and observe the effect of their fire. In selecting
his position, he considers the need for maintaining
contact with the platoon leader. At times, because
of battle noise and confusion, he moves from man
to man, giving instructions. He fires only in an
emergency or when he considers that his fire power
or example outweighs the need for close control
of his squad.
b. When the squad leader personally cannot
maintain effective control over the fire of the
squad as a whole, he may retain control over a
part and temporarily give control of the remainder
to the assistant squad leader. The squad leader
also-
(1) Directs the fire of his squad to positions
where enemy troops are known or be-
lieved to be located.
(2) Looks ahead for new firing positions for
his squad, and he is constantly on the
alert to advance his squad toward the
enemy.
(3) Seeks a position for his automatic rifle-
man to fire on any target blocking the
squad's advance; this position should
permit automatic rifle fire across the en-
tire front, where practicable.
(4) Maintains contact with the platoon leader
or assigns this duty to the assistant squad
leader, and he keeps the men of his squad
informed of the situation of adjacent and
supporting units.
(5) Maintains dispersion, yet prevents his
men from scattering beyond control. He

67
 prevents several men from bunching be-
hind cover suitable for only one man;
isolated trees, stumps, bushes, or other
well-defined objects are avoided.
(6) Observes units on his flanks and makes a
prompt report to the platoon leader when-
ever wide gaps occur (see fig. 20).
(7) Attacks important or dangerous targets
without orders, when necessary.
(8) Resists, by fire, sudden attacks from the
flanks. In the event of an enemy tank
attack, he uses antitank and white phos-
phorous grenades to disable the tanks.
(9) Joins the nearest troops, if his squad is
separated from the platoon, and takes
orders from the leader of these troops.
At the first favorable opportunity, he re-
joins his platoon.

66. POSITION AND DUTIES OF ASSISTANT SQUAD

LEADER. The assistant squad leader's position is
not fixed; he takes the position where he best can
assist the squad leader. He may be ordered to place
the automatic rifle team in position and control its
fire. He assists in enforcing fire discipline, super-
vising ammunition supply, and maintaining con-
tact with the platoon leader. He replaces the squad
leader in the squad leader's absence.

67. DUTIES OF SQUAD MEMBERS. a. The automatic

rifleman and his assistant function as a team. The
automatic rifleman selects the exact position where
he best can cover the target. The team is alert for

68
 FAM

~F
~nnlltid li IL · tsrl2~4

6
Y X. 0 II a

.j
x0
J< L w

69
surprise targets, particularly automatic weapons.
It maintains eye contact with the squad leader or
his assistant to fire at new targets rapidly. (See
fig. 21.)
b. The riflemen move forward in the attack, as
ordered by the squad leader, and remain alert for
instructions. They pass on instructions from the
squad leader to other riflemen. When some men of
the squad are advancing, the remaining men cover
them by fire.

68. ORDERS. The squad leader gives his attack or-

der to all men of his squad. When his men can-
not see their route of advance before the attack
starts, the squad leader supplements his order
with a sketch showing the important terrain fea-
tures. Orders are clear and definite so that all men
in the squad understand the squad's mission and
the plan for accomplishing the mission. The squad
leader's order includes-
a. Information of the enemy and friendly forces,
including the location and proposed action of
adjacent squads.
b. Mission of the squad and the plan for accom-
plishing it.
c. Duties of squad members to include instruc-
tions for the reorganization on the objective.
d. Administrative details, including ammunition
supply and the location of the battalion aid station.
e. Prearranged signals.
f. Location of squad and platoon leaders.

70
 "
%--=~iI I'j

71
 Section IV. ATTACK

69. MOVEMENT ACROSS THE LINE OF DEPARTURE.

The squad, as a part of the platoon, moves from
the attack position to the line of departure. Be-
fore leaving the attack position, the squad leader
checks to see that each man is in his assigned place
and ready to move forward at the prescribed time.
On a signal, the squad crosses the line of de-
parture in an appropriate formation (par. 56),
and it does not deploy further until it is necessary
to fire on the enemy. (See fig. 22.)

70. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. After crossing

the line of departure, the squad moves to the as-
sault position as rapidly as the situation permits.
Unnecessary halts are avoided since the longer the
squad is exposed to enemy fires the more casual-
ties it is likely to receive. The squad advances in
a formation which allows speed and control under
conditions of terrain and enemy fires.
a. Maximum use of supporting fires. When attacking
as a part of a larger force, the squad is supported
by the heavy fires of higher units. These fires, in-
cluding smoke, tend to neutralize the enemy, and
they let the assault elements move rapidly to the
assault position. The neutralization is most effec-
tive during the initial stages of the attack. By
using these fires, the squad often can advance by
a quick forward movement to the assault position
with few, if any, casualties. Conversely, halts or
even hesitation give the enemy time to recover
from the shock of the fires and allow him to bring

72
THERE'S THE -D

E ATTACK MAY BE~WE AH ACK ATE

LET'S GOI - 0630!

E BE LAUNCHTED
THMASILY
ATTACK IS
A PRFEATURNGE
TERRAION

ATTACK PROM MARKS OUT

S QUAD
LEAE _ DEPARTSUe'

USED AS A LINE (AREAI OF

Figure 22. ]Alovem.e7!t across the line of d(lep(arit7re.

73
down defensive fires, thus increasing the prob-
ability of casualties.
b.Use of cover and concealment. During movement
from the line of departure to the assault position,
the squad usually is limited to a route prescribed
by the platoon leader. However, most terrain has
some irregularities which provide cover from
enemy fire and growths which give some conceal-
ment from enemy observation. Even in open ter-
rain, the well-trained rifleman can locate and use
limited cover such as that furnished by slight de-
pressions or rises. By using the available cover
and concealment, the squad obtains some protec-
tion,from hostile fire.
c. Hostile fire.
(1) Mortar and artillery concentrations and
long-range machine gun fires often can
be bypassed. Concentrations at times are
so small that the squad can pass quickly
to either side without too much turning
away from its prescribed route of ad-
vance. Long-range machine gun fire
often can be bypassed by using folds of
the ground after making a quick study
of the fire pattern, particularly when the
enemy's observation is obscured by haze,
fog, dust, or smoke.
(2) In some situations, enemy fire is received
which cannot be neutralized by small
arms, and it prevents the squad from ad,
vancing by its own fire. Often this enemy
fire cannot be bypassed. Under these con-
ditions and when the effectiveness of

74
 the enemy's fire would result in excessive
casualties, the squad halts under cover
until supporting fires or the action of
adjacent units permit the advance to be
resumed. However, the squad leader does
not halt when receiving light indirect or
long-range direct fires. To accomplish his
mission at the least possible cost in lives,
he quickly moves his squad forward
through the fire-swept area. He bears
in mind that usually a rapid movement
through such fire costs far less in casual-
ties than does indecision and useless
halting.
d. Fire and maneuver.
(1) At times, the squad receives short-range
direct fires from the enemy before it
reaches the assault position. When re-
ceiving effective small-arms fire, all men
of the squad instantly saturate the
enemy with rifle and automatic rifle fire.
When the enemy is within range, rifle
grenades are effective in destroying,
blinding, or otherwise neutralizing his
gun crews. The squad's fire power often
beats down the enemy element which dis-
closes its position.
(2) When the immediate application of the
squad's maximum fire power fails to de-
stroy the enemy, the squad advances by
fire and maneuver. The squad leader first
establishes fire superiority. Fire supe-
riority is gained and maintained by keep-

853696 0-49-- 75
 ing the enemy under heavy and accurate
fire so that his fire is ineffective. Until
supporting weapons or other units main-
tain fire superiority without assistance
from the squad, enough men of the squad
fire to maintain fire superiority. Here
the automatic rifle can do much to pro-
duce the desired effect. Meanwhile, other
men of the squad move forward, take up
firing positions closer to the enemy, and
they cover by fire the forward movement
of the remaining men. When the squad
leader advances with additional men, he
gives the remaining men to the assistant
squad leader. The assistant squad leader
moves those men on the squad leader's
orders. By this combination of fire and
maneuver, the squad advances to the as-
sault position. (See fig. 23.)
e. Taking advantage of enemy's distraction. The squad
leader looks for opportunities of taking advantage
of any distraction of the enemy by.a friendly unit.
Frequently, such distraction results from success
by an adjacent friendly unit. At other times, after
an enemy element has stopped the squad, it turns
its attention and fire toward others of friendly
troops. In either case, the leader of the halted
squad takes advantage of the enemy's preoccupa-
tion to resume his advance energetically.

71. ASSAULT. a. The final phase of an attack is

the assault. In preparation for the assault, the
squad works its way up to the objective by keep-

76
 I

Figure 2t. The squad attacks by 'use of fi're and mwneurver.

77
ing as close as possible to the supporting fires,
taking maximum advantage of the shock effect of
these fires on the enemy (fig. 24). When the
men reach the assault position (par. 64) and the
supporting fires are lifted, they start the assault
and close rapidly, delivering assault fire on the
objective until it is captured.
b. The squad is deployed as skirmishers. The
riflemen and the automatic rifle team take up the
fire. The assistant automatic rifleman does not
fire but assists the automatic rifleman. The squad
leader and assistant squad leader seldom fire but
take positions several paces in rear of the squad
to enforce the continuity of fires and-to control the
alinement of the men.

72. ASSAULT FIRE. a. Assault fire is the violent and

heavy fire by assault elements as they close on
the enemy at close range. The men fire from the
hip or shoulder, walking forward steadily and
rapidly as the terrain permits. Each man fires at
least one shot every two or three paces. He holds
his fire in the general direction of his advance,
shooting at every little rise in the ground, bush,
tree, or point which possibly might conceal an
enemy. (See fig. 25.)
b. Assault fire is characterized by violence and
volume rather than by accuracy. Its purpose is
not only to kill and wound the enemy but also to
terrify and demoralize him. It keeps the enemy
deep in his hole where the shock effect of the
supporting fires put him-hugging the ground

78
 Siii

;
:::::::,
iiiL NllxBF
Y

a8 g
liiiiii

n .·
iil
:iiXn B

iii
:r:::,
.s
ct,
Li

j3jl

''''!

t iia lil

79
 ?i -i

'A· i a'4' ! ~>?t1, ,

1'svX a 7

80

80
with his weapon idle-or it forces him into a hur-
ried and disorderly retreat.
c. The squad does not stop on the near edge of
the objective but drives rapidly to the far edge
or to the squad's part of the objective. The enemy
is given no time to recover from the shock of the
assault. In addition to rifle fires, hand and rifle
grenades are used to blind and destroy stubborn
pockets of resistance in the direct path of the
advance.

73. REORGANIZATION. As soon as the hostile po-

sition is captured, the men move into position to
repel an enemy counterattack. The squad defends
its assigned part of the platoon objective. When
the position is occupied to repel a counterattack,
the squad leader checks his squad for casualties,
the condition of weapons, and the status of am-
munition. He redesignates key men, redistributes
ammunition, and reports his strength and require-
ments for weapons and ammunition. Reconnais-
sance is continued and, after receiving instructions
from the platoon leader, the squad leader issues
orders for continuing the attack.
74. FLANK PATROL. Throughout the various at-
tack situations, a rifle squad may be sent out as a
flank patrol. Such a patrol is given a specific mis-
sion to accomplish and, on completion of the mis-
sion, it rejoins its unit.

75. CONNECTING GROUP. A connecting group is

any group used to maintain contact between
forces. It moves and operates so that it knows the

81
location of the near flank of the unit with which
it is maintaining contact. The primary mission
of a connecting group is to tell the parent com-
mander the location and situation of the unit with
which it maintains contact. As secondary mis-
sions, it tells the commander of the contacted unit
of the parent unit's situation and covers gaps be-
tween units by resisting any hostile penetration.
If the adjacent unit falls behind, an immediate
report is made to the parent commander (see fig.
26). The connecting group may consist of small
patrols to cover a wide interval and maintain con-
tact with both units. If contact with the adjacent
unit is lost, the fact is reported at once and, un-
less ordered to return, the connecting group fires
only for self-protection or to give warning of a
flank attack.

76. SUPPORT SQUAD. a. Before the attack, the

squad leader of a support squad tells his men the
situation and the proposed action of the platoon.
He advances his squad on order of the platoon
leader or the platoon sergeant, keeping his squad
under cover and preventing it from merging with
the assault squads. During the attack, the squad
leader keeps abreast of the situation and makes
tentative plans for the probable use of his squad
(see fig. 27).
b. If ordered to attack the flank of a definitely
located hostile position, the squad leader selects an
assault position for the attack and the best cov-
ered route of approach to it. He then moves the
squad to the position and attacks by opening sur-

82
 00

.0

J~~~~~~~~~~~
F~~~~
00 . .L~~~~~~~~~~.

:r IL

83o
83
 SQUAD FORWARD /R
THROUGH THOSE WOODS
ON THE RIGHT

SUPPORT SQUAD

Figure 27. The leader of the support squad makes tentative

plans for the probable use of his squad.

84
prise fire and assaulting from an unexpected di-
rection. (See fig. 28.)
c. When directed to reinforce the assault squads,
the support squad leader shows his squad the po-
sitions of the enemy and the assault squads. He
points out the part of the line to be reinforced,
then moves his squad there in a formation to fit
the terrain and the enemy fire.

Section V. DEFENSE

77. GENERAL. The rifle squad is used as a part of

the rifle platoon in the organization and defense
of the platoon defense area. The platoon leader
coordinates the use of the rifle squad with adjacent
squads within and"adjacent to the platoon defense
area and also with supporting weapons. The pla-
toon defense order assigns the exact squad areas
to be organized, the general trace of the line to be
occupied, specific sectors of fire, and the general
location and principal direction of fire for the au-
tomatic rifles of each squad.

78. MISSION. The mission of the rifle squad as a

part of a front-line platoon is to defend its as-
signed part of the platoon defense area by fire and
by close combat. The rifle squad, with the support
of other fires, stops the enemy by fire in front of
the main line of resistance and repels him by close
combat if he reaches it. Squad elements protect'
supporting weapons within the platoon defense
area and exchange mutual fire support with ad-
jacent units. When necessary, the squad (or ele-

85
 lil

' ~. d'
W
11:, :I::,
U'Ic
4
.1'ii I I· 0

N~ -,

1/ 1

/ ~~~
A

,, :~·/

\ /· ~

./////i%

86
ments of it) moves to supplementary positions to
protect the flanks or rear of the platoon defense
area.

79. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. Primary

and alternate position areas for the automatic
rifleman are selected by the platoon leader. A po-
sition area for the automatic rifleman is selected
to cover the major part of the squad sector of fire
or a specific approach. Supplementary positions
are selected when the flanks and rear of the de-
fense area cannot be protected from primary or
alternate positions. Exact positions for the auto-
matic rifleman are selected by the squad leader.
b. Positions for the riflemen are selected so that
adjacent individual sectors of fire overlap and
use the best available fields of fire. The interval
between fox holes may be from 5 to 20 yards. In
open terrain, single fox holes may be as much as
10 yards apart and double fox holes, as much as
20 yards apart. In close terrain, the interval may
be reduced to 5 yards between single fox holes and
10 yards between double fox holes. The choice be-
tween single or double fox holes is limited by
such factors as morale, fields of fire, and unit
strength. The double fox hole provides continual
observation and gives increased individual morale
and, therefore, it is used whenever conditions per-
mit. The squad leader selects primary individual
positions so that each man can cover the desired
sector of fire. Supplementary positions to protect
the flanks and rear are designated if required.
(See fig. 29.)

87
80. SQUAD DEFENSE ORDER. On receiving the pla-
toon defense order, the squad leader makes a re-

SUPPLEMENTARY POSITIONS

W AR AND ASSISTANT
De ALTERNATE POSITION FOR AR
0 ASSISTANT SQUAD LEADER AND
ONE RIFLEMAN

C- SINGLE FOXHOLE FOR RIFLEMAN

mTDOUBLE FOXHOLE FOR TWO RIFLEMEN

SQUAD LEADER

Figure 29. Rifle squad defense area.

connaissance of his assigned area and notes the

location of adjacent squads with which he co-
ordinates and any supporting weapons which he

88
protects. He then issues his order to the squad.
When practicable, the squad defense order is given
on the position to be organized. The defense order
follows the outline indicated for the squad attack
order (par. 68) with additional instructions to
include-
a. Primary position and sector of fire for each
man of the squad.
b. Alternate positions and principal direction
of fire for the automatic rifleman.
c. Organization of the ground, including the
type of emplacements (app. V), other construc-
tions, and work priority.

81. ORGANIZATION OF THE POSITION. After is-

suing the squad defense order, the squad leader
moves his men directly to their firing positions.
The automatic rifle is mounted temporarily to
cover its assigned sector, and a sentinel is posted.
Before construction work is started, the squad
leader has each man lie down at the place his fox
hole will be dug, and has him personally verify
the observation and sector of fire permitted by
each position. The squad leader verifies that sec-
tors of fire are overlapping within and on the
flanks of the squad. Work then is started on the
position, and the squad leaders' responsibilities
during. the preparation of the position include-
a. Supervising the clearing of fields of fire.
b. Locating the initial ammunition supply and
selecting supply routes.
c. Preparing range cards to include estimated
ranges to important landmarks.

89
 d. Selecting and preparing a position where he
can observe his assigned frontage, controlling his
squad, and maintaining contact with the platoon
leader.
e. Selecting and supervising the preparation of
alternate and supplementary positions.
f. Inspecting cover and concealment of men and
weapons to check closely that the position is con-
cealed from enemy ground and air observation.
g. Preparing a sketch in duplicate of the squad's
sector of fire, showing prominent terrain features
and the estimated ranges to them. He gives one
sketch to the platoon leader and keeps a copy for
himself.

82. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. Initial fires of

weapons used within the squad area are withheld
until the enemy comes within effective rifle range
(maximum 500 yards) or when the enemy reaches
a designated terrain feature. This gives maximum
surprise and avoids the premature disclosure of
the battle position. During hostile preparatory
fires, the squad takes cover in its prepared po-
sitions. As soon as these fires lift, the men take
firing positions to meet the hostile attack.
b. During the defense, the squad leader's pri-
mary duty is to control the fires of his squad. Only
in the close-in defense of the squad does he take
part in the fire fight. The assistant squad leader
fights as a rifleman and as a grenadier, and he
assists in the control of the squad.
c. Squad members open fire upon the approach-
ing enemy on command of the squad leader as

90
given in the platoon leader's order or when the
enemy reaches a predetermined line. As the
enemy approaches the position, the rate of fire is
increased to inflict maximum casualties and to
stop the hostile attack before it reaches the po-
sition. If the enemy assaults and enters the po-
sition, he is driven out by fire, grenades, and the
bayonet. The success of the defense depends on
each squad defending its assigned area. A stub-
born defense in place by a front-line squad breaks
up enemy attack formations and makes him vul-
nerable to counterattack. The squad withdraws
only on orders of a higher commander.
d. When the attacking force contains tanks as
well as infantry, the primary targets for all squad
weapons (except grenade launchers) are hostile
foot troops and exposed men on the tanks. The
rifle grenadiers fire at tanks which threaten the
squad position. If the enemy infantry does not
furnish a target, rifle fire is used against open
turrets and vision slits of attacking tanks. Men
continue firing unless forced to take cover to pro-
tect themselves and their weapons from the fire
and crushing action of the tanks. Men return to
their firing positions as soon as the tanks pass, and
they fire on approaching foot troops. Maximum
effort is made to separate the foot elements from
the tanks.

83. SECURITY. In all types of defensive situations,

security is maintained. The rifle squad, as any
other unit, is responsible for its own local security.
Measures to closely check and coordinate the se-

853696 0-49-7 ~~~~~~

curity for the battle position are given by higher
commanders. These measures consist of all or
part of a system of sentinels or listening posts, out-
guards, patrols, supports, and reserves-depend-
ing on the force for which security is furnished.
(See sec. V, ch. 8.) The rifle squad may be the
security force itself or it may be a part of a larger
security force. In either case, the squad may be
responsible for one or more of t e following: a
sentinel post, a listening post, an outguard, and
visiting patrols.
a. A sentinel post consists of one or two men
and is established to give early warning of an
enemy infantry, tank, or air attack. These posts
may be inside or outside of an organized position.
They furnish the maximum observation over hos-
tile approaches and have cover, concealment, and
good routes of withdrawal. Sentinels do not en-
gage in close combat. Means of communication are
established to alert troops for an enemy attack.
For its own local security a squad has a sentinel
post at all times.
b. A listening post normally consists of two to
four men, and it functions when visibility is
limited in order to give the early warning of a
hostile attack. Listening posts are located to cover
favorable enemy approaches. Selected positions
furnish cover, concealment, and good routes of
withdrawal. Listening post men are relieved often
to maintain an alert warning system and, if fre-
quent relief is impracticable, double sentries oc-
cupy the post. Both remain awake to prevent a
surprise.

92
 c. An outguard is a small group posted by an
outpost to delay and disorganize the enemy and
give warning of his approach. An outguard may
vary in size from a half squad to a platoon with
supporting weapons. Outguards organize defense
areas permitting observation and long fields of
fire. Each outguard organizes its position on a
normal frontage so as not to sacrifice control. Fox
holes are dug, the position is camouflaged, and
routes of withdrawal are selected. Security for the
outguard is obtained through the use of sentinel
posts, listening posts, and patrols. As soon as de-
sirable targets appear, outguards inflict maximum
losses on the enemy by long-range fire. Normally,
outguards withdraw before fighting in close com-
bat, on orders of the outpost commander or ac-
cording to prearranged plans.
d. Visiting patrols consist of two or three men,
and they cover the intervals and maintain contact
between stationary security elemnents. Visiting
patrols operate from right to left and at irregular
times and by different routes to prevent the enemy
from discovering the patrol system.

93
 CHAPTER 4

WEAPONS SQUAD

Section I. GENERAL

84. ORGANIZATION. The weapons squad consists

of a squad leader, a light machine gun team, and
a rocket launcher team. Each team consists of a
gunner, an assistant gunner, and two ammunition
bearers.

85. DUTIES OF LEADERS. a.. The weapons squad

leader is responsible for the discipline, training,
control, and conduct of his squad. He uses his
squad as directed by the platoon leader. He selects
and assigns exact locations for the weapons within
the general area assigned by the platoon leader.
He regulates the displacement of weapons, con-
trols the expenditure of ammunition, and super-
vises the supply of ammunition by the ammunition
bearers. Whenever the ammunition bearers can-
not maintain an adequate ammunition supply, the
squad leader requests assistance from the platoon
leader. In the attack, the light machine gun team
and the rocket launcher team often operate at
some distance from each other. When these units
are separated, the light machine gun team usually
is controlled by the squad leader. The rocket
launcher team is controlled by the leader of that
element of the rifle platoon with which it operates.
b. Team leaders move their teams to selected lo-
cations, prepare and occupy firing positions,
camouflage, observe and adjust fire, and use am-
munition bearers to supply ammunition. Each
team leader is also the gunner.
c. Squad and team leaders use voice and visual
signals to control their units.

86. CONDUCT OF FIRE. a. The light machine gun

team is assigned a definite target or a sector of tire.
The squad leader determines the metnod of firing
at a definite target, designates the target, speci-
fies the rate of fire, and gives the command or
signal for opening fire. He establishes contact
with the rifle squad leaders to obtain information
of their situation and plans.
b. The rocket launcher team is assigned a defi-
nite target or a sector of fire, or it covers a specific
avenue of approach. The squad leader (or the
leader of the rifle unit with which the team op-
erates) designates the targets and gives the com-
mand or signal for opening fire. In the attack the
team leader is alert to destroy enemy machine
guns which may open short-range surprise fire on
the advancing riflemen.

87. RANGE ESTIMATION. Men of the light machine

gun and rocket launcher teams are trained in range
estimation. Range estimations for the light ma-
chine gun may be verified by observing the strike
of tlhe bullets or by using tracer ammunition.

95
Gunners make bold adjustments to compensate for
any initial errors in range estimation. The rocket
launcher team estimates leads for firing on moving
targets. Skill in range estimation allows accurate
surprise fire.

88. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. During the movement

phase, the company headquarters /4a-ton trucks
transport the weapons and ammunition of the
weapons squads. In the assembly area or attack
position, the light machine gun and rocket
launcher, with an initial ammunition supply, are
unloaded from the vehicle. Ammunition bearers
hand carry supplies from a company ammunition
supply point to the firing positions. In many in-
stances, the ammunition is obtained from a 1/4 -ton
truck which is sent to the vicinity of the firing
position

89. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraft se-

curity measures, see paragraph 12.

90. ANTITANK DEFENSE. The squad leader uses the

rocket launcher team to cover avenues of tank ap-
proach. This weapon is sited so that short-range
flanking fire can be delivered against enemy tanks
using the approach. (Antitank defense for indi-
viduals is described in par. 13.)

Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

91. ROUTE AND TACTICAL COLUMN. In route col-

umn and tactical column, the squad moves in the

96
platoon formation as directed by the platoon
leader.

92. APPROACH MARCH. During the approach

march, the weapons squad is located where it rap-
idly can give close support fire when contact is
made. Crew-served weapons and ammunition may
be hand carried or they may be transported by
weapons carrier. When conditions call for long-
distance hand carry and for an expected great ex-
penditure of ammunition, the weapons squad tem-
porarily may be reinforced with riflemen to carry
extra ammunition. If weapons and ammunition
are transported on a carrier, they are readily avail-
able. Upon contact, the light machine gun team
may reinforce the fires of the rifle squad which
makes contact, or it may assist the maneuver of
the remainder of the platoon. The rocket launcher
team, in view of the launcher's limited range, nor-
mally joins that part of the platoon which is the
maneuver element. However, the rocket launcher
team is sent immediately to any sector within the
platoon zone of action which is threatened with a
tank attack.

Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

93. GENERAL. Before the attack, the weapons

squad may be directed to halt in a covered area
selected by the platoon leader. This area usually
is a part of the company or battalion assembly
area. Immediately on arrival in this area, the
squad leader disperses his-men in the area allotted

97
to him by the platoon leader. Normally, the pla-
toon leader directs the squad to secure the light
machine gun and rocket launcher and an initial
supply of ammunition from a company weapons
carrier. The squad leader checks the condition of
his squad to determine that the weapons and am-
munition are in proper condition, that each man
has the proper amount of ammunition and rations,
and that special equipment is issued. Existing
cover and concealment are used to protect the
squad from aerial and ground observation and fire.
Men use holes, ditches, or slit trenches. When an
enemy threat exists, the squad may be ordered to
occupy positions to protect the assembly area. On
this mission, the weapons are placed to cover ave-
nues of approach. While the squad is in the as-
sembly area or is en route to the attack position,
the weapons squad leader moves forward with the
rifle squad leaders to receive the platoon leader's
attack order.

94. PLATOON LEADER'S ORDER. The platoon lead-

er's decision as to the use of the weapons squad is
given in the platoon attack order. The order states
the mission, initial position areas, targets or sec-
tors of fire, the time of opening fire, and the or-
ganization. It may state the conditions for dis-
placement and ammunition supply.

95. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. On receiving the

platoon' leader's attack order, the squad leader
makes his reconnaissance. Often this is an obser-
vation made from the point where he receives the

98
attack order. He studies the terrain, paying par-
ticular attention to the exact positions for weap-
ons, routes to firing positions, and routes for dis-
placement. Based on the platoon leader's order and
the terrain study made while on reconnaissance,
the squad leader formulates his attack order.

96. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. The light machine

gun team is used by the platoon leader to furnish
close support for the platoon. It usually joins the
element which makes a frontal attack. Its fires
usually are under the direct control of the weapons
squad leader. The team displaces as the need arises
to continue close support. It has the following
missions:
(1) Supports by fire the units of the platoon
or units of the adjacent platoon. To fur-
nish this support, the team may be direct-
ed to follow a certain rifle element, or it
may follow a general route along a flank
of the platoon-occupying successive'fir-
ing positions.
(2) Protects the platoon flanks.
(3) Covers the platoon reorganization.
(4) Breaks up hostile counterattacks.
b. The rocket launcher team's primary mission
is to destroy enemy tanks. If there is no tank
threat, the rocket launcher team assists the ad-
vance of the rifle elements. Because of the rocket
launcher's short range, the team usually moves
with a maneuvering element; this also permits the
antitank weapon to arrive early on the objective.
When enemy tanks appear, the team reverts to its

99
antitank role, regardless of previously assigned
targets or missions.

97. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITION. a. The pla-

toon leader assigns a general position area and the
squad leader selects the exact primary and alter-
nate firing positions. (See par. 7.) Desirable char-
acteristics of firing positions are:
(1) Affords observation of the assigned tar-
gets or assigned sector of fire.
(2) Affords observation of friendly troops.
(3) Permits direct fire without interference
from friendly troops, trees, or other ob-
stacles.
(4) Gives maximum protection against hos-
tile observation and fire.
(5) Uses tank obstacles such as ditches, large
trees, and boulders.
(6) Permits covered routes for occupation
and supply.
b. The light machine gun is placed in partial
defilade. The squad leader controls the fire by
voice or signal. Positions near other automatic
weapons are avoided.
c. The rocket launcher firing site lets the gun-
ner fire prone at stationary targets and sitting or
standing at moving targets. Clearance to the rear
is essential.

98. TARGETS. a. Appropriate targets for the light

nmachine gun are crew-served weapons, small
groups of enemy, pillbox embrasures, lightly ar-
mored vehicles, and tank vision slits. Enemy

100
whose general location is known may be engaged
with short burst of light machine gun fire. In
built-up areas, light machine guns are used against
definitely located targets in buildings.
b. The primary target for the rocket launcher is
an enemy tank. High explosive, antitank, and
white phosphorous rockets may be used against
such targets as crew-served weapons, pillbox em-
brasures, and small enemy groups. In fighting
within built-up areas, targets include enemy per-
sonnel and weapons in buildings. The launcher
also may be used against buildings to blast an
opening for the entrance of assaulting infantry.

99. ORDERS. The squad leader gives his attack or-

der to his men, and it covers the following items:
a. Information of the enemy.
b. Information of friendly troops, including the
expected action of the leading rifle platoon and the
missions and positions of supporting weapons.
c. Missions of each team to include initial firing
positions and the routes to them or the unit to be
followed; initial targets or sectors of fire; time of
opening fire; subsequent action; and instructions
for reorganization of the objective.
d. Administrative instructions, including the
supply of ammunition and the location of the bat-
talion aid station.
e. Communication instructions, including pre-
arranged signals and the location of squad and pla-
toon leaders.

101
 Section IV. ATTACK

100. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS. a. The

light machine gun team moves from the attack
position to its firing position under the control of
the squad leader. In moving the gun into its firing
position, maximum advantage is taken of avail-
able cover and concealment to avoid being discov-
ered by the enemy. If available, a covered position
immediately in rear of the firing position is occu-
pied first. The team moves from the covered po-
sition to the firing position just before opening fire.
Ammunition bearers remain in the covered posi-
tion when they are not supplying ammunition.
b. The rocket launcher team normally does not
occupy a firing position at the start of the attack.
It accompanies the assault team and is used as di-
rected by the platoon leader.

101. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK. a.

The light machine gun team supports the advance
of the platoon rifle elements. The weapons squad
leader keeps continuous observation on the advanc-
ing riflemen as well as on the objective, so that the
fire of the team does not endanger friendly troops.
He looks for positions from which the team may
deliver oblique, flanking, or enfilade fire on enemy
groups holding up the advance of his platoon or
adjacent units.
b. The rocket launcher team fires at suitable tar-
gets holding up the advance of the rifle elements
when the threat of enemy tank attack is not pres-
ent. If there is a threat of an enemy tank attack,

102
the rocket launcher team occupies positions cover-
ing avenues of tank approach (see fig. 30).

102. DISPLACEMENT. When the progress of the at-

tack makes it impossible for the teams to execute
their missions from initial positions, they displace
to new firing positions. The teams move aggres-
sively, closely behind or with the element of the
rifle platoon with which they operate. Before dis-
placement, the squad or team leader looks for new
positions, and selects them by a visual or a physi-
cal reconnaissance. In m6ving to the new firing
positions, the teams use the available cover, con-
cealment, and defilade.

103. REORGANIZATION. As soon as a hostile po-

sition is captured or the attack is halted, the squad
leader moves the weapons into firing positions
which protect the platoon against a counterattack
during the reorganization. Instructions for reor-
ganization are given in the squad leader's attack
order. When positions are occupied to repel a pos-
sible counterattack, the squad leader checks his
squad for casualties, the condition of weapons, and
the status of ammunition. Strength, weapons, and
ammunition requirements are reported to the pla-
toon leader. The squad leader receives orders from
the platoon leader. Reconnaissance for positions to
support a continuation of the attack is started
promptly, and orders for further use of the squad
are given by the platoon leader.

103
 10 .:!!i'l : ii Iiil::
:::::'

Off..
 Section V. DEFENSE

104. GENERAL. The weapons squad is used within

the rifle platoon area to assist in the defense of the
assigned platoon area. The platoon leader closely
checks that the squad weapons furnish the maxi-
mum protection to the platoon defense area and
coordinate with the over-all fire plans of the com-
pany and battalion.

105. MISSION. a. The light machine gun teams of

front-line rifle platoons are assigned missions by
the rifle platoon leader according to the battalion
fire plan in order to form a band of fire acrbss the
battalion front. They are used within the platoon
positions to protect the platoon areas, exchange
mutual supporting fires with adjacent units, and
deliver final protective fires. The light machine
gun teams of the support platoon and of the pla-
toons of the reserve company protect their platoon
defense areas, cover dangerous avenues of ap-
proach with the battle position, and support adja-
cent units.
b. The primary mission of the rocket launcher
team is to furnish close-in antitank protection for
the platoon. This is equally applicable whether the
rocket launcher is used in the front-line platoons,
support platoons, or platoons of the reserve com-
pany.

106. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. Positions

for the light machine gun and rocket launcher are
selected by the platoon leader before the detailed

105
organization of the platoon position. Positions se-
lected may be within a rifle squad defense area, be-
tween rifle squad defense areas, or on the flank of
the rifle platoon. Supplementary positions to pro-
tect the flanks and rear of the platoon are prepared
as required. (For additional information, see par.
97.)

107. SQUAD DEFENSE ORDER. On receiving the pla-

toon defense order, the squad leader makes a re-
connaissance of the position areas assigned to the
teams of his squad and notes the location of the
rifle squads and supporting weapons with which
he coordinates. He then issues his order to the
squad on the position to be organized when practi-
cable. The defense order follows the outline indi-
cated for the squad attack order (par. 99), and it
has the following additional instructions:
a. Final protective fires of the light machine
gun, to include the method of calling for these fires,
the location where signals can be given, and rates
and duration of fire.
b. Organization of the ground, including type
of emplacements (app. V), other constructions,
and work priority.

108. ORGANIZATION OF THE POSITION. After is-

suing the squad defense order, the squad leader
moves his two teams directly to their firing posi-
tions. Each weapon is located temporarily to cover
its assigned sector of fire. The squad leader per-
sonally checks the observation and sectors of fire
allowed by the selected positions and completes the

106
coordination with the rifle squads. Work then is
begun on the preparation of the positions. Re-
sponsibilities of the squad leader during the prep-
aration of positions include-
a. Check of the final protective line of the light
machine gun (see FM 23-55). The extent of the
line and the dead space is reported to the platoon
leader.
b. Supervision of the clearing of fields of fire.
c. Disposition of the initial ammunition supply
and selection of routes for supply.
d. Preparation of range cards for each firing
position.
e. Selection and preparation of his personal po-
sition, at a location where he can watch the pla-
toon leader for orders and control both teams of
his squad. When this cannot be done from one po-
sition, the platoon leader decides which team the
squad leader controls. The other team is com-
manded by the gunner and receives its orders di-
rectly from the platoon leader.
f. Selection and supervision of the preparation
of alternate and supplementary position.
g. Inspection of cover and concealment of men
and weapons.

109. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. During the hos-

tile preparatory bombardment of the position, the
men of the squad take cover in their prepared po-
sitions. As soon as the artillery fire or the air bom-
bardment lifts, men take firing positions to meet
the attack.
5.3696 0-49--8 107
 a. Light machine gun team,
(1) Initial fires of a light machine gun located
in a front-line platoon defense area are
coordinated with the rifle platoon fires.
As the enemy attack advances, the light
machine gun fires at suitable targets in
its sector of fire. Rates of fire are in-
creased as the enemy comes nearer the
position. Final protective fires are de-
livered on call.
(2) During periods of reduced visibility, the
gun is laid on its final protective line.
When final protective fires are called for,
only those guns open fire whose final pro-
tective lines protect the unit calling for
the fire. When visibility is good, the
squad leader or gunner determines the
rate and duration of fire on the final pro-
tective line. For conditions of reduced
visibility, the platoon order gives the rate
and the duration of fire. In the absence
of instructions, the usual rate is 150
rounds per minute for 2 minutes and then
75 rounds per minute until ordered to
cease firing. (See FM 23-55).
(3) Light machine guns of the support pla-
toon or of platoons of the reserve com-
pany are used to stop the enemy who
break through the main line of resist-
ance, to stop an enemy envelopment, or to
support a planned counterattack.
b. Rocket launcher team. The rocket launcher team
opens fire on hostile tanks when they come within

108
effective range. It continues to fire until forced to
take cover to protect itself from the crushing ac-
tion of the tank. The firing position is resumed
as soon as the tank passes, and the team then fires
at the rear of the tank. If there are no hostile
tanks, the rocket launcher team fires at crew-
served weapons and enemy groups. For maximum
fire effect and to prevent early disclosure of its
position, the rocket launcher opens fire only at
short range.

109
 CHAPTER 5

RIFLE PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL.

110. ORGANIZATION. The rifle platoon consists of

a platoon headquarters, three rifle squads, and one
weapons squad. The platoon headquarters includes
the platoon leader, platoon sergeant, assistant pla-
toon sergeant, two messengers, and an aid man
attached from the regimental medical company.

111. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PERSON-

NEL. a. The platoon leader is responsible for the
training, discipline, control, and tactical employ-
ment of his platoon. He develops responsibility
and leadership in his squad leaders by giving in-
structions through his chain of command.
b. The platoon sergeant is the second-in-com-
mand. He assists the platoon leader in controlling
all operations and takes a position where he best
can assist in that control. He takes command when
the leader is absent.
c. The assistant platoon sergeant enforces or-
ders concerning cover, concealment, and discipline.
He usually is in rear of the platoon where he ob-
serves the situation on the flanks and rear. He

110
supervises the ammunition supply and distribu-
tion.
d. Messengers maintain liaison between the
company commander and the platoon leader.
When the company prepares for action, one mes-
senger reports to the company commander and one
remains with the platoon leader.
e. The attached aid man provides first-aid treat-
ment for men of the platoon.

112. CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION. The pla-

toon leader controls his platoon by oral orders and
by arm-and-hand signals. Communication with
company headquarters is by radio, telephone, mes-
senger, or visual signals.

113. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Before combat, am-

munition is issued in the assembly area. During
combat, the platoon and its attachments draw am-
munition either from a company ammunition sup-
ply point or from a designated company vehicle.
The assistant platoon sergeant supervises ammuni-
tion replenishment.

114. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraft

security, see paragraph 12.

115. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Antitank defense for

men is covered in paragraph 13. Antitank weap-
ons of the platoon are used as noted in paragraphs
50 and 90.

111
 Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

116. GENERAL. During the advance in route or tac-

tical column, the rifle platoon moves as part of the
company. During foot marches, the usual forma-
tion for the platoon is a column of files on each side
of the road (march column formation, app. II).
This formation gives maximum speed and control.
It also is used to move the platoon from one loca-
tion to another in a combat area behind friendly
front lines. During the approach march, the rifle
platoon, or elements of it, may perform reconnais-
sance and security missions-for example, an ad-
vance party, a flank guard, or a march outpost.

117. ADVANCE PARTY. a. When the platoon is used

as an advance party (fig. 31), it is sent forward
from the support. (See par. 22.) The advance
party in turn sends forward a squad as the point.
The mission of the advance party is to secure the
uninterrupted forward movement of the support.
b. The advance party is disposed in a column of
squads, each squad in a column of two's with one
file on each side of the road, and there is a distance
of not more than 5 paces between men. The ad-
vance party commander usually marches at the
head of the advance party or between the point
and the advance party. He goes where he best can
observe the ground and direct the action. He is
responsible that the assigned route or direction of
march is followed. He usually is responsible for
the rate of march of the advance guard, and he
prescribes the distance at which the point is to

112
 POINT

15o_-250 /

< j.ICo ONNECTING FILE

E]£

WEAPONS SQUAD

LEGEND

ATTACHED AID MAN

PLATOON LEADER

PLATOON SERGEANT

ASSISTANT PLATOON
SERGEANT
/ MESSENGER

F'igure 31. Platooli as the advance party.

113
precede the advance party. In open country, this
varies between 150 and 250 yards. At night or
under conditions of poor visibility, distances are
reduced considerably. The advance party sends
forward connecting files to maintain contact with
the point. (See par. 53.)
c. Because of the small size and the mission of
the advance party, its flank security normally is
limited to visual reconnaissance. Distant danger-
ous localities on the flanks are reported to the sup-
port commander, who sends out the necessary flank
protection from the support.
d. When the column halts, the advance party
provides security to the front. It immediately
sends observers to nearby points, giving observa-
tion to the front and flanks.

118. FLANK GUARD. The platoon, acting as a flank

guard for a marching column, conforms in general
to the doctrine governing the use of a rifle squad
as a flank guard. (See par. 26.)

119. MARCH OUTPOST. The rifle platoon may es-

tablish the security for a marching column during
a temporary halt. It occupies critical terrain fea-
tures controlling the approaches to the route of
march. Its actions depend upon the duration of
the halt, the nearness of the enemy and likelihood
of early contact, and the terrain. The rifle platoon
leader receives specific instructions from the com-
pany commander.

120. COMBAT FORMATION. In the approach march,

114
after the initial contact is made or as it is being
made, the leading rifle platoon (advance party)
and other selected platoons deploy and use suitable
formations. These formations, which are used in
the attack as well as in the approach march, vary
with the terrain and enemy situation. The com-
pany commander ordinarily prescribes the initial
formation and allows the platoon leader to change
the formation as necessary. The usual formations
are the platoon column, vee, line, wedge, and eche-
lon (see app. II).
a. The platoon column is used to approach an
enemy position which is believed to be directly to
the front but not yet located. It normally is the
best formation for movement in woods, smoke, fog,
at night, and through defiles and along trails. It is
easy to control and is flexible; it provides some all-
around protection and permits the immediate ac-
tion toward the flanks.
b. The platoon vee is used when the enemy is be-
lieved to be directly to the front and his approxi-
mate strength and location are known. The bulk
of the firepower of the platoon can be directed to
the front. It provides security to both front and
flanks and favors maneuver and control.
c. The platoon line is used when the location and
strength of the enemy is known. It lets the pla-
toon deliver the greatest firepower to the front in
the shortest time. It is used primarily during the
assault phase of an attack. It also is used to rap-
idly cross an area exposed to mortar, artillery, or
long-range machine gun fire.
d The platoon wedge is used when little is

115
known of the enemy strength and disposition or
when the platoon is acting alone. It provides a
high degree of flexibility, gives all-around protec-
tion, and is easy to control.
e. The platoon echelon right (left) is used to
protect an open or exposed flank. It permits heavy
fire to the front and in the direction of the echelon.

121. ACTION WHEN CONTACT IS ESTABLISHED. a.

When the point meets enemy resistance which it is
unable to overcome, the advance party deploys and
attacks aggressively without hesitation or pro-
longed reconnaissance (see fig. 32). Maximum
effort is made to clear the way quickly for the re-
mainder of the column. The advance party leader
moves forward rapidly when the initial contact is
made and decides upon the best method of attack.
He may use the point squad for a frontal attack
and maneuver with the remainder of the platoon,
or he may make a direct frontal attack with the
platoon. The method of attack and the formation
used (par. 120) depends upon the terrain and en-
emy situation. When the resistance is overcome,
the march is resumed promptly. If the platoon is
deployed extensively, it may be replaced by another
platoon from the support.
b. If the advance party is unable to overcome
the enemy resistance, it makes maximum effort to
immobilize the enemy by fire and to locate his
flanks. Further action is taken according to in-
structions from the support commander.
c. Once contact is established, the support com-
mander may find it necessary to deploy laterally

116
C;Torh A o W i-

~
:: 0~~~~~~)@~
;Xt:::X:
:f:g: : S'
I- `izofgC

enemy resistance, the advance party imme-

diately deploys and attacks.

117
117
across the axis of advance to guard against a sur-
prise attack from the flank or definitely to locate
the enemy. In this case, the advance party platoon
or a rifle platoon from the support proper may be
assigned a zone of reconnaissance and successive
objectives within this zone. The width of the zone
depends upon the terrain and the observation.
When moving to successive objectives in a zone of
reconnaissance, the platoon leader often moves
ahead with a security squad to a specific terrain
feature. Having reconnoitered the terrain feature,
he signals the platoon forward, and then, with the
security squad, he moves on to another terrain
feature.

Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

122. GENERAL. Before the attack, the platoon may

halt in a covered area selected by the company
commander. This area usually is part of the com-
pany or battalion assembly area. While the pla-
toon is preparing for the attack, the platoon leader,
accompanied by the platoon sergeant and a messen-
ger, moves forward to receive the company attack
order. The assistant platoon sergeant supervises
the preparation of the platoon. (See pars. 61 and
93.)

123. COMPANY COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The com-

pany commander decides whether the platoon ini-
tially will be in the assault or in the support eche-
lon. If the platoon is in the assault echelon, it is
given a section of the line of departure or an area

118
from which to start its attack, a direction of at-
tack, and a terrain objective or a series of objec-
tives to capture. The width of the zone may be
shown by assigning a frontage between 100 and
250 yards. The platoon seldom is assigned bounda-
ries; thus, it uses covered routes in adjacent pla-
toon zones of action, provided this is coordinated
with the adjacent unit. The time of attack nor-
mally is given in the company order.

124. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. After the pla-

toon leader receives the company attack order, his
actions usually follow a logical sequence called
troop leading procedure. The leader uses this pro-
cedure because it saves him time and helps him
remember just what to do. Upon receiving the
attack order, the platoon leader takes the following
actions:
a. Reconnaissance plan.
(1) Studies his map and plans his reconnais-
sance.
(2) Coordinates with the other platoon lead-
ers before they leave the vicinity. His
plan includes the establishment of liaison
with the leader of any friendly unit in
contact with the enemy and through
which the platoon will pass. Valuable
first-hand information of the enemy's
strength and location can be obtained
from leaders of these units.
b. Observation post. (See fig. 33.)
(1) Selects an observation post that gives
maximum observation of his zone of ac-

119
 w Wd~~~~~

La W Z

0 co ts
Z_ I
00 0 0:
t0

w~~,~"
OJ ~~~~~~1E~~~~~i~~~iC~C
u·e
w~~~~~~~~

0~
z~::
~ 1 ~y
0 C3W

a lilB a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r

120 o
 COVER AND CONCEALMENT
OK AS FAR AS THIS
SMALL HILL AND THAT
FARM HOUSE. TWO SQUADS
FORWARD

g 4. n is ecoaiss the too

Fig/lre 34. D1I'i.lg his recov'nlaissauce, the platoon leader
makes his estimate of the situation and for-
IIultlates his plan of attack.

121
 tion and adequate cover and concealment.
(2) Sends his messenger back to guide the
squad leaders to the platoon observation
post to receive his attack order. If appro-
priate, he directs that the assistant pla-
toon sergeant move the platoon forward
to the platoon attack position.
c. Reconnaissance. (See (fig. 34.) Goes on a per-
sonal reconnaissance, during which time he makes
a continuous estimate of the situation to include
a terrain analysis. In this terrain analysis, the
military aspects of the area are interpreted and
evaluated in terms of five factors: critical terrain
features, observation and fields of fire, obstacles,
cover and concealment, and avenues of approach.
(1) Criticalte'rrainfeatures. Studies the ter-
rain from both the enemy's viewpoint and
the viewpoint of his platoon. He decides
which elements of the terrain are vital
and will have a marked influence on the
operation. He considers which terrain
features his platoon must seize or use or
deny the enemy in order to accomplish
the platoon's mission. Examples of crit-
ical terrain features are the platoon ob-
jective, high ground, a clump of trees, a
draw, a ditch, or a road embankment.
Thestudy is not limited to the platoon's
zone of action. The use of adjacent crit-
ical terrain features is requested if they
will further the success of the operation.
(2) Observationand fields of fire. Studies the
terrain to find observation and fields of

122
 fire that are available to the enemy as
well as to his platoon. He notes points
that need to be neutralized to limit the
enemy's observation or fields of fire on
his route of advance. He considers fields
of fire of enemy weapons in adjacent pla-
toon zones from which the enemy can
place fire on the advance of his platoon.
He notes the good points of observation
available to him which will aid control as
he advances with his platoon. He notes
fields of fires available for the weapons
within his platoon and for any attached
weapons. If indicated, he requests sup-
porting mortars or artillery to cover ter-
rain where his weapons have poor fields
of fire.
(3) Obstacles. Studies the natural features
of the terrain which will stop or delay the
advance of his platoon. He considers
which natural obstacles may give his pla-
toon flank security. Studies artificial ob-
stacles such as minefields, wire entangle-
ments, and blown-up bridges to deter-
mine their possible influence on the op-
eration. He considers the enemy's obser-
vation and fields of fire available to pro-
tect the obstacle. He considers special
equipment needed to breach the obstacle.
He studies the terrain to determine if
there is a way of avoiding the obstacle.
(4) Cover and concealment. Considers each

853696 (-49--9 12
 possible route that his platoon may use
in moving to its objective. First, he tries
to find a route that will give him cover
from enemy fire and, at the same time,
concealment from enemy observation.
Since this combination rarely can be
found, he next considers routes which in-
clude irregularities of the terrain provid-
ing cover and concealment for part of the
way to his objective. He considers the
use of smoke to provide concealment. De-
termines the cover and concealment avail-
able to his own supporting or attached
weapons. Considers covered or concealed
positions from which he can launch the
assault. He also considers the cover and
concealment available to his platoon after
the capture of the objective.
(5) Avenules of approach. Studies the terrain
to determine the best avenues of ap-
proach from the line of departure to the
objective. He looks for a route which
provides cover and concealment and aids
control and speed of movement of the pla-
toon. He avoids a route which prema-
turely masks direct fire supporting weap-
ons. Determines which avenues of ap-
proach the enemy may use in counterat-
tacking with foot troops or tanks. Looks
for routes he can use to evacuate his cas-
ualties and to resupply his platoon and
uses those which are best protected by
cover and concealment. He tries to find a

124
 direct route, but he selects a longer route
if it provides better cover.
d. Estimate of the situation.
(1) Considers throughout his reconnaissance
his company's and platoon's mission in
relation to the terrain. He now examines
in detail the courses of action which the
platoon may follow in accomplishing its
mission. He estimates the enemy's
strength and disposition and estimates
what the enemy can do in his zone of ac-
tion. He considers his own strength and
planned locations, the capabilities of
friendly supporting units, and the mis-
sions of adjacent platoons. His estimate
of the situation is a continuous process,
through all phases of combat.
(2) Decides upon his method of attack (see
par. 125).
e. Orders. Gives his attack order (see par. 126).
f. Supervision. Supervises the preparation for the
attack after he gives his order.
125. METHOD OF ATTACK. a. The platoon advances
from the line of departure to the assault position
by fire and maneuver. In addition to the heavy
indirect fires furnished by the artillery and mor-
tars, the platoon is supported by many direct-fire
weapons. These include the 57-mm rifles from the
weapons platoon, the machine guns and 75-mm
rifles from the heavy weapons company, and at
times the fires of a tank platoon.
b. In some cases, prearranged supporting fires
are adequate to keep the enemy down and neutral-

125
ize his resistance throughout the advance from' the
line of departure to the assault position. In this
event, the platoon advances rapidly as a unit across
the line of departure to the assault position under
the protection of these heavy fires. Under these
conditions, it is unnecessary to add to these fires
the fire power of riflemen until the assault starts.
If there is a suitable firing position near the line
of departure, the light machine gun may add its
fire to those of the other supporting weapons.
c. The platoon uses a covered approach if one
is available. If there is no covered approach, the
platoon makes a rapid frontal advance to the as-
sault position, taking maximum advantage of
available supporting fires and smoke. Occasional
enemy weapons encountered are taken under fire
immediately by the advancing riflemen. This situ-
ation occurs often when the platoon attacks as a
part of the company, battalion, and regiment in a
coordinated attack.
d. Prearranged supporting fires may not neu-
tralize all enemy direct-fire weapons. The rifle
platoon then reinforces the supporting fires with
a portion of its own fires to let other platoon ele-
ments advance. If this condition is determined be-
fore crossing the line of departure, a part of the
rifle platoon (for example, a rifle squad and the
light machine gun team) may execute a frontal at-
tack to make the enemy's fires ineffective and hold,
him in position. At the same time, the remainder
of the platoon advances to the assault position un-
der the protective fires of the first element, using
maximum cover. However, in most cases where

126
the supporting fires are unable to neutralize enemy
weapons or to keep them neutralized throughout
the advance to the assault position, the effect of
those weapons will become apparent after the pla-
toon crosses the line of departure. When the pla-
toon receives the fires of such weapons, the areas
of the weapons not neutralized are taken under fire
immediately by the advancing riflemen. If this
enemy fire continues, it then is necessary for the
platoon leader to use fire and maneuver within the
platoon itself. He uses the fire of his organic light
machine gun, any attached supporting weapons,
and a portion of the rifle elements to neutralize the
enemy weapons and let the remainder of the pla-
toon maneuver. (See fig. 35.) He also adjusts sup-
porting fires of higher commanders on the enemy
weapons not neutralized.
e. The platoon also attacks other than as an as-
sault element of a larger unit. To gain fire super-
iority when attacking as a unit, the platoon uses
a portion of its fire power to replace or add to the
supporting fires normally furnished by higher
commanders. This usually is done in the follow-
ing situations:
(1) When the platoon acts as a combat patrol
and only artillery or mortar concentra-
tions are available on call by radio.
(2) When the leading platoon in the approach
march makes contact and heavy support-
ing fires are not available immediately.
The platoon then attacks aggressively,
using fire and maneuver within itself to
rapidly overcome minor resistance.

127
 ENEMYif

z ~' Hi
A- | SERGEANT. MOVE YOUR

Q1L
. -
.: SOQUADUP THE LEFT FLANK
TO THOSE WOODS AND GET
SURPRISE FIRE ON THE
ENEMY TO OUR FRONT.

Figure35. In the attack the platoon advances by tre and

inavenver.

128
 (3) When in the pursuit or in the continua-
tion of a fast moving attack in which sup-
porting weapons have not displaced rap-
idly.
(4) When attacking over terrain such as
heavy woods, jungles, or mountains and
when supporting weapons cannot be
brought forward or have no fields of fire.
f. Timely coordination of the assault with the
lifting of support fires is a most important element
in infantry combat. The termination of supporting
fires is indicated to the riflemen of the assault
echelon by a visual signal fired by a selected sup-
porting unit. Squads not already deployed as they
approach the assault position move into formation
as skirmishers (app. II). The platoon takes up
the assault fire and advances rapidly to the objec-
tive as the artillery, mortars, and other supporting
weapons lift their fires from the objective in order
not to endanger friendly troops.

126. ORDERS. (See fig. 36.) a. The platoon leader

gives his order at a previously selected observation
post, and there he orients his squad leaders by
pointing out important terrain features. The pla-
toon order includes the following:
(1) Pertinent enemy information; informa-
tion of friendly troops to include the com-
pany objective, the missions of adjacent
units, and the support expected from the
company weapons platoon, battalion
heavy weapons, elements of the heavy
mortar company, and the altillery.

129
 o z .... ; -"V::

~IP,
:i.:':

.4~~~~~~~~~~~~~j

~~~~~'~

hi~~~

3?0

130
 (2) Platoon objective, line of departure,
frontage, hour of attack, formation, and
direction of attack.
(3) Line or area of departure for each squad,
the mission or targets of each squad, se-
curity measures, and instructions for the
reorganization on the objective.
(4) Location of the battalion aid station and
other administrative details.
(5) Communication instructions to include
prearranged signals, the platoon leader's
location, and the company command post
location.
b. The platoon leader makes certain that squad
leaders understand the order. Upon receipt of the
order, the squad leaders prepare for the attack as
outlined in paragraphs 61 and 68.

Section IV. ATTACK

127. MOVEMENT ACROSS THE LINE OF DEPARTURE.
The platoon moves in march column from the as-
sembly, area to the attack position. The platoon
may move from the attack position to the line of
departure in a partially deployed formation, or in
the attack formation. The determining factors are
the terrain and hostile observation and fire. The
movement from the attack position is timed so
that the leading elements of the platoon cross the
line of departure without halting at the specified
time. The failure to cross the line of departure on
time causes a loss of maximum advantage of sup-
porting fires, and the flanks of adjacent units may
become exposed.

131
128. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The principles
outlined in paragraph 70 for squad conduct of the
attack are applicable to the platoon. The platoon
moves across the line of departure, using available
cover and concealment. Enemy fire and observa-
tion are neutralized by the fires and smoke pro-
vided by supporting weapons, particularly from
the artillery and mortars. Mortar and artillery
fires cover the movement of the assault rifle pla-
toon to within assaulting distance of the objective,
usually 100 to 150 yards. When troops have effec-
tive supporting fires, they take advantage of it and
move rapidly. When the assault elements are with-
in assaulting distance of the objective, the sup-
porting fires are lifted on call by the company or
battalion commander. Then the advance rifle units
immediately start their assault under cover of
their own direct-fire weapons.
b. Advance against long-range fires. During the ad-
vance of the platoon to the assault position, the
supporting weapons may not completely neutral-
ize enemy fires from weapons which the platoon
cannot combat (distant machine guns, mortars,
and artillery). The platoon leader then has three
possible alternatives: to detour danger areas by
using defilade to escape machine gun fires or to by-
pass impact areas of enemy mortars and artillery;
to move the platoon through the danger area as
rapidly as possible; or to stop the advance.
(1) When the terrain or the size of the enemy
concentration permits bypassing, this
method is the best.
(2) When the enemy fires cannot be bypassed,

132
 often they are light enough to permit the
rapid movement through the danger area
at the cost of only a few casualties. In
such situations, the platoon leader un-
hesitatingly moves the platoon forward
rapidly, since defensive fires usually in-
crease in intensity and accuracy as the
fighting progresses, particularly when
the attacker suspends or eases its pres-
sure.
(3) To stop the advance gives the enemy
more time to bring down fires and at the
same time deprives adjacent units the
support upon which they are depending.
Halts which are not absolutely forced by
enemy action usually result in needless
casualties because of the increased length
of time men are exposed to enemy fire.
Therefore, the platoon leader stops his
advance only when a continuation of for-
ward movement would result in excessive
casualties. When the platoon is forced to
stop, the platoon leader immediately re-
ports his position to his company com-
mander, the enemy action which caused
his halt, and any other information. At
the same time, he is alert to resume the
advance, should the enemy fires cease or
lighten in intensity.
c. Advance against short-range fires.
(1) Where the enemy fires come from small
arms within effective range of the pla-
toon weapons, all members of the platoon
immediately fire at these enemy weapons.
133
 (See par. 60.) When the platoon's fire
fails to neutralize the enemy weapons the
advance is made by fire and maneuver
within the platoon itself.
(2) Specific targets holding up the advance
are pointed out to the leaders of support-
ing weapons units, accompanying for-
ward observers, and to the company com-
mander. At the same time, the platoon
leader uses all means within the platoon
to further the advance. Enemy are pinned
down by the fire of one platoon element
while the remainder of the platoon ma-
neuvers forward under the cover of this
fire. Then the original maneuver element
of the platoon occupies firing positions
and covers the advance of the other ele-
ment.
(3) Maneuver in the zone of an adjacent pla-
toon is often the only way a squad or
small group can approach the enemy po-
sition. (See fig. 37.) The platoon leader
uses such a route after coordinating with
the adjacent platoon.
d. Contact with adjacent units. The platoon pro-
tects its flanks by having connecting groups main-
tain contact with adjacent units (see par. 75).
When a considerable gap develops between his pla-
toon and an adjacent platoon, the platoon leader
reinforces the connecting group and promptly re-
ports the situation.
129. ASSAULT. a. Before the assault, the platoon
works its way as close to the hostile position as
134
 :j:: |
./ I -- -:

::~:i:::iR
i: EE ^i~i

i-li:iin
E : i: ::::
: s

:ES ----
::"~~~~~~7
in A ,,d9. .AR

: : s - : .: <:.^

.......;..

Figure37. Maneuver in the zone of an adjacent platoon

may be used to approach the enemy's position.

135
possible, taking maximum advantage of the shock
effect of friendly supporting fires on the enemy.
When the platoon attacks as part of the company,
the assault is made at a specified time or on a sig-
nal from the company commander. If a platoon is
assaulting alone, the prearranged signal for lift-
ing supporting fires is given by the platoon leader.
b. As the supporting fires lift, the objective is
covered with assault fire from all available weap-
ons. The enemy is beaten down, blinded, or de-
stroyed by fires from rifles, automatic rifles, rifle
grenades, hand grenades, rocket launchers, and
recoilless rifles. Ammunition is used unhesitat-
ingly and replenished. The platoon does not hesi-
tate or stop at the near edge of the objective, but
drives forward to the far edge before the enemy
has time to recover from the initial shock of the
assault. Immediately upon arrival at the far edge
of the objective, the platoon prepares for a possi-
ble counterattack and for the continuation of the
attack to the next objective.
130. REORGANIZATION. a. The platoon leader's
first consideration after capture of the objective is
to locate the platoon quickly to repel a possible
counterattack. When the nature of the objective
permits, the attack order includes a plan for divid-
ing the objective into squad sectors so that each
squad leader may know the position of his squad
on the objective. This may be done by the clock
system. An imaginary clock is placed on the objec-
tive, with the center of the clock on the center of
the objective (see fig. 38). The direction of the
enemy to the front is 12 o'clock, the squad sectors

136
then are assigned by hour numbers. For example:
the first squad defends and reorganizes from 9
o'clock to 11 o'clock; the second squad, from 11
o'clock to 1 o'clock; and the third squad, from 1
o'clock to 3 o'clock. Immediately upon the capture
of the objective, the squads move, without further
orders, to their assigned locations. The platoon
leader inspects the platoon area and makes adjust-
ments to take advantage of the terrain and to meet
enemy resistance.
b. As soon as positions are secure to repel a pos-
sible counterattack, the platoon leader prepares to
continue the attack. Weapons are checked and am-
munition is redistributed. A report is sent to the
company commander stating the effective strength
of the platoon, the condition of weapons, and the
status of ammunition. A squad greatly reduced in
strength may be combined with another squad, or
its men may be distributed among the other
squads. However, a squad of five men which in-
cludes a leader, an automatic rifleman, and a rifle
grenadier, may be an effective fighting force. Or-
ders for the continuation of the attack usually are
given by the company commander. The attack of
a new objective is made like the initial attack. The
platoon leader makes a brief reconnaissance to the
front and flanks to observe the area of advance,
looks for available routes for moving the platoon
forward, makes an estimate of the situation, and
formulates a plan for the continuation of the
attack.
131. SUPPORT PLATOON. a. In the early phases of
an attack, the rifle company commander often
137
 '20 S QUAD

7 S

.1 12a H e

SQUAD
IST 3S UAD

38 4

Figure 38. The clock system may be used for reorganiza-

tion on the objective.

138
keeps a platoon in support. Support platoon mis-
sions (fig. 39) may include one or more of the
following:

ENEMy , ENEMY
IC,~;R
Ce ~:' ESi .RESISTANCE-_'
STAn
'

ASSAULTING
PLATOONS
ASSAULTING
PLATOONS

SUPPORT PLATOON
PLATOON

ATTACK THE FLANK OF POINTS OF RE- TAKE OVER THE MISSION OF AN

SISTANCE HOLDING UP THE ASSAULT- ASSAULTING PLATOON
INGSPLATOONS

Q41V ENEMY r ENEMY

ADJACENT
UNIT
S GUPPORT SUPPORT

i) FURNISH SECURITY TO THE FLANKS ~ MAINTAIN CONTACT WITH ADJACENT

USING COMBAT PATROLS UNITS BY MEANS OFN CONNECTI G

Figure $9. Missions of the support platoon.

XHiS:-HO9C
()-49----1Ij 139
 i-

zo
LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
'~s'"'i~';"
. 0: '
~~~~~ ~~~ ~4
a: ~o
1' ~ ~*r~~~~
a·~~~z
OW
z> a. F-
IL W
IL
IL°°0
u~~~~
a-z' ~z t-Z

LoIr LL~
0 Z
oo wZ
L~~~~~~s~.
4W
~~~~w
~~~~P ~~~~Za
F~--1Z
00
zO
140
D - 0: CZ

w 00
z0
z
0 Jo U LLu
w0Z.AO
~~O,~~~,
r·~~~
~~~~t
it0

140~~~~~~~~
 (1) Furnish flank security by means of flank
combat patrols.
(2) Maintain connecting group contact with
adjacent units.
(3) Attack the flank of the enemy holding up
the assault elements.
(4) Take over the mission of an assault pla-
toon if it is disorganized or lost, or suf-
fers excessive casualties.
(5) Mop-up a position overrun by the assault
elements.
(6) Furnish protection against counterat-
tacks during the reorganization.
b. The support platoon advances by bounds as
directed by the company commander. It uses a col-
umn formation until committed to action. The pla-
toon leader prevents it from merging with the
assault elements. During the advance, the support
platoon leader constantly observes the action of
the assault elements and the situation on the
flanks. As the situation progresses, he makes ten-
tative plans for the use of his platoon.

Section V. DEFENSE
132. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. A rifle company
organizes its assigned defense area by assigning
areas to its rifle platoons. Each rifle platoon is
assisted by the fires of supporting weapons. The
defense areas organized by a rifle platoon may be
classified according to location as a front-line area,
a support area, or a reserve area. Each of these
areas is organized similarly. Each platoon nor-

141
mally occupies one defense area; however, the ter-
rain may require that elements of one platoon oc-
cupy separate defense areas. In this case, each
area is commanded separately and operates di-
rectly under the company commander.
b. The mission of the front-line platoon is, with
the support of other units, to stop the enemy by
fire in front of the main line of resistance and to
repel him by close combat if he reaches it.
c. The primary mission of the support platoon
is to support the front-line platoons by fire. Other
missions include extending in depth the defense of
the company area, protecting the flanks and rear
of the company area, limiting penetrations, and
rarely ejecting the enemy by counterattack.

133. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE.- When the pla-

toon leader receives the company defense order,
his actions usually follow a logical sequence. These
actions are called troop leading procedure. The
leader uses this procedure because it saves him
time, helps him remember just what to.do, and
provides the maximum available time for the
troops to prepare for the defense. Having received
the company order, the rifle platoon leader takes
the following actions:
a. Initial plans.
(1) Makes a tentative plan for defense. This
gives him a basis for later action and lets
him orient his leaders in time for them
to do certain things early, rather than
after the platoon order is issued. This
plan includes the general tentative loca-

142
 tions and missions of the three rifle
squads, weapons of the weapons squad,
and attached troops.
(2) Plans the movement of his platoon to the
assigned defense area and gives the
movement order. He does this to secure
a controlled, timely arrival on the po-
sitions.
(3) Decides where, when, and to whom the
order is to be given, and he notifies the
persons concerned.
(4) Plans his reconnaissance, which is as
detailed as time permits. He gives his
major attention to critical points. He in-
forms his lower leaders of his plan of re-
connaissance so that he can be located
quickly if needed.
(5) Coordinates with adjacent units and ar-
ranges for the supporting weapons to be
used in his area.
b. Reconnaissance.
(1) Goes on his personal reconnaissance of
the ground, taking with him the men he
needs. His reconnaissance is as detailed
as time permits.
(2) Examines the immediate front of the po-
sition to find areas which give the enemy
close, covered approaches to his position.
He looks for natural obstacles and ex-
posed terrain over which the enemy
would have difficulty in moving. He looks
for commanding terrain features which
may be occupied as hostile observation

143
 posts. He looks for areas within the pla-
toon defensive position which are exposed
to hostile observation.
(3) Examines the ground in his defensive
area to determine the exact limits of his
area of responsibility. He decides where
to coordinate with adjacent units and
with supporting weapons in his platoon
position. He selects locations for squad
defense areas, including supplementary
positions. He determines the missions
and general locations for his light ma-
chine gun and rocket launcher, including
alternate and supplementary positions.
He decides on the missions and general
locations for attached weapons. He se-
lects routes of communication and sup-
ply and the location of his command and
observation posts. He determines the
priority of work.
c. Orders.
(1) Goes to the point previously selected to
give his order. He adjusts his tentative
plan as affected by his reconnaissance and
gives his order.
(2) Informs the company 'commander of his
defense plan.
d. Supervision. Supervises the organization of
the platoon defense area.

134. PLATOON DEFENSE ORDER. The platoon de-

fense order is given from an observation point
overlooking the platoon defense area, when prac-

144
ticable. The defense order follows the same 5-
paragraph form as the platoon attack order (par.
126), with the following additional instructions:
a. Location and sector of fire for each rifle
squad.
b. Location, mission, and sector of fire for each
automatic rifle, rocket launcher, light machine
gun, and attached weapons.
c. Organization of the ground including the type
of emplacements (app. V), other construction, and
the priority of work.

135. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH. a. The company com-

mander assigns frontages to his rifle platoons con-
sistent with the natural defensive strength and
relative importance of their defense areas. If a
platoon occupies an area having poor observation.
and poor fields of fire (for example, heavily
wooded or broken terrain), the frontage usually
does not exceed 300 yards. If the area is open and
permits longer fields of fire, a frontage of 600
yards may be assigned. If the terrain is open
and flat or an obstacle across its front makes an
enemy attack in strength difficult, the frontage as-
signed to the platoon may exceed 600 yards.
b. The frontage physically occupied by the pla-
toon is determined by the intervals which can be
left between fox holes and between adjacent units
without jeopardizing the effectiveness of the de-
fense, and by the number of supporting weapons
within the area. These intervals are determined
by observation, fields of fire, and obstacles. In gen-
eral, the intervals between fox holes vary from 5

145
to 20 yards. Under normal conditions, a 25-yard
interval is allowed for each crew-served weapon
in the platoon area. The platoon covers by fire
the portion of its front which is not physically
occupied.
c. If the platoon has good fields of fire to the
flanks and rear from its front-line fox holes, it
may use a depth of only 50 yards. If elements of
the platoon must move from their forward posi-
tions to get adequate fields of fire to the rear, a
depth up to 200 yards may be used.

136. DISTRIBUTION OF SQUADS. (See fig. 40.) a.

I- C_
150.300 YARDS

i~~- ~300-600
YARDS

Figure 40. Rifle platoon in defense (schematic).

146
The three rifle squads of a front-line platoon are
placed to deliver their heaviest volume of fire for-
ward of the main line of resistance, both imme-
diately in front of the platoon defense area and
across part of the front of adjacent platoons. The
squads are placed generally abreast, with the men
staggered in depth in an irregular line. When
gaps exist between platoons, the flank squads are
located to cover them. Rifle squad positions are
adjusted to permit supporting weapons in the
platoon area to be placed at points from which they
can get their best fields of fire.
b. The rifle squads of the support platoon and
of the platoons of the reserve company are located
to deliver their heaviest volume of fire forward of
their platoon defense areas. They cover gaps be-
tween the forward platoons and are mutually sup-
porting. Their rifle squads are placed similar to a
front-line platoon. At times a platoon may occupy
two defense areas, with the platoon sergeant in
command of one; however, integrity or rifle squads
is maintained. The automatic riflemen normally
remain with their squads. The platoon leader
places the light machine gun and the rocket
launcher where each best can accomplish its mis-
sion. Except when the men of the platoon can fire
to the flanks and rear from their primary indi-
vidual emplacements, supplementary positions are
constructed for all-around defense. Plans are
made for shifting part of the platoon to these
positions. Natural cover, drainage lines, ditches,
trenches, and other defilade are used for the move-
ment to supplementary positions.

147
137. FIRE PLAN. a. The rifle platoon leader fa-
miliarizes himself with the parts of the battalion
and company fire plans that affect the defense of
his area. He also procures a map or overlay which
shows artillery concentrations by positions and
designating numbers. When time and facilities
permit, he issues copies of this map or overlay to
his platoon sergeant and assistant platoon ser-
geant in order that any one can call for specific
fires in event forward observers become casualties.
He then plans the fires of his organic and attached
weapons to provide the maximum defense of the
platoon area in coordination with the company and
battalion fire plans. The rifle platoon fire plan
includes the assignment and coordination of sec-
tors of fire for each rifle squad and for weapons
under the direct control of the platoon.
b. The front-line rifle ptatoon distributes its fire
to cover its front and flanks and portions of the
fronts of adjacent platoons. Each rifle squad is
given a sector of fire. These sectors overlap to get
complete coverage of the target areas. Each au-
tomatic rifle is emplaced where it can cover the
major portion of the squad sector of fire and can
fire across the fronts of adjacent squads. It is
assigned a principal direction of fire to cover a
specific terrain feature or to cover a gap in the
final protective fires of the supporting weapons.
c. The light machine gun is assigned a sector of
fire and a final protective line. It is placed where
it gives the maximum protection to the platoon
defense area, exchanges mutually supporting fires

148
with adjacent units, and delivers final protective
fires.
d. The rocket launcher is assigned a sector of fire
and a principal direction of fire. It is placed where
it can give maximum antitank protection to the
platoon defense area. Its location and principal
direction of fire are coordinated with other anti-
tank weapons.
e. The support platoons and platoons of the re-
serve company assign their squads sectors of fire
which complete the all-around, integrated defense
of the area. They cover unit flanks and gaps be-
tween units and are prepared to fire on an enemy
penetration or envelopment. Their machine guns
are given principal directions of fire to cover gaps
between forward defense positions and to cover
likely routes of hostile approach within the battle
position. The rocket launcher is used as in a front-
line platoon.
f. The rifle platoon leader tells his men how the
fires will be controlled. These measures to control
platoon fires normally include selection of terrain
features over which the enemy must pass before
the platoon opens fire; signals for shifting fires or
moving to supplementary positions; and signals
for final protective fires.

138. COMMAND AND OBSERVATION POST. The

platoon leader does not have separate command
and observation posts. He selects a position from
which he best can observe the front and flanks of
his area and control his troops. His position pref-
erably has cover for messengers and concealed

149
routes to the company command post. The platoon
sergeant is placed where he best can assist the
platoon leader in the control of the platoon. He
watches the platoon leader for commands, and con-
trols the part of the platoon most difficult for the
platoon leader to control directly. Forward ob-
servers and commanders of supporting weapons lo-
cated in the area usually station themselves within
easy communicating distance of the platoon leader.

139. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. a. The organi-

zation of the platoon defense area is continuous.
After the locations for weapons emplacements and
individual fox holes are selected, the primary con-
siderations are to get the men dug in, the position
concealed from air and ground observation, and
the front cleared sufficiently to permit effective
fire. The company order normally states the se-
quence in which the tasks are done. This sequence
is-
(1) Preparing fox holes and weapons em-
placements.
(2) Clearing fields of fire.
(3) Constructing wire entanglements and
other obstacles.
(4) Preparing routes for supply, communica-
tion, and evacuation.
(5) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, and
antipersonnel mines.
b. When the platoon reaches its defense area,
crew-served weapons are mounted immediately in
temporary firing positions, fields of fire are cleared,
and work is started on the position. Weapons em-

150
placements and fox holes are dug, and positions are
concealed from air and ground observation. This
work is done concurrently. Covered and concealed
routes for supply, communication, and evacuation
are prepared and overhead cover, alternate and
supplementary positions, wire entanglements, and
other obstacles are prepared as time permits.

140. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. The platoon

holds its position at all costs and never withdraws
except upon the verified order of the company
commander. Successful defense depends on each
unit holding its area. Initial fires of weapons used
within the front-line platoon area are withheld un-
til the enemy comes within effective rifle range
(maximum 500 yards) or when the enemy reaches
a certain terrain feature. This gives maximum
surprise and prevents the premature disclosure of
the battle position. During the hostile prepara-
tory fires, the platoon takes cover in its prepared
positions. As soon as the hostile preparation fires
cease, all weapons are readied to meet any hostile
ground attack.
b. The duties of the platoon leader during the
conduct of the defense include-
(1) Fire control, including the opening of
initial fires and the shifting of fires to
the most dangerous targets.
(2) Requests for additional supporting fires
as required.
(3) Shifting of men within the platoon po-
sition to defend it.

151
 (4) Keeping the company commander in-
formed of the situation.
c. Unit leaders control the fires of their units
and direct them against the most threatening tar-
gets. The platoon leader keeps fire control by
continuous observation and timely orders. If an
adjacent defense area is penetrated, fire is di-
rected against the enemy to keep him from widen-
ing the break and enveloping nearby platoons. If
the platoon is threatened with envelopment, the
platoon leader changes the locations of his men
to get all-around defense of his area. Except in
emergencies, nonorganic weapons used within the
platoon area by higher commanders are not shifted
without the approval of the commanders con-
cerned. The decision to move a crew-served weapon
from the primary to the alternate position is
made by the immediate commander in the vicinity
of the weapon. This move prevents destruction
of the weapon and crew by enemy fire or infiltrat-
ing parties. Usually, this move is accomplished
during lulls in the fire fight. During a fire fight,
such a movement is exceptional and will be influ-
enced by available cover and concealment. When
two or more weapons are moved to alternate po-
sitions, the weapons move by echelon. The com-
mander of the defense area is notified immediately.
(See par. 82.)
d. It usually is necessary to make adjustments at
night to meet conditions of reduced visibility.
These adjustments may include minor shifting of
weapons within the platoon defense area, use of
security detachments to cover open and exposed

152
areas which favor night attack, use of infrared
equipment and means of night illumination, and
the strengthening of local security elements.

141. SECURITY. The platoon provides its own local

security by constant observation to the front,
flanks, and rear. Enough men are kept alert at all
times to maintain an effective warning system. A
sentry is posted in each squad area to give the
warning of hostile ground or air approach. To
keep alert, sentries are relieved at least once every
two hours. Additional security measures may be
given in the company defense order.

153
 CHAPTER 6

WEAPONS PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL

142. ORGANIZATION. a. The weapons platoon con-

sists of a platoon headquarters, one 57-mm rifle
section, and one 60-mm mortar section. The pla-
toon headquarters has a platoon leader, a platoon
sergeant, two truck drivers, and two messengers.
The platoon headquarters has two 1/4 -ton trucks
to transport weapons, ammunition, and acces-
sories. A caliber .50 machine gun may be mounted
on one of these vehicles.
b. The 57-mm rifle section consists of a section
headquarters and three 57-mm rifle squads. The
section headquarters has a section leader and a
messenger. Each squad has a squad leader, a gun-
ner, an assistant gunner, and two ammunition
bearers. The principal weapon of the squad is one
57-mm rifle.
c. The 60-mm mortar section consists of a sec-
tion headquarters and three 60-mm mortar squads.
The section headquarters has a section leader and
a messenger. Each squad has a squad leader, a
gunner, an assistant gunner, and two ammunition
bearers. The principal weapon of the squad is one
60-mm mortar.

154
143. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PER-
SONNEL. a. The platoon leader is responsible for
the training, discipline, control, and tactical em-
ployment of his platoon. He recommends the use
of his platoon to the company commander and con-
trols its actions through timely orders to his sec-
tion. He goes where he best can influence the ac-
tion of his platoon. However, since the 57-mm
rifle squads normally operate with the rifle pla-
toons, he usually is concerned with the use of the
60-mm mortar section.
b. The platoon sergeant is second-in-command
of the platoon. During a movement, he marches
at the rear of the platoon to help maintain control.
He constantly keeps in touch with the situation
to the platoon's rear and flanks, supervises am-
munition supply, and assists the platoon leader in
observation and fire control.
c. One messenger accompanies the platoon
leader; the other reports to the company com-
mander when the company deploys for action.
d. Truck drivers conceal and camouflage their
vehicles at halts, and they perform driver main-
tenance. They use antitank rifle grenades for the
antitank defense of their vehicles. The 1/4 -ton
truck driver is trained to use the caliber .50 ma-
chine gun which is mounted on the vehicle. Other
drivers also are trained in the use of this weapon.

144. DUTIES OF SECTION AND SQUAD LEADERS.

The section and squad leaders train and lead the
men in their units. They deploy their units ac-
cording to the platoon or section mission.

85369(; 0-4---19---11 155

 a. The 57-mm rifle section.
(1) The section leader assigns general po-
sition areas and targets or sectors of fire,
and he controls the displacement of the
weapons and the supply of ammunition.
In the attack, he watches the rifle ele-
ments and regulates the movement of his
squads to fit in with the maneuver of the
rifle elements. When a squad is attached
to a rifle platoon, the section leader as-
sists the rifle platoon leader in supplying
the squads of his section.
(2) The squad leader moves his squad to its
position area, selects and supervises the
preparation and occupation of exact fir-
ing positions, adjust the squad's fire, and
directs its ammunition supply.
b. The 60-mm mortar section.
(1) The section leadelr assigns general loca-
tions for his squads within the area given
to his section, assigns targets, and con-
trols the displacement of the weapons and
the expenditure and supply of ammuni-
tion. He goes where he best can control
his section. He may conduct fire at the
section position, or act as a forward ob-
server, or take a position where he can
observe closely the rifle troops and con-
trol the movement of his section.
(2) The squad leader moves his squad to its
position area, selects and supervises the
preparation and occupation of exact fir-
ing positions, and uses his ammunition

156
 bearers to supply ammunition. Squad
leaders are trained as forward observers
and operate with front-line rifle pla-
toons. (For general duties of forward
observers, see sec. II, app. IV.)

145. CONTROL. a. For methods of combat control,

see sec. I, app. IV. The amount of control the
platoon leader exercises over his sections depends
on factors to include the time available to re-
connoiter and give orders; the observation of his
zone of action; the detachment of his platoon
elements to rifle units; his ability to contact his
units; and the speed and intensity of the action.
The platoon leader furnishes maximum fire sup-
port to the rifle elements by using his platoon
headquarters personnel to locate firing positions
and targets, to help in getting firing data, and to
assist in ammunition supply and the movement
of vehicles.
b. In the attack, the 57-ram i'fle section may be
used in general support of the company to increase
the flexibility of fires and to have a continuity of
fires during the displacement. However, because
of limitations of the terrain and the difficulty in
maintaining control, squads of the 57-mm rifle
section usually are placed in direct support of, or
attached to, the assault rifle platoons. When squads
of the 57-mm rifle section are attached to rifle
platoons, control passes to the leader of the unit
to which they are attached. The weapons platoon
leader and the 57-mm section leader aid the rifle
platoon leaders in supplying the 57-mm rifle

157
squads. In the defense, the squads usually are in
direct support of the rifle platoons and occupy po-
sitions within platoon defense areas.
c. The 60-mm mortar section normally is used as
a unit under the control of the weapons platoon
leader. The platoon leader assigns the initial po-
sition area and section mission and the section dis-
places on his order. Communication within the
section between observers and the mortars is by
radio or sound-powered telephones.

146. CONDUCT OF FIRE. a. The 57-mm rifle squads

are given definite targets or sectors of fire. The
squad leader selects targets, specifies the type of
shell and rate of fire, and gives the command or
signal for opening fire. (See FM 23-80.)
b. The 60-nmn mortar section may be given a
definite target or a target area. The section
usually is used from a section position and the fires
of all mortars are placed on the same target or
target areas. Planned mortar fires in the attack
consist of concentrations. A concentration is the
fire of one or more mortars in an area 50 yards
in diameter. Any number of concentrations may
be planned in the attack. When given a target by
a forward observer, the section leader directs the
fire of all or a part of the section on the target
by means of appropriate fire commands. (See FM
23-80.)

147. OBSERVATION. a. Squad leaders for the 57-

mm r'ifle section place themselves where they can
observe their targets or sectors of fire. The squad

158
leader usually is close enough to the gun so that
voice or signals can be used to control the fire.
When a part or all of the section is in general
support of the company, the section leader has an
observation post at a point from which he best can
observe the targets or sectors of fire given to his
squads.,
b. Observation for the 60-nm mortar section is
obtained primarily by forward observers with the
rifle platoons. Communication between these ob-
servers and the mortars is by radio or sound-pow-
ered telephones. When the situation permits, it
may be desirable to have a section observation
post. The observation post should give observation
over the company zone of action, provide cover
and concealment, and have a covered route to it.
This observation post adds to but does not replace
the observers with the rifle platoons.

148. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. a. The platoon's ve-

hicles transport weapons and ammunition. In the
attack, one of the vehicles usually supplies the as-
sault rifle platoons and attached 57-mm rifles. The
other vehicle supplies the 60-mm mortar section.
The platoon sergeant supervises resupply of am-
munition.
b. In the assembly area or the attack position,
the weapons and the initial ammunition supply
for the 57-mm rifle section are unloaded from the
platoon weapons carrier and are hand carried in
the attack. In defense situations, the weapons and
the initial supply of ammunition are unloaded at
the firing position. Ammunition is resupplied by

159
ammunition bearers who return to a company sup-
ply point and hand carry it forward to the firing
position. Often, ammunition can be delivered by
vehicle to the vicinity of the firing platoon.
c. Ammunition for the 60-mm mortar section
normally is transported by vehicle. When the ve-
hicle cannot be brought to the firing position area,
the platoon leader selects the point at which it
halts, and the ammunition is hand carried to the
firing position. The empty vehicle returns to the
company supply point for resupply.

149. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. Antiaircraft se-

curity measures are covered in paragraph 12.

150. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Individual antitank

defense is covered in paragraph 13. The 57-mm
rifles may be used for antitank defense in either
offensive or defensive situations. The weapons
then are sited along avenues of tank approach so
that flanking fire can be delivered against armor.
(For capabilities of the 57-mm rifle against tanks,
see par. 6.)

Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

151. GENERAL. During the advance in route or

tactical column, the weapons platoon moves as
part of the company. In route or tactical column,
the vehicles and accompanying personnel nor-
mally move with the battalion transport. If the
company has a mission requiring readiness for ac-

160
tion, the 1/4 -ton trucks move with their company
under the direct control of the platoon leader.

152. APPROACH MARCH. The company commander

gives the platoon its mission. The situation may
require elements of the weapons platoon to be in
direct support of or attached to the rifle platoons.
The formations and movements of the weapons
platoon resemble those for the rifle units. The
platoon leader directs the initial platoon location
to permit close support of the rifle units. A 60-
mm mortar forward observer and a 57-mm rifle
squad accompany the advance party of a support
company of the advance guard.

Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

153. GENERAL. a. Before the attack, the platoon

may be directed to halt in a covered area selected
by the company commander. This area usually is
a part of the company or battalion assembly area.
While the platoon is preparing for the attack, the
platoon leader, accompanied by a messenger,
moves forward with the company commander to
plan the attack. The platoon sergeant supervises
the preparation of the platoon, as detailed in para-
graphs 61 and 93.
b. The company commander may order the
weapons platoon to occupy firing positions to pro-
tect the assembly area, or the weapons may re-
main on carriers within the platoon area. This de-
cision depends on several factors, including the
enemy threat, the length of time the unit will re-

161
main in the assembly area, and the availibility of
battalion and other supporting weapons for pro-
tection of the assembly area.
c. The 57-mm rifle section may be used for pro-
tection of the company's portion of the battalion
assembly area, or the 57-mm rifles may be left on
the weapons carrier in the area given to the 57-
mm section and be ready for action should the need
arise. When the company occupies an assembly
area which is separated from the other units, the
company commander may have the 57-mm rifle
section occupy positions covering the most likely
avenues of approach, particularly if the threat of
an enemy break-through exists.
d. The 60-mzm mortar section rarely occupies
firing positions when the company is assigned a
portion of the battalion assembly area. The mor-
tars remain on the weapons carrier in the section
area. When the company occupies an assembly
area which is separate from the other units, the
company commander may direct that the mortars
be placed to fire on avenues of approach.

154. COMPANY COMMANDER'S ORDERS. After re-

ceiving the recommendations from the weapons
platoon leader, the company commander uses the
weapons platoon to carry out the company plan
of attack. This decision is given as a part of the
company attack order. The order gives specific
missions, initial position areas, targets or sectors
of fire, attachments to rifle platoons, time of open-
ing fire, and plan of reorganization. It may give

162
the conditions governing the displacement and
provisions for ammunition resupply.

155. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. a. The weapons

platoon leader's troop leading procedure follows
the same sequence as that of the rifle platoon
leader (par. 124). Before issuing the company at-
tack order, the company commander may take the
weapons platoon leader on a reconnaissance, or he
may direct him to reconnoiter for specific infor-
mation. To give the weapons platoon maximum
time to prepare its positions, the platoon leader
usually gives his attack order immediately follow-
'ing the company attack order. This also allows
maximum time for squad and section leaders to
reconnoiter and select exact firing positions, to ob-
serve the ground over which the attack will be
made, to occupy initial positions, and to complete.
preparations for the initial mission. (See fig. 41
and par. 7.)
b. The weapons platoon leader gives timely in-
structions for the forward movement of the pla-
toon. Unless the company commander has speci-
fied the off-carrier position for the 60-mm mortar
section, the platoon leader selects this position
while on reconnaissance.
c. The 60-mm mortar section leader goes ahead
of his section to the position area after receiving
the platoon leader's order. He notes the location
of the front-line troops and his targets or target
areas. When he has selected the general location
for his weapons and cover positions, he moves the

163
 ;I E~~~~~~~~~~q

14

:-:::j :::i::: C:~~~~~~~~

.:j::::::::::
iFii ::_::in i:i

164 ~ :::i::::::::: 0
squads and their weapons from the off-carrier po-
sition to the firing positions.
d. The 57-mm rifle section leader supervises the
attachment of his squads to assault rifle platoons.
For squads not attached, he selects position areas,
assigns targets or sectors of fire, and provides for
ammunition supply.

156: TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. In the attack, a

57-mmm rifle squad ordinarily is placed in direct
support of or attached to each assault rifle pla-
toon. A squad not thus used may be retained un-
der company control in general support, and used
with the support platoon if it is committed. The
57-mm rifle usually is used for direct fire on tar-
gets which hold up the advance of the platoon it
supports. The squad displaces as necessary to
maintain close support of the platoon. Once the
objective is captured, the squad protects the re-
organization of the platoon and assists in break-
ing up hostile counterattacks. Exceptionally, one
or more 57-mm rifle squads may be assigned the
mission of antitank protection for the company.
b. The 60-mm mortars usually are placed in a
section position. During the attack, the mortars
fire on request from forward observers, firing at
targets which hold up the advance of the assault
platoons. The mortars usually displace by section
when their fires no longer can give close support.
After capture of the objective, the section protects
the reorganization of the company and aids in
breaking up hostile counterattacks.

165
157. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. Desir-
able characteristics for 57-mm rifle firing positions
(see fig. 42) include-
(1) Observation of friendly troops and ob-
servation of targets or sectors of fire.
(2) Fields of fire which permit direct fire.
(3) Cover and concealment from enemy ob-
servation and fire.
(4) Safety clearance to the rear, particularly
applicable to closed rooms.
(5) Obstacles which give protection against
enemy tanks but do not interfere with
firing.
(6) Covered routes of communication for oc-
cupation and ammunition resupply.
b. Desirable characteristics for 60-mm mortar
firing positions include-
(1) Locations within the effective range of
targets or target areas.
(2) Mask clearance of hills, trees, buildings,
and similar obstacles to high-angle fire.
(3) Cover and concealment from enemy ob-
servation and fire. Complete defilade pro-
tects positions from enemy flat-trajectory
fire, and holes and ditches give some pro-
tection from high-angle fire.
(4) Dispersion between mortars to prevent
two mortar positions from being hit by
one enemy shell. Dispersion is limited
by voice or visual control.
(5) Covered routes to the position for oc-
cupation and ammunition resupply.

166
167
158. TARGETS. a. Appropriate targets for 57-mm
rifles are point targets; for example, crew-served
weapons, small enemy groups, pillbox embrasures,
and enemy tanks which are about to overrun the
friendly position. The 57-mm rifle may be used to
fire on small area targets in which enemy person-
nel or installations may be located but are not
clearly visible. Fighting in built-up areas, the
57-mm rifle is used against definitely located tar-
gets in buildings and against the buildings them-
selves to let the assaulting infantrymen enter.
Smoke shells may be used to limit enemy ob-
servation.
b. Primary targets for 60-mm mortars are point
targets; for example, crew-served weapons and
small groups of enemy personnel, particularly
those in defilade. The 60-mm mortars are effective
against small area targets but are not used to
search large areas. The white phosphorous (WP)
shell may be used to screen specific points, such
as the embrasures of pillboxes or a street barri-
cade. When fighting in built-up areas, the mortar
may be used against roof-top targets. It also is
used against defiladed targets not closer than 100
yards from friendly troops and which are too
close for the use of 81-mm and 4.2-inch mortars
or artillery.

159. ORDERS. a. The platoon leader's orders include

as much of the following as is necessary:
(1) Information of the enemy and friendly
troops, including the expected action of
the leading rifle platoons of the company

168
 and the positions and missions of the bat-
talion heavy weapons elements.
(2) Mission of the weapons platoon.
(3) Instructions concerning ammunition sup-
ply, location of the battalion aid station,
and other administrative matters.
(4) Communication instructions (including
prearranged signals) and the location of
the platoon leader and company com-
mander.
(5) Orders to the sections to include initial
position areas, route or unit to be fol-
lowed, .off-carrier position, initial targets
or sectors of fire, time of opening fire,
displacement and reorganization, and at-
tachments to rifle platoons.
b. The attack orders of a section leader include-
(1) Information of the enemy and friendly
troops.
(2) Mission of the section.
(3) General location of squad firing positions,
instructions for movement to them, and
instructions on the opening and conduct
of fire.
(4) Instructions concerning ammunition sup-
ply and the location of the battalion aid
station.
(5) Prearranged signals and the locations of
the section leader and the platoon leader.
c. Each squad leader includes in his attack order
the items of the section order which pertain to
his squad. After the initial firing positions are oc-
cupied, he gives the fire order for firing at the first

169
target. Squad leaders of 57-mm rifle squads at-
tached to rifle platoons get their orders from the
rifle platoon leader.

Section IV. ATTACK

160. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS. a.

The weapons, ammunition, and accessories of the
57-mm rifle section are moved by weapons carrier
from the assembly area to the attack position, if
practicable. Otherwise, the weapons are unloaded
from the weapons carrier as far forward of the
assembly area as possible. At the attack position,
the squads which are attached to assault rifle pla-
toons join those platoons and move to a cover po-
sition as directed by the rifle platoon leader. The
squad leader selects the exact firing position and
supervises its preparation and occupation. When
the mission requires one or more squads to be
placed in general support of the company, the
squads are moved to the firing position area by
the section leader. The exact firing position is
selected by the squad leader and occupied like that
of the squads attached to rifle platoons. The route
from the cover position to the firing position
should be covered and concealed. When not re-
supplying ammunition, ammunition bearers re-
main in a cover position near the rifle.
b. Since the 60-mm mortar section normally is
fired from defilade, it usually moves by vehicle
from the assembly area to an off-carrier position
located as close to the position area as the situation
permits. The weapons, accessories, and initial sup-
170
ply of ammunition are unloaded and hand carried
to exact firing positions selected by the squad lead-
ers. The squad leaders supervise the preparation
and occupation of the firing position. Ammunition
bearers are dispersed near the firing position when
not resupplying ammunition.
161. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK. a.
The 57-mm rifle squad leaders use their squads to
support closely the assault rifle platoons during
the attack. They continuously watch the ad-
vancing riflemen and the objective so that their
fires do not endanger friendly troops. They
promptly fire at surprise targets which threaten
the advance of the assault platoons. When the ad-
vance of the assault platoons masks the fires of
57-mm rifles, the fires are shifted to the flanks of
the objective or a displacement is made.
b. The 60-mm mortar section may fire prear-
ranged concentrations on specific targets or tar-
get areas before and during the initial phases of
the attack, as part of the company or battalion
fire plan. During the attack, they fire at suitable
targets as directed by the company commander,
the weapons platoon leader, the section leader, or
as requested by the forward observers. During
the assault, the 60-mm mortar section fires on ap-
propriate targets on the flanks or beyond the
objective.
162. DISPLACEMENT. a. When the assigned mis-
sion no longer can be accomplished from initial
positions, displacement is made to cause a mini-
mum of interruption in fire support.
853696 0-49--12 171
 b. The rifle platoon leader to whom a 57-mm
rifle squad is attached may direct the displacement
of that squad. Often the squad leader, on his own
initiative, moves his squad to new positions when
continuous fire support is impossible, or when the
old position cannot be held due to enemy action.
The displacement then is made rapidly; the squad
moves closely behind or on the flank of the rifle
platoon. The squad leader leads his squad forward
to select and direct the rapid occupation of a new
firing position.
c. The 60-mm mortar section ordinarily dis-
places as a unit. Displacement of weapons and
ammunition is made by vehicle, if possible. When
a displacement of the section is expected soon, the
platoon leader makes a personal reconnaissance
and designates a new general position area to the
section leader. The section leader indicates squad
position areas to the squad leaders. The squad
leaders lead their squads forward, making use of
covered routes, and select the exact firing positions
for their squads.

163. REORGANIZATION. a. As soon as the hostile

position is captured, or the attack is halted for any
reason, weapons are placed in positions which
protect the front and flanks of the assault rifle
platoons against a counterattack. (See fig. 43.)
b. After weapons are emplaced to repel a count-
erattack, the platoon leader begins the preparation
to continue the attack. He has his squad leaders
replace key men within their squads, check the
condition of weapons, and collect and redistribute

172
ammunition. Concurrently, the platoon leader re-
places leaders in the platoon. The squad leaders
report the strength of their squads and their
weapons and ammunition needs, and the platoon

o°011-.~31 PLATOON

IST PLATOON

Figure 43. Reorganization. As soon as the objective is cap-

tured, the weapons of the weapons platoon are
emplaced in positions to protect the front and
flanks of the rifle platoons.

leader, in turn, reports the platoon needs. Orders

to continue the attack are given, and the action
taken resembles the action before the initial
attack.

173
 Section V. DEFENSE

164. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. The weapons pla-

toon of the rifle company assists the rifle platoons
in the defense of their areas. The company com-
mander coordinates the fires with those of the
battalion fire plan. When circumstances permit,
the weapons are kept under company control to
coordinate fires. When time is limited, the weap-
ons may be attached to rifle platoons to give the
maximum close support to the rifle platoons until
detailed coordination is made under company
control.
b. The mission of the 57-mm rifle section in de-
fense is to destroy enemy crew-served weapons,
enemy groups, and tanks attempting to overrun
the position. The rifles are used by the company
commander to cover sectors, or approaches in
which targets of opportunity are most likely to
appear.
c. The missions of the 60-mm mortars of a front-
line rifle company in defense are to-
(1) Cover its assigned sector., The mortars
give close support to the forward defense
areas by firing concentrations on tar-
gets of opportunity-particularly those
in defilade-to break up a hostile attack
before it reaches the battle position.
(2) Assist in the battalion coordinated fire
plan. Mortar barrages fill gaps in the
final protective fires of the battalion fire
plan. If no gaps exist inside the company
sector, barrages strengthen the final pro-

174
 tective fires in the most dangerous areas
of approach.
(3) Assist in limiting penetrations. Concen-
trations are planned within the company
defense area to limit an enemy penetra-
tion of the main line of resistance.
(4) Support counterattacks. Concentrations
may be used to block off the penetrated
area or to give close support to a count-
erattack force.

165. SELECTION OF PQSITIONS. a. If practicable,

the platoon leader accompanies the company com-
mander on his reconnaissance and makes recom-
mendations for the use of the weapons platoon.
Based on his own reconnaissance and the recom-
mendations of the weapons platoon leader, the
company commander's defense order assigns mis-
sions and general locations for the weapons pla-
toon elements.
b. The weapons platoon leader's troop leading
procedure follows the same sequence as that of the
rifle platoon leader. (See par. 133.)
c. When sectors of fire, observation, and com-
munication facilities are not limited, the most ef-
fective fire and control is obtained by using the
60-mm mortars in a section position under com-
pany control. Then the firing positions normally
are in the vicinity of the support platoon. Ob-
servers are located in front-line platoon areas with
direct communication by both wire and radio to
the section.
d. When sectors of fire, observation, and com-

175
munication facilities are limited to prevent cover-
age of the company front, the section may be di-
vided and guns placed within the front-line platoon
areas.
e. After receiving the company commander's or-
der, the weapons platoon leader gives his order,
and he has the platoon elements moved to their
firing positions. The platoon leader and section
leaders precede the remainder of the platoon to
the defense areas to coordinate the use of the
weapons and the selection of firing positions. Fir-
ing positions selected for the 57-mm rifles and
60-mm mortars in defense resemble those selected
in the attack. (See par. 157.)

166. SECTORS OF FIRE AND TARGET AREAS. a.

The 57-mrm rifles are used by the company com-
mander to cover approaches where targets of op-
portunity are most likely to appear. Often one
57-mm rifle is used in direct support of each rifle
platoon defense area. Specific sectors of fire and
position areas are designated by the weapons pla-
toon leader.
b. Each 60-mm mortar squad is assigned a sec-
tor of fire, one barrage, and any number of con-
centrations. The three squad sectors overlap to
cover the entire company front. The company com-
mander normally uses the barrages to close small
gaps in the machine gun final protective lines.
These barrages are 50 yards square and normally
are located at least 100 yards forward of the front-
line elements. The weapons platoon leader assigns
concentrations and sectors of fire according to the

176
company defense plan. These concentrations are
planned both forward of and within the battle po-
sition. Concentrations are 50 yards in diameter.
(See figs. 44 and 45.)

1/
i /

O CONCENTRATION

D BARRAGE

Figure 44. In the defense, 60-mm mortar sectors overlap to

cover the entire company front.

167. ORDERS. a. The platoon defense order is based

on the company order and the platoon leader's re-
connaissance. It is given to the section leaders and

177
other key men of the platoon. When practicable,
the platoon leader gives his order from a position
where he can point out to each lower unit leader
the selected firing positions, sectors of fire, and lo-

' ' x ®
0R 1

D BARRAGE

O CONCENTRATION

Figure 45. If the 60-mm mortar section is divided, its guns

are placed within the front-line platoon areas.

cations of adjacent troops. The section leaders give

their orders based upon the platoon order and

178
their own reconnaissance. The troop leading pro-
cedure used by the section leaders is similar to that
used by the platoon leader. The platoon leader and
the section leaders supervise the coordination and
execution of their orders. The defense order fol-
lows the general form for the platoon attack order
(see par. 159) and contains the following addi-
tional instructions:
(1) Barrage and concentration areas for the
60-mm mortars.
(2) Final protective fires to include the
method for calling for these fires, a lo-
cation from which visual signals for fires
are given, and the rates and duration of
fire.
(3) Organization of the ground, including
types of emplacements, other construc-
tions, and priority of work.
b. The squad leaders base their orders, on the
order of the section leaders. The squad leaders
select exact positions for the guns or mortars, and
they give orders for clearing fields of fire and pre-
paring and camouflaging primary, alternate, and
supplementary positions.

168. POSITION OF LEADERS. a. Platoon leader.

The platoon leader assists the company com-
mander in controlling weapons platoon fire mis-
sions. Normally, the platoon leader is at or near
the firing positions of the 60-mm mortars. When
observation and sectors of fire are limited, the
platoon leader may establish an observation post
for increased observation of the company sector.

179
 b. Section leaders.
(1) The 57-mm rifle section leader remains
with the squad used in the support pla-
toon area. From this position, he best is
able to control the supply of all squads,
replace key men, and rapidly shift fire
to meet a threat from the flank or rear.
(2) The 60-mm mortar section leader is con-
cerned primarily with fire control and
ammunition supply. If the mortars are
in a section position, the section leader
remains at the firing position. If the mor-
tars are divided, control of fires usually
is delegated to the squad leaders, and the
section leader concerns himself primarily
with ammunition supply.
c. Squad leaders.
(1) The 57-mm rifle squad leaders stay with
the rifles and control their fires.
(2) The mortar squad leaders act as for-
ward observers with the front-line rifle
platoons. They put their observation
posts within the platoon areas where they
best can observe their assigned sectors.
A squad leader not used as an observer
assists in the control of fires.

169. OCCUPATION AND ORGANIZATION OF

FIRING POSITIONS. a. After squads arrive at their
assigned locations, the firing positions and sectors
of fire of the weapons are shown to the squad
leaders. Each squad leader has his squad weapon
mounted in a temporary firing position, prepared

180
to open fire to cover his assigned sector of fire. As
soon as the weapons are mounted in temporary
positions, the positions are constructed, camou-
flaged, and stocked with ammunition. The weap-
ons then are mounted in the primary firing
positions.
b. The characteristics of the 57-mm rifle are
such that emphasis is placed on clearing fields of
fire, preparing alternate positions, and concealing
the positions. The ammunition bearers prepare
fox holes from which they can resupply ammuni-
tion and give close-in protection to the weapon and
the remainder of its crew. After the squad digs in,
the squad leader examines his position from the
direction of the enemy to check on the camouflage
and concealment. Ranges are determined to the
most important landmarks in the squad sector of
fire, and range cards are prepared.
c. The primary 60-mm mortar positions and the
observation posts are constructed first, and fox
holes for the ammunition bearers then are pre-
pared. Alternate positions are constructed accord-
ing to the priority of work. If the situation per-
mits, each mortar is registered on its barrage and
on as many concentrations as necessary. Care is
taken to avoid endangering security elements, re-
connaissance parties, and work details forward of
the battle position. Firing data are recorded by
the squad leader. One copy of each range card
is kept by the squad leader, and one copy is given
to the platoon leader. The platoon leader then pre-
pares and gives the company commander an over-
lay or firing sketch showing the prepared mortar

181
fires. After the company commander approves
these planned fires or makes necessary changes,
he prepares a company overlay or firing sketch
and gives it to selected men of the company and
to the battalion commander.
d. Camouflage is concurrent with the construc-
tion of defensive works. Spoil not used in con-
struction is disposed of immediately. Parapets are
tramped down and sodded. Men avoid making
new paths ending at installations.
e. Dry, concealed ammunition shelters are con-
structed within or near the weapons emplace-
ments.

170. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. The 57-mm rifles

engage by direct fire enemy crew-served weapons,
groups of men, and tanks. If located within or
near a front-line platoon area, the rifles withhold
their fire until the other weapons of that defense
area open fire. If more than one of the above
types of targets appear within the assigned sector
at one time, a 57-mm rifle fire is directed against
the target which is the greatest threat to the po-
sition. The 57-mm rifles do not fire at night ex-
cept in emergencies and when the enemy is at
close range.
b. The 60-mm mortars initially are laid to fire
where suitable targets are most likely to appear.
If the enemy succeeds in driving in security ele-
ments, the mortars then are laid on their bar-
rages when not firing other missions.
c. As the enemy advances, observers call for
fires on suitable targets within their sectors. If

182
final protective fires are called for, the mortars
fire their barrages. If the barrage of any mortar
is not within the area where the final protective
fires are needed, that mortar fires the.concentra-
tions which most effectively reinforce the final
protective fires. If the enemy penetrates any por-
tion of the battle position, the mortars fire in the
area of penetration to disrupt and destroy the
enemy and to prevent a widening of the pene-
tration.
d. The decision to move a crew-served weapon
from the primary to the alternate position is made
by the immediate commander in the vicinity of
the weapon. This move is made to prevent the
destruction of the weapon and crew by enemy fire
or infiltrating parties. Usually this move is made
during lulls in the fire fight. During a fire fight,
such a movement is exceptional and is influenced
by the available cover and concealment. When two
or more weapons are moved to alternate positions,
the weapons move by echelon. The commander of
the defense.area is notified immediately.

183
 CHAPTER 7

RIFLE COMPANY, OFFENSIVE COMBAT

Section I. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK

171. GENERAL. a. For the general duties of the com-

pany commander and company headquarters per-
sonnel, see chapter 1. For the conduct of the com-
pany in movement to contact, assembly areas, and
attack positions, see chapter 2.
b. Before the attack, the company may be di-
rected to halt in a covered area selected by the
battalion commander. This area usually is part
of the battalion assembly area. Normally, while
the company is preparing for the attack, the com-
pany commander joins the battalion commander to
receive the attack order. He usually takes with
him the weapons platoon leader, the communica-
tion sergeant, a radio operator, and a messenger.
One officer, usually the executive officer, remains
with the company.

172. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The com-

pany usually attacks as part of the battalion. The
battalion order indicates whether a company is
initially in the assault or in reserve and gives the
supporting and attached units. If the company is
in the assault, it has a definite terrain objective or

184
a series of objectives, a line of departure or area
of departure, a definite zone of action, a direction
of attack, pertinent parts of the battalion or regi-
mental fire plan, and the time of attack.

173. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. a. Company com-

mander. After receiving the battalion order, the
company commander decides what preparations
are to be made, what he will do personally, and
what he will delegate to others. The company com-
mander's actions generally follow this sequence:
(1) Confers with other unit commanders.
(2) Plans his reconnaissance.
(3) Selects an observation post and sends for
his unit leaders.
(4) Make a reconnaissance.
(5) Formulates a method of attack.
(6) Gives the order.
(7) Supervises the execution of the order.
b. Conference with other unit commanders.
(1) He holds brief conferences with com-
manders of adjacent and supporting units
before leaving the place where the bat-
talion order is given. Frequently, all that
he can do now is to make definite arrange-
ments for a later exchange of informa-
tion, either through conferences or mes-
sages. He secures information by tele-
phone from commanders not present, or
by sending agents to confer with them.
(2) The information the rifle company com-
mander needs from the local covering
force commander is the exact location of

185
 elements through which the company will
pass, and detailed informatlon of enemy
activities and locations, sucn as locations
of automatic weapons, observation posts,
antitanK guns, minefields, intrenched
riflemen, and recent patrol action.
(3) The intormation he usually needs trom
adjacent commanders is their plan of
attack and the method of maintaining
contact between the two units.
(4) The information he needs from support-
ing weapons commanders is the exact po-
sition areas and target areas of their
weapons. This information is essential to
avoid premature masking of their fires
and to determine the best possible loca-
tions for company weapons.
c. Reconnaissance plan. He studies his map, ob-
serves the ground, and selects a route for his re-
connaissance.
d. Observation post. He selects an observation post.
Its location gives the maximum observation over
the company zone of action and is concealed
enough to permit the assembly of his officers for
the company attack order. He selects this point
early to allow time for the platoon leaders to be
guided there by a messenger. He issues instruc-
tions regarding the time and place of giving the
order and the movement of the company from the
assembly area to the attack position.
e. Reconnaissance. His reconnaissance is carried
out while the company is moving forward and his
platoon leaders are moving up to join him. During

186
his reconnaissance, he makes an estimate of the
situation which includes a terrain analysis.
(1) An estimate of the situation is a reason-
ing process by which a commander ar-
rives at a plan of action to carry out his
mission. The company commander con-
siders his mission, the opposing enemy
force and its capabilities of interfering
with the execution of his mission, his
own force, the terrain, and the courses
of action open to him. For units as small
as the rifle company, the estimate is com-
paratively brief and simple. It is based
upon available intelligence, personal re-
connaissance, and the reconnaissance of
unit leaders and patrols.
(2) The terrain is evaluated for its critical
terrain features, observation and fields
of fire, obstacles, cover and concealment,
and avenues of approach. (See par. 124.)
While on reconnaissance, the company
commander determines the possible lo-
cations of enemy weapons and personnel.
He notes the routes or areas where the
enemy's observation or fire is limited
most by the terrain and which ones are
his most favorable avenues of approach
to the hostile position. He considers the
help he can expect from smoke and fire
of supporting weapons, and he notes the
locations where his own weapons can be
placed to support the movement of his
rifle units. He also considers whether ad-
853696 0-49 13: 187
 jacent units initially will be ahead, be-
hind, or abreast of his company and
therefore determines whether his flanks
are protected or exposed. He notes
whether the terrain gives the enemy
cover or concealment from which to
launch surprise counterattacks as the at-
tack progresses. With these factors in
mind, he decides how to use his company
to accomplish his mission promptly and
with the fewest casualties.
f. Method of attack. Upon completing his esti-
mate of the situation, he decides how he will
attack.
g. Orders. After completing his reconnaissance,
the company commander immediately gives his or-
der. This is done to allow platoon, section, and
squad leaders the maximum time to make their
own reconnaissance, give their orders, and place
their units for the attack. (For details of the
attack order see par. 185 and app. I.)
h. Supervision. The company commander super-
vises the preparation for the attack.

Section II. METHOD OF ATTACK

174. OBJECTIVES. The battalion attack order

usually directs the capture of a terrain objective
or a series of terrain objectives. The company or-
der, as a means of coordinating the efforts of the
company, assigns successive objectives to the as-
sault platoon or platoons. As its initial objective,
each assault platoon is given the nearest terrain

188
feature or hostile position within its zone of action
whose capture is essential to the accomplishment
of the company mission. Platoons may continue
their attack against other definite objectives after
their initial objectives are captured. If the com-
pany commander desires to control the action more
closely, the platoons may be directed to continue
the attack on company order. Depending on the
terrain, there may be several of these successive
platoon objectives to be captured before the as-
sault echelon reaches the initial company objective.

175. SCHEME OF MANEUVER. a. The cover and

concealment provided by irregularities of the ter-
rain seldom is uniform in all parts of the company
zone of action. Available supporting fires may not
be enough to neutralize all hostile elements op-
posing the advance. The hostile position usually is
occupied irregularly because of the terrain. Open
areas may be lightly occupied physically, but ade-
quately covered with fire; while broken terrain and
covered approaches leading to the enemy position
may be strongly occupied. Since the enemy's ob-
servation and fields of fire are weaker in broken
terrain the company commander plans to concen-
trate his efforts on advancing a portion of his as-
sault echelon through that part of the company
zone which gives the best cover and concealment.
b. The remainder of the assault echelon attacks
through that portion of the company zone giving
the best remaining concealment and cover. This
forces the enemy to disperse his efforts, prohibit-
ing the use of his maximum defensive strength

189
against one portion of the assault echelon. (See
fig. 46.)

176:-FORMATIONS. a. The formation used for.the

attack is governed by the mission of the company,

LD
ASSAULTECHELON
SUPPORT
PLATOON

Figure46. The company advances along routes which offer

the best cover and concealment.

the width of the zone of action, the reinforcements

and supporting fires, the terrain, the knowledge of
enemy locations, and the need for security.

190
 b. By using a formation with two rifle platoons
in the assault echelon and one in support, the
company can deliver a strong initial attack while
retaining a support to influence future action.
c. A formation with one rifle platoon in the as-
sault echelon and two in support is used frequently
when the company has a very narrow zone of ac-
tion, when it is operating on an exposed flank, or
when the enemy situation is obscure. In this for-
mation, the support platoons may be in column be-
hind the leading platoon; they may be echeloned
behind the leading platoon toward an exposed
flank; or, if both flanks are exposed, they may be
echeloned, one to each flank of the leading platoon.
d. The situation and terrain may require the use
of all three platoons in the assault echelon, but
not necessarily abreast. A formation for the initial
attack with all three rifle platoons abreast is ex-
ceptional. It may be used when the company is
given an extremely broad zone of action and the
enemy situation is known.

177. LINE OF DEPARTURE. The battalion order

designates a line of departure from which the
company launches its attack. Its purpose is to co-
ordinate the advance of the assault echelon so that
its elements will strike the enemy in the order and
at the time desired. This line should be approxi-
mately perpendicular to the direction of attack
and recognized easily on the ground, and it should
be controlled by friendly forces. Occasionally, the
line of departure is difficult to locate on the ground,
or it cannot be reached without exposing the as-

191
sault echelon to observation and fire. In this event,
the company commander has each platoon start its
attack from a suitable position in rear of the line
selected by the battalion commander; a company
time of attack is prescribed so that the leading ele-
ments cross the line ordered by the battalion com-
mander at the time set in the battalion order.

178. ZONES OF ACTION. a. The battalion com-

mander ordinarily does not designate boundaries
between companies. An interior company usually
remains within the battalion boundaries and with-
in the zone of action assigned by the battalion
commander. The entry into an adjacent battalion
zone is coordinated with the commander of the ad-
jacent unit, either by the battalion commander or
the company commander. To make a flank attack,
a company commander can move elements in rear
of an adjacent company within the battalion sec-
tor. This ordinarily is done by coordination be-
tween the two company commanders concerned.
An interior company ordinarily uses a zone of ac-
tion from 200 to 500 yards in width.
b. Each rifle platoon in the assault echelon is
given a definite zone of action. (See fig. 47.) The
zone of action is indicated by giving the platoon
a particular section of the line of departure or an
area from which to start its attack, a direction of
attack, and a definite terrain objective or series of
objectives to be captured. If desired, the width
of the zone may be indicated by directing that the
platoon attack on a frontage indicated in yards.
This is its zone of responsibility in which it drives

192
 .. .......

EL'

I 'D

I ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I

193
forward and captures the assigned objectives.
Normally, the frontage assigned the platoon is
from 100 yards to 250 yards; under exceptional
circumstances, these limits vary. For reasons in-
dicated in paragraph 123, boundaries between pla-
toons seldom are given.
179. SUPPORT. At the start of the attack, the com-
pany commander may hold out a support for later
use in repelling counterattacks, for replacing an
exhausted part of the assault echelon, or for strik-
ing the final blow necessary to capture an objec-
tive. It is adequate in strength to accomplish its
probable missions. (See par. 131.)
180. WEAPONS PLATOON. The 57-mm rifles and
60-mm mortars are placed in position before the
attack to neutralize enemy elements that may hold
up the advance of rifle platoons. (See par. 156.)

181. SUPPORTING FIRES. (See app. IV.) a. The

battalion commander announces the supporting
fires in his attack order to include the platoons of
the heavy weapons company, the heavy mortar
company, the tank company, and the artillery.
The targets or target areas and the time and dura-
tion of the supporting fires are given to the com-
pany commander. He plans his attack to take max-
imum advantage of the supporting fires which
cover the movement of the assault echelon from
the line of departure to the assault position. The
fires are lifted by the battalion or comhpany com-
mander when the assault echelon reaches the as-
sault position.

194
 b. Platoons of the heavy weapons company. The po-
sition areas and initial target areas or fire mis-
sions of the machine gun platoon, 75-mm rifle pla-
toon, and 81-mm mortar platoon are given in the
battalion order. The weapons of the machine gun
platoon and 75-mm rifle platoon are emplaced in
the vicinity of the line of departure. The rifle com-
pany commander coordinates the emplacement of
his own crew-served weapons and the advance of
his rifle units with the position areas of the heavy-
weapons units. When terrain or communication
difficulties make control by the battalion com-
mander impracticable, machine gun and 75-mm
rifle units may be placed in direct support of or
attached to rifle company. (See sec. I, app. IV.)
c. Heavy mortar company. The heavy mortar tom-
pany usually is placed in general support of the
regiment with priority of fires to specific battal-
ions. Fires of the heavy mortar company are used
primarily to destroy or neutralize enemy troops
and weapons which can be fired at more readily by
mortars than by the supporting artillery. The
heavy mortar also fires smoke missions.
d. Tanks. Tank fires increase the fire power and
shock effect of the rifle company and provide anti-
tank protection. One or more tank platoons are
often attached to a rifle company to form an infan-
try-tank team. In general, there are five methods
of attack which may be used by infantry-tank
teams. These methods are modified frequently by
combining elements of two or more methods. The
circumstances of enemy resistance and terrain in-
dicate which method promises the maximum suc-

195
cess in any specific attack. The methods of attack
are discussed in the following paragraphs.
(1) Initially, the tanks support the infantry
by fire from stationary hull defilade po-
sitions on or near the line of departure.
When the infantry approaches the assault
position, the tanks advance rapidly and
join the infantry at the assault position.
Supporting fires on the objective then are
shifted, and the assault is executed by in-
fantry and tanks together. The tanks
should time their advance from the line
of departure so infantry and tanks reach
the assault position at the same time.
During the assault, infantry and tanks
advance generally abreast. This method
is used when the objective is defined
clearly and when fields of fire exist for
the tanks. Surprise usually is achieved,
and the maximum tank fire power is
available at the critical time of the final
assault. The fires from the moving tanks
at short range, in combination with the
assault fire of the infantry, add greatly
to the intensity of the shock effect.
(2) Tanks cross the line of departure in order
to pass through the advancing infantry
either before it reaches the assault po-
sition or when it is at the assault position.
Thereafter, the tanks precede the infan-
try by distances varying from 50 to 300
yards. They are protected against local
antitank weapons by their own fires, time

196
 or VT artillery fire, and fires of the rifle
unit. When the supporting fires are lifted
just before the tanks arrive on the objec-
tive, the rifle units immediately open as-
sault fire and follow the tanks to the ob-
jective. This method is used mostly in
attacks heavily supported by artillery
time and VT fire and against an enemy
who possesses little or no overhead cover
and whose forward antitank weapons in-
clude few tanks. It has the advantage of
speed and shock action and usually
achieves surprise. Maximum tank fire
power is available during the critical pe-
riod when artillery and mortar fires are
being shifted and the task of keeping the
enemy's forward weapons neutralized is
passing to the weapons of the assault
echelon. As in the previously discussed
method, the tanks support the infantry.
advance by fire from stationary hull def-
ilade positions until the time arrives to
launch their own attack.
(3) Infantry and tanks, moving by separate
routes, converge on the objective from
different directions. Because of the great-
er speed of the tanks, the infantry usually
starts its attack first, and the tanks cross
their line of departure at the time neces-
sary for a coordinated final assault of in-
fantry and tanks. Whenever possible, the
tanks support the infantry advance by
fire until the time arrives to start their

197
 own attack. This method is useful when
the terrain or enemy defenses favor the
use of two routes, one for infantry and
another for tanks. It usually achieves
surprise and has the advantage of con-
verging fire effect and shock action.
(4) Infantry and tanks move together at the
same rate of speed throughout the ad-
vance from the line of departure to the
objective. The infantry may move slight-
ly in advance of the tanks, between them,
or immediately in rear. As the advance
progresses, these relative positions of
tanks and infantry are adjusted accord-
ing to the enemy resistance and the ter-
rain. This method is used when visibility
is limited, in built-up areas, and in woods.
It permits close coordination and maxi-
mum mutual support, but it sacrifices
speed and surprise. The slow rate of
movement increases tank vulnerability to
hostile antitank fires and gives the enemy
time to increase the intensity of his de-
fensive fires. In close terrain, when little
is known of the enemy, it frequently is
desirable to use this method initially,
passing to another when the assault eche-
lon enters more open terrain or when the
enemy situation clarifies. In a variation
of this method, the infantry rides on the
tanks until enemy fire forces them to dis-
mount and fight on foot. This provides
speed but results in increased exposure

198
 of infantry to enemy fire, particularly to
air bursts. It also interferes with the
operation of the tank. It is used primar-
ily in exploitation.
(5) From stationary hull defilade firing po-
sitions on or near the line of departure,
tanks support the infantry by overhead
or flanking fire throughout its advance
from the line of departure to the objec-
tive. This is the least efficient of all the
methods. It should be used only when
natural or artificial antitank obstacles
prohibit the tank movement to the objec-
tive, or when additional tanks are pro-
vided to increase the tank support in the
first three methods discussed.
No matter what method is used to reach the ob-
jective, once it is captured, infantry and tanks
closely coordinate their actions during the mop-up
phase. Tanks particularly support the riflemen in
clearing the objective area of hostile automatic
weapons. The riflemen assist the tanks by prompt-
ly eliminating individual and crew-served antitank
weapons. During the reorganization and the prep-
aration to continue the attack, the tanks are
disposed along with the infantry as previously
planned, to hold the captured ground against a
counterattack. (For additional details see app. IV
and FM 7-35.)
e. Artillery. The infantry regimental and battal-
ion commanders, with artillery liaison officers, pre-
pare a detailed plan of close artillery fire support.
This fire plan is based on the battalion command-

199
er's scheme of maneuver. An artillery forward
observer moves with each company to obtain and
adjust the artillery fires requested by the rifle com-
pany commander. (See app. IV.)

182. USE OF SCREENING SMOKES. a. The rifle com-

pany frequently uses screening smokes to assist its
attack. Smoke support may be accomplished by
organic means or by supporting artillery, mortars,
or tanks. Organic means consist of rifle grenades,
hand grenades, rocket launchers, and the 60-mm
mortar. These provide only small, local screens
within the company zone of action. Supporting
smoke screens are fired on call or as predetermined
fires. They are more-general in extent and require
greater coordination with adjacent units, as con-
sideration must be given to the drift of the more
extensive smoke cloud.
b. Smoke is used carefully and with skill in or-
der to obtain the maximum success and the mini-
mum interference with the unit or adjacent units.
Small screens from company weapons rarely re-
quire more than internal coordination. Wind
speed and direction are considered in predicting
the cloud drift and in establishing the location of
impacts to give the maximum screening effect. If
white phosphorous smoke is fired for both casualty
and screening effect, the bursts are directly on the
target, regardless of wind direction. Smoke mis-
sions include-
(1) Screening movements of the rifle com-
pany.
(2) Blinding hostile observation.

200
 (3) Reducing the effectiveness of hostile
aimed fire.
(4) Isolating enemy positions or areas.
(5) Obtaining casualties (use white phospho-
rous only).
(6) Screening reorganization of the company.
(7) Indicating targets or marking front lines
for supporting artillery, mortars, or air
force units. Colored smoke frequently is
more suitable for this work than white
smoke. (For details concerning the tac-
tical use of smoke, see FM 3-5.)

183. SECURITY. a. Regardless of flank protective

measures taken by battalion and regimental com-
manders, the company commander is responsible
for the close-in protection of his flanks throughout
the attack. Usually, there are gaps between the.
company and the units on its right and left. If, at
the start of the attack, an adjacent unit is abreast
or ahead of the company and the gap cannot be
covered by observation and fire, the company com-
mander has a connecting group maintain contact
with the adjacent unit and report periodically the
location of its nearest flank. (See par. 75.)
b. Ordinarily, security groups are detailed from
the support platoon. These groups may operate di-
rectly under the company commander, or he may
delegate control by directing that the platoon lead-
er maintain contact or protect a flank. When the
company commander delegates this control to the
platoon leaders, he indicates the maximum size of
the security group.

201
 c. Timely warning is the key to reducing losses
from air and tank attack. Each rifle platoon pro-
vides its own air and antitank security. The anti-
tank rifle grenadiers and rocket launchers protect
the platoon; they are not used to protect other com-
pany elements.
d. The company commander coordinates the
antitank defense measures within his company.
He gives each rifle platoon specific directions or
areas to defend against enemy tank attack.
184. TIME OF ATTACK. The time of attack normal-
ly is given in the battalion order. The company
commander allows time for the movement of his
company to its attack positions, and he also allows
time for reconnaissance, the preparation of plans,
and the issuance of orders by himself and his unit
leaders. Some of these activities can be carried on
concurrently. The start of the attack may be co-
ordinated by having units begin their forward
movement at a definite hour, or by having them
ready at a specified time and beginning their op-
eration on a prescribed.signal.
185. ORDERS. a. The company commander gives
his order for the attack to his assembled platoon
leaders and the leaders of attached units. When
conditions permit, the first sergeant, the commu-
nication sergeant, the platoon sergeants, and the
section leaders of the weapons platoon assemble to
hear the order. The company commander orients
the executive officer as early as possible. Whenever
practicable, the order is given at a point from
which important terrain can be pointed out. Maps,

202
aerial photographs, and sketches may be furnished.
When time is limited and the leaders are sepa-
rated, the company commander gives his orders,
either oral or written, in fragmentary form. Lead-
ers of units which are engaged with the enemy are
not called away from their units to receive orders.
For the form of a company attack order, see ap-
pendix I. The company order includes-
(1) Information of the enemy and friendly
troops. Information of friendly troops
should include the location and actions of
supporting, adjacent, and other units
which have a direct bearing on the com-
pany's attack.
(2) Company mission, time of attack, line of
departure, direction of attack, and the
initial formation.
(3) Specific instructions for each assault rifle
platoon, for the weapons platoon, and for
attached elements.
(4) Location of the support and, if practica-
ble, its probable use.
(5) Instructions for maintaining contact and
flank protection.
(6) Plans for reorganization after taking the
objectives.
(7) Location of the battalion ammunition
supply point, the battalion aid station,
and other administrative instructions.
(8) Location of the company command post
and the initial and future locations of the
company commander.
b. Orders have their maximum effectiveness
85:(;96 (o-49 14 203
only when each man of the company understands
what he is to do, and the where, when, how, and
why. The trained soldier who is briefed completely
will attempt to find ways of overcoming every ob-
stacle to accomplish his mission. The unbriefed
soldier, no matter how well trained, is likely to sus-
pend or cease his efforts when he meets strong re-
sistance because he does not know what should be
done. Therefore, the company commander closely
checks that the men are thoroughly briefed. The
maximum possible use should be made of all avail-
able and improvised orienting aids, such as maps,
sketches, aerial photographs, and, when time per-
mits, sand tables.
186. ANTITANK DEFENSE. For antitank measures
see paragraphs 13, 50, 90, and 150.
187. COMMUNICATION DURING THE ATTACK. a.
Tactical control of the company during the attack
depends primarily on communication. The com-
pany commander keeps informed of changes in the
situation of his own units and those in adjacent
and larger units. To do this, a constant flow of
information is needed to the front, laterally, and
to the rear, so that he can give timely orders to
meet changing situations.
b. Adequate communication within the company
is the company commander's responsibility. A ra-
dio operator and a messenger habitually accom-
pany the company commander.
c. Communication with the battalion command-
er and adjacent unit commanders is maintained.
The company commander normally communicates

204
with the battalion commander by radio. Commu-
nication between company and battalion command
posts is by wire, radio, and messenger. The com-
pany commander may communicate with adjacent
units direct or through the battalion command post
by radio, messenger, and wire, when practicable.
d. The command post of an assault rifle company
is seldom more than 300 yards from the front line,
and it moves forward as the company advances.
The new locations are reported to the battalion
command post. All locations should provide con-
cealment from enemy ground observation and, if
possible, defilade from enemy fire and concealment
from aerial observation.

Section III. ATTACK

188. MOVEMENT TO THE LINE OF DEPARTURE. The

movement from the attack position to the line of
departure is in a deployed formation which per-
mits the assault elements of the company to use
maximum cover and concealment. This formation
places them on the line of departure in the relative
position from which they start the attack.

189. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The assault

platoons cross the line of departure at the time set
for the attack, using the cover and concealment
provided by the terrain and the protection given
by the supporting fires. If subjected to effective
small-arms fire before reaching the assault posi-
tion, the platoons advance as discussed in para-
graph 128. If subjected to hostile artillery or mor-

205
tar fires, the assault troops move rapidly through
or around the impact area. The ability of an en-
emy observer to adjust fire on advancing rifle
troops is partially or totally neutralized by fire and
smoke fromr friendly supporting weapons. In ad-
dition, as the troops near the assault position
(within 100-150 yards of the objective), they are
less vulnerable to enemy mortar and artillery fires,
since the defender ordinarily does not place these
fires on his own troops. Therefore, to obtain this
relative immunity from enemy indirect fires, the
assault echelon moves rapidly toward the enemy
position.
b. Leaders aggressively push groups forward to
seize natural strong points of terrain from which
fire (particularly that of automatic weapons) can
be delivered on enemy positions. Because of un-
equal resistance by the enemy, differences in ter-
rain, and variations in the assistance received
from supporting fires, some units may advance
while others are held up. A platoon not stopped
by fire pushes on even though adjacent units are
stopped. This advance may outflank resistance
holding up adjacent units and may let automatic
weapons deliver flanking fire on the enemy. It may
permit other elements to move into the gap to en-
velop the enemy or attack his rear. Islands of re-
sistance are overcome by combined frontal and
flanking action.

190. CONTROL. a. Once the attack is launched, the

company commander influences the action by su-
pervising the assault platoons, by using all avail-

206
able-supporting fires, and by using the support at
the proper time and place. To plan ahead and act
at the proper time, he keeps constantly informed
of the situation on his front and flanks. The com-
pany commander, accompanied by a radio operator
and a messenger, moves where he best can observe
and control the action of that part of the company
whose operations are most vital to success. He
must be able to communicate readily with the as-
sault platoons, the company command post, the
support, the supporting weapons under his control,
the forward observers of weapons units of higher
echelons, and the battalion commander.
b. Supporting fires. Throughout the attack the
company commander brings about the closest co-
ordination between the movements of his rifle pla-
toons and the fires of supporting weapons. He ar-
ranges for heavy, well-coordinated fire support, to
obtain the maximum shock effect on the enemy.
Under its protection, he pushes the attack rapidly
to save time and casualties.
c. Use of the weapons platoon. The weapons pla-
toon pushes forward aggressively to maintain ef-
fective fire support. (See pars. 162 and 163.)
d. Use of the support. (For missions of the sup-
port, see par. 131.)
(1) When the company commander holds out
a support at the start of the attack, it is
kept close enough to the assault echelon
to permit its prompt use to exploit a suc-
cess or to repel a counterattack. If the
support is directed to follow the assault
echelon by bounds from one covered po-

207
 sition to another, the company command-
er keeps it within supporting distance
but does not merge it with the assault
echelon. If the company commander ini-
tially directed the support to await orders
in a certain location, he gives timely or-
ders for its forward movement. Varia-
tions in terrain or in the situation may
require a change in the manner of con-
trolling the movement of the support, or
a change in the distance at which it fol-
lows the assault echelon. The company
commander considers these conditions
and directs changes whenever necessary.
(2) When use of the company support is nec-
essary to renew the impetus of a stalled
attack, it is committed without hesita-
tion. It is used preferably for a flank at-
tack or an envelopment against an enemy
weakness rather than against enemy
strength. Every attempt is made to avoid
attacking through an assault platoon
which is disorganized or which has ex-
cessive casualties. The support attacks
as a complete unit. Except to repel a
counterattack, the company support ordi-
narily is not used if the assault platoons
still have elements which are not commit-
ted. A new support is reconstituted at
the earliest practicable opportunity.
e. Security. The company commander does not
depend on the original measures taken for flank
security to remain effective throughout the entire

208
attack. (See par. 183.) He adjusts his flank se-
curity to meet changes in the situation.
f. Assistance to adjacent units.
(1) The company assists adjacent units to ad-
vance. This is done when directed by the
battalion commander, or when the com-
pany commander estimates that such as-
sistance will help achieve 'the battalion
mission.
(2) Assistance which lets a rearward adja-
cent unit advance is generally an effective
means of protecting the company's flank.
(3) Assistance by fire and maneuver usually
is more effective than assistance by fire
alone. (See fig. 48.) Such maneuver is
supported strongly by the fire of available
weapons, including those of the unit be-
ing assisted. Maneuver is not used if it
results in depriving the company of its
essential elements for its own further
progress.

191. ASSAULT. When the assault echelon progress-

es as close to the enemy position as it can without
masking its supporting fires, the fires are lifted
and the assault is started. The company com-
mander lifts supporting fires by giving a prear-
ranged signal, or he estimates when the units will
be ready to assault and arranges with the battalion
commander for lifting supporting fires at that
time. When supporting fires are lifted, assault
troops close rapidly and aggressively, using assault
fire. Supporting weapons cover the assault by fir-

209
 zooc
p 0Z
0Iw a
- ~, o w
WIU
4'>-4
> -j . x
mu IL 0 mu) m aai<wwrr
w m0 D , A %x L cz ,0
maz~m
_
I-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
OZUZOO. UOZ L9
W> M-U moU w
<ww ,I I Lm , w 9~>
w

I IL
(n U < < <n~OXY
A Iw w I. _j 0 .

Er ~~WW-
m
m~~~(~,OI - (,
oL x-w
2WO~w
zo
~><
z D moz 10o
wm
w IOo
rO4.(b

r u. - < u w0 ELZ oo u Dz i
4<o w
.j m m 14:3: f- U, j 2 , j w u~~~~1
O..O)U ~0
-ooOZ
0
~~w
0
~ z< lazIL ow K .nu 0~
mOb~
w ~=1- ~~~~~-
2Z u z mi
w~~~z~~
v~~wx, w ~ 3. -A -ww ww o i
~0
\¼
i///
( ~.'T'0
\l/ I:

ulu~uao~
Ow
uor~C mm m QaAwW ~~~ftmmw

210~~~~~~~~

210~~~~~~~~~~c4
ing on adjacent and rearward hostile elements.
The assault is started on the company command-
er's order or signal, and it is repeated by all offi-
cers and noncommissioned officers. The assault is
pushed through the depth of the objective without
allowing the enemy an opportunity to reorganize
or man his defense. The company commander uses
every means at his disposal to press the attack ag-
gressively forward, and he exploits without delay
every advantage gained.

192. REORGANIZATION. a. Immediately upon tak-

ing an objective, the company places itself to repel
a counterattack according to the company attack
order. The company commander then makes
prompt adjustments to fit the situation. He orders
the rapid displacement of the weapons platoon and
any attached weapons, and he places them to cover
possible enemy avenues of approach to the front
and flanks of the captured objective. He uses other
supporting fires to protect against hostile counter-
attacks.
b. After the company elements are placed to re-
pel a counterattack, reconnaissance is made for a
continuation of the attack. Concurrently, the com-
pany commander has each platoon leader reorgan-
ize his platoon. Key men are replaced, ammuni-
tion is redistributed, and the unit situation,
strength, and ammunition status are reported to
the battalion commander. Ammunition is brought
forward by vehicle or carrying parties, and cas-
ualties are evacuated. Identification of enemy
units is reported, and prisoners are sent to collect-

211
ing points. Completion of the reorganization
should find the company regrouped into an effec-
tive team with control re-established, with an ade-
quate ammunition supply, and with plans com-
pleted to continue the attack. The battalion com-
mander is informed of the situation.

193. ACTION WHEN THE ADVANCE IS HALTED. a.

When strong enemy action forces a temporary de-
fense while in close contact with a strong enemy,
the company organizes its position as outlined in
paragraph 287. The company may continue the
attack by fire until other supporting fires can help
or until an adjacent or reserve unit flanks the en-
emy position. The company does not withdraw
from its position except on order from the battal-
ion commander.
b. When a hostile threat is repulsed after a tem-
porary defense at close quarters, the company pre-
pares to continue the attack as outlined in para-
graph 175. The company commander's troop lead-
ing procedure is applied as the situation permits.
c. During temporary halts other than those re-
quired by enemy action, the company commander
gives security instructions to the company. Maxi-
mum advantage is taken at halts to reorganize the
platoons, to resupply, and to prepare for continu-
ing the attack. Protective measures are taken to
minimize casualties because of enemy small arms
or artillery fire and aerial bombardment.

194. PURSUIT. a. The pursuit starts when the en-

emy cannot maintain his position and endeavors to

212
escape by retreat. It begins only upon orders of a
higher commander. Once it starts, it is character-
ized by boldness and rapidity of action and is
pushed to the limit of endurance. Security meas-
ures are limited in order to aid the advance. No
opportunity is given the enemy to reorganize his
forces or his defense.
b. To conserve the strength of troops, the pur-
suing elements usually are motorized, and maxi-
mum use is made of vehicles and tanks to overtake
and envelop the enemy. The formation and actions
of a leading rifle company resemble those of the
support of a motorized advance guard battalion
(par. 31). The company commander is allowed
maximum freedom of action by the battalion com-
mander. The battalion commander's orders usu-
ally are brief and fragmentary, giving missions,
direction of advance, and objectives. Objectives
are much more distant than in normal attack situa-
tions and may include important road junctions,
stream crossings, villages, and towns along the
axis of advance. Frequently, the company is or-
dered to continue the movement during darkness
or to make a limited objective night attack. The
night attack follows the general principles outlined
in section V, this chapter, but the preparation time
is brief and daylight reconnaissance usually is
lacking.
c. Tanks and elements of the heavy weapons
company in the pursuit are attached to a leading
rifle company. The enemy may use tanks and self-
propelled guns to cover his retreat. Therefore, the
company commander uses his attached tanks for

213
both assault purposes and antitank protection.
The company commander calls for fires of artillery
and heavy mortars through accompanying for-
ward observers but does not delay his action await-
ing such support. Uncovered night movements are
common in the pursuit.
d. Frequently, in the pursuit, a rifle company is
attached to a tank company. (See FM 7-35.)

Section IV. RESERVE RIFLE COMPANY IN THE

ATTACK

195. MOVEMENT TO INITIAL POSITION. a. The bat-

talion order designating a rifle company as the
battalion reserve indicates the initial location of
the company. The order may include instructions
for a subsequent movement, flank protection, prep-
aration of plans to meet various situations, and
contact with adjacent units.
b. Upon receiving the battalion order, the re-
serve company commander considers possible cov-
ered routes from the assembly area to the initial
reserve position. The selection of the route is made
after a reconnaissance, preferably by the company
commander. Maximum effort is made to avoid dis-
closing the location or movement of the reserve.
The company commander normally remains with
the battalion commander during the conduct of the
attack.
c. After making his reconnaissance of the route
to and the location of the initial reserve position,
the company commander gives his initial order.

214
He gives his men information of the enemy and of
supporting troops, the battalion plan of attack, and
instructions for the movement to the initial reserve
position and its occupation and security.

1%. MOVEMENT TO SUCCESSIVE RESERVE POSI-

TIONS. a. Initially, the reserve company usually is
placed behind the company which is attacking the
key objective in the battalion zone. Later, it ad-
vances behind the company making the most rapid
progress, to protect that company against counter-
attack and infiltration from its rear, to support the
main effort, and to exploit a success. The company
commander reconnoiters and recommends succes-
sive positions and routes to them.
b. Except in emergencies, the company moves
by bounds, on the orders of the battalion com-
mander. When the company is too far behind the
assault rifle companies to accomplish its probable
missions, the company commander promptly re-
ports this fact to the battalion commander.

197. PLANNING POSSIBLE MISSIONS. a. The re-

serve company may be assigned one or more of the
following missions:
(1) Envelop points of resistance located by
the assault echelon, frequently by a move-
ment through the zone of an adjacent bat-
talion.
(2) Protect the flanks and rear of leading
companies.
(3) Repel counterattacks, especially against
the flanks.

215
 (4) Mop-up of a position overrun or bypassed
by the assault echelon.
(5) Take over the mission of all or part of the
assault echelon.
(6) Keep contact with adjacent units.
b. As the attack develops, the battalion com-
mander indicates the probable use of the reserve.
He has the company commander reconnoiter and
make plans. The company commander makes time-
ly plans to meet all possible situations, and he re-
ports his plans to the battalion commander for ap-
proval. He informs his unit leaders of the details
of these plans and estimates the time necessary to
put each plan into effect.

198. RECONNAISSANCE AND LIAISON. To execute

any of his missions promptly, the company com-
mander constantly keeps himself informed of the
situation by-
a. Personal reconnaissance and observation.
b. Liaison with the battalion commander and
the battalion command post.
c. Communication with the battalion command-
er and the battalion command post.

199. ACTION WHEN COMMITTED. The battalion

commander selects the attack position, the com-
pany objective, the direction of attack, the tenta-
tive time of attack, and the general supporting
fires. The actual time of attack is announced by
the battalion commander after the company ar-
rives at the attack position and the company com-
mander reports that the company is prepared for

216
the attack. When the reserve company attacks, it
operates as any rifle company in the attack.

Section V. NIGHT ATTACK

200. GENERAL The rifle company may be used in

a night attack as part of a battalion or as the prin-
cipal attacking force. In either case, the actions of
the company are the same.

201. PURPOSE OF NIGHT ATTACK. Night attacks

may be ordered for one or more of the following
purposes:
a. Avoid heavy losses which would occur in'day-
light.
b. Complete or exploit a success.
c. Prevent the enemy from improving his de-
fenses.
d. Gain important terrain for further opera-
tions.
e. Deceive and surprise the enemy.
202. CHARACTERISTICS OF NIGHT ATTACK. a.
Night combat is characterized by a decrease in the
effectiveness of aimed fire; by an increase in the
importance of close combat and fire of fixed weap-
ons; and by difficulty in movement, maintenance
of direction, troop leading, control, and contact.
Night attacks often are favorable to the attacker
in order to complete or exploit a success, to gain
important terrain for further operations, to avoid
heavy losses which would be incurred by attacks in
daylight over open terrain, or to capitalize on the

217
surprise inherent in night combat. The surprise
and shock to the defender, on the other hand, due
to his limited observation and the reduction of his
defensive measures, occasionally cause him panic.
b. Secrecy and surprise are essential for accom-
plishing a night attack at the minimum cost of
casualties. A simple plan helps obtain surprise.
Surprise can be gained by striking the enemy from
an unexpected direction. However, failure to ob-
tain surprise need not cause a night attack to fail.
The attacker, by resolute action, can destroy or
drive back an enemy who has discovered or antici-
pated their approach.
c. The objective should be easily identifiable at
night and small enough to capture in a single as-
sault by the attacking force. Because of reorgani-
zation difficulties, the company ordinarily is not
given more than one objective during any one
night.
203. TYPES OF NIGHT ATTACK. Night attacks are
classified as nonilluminated and illuminated. A
nonilluminated night attack is made under cover
of darkness, using only the light which may be
available from natural sources. An illuminated
night attack uses artificial light-for example,
flares and searchlights (see par. 211). These two
types are classified further as supported or unsup-
ported, according to their execution. The type of
night attack used depends on the terrain, the tac-
tical situation, and the equipment.
204. SUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK. The capture of a
well-defended enemy position may require the use

218
of all supporting weapons. In a supported night
attack, maximum effort is made to maintain se-
crecy as to the exact location, direction, and time
of attack. Such a supported night attack, utilizing
battalion and regimental weapons and artillery,
includes preliminary preparation fires as well as
protective fires during and after the attack. The
protective fires isolate the objective and prevent or
limit a hostile counterattack.

205. UNSUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK. An unsup-

ported night attack, either illuminated or nonillu-
minated, differs from a supported night attack in
that preliminary preparation fires are not used.
Supporting fires are planned resembling those for
a supported night attack, but the fires may be
withheld entirely or withheld until the attack is
discovered by the enemy. The planned protective
fires may be used as in a supported attack to pre-
vent or limit a hostile counterattack.
206. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A NIGHT ATTACK.
Daylight observation of the objective, and ap-
proaches to it, is desirable. When such observation
is impossible, essential information can be ob-
tained from large-scale maps, from aerial recon-
naissance, and from night patroling. To preserve
secrecy, it may be necessary to limit reconnais-
sance.
207. NIGHT ATTACK PLAN. a. Minute detail and
careful preparation characterize the plan for a
night attack. Plans should be simple. A complex
plan is warranted only after the company com-
x536196 ()-'49--15 219
 mander has weighed its advantages against the in-
creased probability of failure by its use. No set
method of attack can be followed, and the proce-
dures are varied according to the visibility, the
terrain, and the enemy activity. To plan the at-
tack, the company commander seeks complete and
detailed information of hostile forces (size, or-
ganization, identification, and night locations), the
expected action of friendly troops, and the ground
to be crossed.
b. The company commander obtains informa-
tion of hostile locations from sources to include-
(1) The battalion commander. (This includes
information from higher commanders;
for example, intelligence studies, aerial
photographs, and reports of prisoners of
war and of civilian inhabitants of the
area.)
(2) The front-line elements.
(3) Observation posts.
(4) Reconnaissance.
(5) Patroling. (This frequently is the only
source of detailed terrain information
and of hostile outguards and listening
posts.)
c. The company commander obtains informa-
tion of friendly troops from the battalion com-
mander and the units involved.

208. DIRECTION AND CONTROL. The company

commander uses maximum means of maintaining
direction and control, which usually include-

220
 a. Selection of open terrain which favors the
advance.
b. Use of selected riflemen or machine gunners
to fire tracers at the objective area.
c. Use of guides for movements in rear of and
forward of the line of departure. Competent
guides frequently can be selected from patrols
which are familiar with the area.
d. Designation of the lateral and forward limits
of the objective by unmistakable terrain features.
e. Designation of compass directions for routes
of advance forward of the line of departure.
f. Use of connecting files or groups, both lat-
erally and in depth. Their need is determined by
the visibility, the terrain, and the enemy activity.
g. Designation of a base platoon. It usually is
the platoon having the most easily identified route.
h. Regulation of the advance forward of the line
of departure to include the limit of advance on the
objective.
i. Retention of the company column formation
as long as possible. If practicable, deployment as
skirmishers is delayed until the company is within
assaulting distance of the enemy position.
j. Designation of each platoon's mission after
capturing the objective. The platoon leader as-
signs squad sectors and definitely indicates the
area and boundaries of each squad objective.

209. TIME OF A NIGHT ATTACK. a. The time of at-

tack usually is given by the battalion or regimental
commander. When the rifle company is the princi-
pal attacking force, the company commander may

221
be called upon to recommend the time of attack.
b. An attack started during the first hours of
darkness may be used after a successful day at-
tack. It then strikes the enemy before he has time
to organize his position or plan his artillery sup-
port. This timing of the attack also may be con-
sidered when enemy night operations are expected.
c. An attack during-the last hours of darkness
is used better as a preliminary operation to a gen-
eral attack at daybreak because it gives the de-
fender no time to reorganize. The attack should
begin in time to complete the capture of the objec-
tive at least one-half hour before daylight. This
allows time for the reorganization of the assault
troops under cover of darkness. The time of attack
should provide a cushion of time to compensate
for reasonable delays, such as a temporary loss of
contact or control, or an unexpected difficulty.

210. NIGHT ATTACK FORMATION. a. The company

usually crosses the line of departure and advances
toward the enemy in a column, as this is the easiest
formation for the company commander to control.
It is maintained until the platoon release point is
reached (par. 215), or deployment is forced by
enemy action. If visibility permits control and the
objective is close to the line of departure or if early
contact with the enemy is expected, it may be de-
sirable to advance from the line of departure with
platoons on a line and each platoon in a column of
files. After the line of deployment is reached (par.
216), or if the enemy discovers the attack before
it is reached, the assault is begun.

222
 b. When the company is one of the assault com-
panies in a battalion attack, its assault usually is
made with all rifle platoons abreast in order to ob-
tain the maximum fire power and shock action.
When the company attacks alone, it usually holds
one platoon in support. When a support is held
out, it moves as directed by the company com-
mander. It may follow closely the assault echelon
or it may be left in rear of the line of departure to
be brought forward by guides or on a signal. It
may have the mission of mopping up or giving
normal support. If no support is held out, one is
designated immediately after the objective is cap-
tured.
c. The weapons platoon and any attached tanks
or other supporting weapons are made available
shortly after capture of the objective. Weapons
which can be hand carried may follow the assault
echelon by bounds, but they should not be so close
to the rifle platoons that they get involved in the
assault. The decision on how and when to move
them depends on the visibility, the terrain, and
the enemy action. When conditions are unfavor-
able for a movement directly behind the assault
echelon, the supporting elements may be left be-
hind the line of departure to be brought forward
by guides after the objective is captured. In such
cases, if the supporting weapons are used to fur-
nish protective fires for the assaulting force, they
normally should be placed in suitable positions on
the flanks of the line of departure from which they
can deliver flank protective fires. The forward
movement after the capture of the objective may

223
be made by hand or on carriers. Control measures
used for this movement vary with the visibility,
the terrain, the enemy action, and the absence or
neutralization of enemy antitank obstacles or
mines.

211. ILLUMINATION DEVICES. If illumination de-

vices are used during the night attack, the plan of
attack depends on the visibility they give. The
visibility may vary from conditions approximating
daylight, when direct lighting by searchlights and
artillery or aircraft flares are used, to conditions
approximating the light of a half moon or less,
when indirect lighting by searchlights is used. (See
par. 225.)

212. NIGHT ATTACK POSITIONS. The last-minute

coordination before crossing the line or point of
departure is made in an attack position. If this
position is not given by the battalion commander,
the company commander selects it during his day-
light reconnaissance. The attack position is di-
rectly behind the company line or point of de-
parture. It should be clearly. recognizable on the
ground; if not, it is marked unmistakably. Cover
from enemy direct-fire weapons is desirable but
not essential, since the assault troops occupy this
area only briefly. Open terrain is preferable un-
less a high degree of visibility is present. The use
of guides, the choice of clearly defined routes, and
the use of marking devices during the movement
to the attack position, minimize confusion, prevent
loss of direction and control, and preserve secrecy.

224
213. LINE OR POINT OF DEPARTURE. The line of
departure for a night attack resembles that for a
daylight attack. The limitations on visibility dic-
tate whether greater attention is given to select-
ing and to marking a line of departure which easily
is recognized at night. (See figs. 49 and 50.) If
the company makes the initial advance in column,
the line of departure is crossed at a single point
-the point of departure. The line of departure
for a night attack normally is the line held by
friendly troops.

214. ROUTES TO OBJECTIVE. Routes to the ob-

jective are selected carefully. The company com-
mander weighs the advantage of ease of control
gained by selecting a route which follows an
easily recognized landmark against the disad-
vantage of the possibility that the enemy's loca-
tions and prearranged fires cover roads and other
obvious routes of approach.

215. PLATOON RELEASE POINT. The platoon re-

lease point is the point where the company com-
mander releases control to the platoon leaders for
the movement to their respective areas of deploy-
ment. It normally is located between the line of
departure and the probable line of deployment and
is used when the company advances in column.
When the company advances in parallel columns
from the attack position, the platoon release point
is located in the attack positions. If enemy action
causes a premature deployment before the com-

225
 LIMIT OF ADVANCE

PROBABLE LINE OF DEPLOYMENT

DEPLOYMET\ SQUAD RELEASE,

AREA POINTS

PLATOON RELEASE
POTNT

POINT OF DEPARTURE

FRONT LINES

ATTACK

ASSEMBLY

Figure 49. Rifle company in a night attack moving from a

point of departure (schematic).

226
 MIT OF ADVANCE

PROBABLE _ ,...DEPLO .
(FP
DEPLOYMENTT &E
AREA
A SQUAD ASE
POINTS

I !

I I

LINE OF !DEPARTURE i

ASSEMBLY
AREA

Figure 50. The rifle company in a night attack may move

from a line of departure in a line of columns
(schematic).

227
pany arrives at the platoon release point, the pla-
toons deploy and fight as directed by the company
commander or as required by the situation.

216. PROBABLE LINE OF DEPLOYMENT. The prob-

able line of deployment is a previously selected line
where deployment is completed before the final as-
sault. It is a terrain feature which is recognized
easily at night and is within assaulting distance
of the objective. This distance varies according to
the type of position being assaulted, the type and
intensity of the preparation fire, the expected hos-
tile reaction, and the terrain. The probable line
of deployment usually is from 100 to 200 yards
from the objective. It is far enough from the ob-
jective to permit undetected deployment as skirm-
ishers, yet close enough to permit maximum con-
trol during the assault. When no suitable natural
line of deployment is available, a line should be
marked by guides using telephone wire, engineer
tape, luminous buttons, or infrared equipment.

217. LIMIT OF ADVANCE. To retain control and

prevent the assault echelon from being endangered
by friendly protective fires, the company com-
mander gives a limit of advance, both in depth and
to the flanks of the objective. This limit should fol-
low terrain features which are recognizable at
night.

218. SECURITY MEASURES. Frontal and flank se-

curity is maintained during the movement from
the line of departure to the line of deployment. The

228
size of these security detachments varies with the
amount of detailed information of the enemy, the
terrain, and the expected hostile counteraction.
The distance at which these detachments operate
depends on their mission and their commander's
need and ability to control them.

219. SECRECY MEASURES. Surprise is of utmost

importance in a night attack. It is obtained chiefly
through secrecy measures which include-
a. Restricting the size and activities of recon-
naissance elements and other preparations for the
attack.
b. Keeping rifles loaded and locked during the
movement, allowing firing only on order of selected
leaders.
c. Prohibiting smoking, use of lights, talking
(except to whisper orders or instructions), and
the use of shiny or noisy equipment.
d. Darkening faces and hands with dirt or other
substance.
e. Regulating the rate of advance from the line
of departure so that the entire company can move
silently. The rate of advance depends primarily
on the terrain and the visibility.

220. IDENTIFICATION. The force commander de-

termines the means of night identification, which
must be readily available to all men. A white cloth
arm band around each upper arm may be used for
visual recognition. Words or noises, such as a chal-
lenge and a password given in a low tone without
hissing, are valuable as a means of identification.

229
Distinctive marks for officers and noncommis-
sioned officers are desirable.

221. MANEUVER. During a night attack, limited

maneuvers, such as a close envelopment, can be
executed successfully, provided the visibility per-
mits control. Under conditions of poor visibility,
however, maneuver should not be attempted and
units are assigned limited objectives toward which
they advance in a straight line.

222. COMMUNICATION. Leaders familiarize them-

selves with the communication used for the attack.
Communication plans include emergency signals
for calling for and lifting supporting and protec-
tive fires. Wire is laid usually from the battalion
to the assault company by a wire party closely fol-
lowing the advance. To preserve secrecy, wire com-
munication and messengers should be used exclu-
sively during the movement from the line of de-
parture to the line of deployment. Alternate
means, such as radio and pyrotechnic signals, are
carried and used, if ordered by the commander.

223. COMPANY NIGHT ATTACK ORDER. The com-

pany order for a night attack has more detail than
a similar order for a daylight attack to provide for
every possible development. The following details
normally are covered, in addition to those in
appendix I:
a. Designation of platoon release point, if used.
b. Azimuth and description of landmarks.
c. Platoon missions at daylight.

230
 d. Security measures for each platoon.
e. Means of identification.
f Measures to maintain secrecy.
g. Method of advance.
h. Rate of advance.
i. Special measures for control and coordination.
i. Action in case of hostile countermeasures.
k. Probable line of deployment.
I. Limitations on firing.
m. Limitations on reconnaissance.
n. Specific orders for night patroling before the
attack and after the capture of the objective.
o. Illumination devices.
p. Limit of advance after the capture of the
objective.

224. CONDUCT OF A NIGHT ATTACK. a. Advance

to the line of deployment.
(1) The advance from the line of departure
to the deployment area is made in a
column formation. A silent, stealthy ad-
vance is essential to secrecy. This forma-
tion is maintained until the platoon re-
lease point is reached, unless enemy ac-
tion forces an earlier deployment. The
line of deployment should be secured by
patrols before the company arrives. When
the platoons reach the line of deployment,
they form skirmish lines and they assault
at a prearranged time or on a given
signal. Deployment is accomplished
quickly and quietly; any confusion or de-

231
 lay at this point increases the enemy's
chances for detecting the attack.
(2) The commander of each column marches
at or near its head. When the company
moves in a line of columns, the company
commander marches where he best can
control and regulate the advance. A non-
commissioned officer marches at the rear
of each column to assist in control and
enforce secrecy. Column commanders
and the company commander constantly
check on direction and contact.
(3) Commanders prevent a premature as-
sault; however, action of hostile patrols
or outguards may force part of the com-
pany to deploy before the time planned.
If possible, elements forced to deploy re-
form in a column after the resistance is
reduced.
b. Assault. Deployment may be ordered by the
company commander because of enemy action, or
it may be made upon arrival at the line of deploy-
ment. If the deployment is forced by the enemy,
the assault is begun as soon as the deployment is
complete and the assault is made at a walk, with
men firing as they advance. Flares may be used to
assist the assault troops in firing and in moving
forward. When the assault troops deploy undis-
covered at the line of deployment, they move off
in the assault, maintaining silence until fired on by
the enemy. Maximum effort is made to maintain
the skirmish line and prevent it from breaking up
into isolated groups. Noise and tracer fire may be

232
used to demoralize the enemy. Assault echelons
drive forward to the far edge of the objective,
leaving mop-up missions to the support and re-
serve units. Aggressive leadership by officers and
noncommissioned officers is emphasized.
c. Reorganization. Reorganization begins as soon
as the objective is captured, and it is carried out
similar to a daylight attack. (See par. 192.) Se-
curity elements are established far enough to the
front and flanks to prevent the enemy from
secretly re-forming for a counterattack within as-
saulting distance of the captured position. The
preplanned protective fires are continued as neces-
sary. Just before daylight, all troops and weapons
are redisposed as necessary to strengthen the po-
sition and to obtain better fields of fire. When the
attack will be continued after daylight, immediate
preparations are made to continue the attack.

225. ILLUMINATED NIGHT ATTACK. a. The battle-

field is illuminated by attached or supporting
searchlight units, by flares fired by mortars and
artillery, or by flares dropped from aircraft. Bat-
tlefield illumination by searchlight is divided into
direct lighting and indirect lighting. Direct light-
ing normally is used for target designation, ob-
servation, blinding the enemy, and deception. In-
direct lighting is used for movement to positions,
observation, movement to attack, and movement
of reserves and supplies.
b. Direct lighting is not practicable under all
conditions because the hostile reaction is imme-
diate and violent, requiring early displacement of
233
the searchlights. Indirect lighting by the reflection
of light beams from clouds or by the diffusion of
the beams over the area provides intensity of light
approximating half moonlight. The indirect light-
ing method is known as artificial moonlight. If
flares are used to illuminate night attacks, they
usually are placed behind the hostile position to
outline it to the assault troops. Many flares are
necessary for a night attack. When using battle-
field illumination, the attacker usually sacrifices
much of the secrecy of his movements and he may
reveal his intentions of making the attack, yet the
attacker gains more effective control and fire
support.

Section VI. ATTACK OF A RIVER LINE

226. GENERAL. a. This section covers the rifle com-

pany as part of a battalion in the attack of a river
line, the far bank held by the enemy. (For prin-
ciples governing operations at a river line, see
FM 100-5.)
b. The battalion warning and attack orders
usually include-
(1) Information of the enemy and the ter-
rain of the crossing area.
(2) Mission, hour of crossing, attack position,
crossing site, zone of action, and objec-
tives of the company to include any di-
versionary actions to deceive the enemy.
(3) Plan of supporting fires.
(4) Engineer material and men to assist in

234
 the crossing, including where and when
they will be available.
(5) Communication plan.

227. RECONNAISSANCE. a. The battalion order for

a river crossing operation is preceded by a warn-
ing order. Upon receipt of the warning order, the
company commander begins his reconnaissance of
the proposed crossing site and obtains information
to include-
(1) Enemy locations and weapons in the
company zone of action.
(2) Route from the battalion assembly area
to the company attack position.
(3) Attack position.
(4) Routes from the attack position to the
crossing site.
(5) Suitable terrain features to guide the di-
rection of attack.
(6) Width, depth, and current of the river
at the proposed crossing site, and the
condition of the river bottom and both
banks.
(7) Disposition and plans of the supporting
engineer unit.
b. The company commander discusses this in-
formation with the engineer unit leader whose
equipment the company will use during the actual
crossing.

228. ASSEMBLY AREA AND ATTACK POSITION. a.

The assembly area for a river crossing is similar
85:3696 O--4:m----IE 235
to any assembly area. Plans and orders for the
crossing are completed in this area.
b. The attack position for a river crossing is the
area where infantry troops are met by guides,
which usually are furnished by the engineers, and
are conducted to the crossing craft, preparatory to
the movement to the near bank. Desirable charac-
teristics of the company attack position for a river
crossing include-
(1) Ease of identification at night.
(2) Accessibility to trucks or carrying parties
which transport the crossing craft.
(3) Nearness to easily identified, concealed,
and covered foot routes to the river.
(4) Nearness to the actual crossing sites.
(5) Concealment for the assembly of craft
and other means of crossing.
(6) Terrain suitable for the distribution of
assault platoons parallel to the crossing
front. This distribution allows troops to
proceed directly and without delay to
embarkation points and permits them to
leave the near bank at the same time
along the entire front.
c. For a detailed discussion of assembly areas
and attack positions, see paragraphs 37 and 38.

229. PLANS AND PREPARATIONS. a. Based on the

battalion order and on additional information se-
cured by reconnaissance, the company commander
makes his detailed plans for the movement to the
river, for the crossing, and for the action after
landing.

236
 b. To make the crossing with minimum confusion
and delay, the company commander divides the
company into boat groups (fig. 51) for the move-
ment from the assembly area to the far bank of
the river. The company's boat allotment is sub-
allotted to platoon leaders (boat group leaders),
and tactical unity is maintained if the situation
permits. Boat groups rehearse their loading and
landing operations, preferably with the same en-
gineers who will support the group in its actual
crossing. The formation used for the movement
to the river places boat groups in the same rela-
tive positions they will be in when crossing.
c. The company commander closely checks that
men are instructed in the action to take during
the crossing, to include paddling, safety, and limi-
tations on firing.
d. As its initial objective, the rifle company is
given a part of the battalion's initial objective.
This objective is a terrain feature whose capture
neutralizes hostile direct fire from that feature on
the crossing sites.

230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS. a. If the

company is in the battalion assault echelon, enough
assault or storm boats or other crossing craft are
provided to move the entire company in one trip.
(See fig. 52.)
b. Tactical unity within the platoons is main-
tained as far as possible in assigning men to cross-
ing craft. One satisfactory method for distribut-
ing the elements of an assault company is as
follows:

237
--~~ : '._ --

IRIER

BOAT BOAT BOAT BOAT BOAT

' NO 5 - NO 4 - NO 3 -- NO 2 '.-- NO I

RIFLE P LAT SGT PLATOON - ASST RIFLE

SQUAD RIFLE HQ(-) PLAT SGT S SQUAD
SQUAD RL 57 MM
TEAM SQUAD
LMG
TEAM

a 57-m. . rifle squad.

238
 BOAT GROUP BOAT GROUP BOAT GROUP
NO 3 NO NO

'.'~ I : ,; -, HQ// & D 4CO

I \ Q
<' k 4}.x, , SECTRION
MORTAR /

| N02

C A DIVIDED INTO
IBOAT
GROUPS AND SUBDIVIDED
OINTO BOAT TEAMS PRI OR
El1 \F O 3
NO ~ TO LEAVING ASSEMBLY

LEGEND \

I ASSAULT BOAT WITH CREW

C BOAT GROUP

Figure52. Movement to a river, showing attack position

and a typical organization of boat groups.

239
 (1) Leading wave. Assault platoons (with
attachments) and forward observers
from the 60-mm mortar sections and the
81-mm mortar platoon.
(2) Second wave. Company command group,
weapons platoon (less detachments), sup-
port platoon (if any), attachments from
the heavy weapons company, and artil-
lery and heavy mortar company forward
observers.
c. If the company is the battalion reserve, it may
cross on the craft which initially carried the as-
-sault echelon, or it may cross as a unit on a foot
bridge or ferry.

231. WIDTH OF CROSSING FRONT. a. The crossing

front for the company is given by the battalion
commander and he assigns each company a definite
zone of action. The frontage approximates that
for normal terrain.
b. The company commander determines zones of
action for the platoons. In assigning platoon zones,
the company commander considers the following
factors: the amount and type of enemy resistance
expected during the actual crossing, the condition
of both banks of the river, the width and depth of
the river, the speed and direction of the current,
and the amount and type of crossing equipment
available. These factors may require that gaps
exist between the zones of action of platoons; how-
ever, tactical unity of the elements is preserved.
c. For protection during the crossing and ease
of deployment after the landing, lateral intervals

240
between craft afloat resemble those between cor-
responding units on land.

232. FORMATION FOR THE CROSSING. The rifle

company usually crosses with the three rifle pla-
toons abreast, each reinforced with a 57-mm rifle
squad. Company aid men are attached to each pla-
toon. The remainder of the weapons platoon and
the company command group normally follow in
the wave behind the rifle platoons.

233. ORDERS. To give squad and platoon leaders

the maximum time for reconnaissance and plan-
ning, the company commander issues timely warn-
ing orders. The final order for the crossing is as
complete, specific, and detailed as practicable. It
includes instructions for the movement from the
assembly area to the near bank, the crossing of
the river, and the capture of the initial objective.
Upon capture of the initial objective, the company
commander usually gives additional orders for the
continuation of the attack. Besides the data fur-
nished in usual attack orders, the river crossing
order covers the following:
a. Location of the attack position and routes to
it, and the time of departure from the assembly
area.
b. Method of march control to the attack po-
sition; for example, guides, control points, and
formation.
c. Instructions for forming boat groups.
d. Allotment of assault boats to platoons (boat
groups).

241
234. MOVEMENT TO THE RIVER. a. The company
moves to the attack position under battalion con-
trol, when practicable. The company marches in
boat teams as organized for the crossing.
b. Upon arrival in the attack position, the com-
pany is met by engineer guides who lead boat
groups to their boats. Boat teams, accompanied
by engineer crews for the craft, are guided along
previously marked and secured routes, carrying
their boats to the river. The movement is timed
and coordinated so that no pause is made at the
river's edge, and boats of the leading wave are
launched at approximately the same time.

235. CROSSING THE RIVER. Engineers usually are

in charge of the crossing craft; however, keeping
direction from embarkation to landing areas is the
responsibility of the senior infantryman in each
boat. If the craft does not operate under its own
power, the boat teams paddle. Each craft starts
across the river as soon as loaded and goes as
rapidly as possible to the opposite bank. No at-
tempt is made to maintain formation of any kind
while on the water, although intervals between
craft should be maintained. No effort is made to
counteract the natural drift unless the current is
so swift that it causes an appreciable drift down-
stream from the proposed landing site. In such a
case, the need for counteracting this drift is an-
ticipated by the commander conferring with sup-
porting engineers. Firing from craft rarely is
attempted in daylight and never at night. After
reaching the far bank, the troops debark rapidly,

242
deploy, and attack the initial company objective.
Engineer crews return the craft immediately for
further operations.

236. SUPPORT OF CROSSING. a. Air, artillery,

heavy mortar, and heavy weapons company sup-
port for a river crossing is arranged by higher
commanders. The plan of supporting fires is stated
in the battalion attack order. The weapons pla-
toon of an assault company is not used to provide
supporting fire during the actual crossing. It
crosses with the company and, after landing on
the far bank of the river, it supports the attack.
The weapons platoon of a reserve rifle company
initially may occupy firing positions on the near
side of the river to fire on targets on the far side.
b. The location of the heavy weapons company
in a river crossing operation usually is as follows:
(1) One section of the machine gun platoon
ordinarily is attached to each assault
company until the initial company objec-
tive is captured. Thereafter, the platoon
is used as directed by the battalion com-
mander. It may remain attached to as-
sault companies, be in direct support of
assault companies, or be in general sup-
port of the battalion.
(2) One section of the 75-mm rifle platoon
ordinarily is attached to each assault
company until the initial company ob-
jective is captured. Thereafter, the pla-
toon is used in its normal role.
(3) The 81-mm mortar platoon is used on the

243
 near bank in general support of the cross-
ing. A mortar observer moves with each
assault company. The mortar platoon
crosses the river as soon as the initial
battalion objective is captured.
c. A daylight crossing usually is made under
cover of a smoke screen laid by aircraft, artillery,
heavy mortars, 81-mm mortars, or chemical units.
d. For a discussion of the regimental tank and
heavy mortar companies in support of a river
crossing operation, see FM's 7-35 and 7-37.

237. ATTACK AFTER CROSSING. After crossing,

troops in the leading wave promptly clear the river
bank. If the actual crossing of the water is op-
posed, or if the initial company objective is close
to the river, no attempt is made initially to re-
organize from boat teams to platoon groups. The
platoon leader regains control of the boat teams
and reorganizes his platoon as soon. as he can.
When the actual crossing of the water is unop-
posed, individual boat teams go immediately to
previously selected locations and are reorganized
into their normal platoon organization. Rifle pla-
toons then advance to the initial objective. Sub-
sequent operations resemble those for any other
attack. (See par. 189.)

238. SECURITY. After making a river crossing, the

company promptly establishes normal security. In
addition to close-in protection, the company usually
patrols vigorously, especially the unprotected

244
 flanks, to secure early information of enemy lo-
cations and activities.

239. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Ammunition required

for the initial operation on the hostile bank is car-
ried by the men in the assault craft. The company
commander may have extra rifle ammunition car-
ried, and he may have men (in addition to the
regular ammunition bearers) carry extra ammu-
nition for the rocket launcher, the 57-mm rifle, the
light machine gun, and the 60-mm mortars. The
battalion establishes an ammunition supply point
on the far side of the river as early as possible.
The pioneer and ammunition platoon moves this
ammunition forward to the rifle companies.

240. COMMUNICATION. Communication during

- the attack of a river line is similar to communica-
tion in other attack situations. Radio and visual
communication may be restricted until leading ele-
ments reach the attack position or until the attack
is discovered. Messengers (and wire communica-
tion, if available) are used during the movement
to the river and after the landing on the far bank.
The battalion communication section lays a wire
head to the river and extends it across the river
as soon as practicable. Company communication
men operate this wire head.

Section VII. ATTACK IN WOODS

241. GENERAL. a. An attacking force usually avoids

isolated wooded areas in the enemy's defensive

245
position. It bypasses such areas on either or both
flanks while neutralizing their edges with fire and
smoke. If avoiding the woods is impracticable and
their possession is necessary, the attacker en-
velops them. If they cannot be enveloped, then
they must be attacked frontally.
b. When woods are attacked frontally, the attack
consists of the seizure and occupation of the near
edge, the advance through the woods, and the exit
from the woods. This section is concerned pri-
marily with the advance through the woods.

242. FACTORS INFLUENCING OPERATIONS IN

WOODS. The following factors require that an
attack in woods be planned and coordinated care-
fully:
a. Knowledge of the woods. Accurate information
is needed concerning the density of the woods, and
the location of roads, trails, streams, landmarks,
enemy dispositions, and obstacles inside the woods.
Much of this information can be obtained from
aerial photographs and intensive ground patroling.
b. Roads and trails. Key points along roads and
trails usually are defended heavily by the enemy.
The company plan of attack includes provisions to
clear the enemy from these roads and trails in or-
der to allow the use of vehicles for supply and
evacuation and the use of tanks to support the at-
tack. Continued advance without securing such
roads and trails may result in considerable diffi-
culty or failure of the attack.
c'. Enemy automatic fires. Defensive automatic
weapons fire along existing or prepared fire lanes.

246
Such weapons ordinarily do not have long or wide
fields of fire, but they are extremely difficult to
locate. They usually are eliminated by small groups
attacking their flanks and rear.
d. Effects of high explosive fire. Tree bursts increase
the area which can be covered by artillery and mor-
tar fires. The enemy usually minimizes the effects
of such fires against him by building overhead
cover for his positions. The assault rifle company
normally is exposed to hostile artillery and mortar
fires. Areas which are under these fires should
be crossed rapidly or detoured.
e. Antipersonnel mines and booby traps. If the enemy
has time to prepare his position, he will place anti-
personnel mines and booby traps throughout the
area. The problems involved in their detection and
removal vary with the density of the woods and
the underbrush.
f. Snipers and raiding parties. Woods give excellent
concealment for snipers and raiding parties of
either side. Special precautions are taken to pro-
tect company command and supply groups in the
exercise of their duties.

243. PLANS. a. Formations. 'Dispositions depend on

the frontage, the difficulty of movement, the visi-
bility, and the enemy strength and characteristics.
In woods made up of large trees, there usually is
little undergrowth, and leading elements may be
deployed completely. In woods made up of small,
dense trees, or where undergrowth is heavy, a line
of squad columns often is the best formation for
the leading elements of the company. Security ele-

247
ments precede each leading unit, reconnoitering to
the front and flanks. Rear units of the company
ordinarily follow in column. Unless other elements
of the battalion follow closely, some protection to
the rear is provided.
b.Maintenance of direction, contact, and control. Diffi-
culties in maintaining direction, control, and con-
tact require control to be given to platoon leaders.
To prevent the loss of direction, a magnetic azi-
muth normally is given each platoon. To aid con-
trol, the company commander and his command
group usually follow closely behind the center of
the leading echelon. The rate of advance depends
on the visibility and must permit contact with
adjacent units. This contact is by connecting
groups. Periodic halts restore contact and co-
hesion, and phase lines may aid control.
c. Supporting fires. Because of control, coordina-
tion, and observation difficulties, direct-fire weap-
ons, such as heavy machine guns, 57-mm and 75-
mm rifles, and tanks frequently are attached to the
assault rifle platoons. Effective use of tanks de-
pends primarily on the visibility in the woods and
the presence of roads and trails. In this type of
combat, tanks are protected closely by foot ele-
ments. Limited observation and the presence of
tree masks reduce the effectiveness of close support
by artillery. Consequently, the use of 60-mm and
81-mm mortars from openspaces in the woods as-
sumes added importance.
d. Support platoon. If a support is held out by the
company commander, it is kept close to the assault
echelon.

248
 e. Communication. Radio communication often is
limited greatly by the trees, and wire and mes-
sengers more often are used. When the woods -are
dense and enemy infiltration is possible, wire lines
are policed often and thoroughly to prevent tap-
ping and cutting by the enemy. Messenger com-
munication is slow because of movement diffi-
culties.

244. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. Seizure of the

near edge of the woods is similar to any other
attack. While the reorganization in the near edge
of the woods takes place, the company commander
gives instructions for the advance through the
woods. The company starts the advance as soon
as the reorganization is complete or on order from
the battalion commander. A company formation is
adopted which helps maintain contact with adja-
cent companies and which protects exposed flanks.
Assault platoons should not dissipate their
strength by furnishing numerous connecting
groups. If the advance is unopposed, short halts
are made to check direction and contact. Such
halts are made best at well defined lines or areas;
for example, trails, streams, or near edges of clear-
ings. If satisfactory areas or lines are not found
in the woods, halts may be made on a time schedule
or after advancing a specified distance on an
azimuth.
b. When resistance is encountered, the company
uses frontal and flanking action to overcome it.
Much of the combat consists of small-unit actions.
Success depends on information gained by patrol

249
action before the formulation of plans and on in-
telligent, aggressive leadership by platoon and
squad leaders. When the woods are dense, ele-
ments of the support platoon may be used to mop
up the enemy in areas overrun by the assault pla-
toons. The artillery normally fires against rear-
ward targets or areas. Close fire support missions
are supplied by 81-mm and heavy mortars.
c. The exit from the far edge of the woods is
similar to any other attack.

Section VIII. RAIDS

245. EXPLANATION OF TERM. A raid is an attack

made to accomplish a specific purpose inside the
enemy position, with no intention of holding any
ground.

246. PURPOSE OF A RAID. Raids are made to cap-

ture prisoners, to capture or destroy mat6riel, or
to obtain information of hostile dispositions,
strength, works, intentions, or methods of defense.

247. CHARACTERISTICS OF A RAID. A raid is char-

acterized by the immediate withdrawal of the raid-
ing force after accomplishing its mission and by
the fact that both flanks of the raiding force are
exposed during the conduct of the operation. The
withdrawal is the most difficult part of the opera-
tion, and flank security is given added importance.

248. TYPES OF RAIDS. a. Raids are classified as sup-

ported and unsupported. In a supported raid, use

250
is made of heavy fire support. In an unsupported
raid, heavy fire support is planned but used only
on call.
b. Supported raids may be made in daylight or
darkness. For protection, they depend on surprise
and the fires of supporting weapons. When the
raiding force is as large as a company, or when
the mission requires that the raiding force remain
in the hostile position for any length of time, pro-
tective fires of supporting weapons usually are
needed, particularly during the withdrawal.
c. Unsupported raids usually are conducted at
night without the fires of supporting weapons and
depend primarily on surprise and darkness for
protection. Such a raid ordinarily is executed by
a force smaller than a company.

249. ORDERS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.

The rifle company as a unit usually is used only in
a supported raid. The battalion commander gives
the mission, the objective, and the time. He may
request the recommendations of the company com-
mander for the routes of advance and withdrawal
and for planning the fire support. The battalion
commander arranges for rehearsals, and he may
prescribe other details or leave them to the com-
pany commander's judgment.

250. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT

RAID. For planning a raid, a thorough reconnais-
sance is made by the company commander and his
unit leaders resembling that for a night attack.
Night reconnaissance, as well as daylight recon-
853696 0-49 17 251
naissance, is desirable. Besides the personal and
map reconnaissance made by the company com-
mander and his unit leaders, patrols reconnoiter
the approaches to the enemy lines. Reconnaissance
before the night of the raid tries to obtain infor-
mation of the enemy strength and dispositions, and
routes of advance and withdrawal.

251. ORGANIZATION FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT

RAID. The company commander organizes his com-
pany into a number of assault and support parties.
Each party is organized and equipped to accom-
plish a specific part of the over-all mission. As-
sault parties eliminate hostile resistance en route
to the objective, furnish frontal protection for the
raiding force while it is on the objective, and cover
the withdrawal. Support parties do specific tasks
within the objective; for example, guarding
prisoners, removing or destroying enemy ma-
teriel, or searching for information of intelligence
value. Support parties furnish flank protection
and attack unexpected resistance. Assault parties
normally are organized from the rifle platoon and
are reinforced with automatic weapons. Support
parties normally are organized from the weapons
platoon, operating without crew-served weapons,
and from the remainder of the company.

252. EQUIPMENT FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.

a. The company commander indicates the equip-
ment for the men of the company raiding force,
which depends on the mission. If the raid is made

252
to capture prisoners or gain information, subma-
chine gun, knives, and blackjacks may be used.
b. Since raids often require heavy firepower at
short ranges, a large number of automatic weapons
and grenades are carried by the men.
c. Men's hands and faces may be blackened with
charcoal, mud, potblack, or grease, and a special
identification is worn on the uniform.

253. PASSAGE OF ENEMY OBSTACLES DURING A

SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID. A raid against a well-
organized position usually must overcome enemy
barbed wire entanglements and other obstacles.
Barbed wire is cut by the leading elements. If the
wire is too extensive for rapid cutting, bangalore
torpedoes are used to blow out sections of it. The
leading elements of the raiding force include men
experienced in detecting and disarming mines and
booby traps.

254. SUPPORTING FIRES FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT

RAID. Supporting weapons of battalion, of regi-
ment, and of the artillery fire their supporting and
protective fires during the raid. Preparation fires
before the raid may be used. They should be of
short duration because they are likely to alert the
enemy. Arrangements for fires may be made by
the battalion commander in close coordination with
the company commander. Preparation and sup-
porting fires are used as in other attacks. The
protective fires isolate the objective, prevent or
limit hostile counterattacks, and aid in keeping
open the route of withdrawal. All fires of the

253
area are coordinated so that the exact location,
the direction, and the time of the raid are kept
secret.

255. RALLYING POINTS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT

RAID. The purpose of a rallying point is to assem-
ble elements of the company which are separated
during the raid or which complete their specified
missions and are ready to withdraw. A rallying
point is selected in the vicinity of the objective
area. A rallying point or a series of rallying points
may be selected along the routes of advance and
withdrawal. A rallying point within the friendly
lines is used to aid the prompt collection and trans-
mission of materiel, prisoners, and information
gathered in the raid.

256. FLANK PROTECTION FOR SUPPORTED NIGHT

RAID. The company commander plans to protect
his flanks during the raid. He protects his flanks
by planning artillery and mortar concentrations on
probable avenues of enemy approach, and he sends
out patrols from his support parties to the flanks
and to key terrain features. Flank security ele-
ments are given definite instructions regarding
their dispositions and the time or signal for the
withdrawal.

257. WITHDRAWAL OF A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.

Upon completion of its mission, the raiding force
withdraws. The company commander orders the
withdrawal by a prearranged signal. When the
signal is given, the raiding force, less the covering

254
force, assembles at the previously designated rally-
ing point. Withdrawal usually is along the same
route used for the advance. It is covered by the
fires of the covering force and the fires of support-
ing weapons. As the company withdraws, flank
security elements or patrols withdraw at the same
time. These security elements withdraw along the
flanks of the company and give close-in protection
for those flanks. The covering force withdraws as
instructed by the raid commander and it usually
withdraws shortly after the main force.

258. REHEARSALS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.

Time often is available for rehearsals, particularly
in a stabilized situation. At least one daylight and
one night rehearsal are desirable. Preferably,
these rehearsals are conducted on ground similar
to the area to be raided, and the men carry and
use the equipment ordered for the raid.

259. CONDUCT OF A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID. The

attack phase of a night raid resembles a night at-
tack (par. 224). The control of elements which
are assigned special missions is given to the leaders
of those elements. The raid commander, however,
coordinates the actions of all elements of the force.
During the raid, he decides when to call for, shift,
or lift supporting and protective fires.

260. SUPPORTED DAYLIGHT RAID. The plans and

preparation for a supported daylight raid are simi-
lar to those for a night raid. Smoke may be used
to conceal the company. The attack phase of a

255
daylight raid resembles a daylight attack (par.
189).

261. UNSUPPORTED RAIDS. a. An unsupported raid

depends primarily on surprise. Surprise may be
obtained by stealth or by extremely rapid attack
and withdrawal. Supporting and protective fires
are planned similar to a supported raid, but they
are not used unless called for by the raiding force.
An unsupported raid of company size is excep-
tional.
b. Unsupported raids may be used at night or
under other conditions of reduced visibility or
when the enemy position is organized hastily and
surprise, through stealth or rapid attack, is likely.

262. RAID BY AN ELEMENT OF A RIFLE COMPANY.

The rifle company commander may be directed to
conduct a raid, using an element of the company.
Such a raid may be supported or unsupported. An
element of the company is selected as the raiding
force in an unsupported raid only when the situa-
tion is such that the raiding force can accomplish
its mission by surprise without the aid of support-
ing weapons. Such conditions exist at night or
during periods of reduced visibility. The company
commander selects the leader and the units to make
the raid. Subject to instructions from the battal-
ion commander, the company commander gives the
mission, the objective, and routes of advance and
withdrawal. If the raid will be supported, the
company commander arranges with the battalion

256
commander for fire support. He conducts rehear-
sals on ground resembling the raid area.

Section IX. INFILTRATION

263. GENERAL. a. Infiltration is a method of ad-

vancing unobserved into areas which are under
hostile control or observation.,
b. The missions which may be given an infiltrat-
ing force include the following:
(1) Obtain information of enemy strength,
dispositions, and supplies.
(2) Disrupt hostile communication.
(3) Attack and destroy a supply point, a
bridge, a command post, or some other
key installation.
(4) Attack against the rear of a hostile po-
sition, together with a coordinated at-
tack from its front.
(5) Confuse and harass the enemy concur-
rently with other operations.
c. Weather and terrain considerations influence
infiltration, which is accomplished best under con-
ditions of limited visibility. Fog, heavy rain, dark-
ness, heavy undergrowth, and extremely rugged
terrain make control and coordination difficult, but
they help infiltrating groups reach their objec-
tives without detection. If a river or stream pene-
trates the enemy lines, rafts or small boats may
be used.
d. The size of infiltrating groups is determined
by their mission. If the mission entails securing
information only, two or three carefully selected

257
men may be more successful than a large group.
On the other hand, units as large as a rifle com-
pany may be directed to infiltrate through the en-
emy lines and attack against the rear of the hos-
tile position, coordinating this attack with a front-
al assault by another unit.
e. During infiltration, control is given to lower
leaders, who- select and coordinate their own
routes, formations, and rate of advance.
f. Secrecy is needed for infiltrations. If a man
is given the mission of securing enemy informa-
tion by infiltration, he penetrates the hostile lines,
gets the desired information, and returns with the
information in time for it to be used. He acts se-
cretly. In other cases, it may be necessary to main-
tain'secrecy only until the objective is reached;
for example, the attack of a supply point, the de-
struction of a bridge, or the disruption of commu-
nication.

264. INFILTRATION IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN

ATTACK BY A LARGE FORCE. a. General. Before an
attack by a larger force, the rifle company or pla-
toon may be directed to infiltrate through the hos-
tile forward defense during the day or at night,
and then to attack enemy reserves or command,
communication, and supply facilities in conjunc-
tion with the main attack of the larger force. If a
daylight attack is planned, the infiltration should
be completed at least one-half hour before dawn
so that the preparations for the attack can be com-
pleted under cover of darkness.

258
b. Preparatory measures.
(1) Before such action, reconnaissance is
made by the unit leaders. A study is
made of maps and aerial photographs,
and information is obtained from the
leaders or patrols which have operated in
the hostile area. A warning order is
issued in time to permit small-unit lead-
ers to make their reconnaissance. An
initial assembly area is selected within
friendly lines. Points at which the unit
will pass the friendly outpost are select-
ed, and arrangements are made for pass-
ing through them. Reconnaissance of the
routes is made from the initial assembly
area to the friendly outpost line.
(2) Leaders plan the route of advance beyond
the outpost line. When extensive gaps
exist between hostile forward elements,
it may be possible for the entire unit to
move together. If only small gaps exist,
the movement may have to be made by
small groups advancing over separate
routes. If more than one route is used,
each group leader plans his route. As
few routes as possible are used, since con-
trol and reassembly of several groups is
difficult. The planning, made principally
from maps and sketches, seeks to locate
ridges, roads, streams, and other land-
marks that may be used to help maintain
direction.
(3) Rallying points are selected for unit or

259
 groups to reassemble if surprised or scat-
tered.
(4) If the mission requires the unified action
of the groups, assembly areas within the
enemy lines are selected. These areas
should be identified easily by a landmark
that can be found during darkness. Al-
ternate assembly areas are selected.
c. Plan. Careful and detailed planning, similar
to that for a night attack, is made. Because of the
nature of infiltration missions, additional planning
is necessary for secrecy and for aiding the move-
ment during periods of limited visibility. These
additional plans provide that-
(1) Guides are obtained to lead the unit to
the friendly outpost line. Frequently,
guides for the route through the enemy
position are secured from patrols famil-
iar with that area or from friendly gue-
rillas.
(2) Each group moves in column. Distances
are regulated by unit commanders and
security is provided to the front, flanks,
and rear.
(3) If the weapons platoon is used, weapons
are hand carried. If the movement is
made by several small groups, weapons
platoon squads are attached to the
groups.
(4) No definite rate of advance is given. The
rate depends on the visibility, the terrain,
and the enemy activity. Frequently,
groups may halt for long periods while

260
 enemy patrols are allowed to pass. Plan-
ning allows time for such eventualities.
Secrecy is more important than speed.
(5) Radios or pyrotechnics ordinarily are not
used during the movement. They are car-
ried for use after the attack is launched
in rear of the enemy lines.
d. Orders. Orders are detailed, and each man is
told exactly what he is to do. Orders include di-
rections for the movement to the assembly area in
the rear of the enemy lines and for the attack. If
the attack is part of a large-scale action, coordina-
tion is made with fires supporting the main attack
to prevent casualties from such fires.
e. Conduct of movement.
(1) Each group advances silently. Its leader
is at its head or where he best can control
its movement. A noncommissioned offi-
cer at the rear of each column prevents
straggling. Each column leader constant-
ly checks the route and direction.
(2) Each column provides its own protection
to the front and flanks. Enemy outposts
and patrols are avoided. If they cannot
be avoided, they are eliminated as quietly
as possible.
f. Action on reaching assembly area. A group ap-
proaching the assembly area within the enemy
lines is halted while the area is reconnoitered. If
no enemy is found, the group'moves into the area
and establishes security. Leaders reconnoiter for
whatever action is required by the mission. Any
needed changes in plans and orders are made so

261
that the attack is begun as planned and coordi-
nated with the main attack.

265. INFILTRATION DURING AN ATTACK. Small

groups may be sent forward by infiltration during
an attack. When an attack is slowed down or
stopped, infiltrating elements may infiltrate into '
enemy-controlled areas to cause confusion, give the
impression of an attack from a different direction,
or disrupt communication or supply. Infiltrating
elements may consist of two or three men, or of
entire squads.

Section X. OTHER OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

266. REFERENCES. For characteristics of combat

and tactical principles governing other operations,
see FM 100-5 and other appropriate references
listed in appendix VIII.

262
 CHAPTER 8

RIFLE COMPANY, DEFENSIVE COMBAT

Section I. GENERAL

267. EMPLOYMENT. The rifle company of a front-

line battalion is used to reorganize, occupy, and
defend a company defense area on the main line of
resistance, or to constitute the battalion reserve.

268. PRINCIPLES OF DEFENSE. In organizing and

conducting the defense of his area, a rifle company
commander applies tactical principles to give the
maximum coordination of troop locations, terrain,
and fire power. These principles include-
a. Organization of key terrain. A defensive position
can be defended best by organizing key points and
covering by fire the intervals between and ap-
proaches to these key points. A commander evalu-
ates his terrain (par. 269). Based on this evalua-
tion, he selects and organizes the key terrain fea-
tures which give the best defensive strength to his
position.
b. Organization in depth. Any defensive position
can be penetrated if the attacker is willing to pay
the price. Therefore, the defender cannot defend
on a thin line. Depth is essential. A commander
organizes and places his troops and weapons in

263
depth so that, if the enemy is successful in pene-
trating the main line of resistance, a unit to the
rear can limit the penetration and thereby pre-
vent a major penetration.
c. Mutual support. Units of a defensive position,
across the front and from front to rear, are mu-
tually supporting. Each unit on the main line of
resistance is placed so that it can support by fire
the adjacent unit on either flank. Units placed in
depth support the units to their front so that if
the enemy succeeds in penetrating the forward de-
fense, he immediately comes under the fire of the
next rearward unit and is prevented from reor-
ganizing.
d. All-around defense. A unit organizes its posi-
tion to meet an enemy attack from any direction.
The extent of all-around defense depends on the
type of operation, the units involved, and the ter-
rain. An independent unit operating in close ter-
rain has greater need for all-around defense than
a unit which is part of a larger force and operat-
ing in open terrain. A unit may defend in all di-
rections from its primary positions, or it may pre-
pare supplementary positions and shift troops to
meet threats from the flanks or rear.
e. Coordinated fire plan. Each unit plans and co-
ordinates the fires of its weapons to obtain the
maximum effectiveness of the weapons, the com-
plete coverage of the battle position and its ap-
proaches, and continuous fire on the attacker. Unit
plans provide for the opening of fires, for signals
for final protective fires, for rates of fire, for mu-
tual support of adjacent units, and for fires to be

264
delivered under conditions of reduced visibility.
Fire plans of smaller units are supervised and co-
ordinated by the larger units.
f. Coordinated antitank defense plan. Plans for the
use of antitank weapons, minefields, and obstacles
are coordinated to protect the battle position from
a tank attack or a combined tank-infantry attack.
This is done to disorganize and delay hostile tanks
in front of the main line of resistance and to de-
stroy or eject the tanks if a penetration is made.
Unit plans provide for the use of all antitank
means under the commander's direct control.
g. Flexibility. Flexibility in the defense is gained
by preparing supplementary positions, by holding
troops in support or reserve, and by massing sup-
porting fires in any area. The rifle platoon gains
flexibility by preparing supplementary positions
to which troops can be moved. It is normal for the
rifle company and larger units to use about one-
third of their force in rear of the main line of re-
sistance prepared to meet an attack from any di-
rection. This adds flexibility to the defense since
these forces can be used to limit penetration, to
protect the flanks and rear, or to eject the enemy
by a counterattack. Flexibility is gained from sup-
porting weapons by using them under centralized
control, as this control aids the massing of support-
ing fires on a given target area.

269. TERRAIN FACTORS. In making his terrain

study, the commander considers how he best can
use and best deny to the enemy the following
factors:

265
 a. Critical terrain features. A terrain feature is
considered critical if it is a key point or area on
which an operation depends, for either the attacker
or the defender. Examples are a dominant hill or
ridge, shoulders of a valley, a road or trail, a built-
up area, or a communication center.
b. Observation and fields of fire.
(1) Observation provides information of the
enemy and of friendly troops. Detailed
observation forward of the battle posi-
tion is used to direct fire on the enemy
and to determine his plans. Long-range
and close-in observation is maintained by
all units. Close-in observation is gained
by organizing positions on the military
crest (fig. 53); this also protects long-
range observation located near the topo-
graphical crest. Coordination of obser-
vation by each unit obtains overlapping
and detailed coverage of the area. Enemy
observation into the battle position is de-
nied by the use of security forces and
fires of friendly weapons.

DIRECTIONOF
ENEMY APPROACH

A-TOPOGRAPHICALCREST
B-MILITARY CREST
C-REVERSESLOPE
- _ LINE OF OBSERVATIONAND FLAT-TRAJECTORYFIRE

Figure 53. Explanation of terrain terms.

266
 (2) The effectiveness of direct-fire weapons
depends on their fields of fire. When
fields of fire are not good, they are im-
proved by cutting or burning weeds,
grass, and crops, clearing brush and
trees, demolishing buildings, and cutting
lanes through woods. The clearing should
not warn the enemy of the battle position
location or destroy its concealment. The
organizing of terrain which gives good
fields of fire, such as open, fiat terrain,
requires fewer men and weapons than
close terrain with poor fields of fire.
c. Obstacles. In organizing a defensive position,
natural obstacles which will hinder the advance of
the enemy are evaluated and used. By proper
evaluation of natural obstacles, more effective use
of artificial obstacles can be made. Because obsta-
cles not covered by fire are of little value, the po-
sition is organized so that they can be covered by
observed fire.
d. Concealment and cover. Concealment and cover
are used to prevent enemy air and ground observa-
tion of troops and installations. Irregular wooded
terrain furnishes ideal protection from enemy air
and ground observation but limits friendly fields
of fire and observation. If the terrain is flat and
open with limited cover and concealment, time
must be allowed for troops to dig in and camou-
flage their positions.
e. Avenues of approach.
(1) Avenues of approach within the battle
position to be used for supply, evacua-
85.3696 0-49--18 267
 tion, movement of troops into forward
positions, and counterattack must be
evaluated as to their condition, cover, and
concealment from enemy observation.
(2) Avenues of approach available to the en-
emy are considered in terms of roads,
terrain corridors, cross compartments,
and areas where the ground favors cross
country movement into the defender's po-
sition from the front or flanks.
(3) After evaluating the terrain, the com-
mander plans the organization of his po-
sition.

Section II. FRONT-LINE RIFLE COMPANY

270. MISSION. The mission of the front-line rifle

company in the defense is, with the support of
other weapons, to stop the enemy by fire in front
of the main line of resistance, to repel his assault
by close combat if he reaches it, and exceptionally
to eject him by a counterattack.

271. DISPOSITIONS. A rifle company assigned to

the defense of an area on the main line of resist-
ance organizes its area according to the principles
of defense. It covers its front with fire, coordi-
nates its fires with and mutually supports the units
on its flanks, gives close rifle protection for the
supporting weapons placed within its area, and
provides for all-around defense. The ability to
place accurate fire on the enemy forward of the
battle position requires good observation. To ob-

268
tain this observation, a forward slope frequently is
occupied. A reverse slope position, however, may
be preferable if observation can be obtained from
the flanks or rear, and if the terrain on the reverse
slope permits the placing of a heavy volume of
accurate fire on the crest and approaches around
the flanks. The terrain may make it desirable to
occupy a combination of forward and reverse
slopes.

272. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. Following the

receipt of the battalion defense order, the company
commander's actions follow a general sequence
called troop leading procedure. The purpose of
this procedure is to help the company commander
remember all the essential actions, to help him
make maximum use of the time available, and to
help him coordinate the actions of his unit leaders.
In the allocation of the time available, the company
commander allows enough time for his lower unit
leaders to perform their duties and the men of the
company to organize the area. Plans are made and
orders given so that there is a minimum of delay
in beginning the organization of the ground. The
company commander's troop leading procedure is
as follows:
a. Makes tentative plan of defense. This gives him
a basis for later action and allows him to orient,
early, the leaders of the company and the support-
ing units so that they can begin certain tasks be-
fore the company order is given. This tentative
plan includes the general dispositions and missions

269
of troops and weapons within the company defense
area.
b. Plans movement of troops and issuance of his order.
(1) His early planning and early issuance of
orders for the movement of troops assist
control and secure the timely arrival of
the troops at the defensive position. This
movement normally is controlled by his
company executive officer. He plans
where, when, and to whom his order is
to be issued.
(2) He selects an observation point from
which all, or at least the most critical
portion, of the company defense area can
be observed. He designates this point as
the place where he later will issue the
company order.
(3) He designates the time when the order
will be issued. In selecting this time, he
considers the total time available, the
time needed for adequate reconnaissance
by unit leaders, and the time needed for
the actual preparation of the position.
He allots enough time for preparing po-
sitions-even if this may prevent a de-
tailed reconnaissance on his part.
(4) He designates the persons who will re-
ceive the company defense order. These
include the platoon leaders, and they may
include others, such as the artillery and
mortar forward observers, the communi-
cation sergeant, and leaders of crew-

270
 served weapons located within the com-
pany area.
c. Plans his reconnaissance. Before starting his ter-
rain reconnaissance, the company commander
makes a brief map reconnaissance, determines the
localities to be visited, and selects the route. His
reconnaissance is as detailed as time permits. He
gives major attention to the most critical locali-
ties. He announces his route so that he can be lo-
cated quickly.
d. Arranges coordination with other commanders. Ad-
jacent and supporting unit commanders normally
are present at the time the company commander
receives the battalion defense order, and arrange-
ments for maintaining coordination are made with
these commanders at this time.
e. Makes his reconnaissance.
(1) The company commander leaves the area
where he received the battalion order and
goes on his personal ground reconnais-
sance. Frequently he is accompanied by
the weapons platoon leader and such
other persons as he desires. He first posi-
tively identifies his area.
(2) He studies the immediate foreground of
the position to determine-
(a) Areas which give the enemy covered or
concealed approaches to the position.
(b) Natural obstacles and exposed terrain
over which the enemy must pass.
(c) Commanding features of the terrain
which may be occupied as hostile obser-
vation posts, and areas within the de-

271
 fensive position which are exposed to
hostile observation.
(3) He studies in detail the ground within
the defense area to determine-
(a) Coordination with adjacent units and
with supporting weapons to be placed
within the company area.
(b) Locations for defense areas of com-
pany elements, usually platoons.
(c) Locations for the 57-mm rifles and 60-
mm mortars.
(d) Routes of communication and supply.
(e) Location of the company observation
post.
(f) Location of the company command
post.
(4) Because of limited time, the company
commander sometimes may issue his or-
der without making a detailed ground
reconnaissance. In such cases, his order
may be issued from the best observation
point available, or it may be issued based
only on a map study. Adjustments to im-
prove the coordination and tactical or-
ganization are made as soon as the situa-
tion permits.
f. Completes plan and issues order. After complet-
ing his reconnaissance, he goes to the point, previ-
ously designated, for the issuance of his order. He
makes such changes in his tentative plan as are
required by his ground reconnaissance and by rec-
- ommendations of his leaders. He then issues the

272
company defense order, and informs the battalion
commander of the company's plan of defense.
g. Supervises work. After the order is issued, the
company commander supervises the detailed or-
ganization of the company defense area.

273. RIFLE COMPANY DEFENSE ORDER. The com-

pany commander bases his defense order on the
battalion order, recommendations from his unit
leaders, and his own analysis of the situation. (For
the form of a company defense order, see app. I.)
The order is issued orally and includes the fol-
lowing:
a. Information of the enemy, including the di-
rection and the time an enemy attack may be ex-
pected. Information of friendly supporting and
adjacent units.
b. Company mission.
c. Missions and areas of each rifle platoon.
d. Locations and missions of the 57-mm rifles,
60-mm mortars, and any additional weapons at-
tached to the company.
e. Fire control to include the details of calling
for fin'l protective fires.
f. Security.
g. Priority of construction.
h. Location of mine fields and other obstacles.
i. Engineer tools, ammunition supply,-and other
administrative details.
i. Location of the battalion aid station.
k. Alterations or additions to the standing op-
erating procedure; for example, antiaircraft se-
curity, type of emplacements, and sanitation.

273
 I. Command and observation posts.
m. Communication instructions.

274. FRONTAGE. The battalion commander assigns

frontages to his front-line companies according to
the natural defensive strength and relative impor-
tance of their defense areas. A rifle company oc-
cupying a defense'area on the main line of resist-
ance normally is assigned a frontage of 600 to
1,200 yards. (See fig. 54.) Where a company occu-
pies a key area having poor observation and poor
fields of fire, as in heavily wooded or broken ter-
rain, its frontage is near the minimum figure.
Where the terrain is more open and allows longer
fields of fire and better observation, the frontage
approaches the maximum figure. In exceptional
conditions, as in open and flat terrain or where
there are natural obstacles across the front which
greatly strengthen the defense, the company may
be assigned a frontage greater than 1,200 yards.

275. DEPTH. The depth of the company area from

the main line of resistance to the rear normally
does not exceed 700 yards. The area of responsi-
bility forward of the main line of resistance in-
cludes local security and seldom exceeds 500 yards.

276. BOUNDARIES. The battalion commander des-

ignates the area of responsibility of each front-
line rifle company by the use of boundaries. The
length of the boundaries indicates the forward and
rear limits of responsibility, or depth. All defen-
sive elements and installations of the company nor-

274
mally are included within this defensive area. Cer-
tain administrative installations, such as the am-
munition supply point, may be located outside the
assigned defense area if the battalion commander
approves.
DIRECTON
OP
ENEMY APPROACH

6.200 YARDS

YARDS

LIMITING
POINT

Figure 54. The battalion commander prescribes the boun-

daries of the front-line rifle company defense
area.

277. LIMITING POINTS. Points along a line of re-

sistance, where the responsibility of one unit stops
275
and that of another begins, are called limiting
points. These points, which are designated by the
higher commander, serve two primary purposes
for the front-line rifle company. They indicate the
general trace of the main line of resistance and
designate a place on the ground where adjacent
commanders coordinate their defense plans so that
adjacent defense areas are mutually supporting;
The limiting point need not be occupied physically
by either unit.

278. DISTRIBUTION OF PLATOONS-GENERAL CON-

SIDERATIONS. a. Platoons are used within the com-
pany defense area to achieve the maximum effec-
tive application of the principles of defense. Nor-
mally, this is done by using two rifle platoons
abreast on the main line of resistance and one rifle
platoon in support. These platoons are placed to
get the maximum coverage of the most dangerous
avenues of approach and to cover other parts of
the company defense area by fire and observation.
(See fig. 55.) Elements of the weapons platoon
are located within the company defense area where
they best can accomplish their fire missions and
obtain close protection by rifle elements. Usually,
they are located within the platoon defense areas.
b. During periods of reduced visibility, espe-
cially at night, there is greater possibility of the
enemy attacking through open areas. This may
require adjustments within platoon defense areas.
(See fig. 56.) These adjustments may include the
minor shifting of weapons within defense areas,
the changing of the support platoon location, the

276
employing of security detachments to cover inter-
vals between defense areas, and the strengthening
of local security elements.

PROBABLE ROUTES
OF HOSTILE APPROACH

Figure 55. Rifle company in a daylight defense.

279. LOCATION OF FRONT-LINE PLATOON. The

width of a defense area assigned to a front-line
platoon depends on such factors as fields of fire,
obstacles, and supporting fire. A rifle platoon oc-

277
cupying a defensive area normally is assigned a
frontage of 300 to 600 yards. Because of its ability
to cover an area by fire, a platoon seldom occupies

OF HOSTILE APPROACH

Figure 56. Rifle company in a night defense.

all of its assigned frontage. When supporting

weapons are placed within the platoon area, the
occupied frontage may be increased normally
about 25 yards for each crew-served weapon. The
gap between platoons varies with the terrain and
the available fire. Factors to be considered include
observation, fields of fire, ability of the support

278
platoon to fire in gaps, and mutual support from
adjacent front-line platoons. The company com-
mander avoids dividing the responsibility for de-
fending an avenue of enemy approach. When pos-
sible, he assigns to one platoon both the approach
and the terrain which blocks that approach.

280. DISPOSITION OF SUPPORT PLATOON. a. The

primary mission of the support platoon is to sup-
port the front-line platoons by fire. The terrain
seldom permits the support platoon to fire in front
of the front-line rifle platoons. Therefore, this fire
support consists of firing in the gaps between
front-line platoons, within forward areas in case
they are overrun, and to the flanks and rear of the
company defense area. This platoon also is as-
signed the mission of extending in depth the de-
fense of the company area and protecting the
flanks and rear of the company area. Exception-
ally, it is assigned the mission of ejecting the en-
emy from the battle position.
b. The location of the support platoon is on the
best defensive terrain in rear of the front-line pla-
toons and inside the company defense area, where
it can get the best observation and fields of fire
to accomplish its missions. The position is organ-
ized within rifle supporting distance (500 yards)
of the forward platoons, and is at least 150 yards
to their rear to avoid enemy fire directed at the
forward platoons.
c. The support platoon is used to organize a sin-
gle position to accomplish its mission if the terrain
permits. (See fig. 57.)

279
500 YDS
(MAX) eec
150 YOS

PLATOON

'?'
Figur.c57. Support platoon occupying a single prepared
position-arr'ows indicate dir'ection of fire
(schematic).

d. If the terrain is such that the support platoon

cannot accomplish its mission from a single posi-
tion and concealed routes for movement within the
area are available, more than one position may be
organized. (See fig. 58.) The platoon then occu-
pies the prepared position covering the most dan-
gerous threat and prepares to move to other po-
sitions on order.
e. When the terrain is such that it is necessary
to organize more than one position but concealed
routes between these positions do not exist, it may
not be possible to move the support platoon after
the fire fight begins. In this case, it may be neces-
sary to split the support platoon and have it occupy
more than one position. (See fig. 59.) The integ-
rity of rifle squads is maintained.
f. The support platoon may be directed by the
company commander to execute a local counter-

280
 · I /

CONCEALED ROUTE'
~/ .I /

(LESS ONE SQUAD)

Figure 59. Support platoon occupying more than one pre-

pared position (schematic).

281
attack. However, because of its size and the fact
that it usually is in the same fire fight as the front-
line platoons, the support platoon rarely is given
this mission. Such a counterattack, if ordered, is
in the nature of a quick assault and mopping-up
action to destroy a small enemy group which has
made a minor penetration.

281. DISTRIBUTION OF WEAPONS PLATOON. See

paragraphs 164 and 165.

282. FIRE PLAN. a. The battalion order includes

the plans for the use of those weapons under bat-
talion control. The rifle company commander uses
the weapons which are under his direct control to
provide the maximum defense of the company area
in coordination with the battalion fire plan. The
fires of weapons under the direct control of the
rifle company commander supplement and rein-
force the fires of battalion weapons. The company
fire plan includes the coordination of the platoon
fires and the fires of the weapons under the direct
control of the company.
b. The company commander obtains the location
of the prepared barrages of the supporting artil-
lery and mortars, and the sectors and final protec-
tive lines of the machine guns of the heavy weap-
ons company. He then assigns missions to the 57-
mm rifles and the 60-mm mortars to cover gaps
and reinforce these fires.
c. Rifle platoons are located to permit mutual
exchange of fire, defense in depth, and all-around
protection. Platoon fire plans are checked to de-

282
termine that light machine guns are used to fill
gaps in the final protective fires, that the fore-
ground of each platoon area is covered by small-
arms fire, and that overlapping sectors of fire are
provided. Fire control measures are disseminated
to company elements, and observation is coordi-
nated for complete and efficient coverage. As time
and facilities permit, lower unit leaders are issued
a map or overlay showing the prearranged con-
centrations by position and number of the support-
ing artillery and mortars.

283. OBSERVATION. a. The company commander

coordinates the observation posts established by
the company to fit them into the battalion observa-
tion plan and avoid the duplication of effort. The
location of several observation posts in the imme-
diate vicinity of each other is avoided. When ter-
rain features which offer good observation are lim-
ited, observers are spread across the front so that
overlapping observation is obtained over the de-
fense area and the approaches to it. Communica-
tion facilities are coordinated and used to the max-
imum, so that any observer can call for and con-
trol the fires of any supporting weapon.
b. The company observation post should give a
view of as much of the company defense area and
its approaches as possible. If observation is lim-
ited, an observation post is selected which provides
observation of the most dangerous approaches.
Observation to the flanks also is important. Al-
though the observation post is the battle station
of the company commander, he goes where his
853696 0--49-19 283
presence is demanded. The command post is kept
informed of his location.

284. COMMAND POST. The company command

post is located in the rear portion of the company
defense area. For local protection, it normally is
within or near the support platoon area. It pref-
erably is in defilade and concealed from air obser-
vation. Covered and concealed routes to the front
and to the rear are desirable to aid communication
with the platoons and with the battalion command
post.

285. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. a. The organi-

zation of the company defense area is limited only
by the time and facilities available. The battalion
order normally gives the sequence in which the
tasks are executed. These may include-
(1) Preparing emplacements for weapons
and individual shelter.
(2) Clearing fields of fire.
(3) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, and
antipersonnel mines.
(4) Constructing wire entanglements and
other obstacles.
(5) Preparing routes for supply, communica-
tion, and evacuation.
b. In the absence of special instructions, the men
first dig standing-type fox holes or weapons em-
placements. While these emplacements are being
constructed, crew-served weapons are mounted in
nearby temporary firing positions. Maximum use
is made of natural and artificial concealment and
284
cover against both ground and air observation and
fire. Protective wire is placed around each small-
unit defense area and tactical wire is installed for-
ward of the company position. Normally, some of
these tasks, such as laying mine fields and con-
structing obstacles, are accomplished by or under
the supervision of specially trained elements from
other units.
c. Organization of exposed areas subjected to
enemy fire or air bombardment may have to be
accomplished piecemeal during daylight with men
well dispersed. If this is impracticable, the or-
ganization of these exposed positions is postponed
until darkness.

286. ANTITANK DEFENSE. The preparation of a

coordinated antitank defense plan primarily is the
responsibility of battalion and larger unit com-
manders. This plan provides for an adequate
warning system and for placing antitank weapons
within and mine fields and obstacles forward of
the front-line rifle company areas. The company
commander familiarizes himself with this plan
and uses his antitank weapons to give the maxi-
mum close protection to his company area. He
places his antitank weapons where they can cover
avenues of enemy tank approach by flanking fire,
mine fields, and obstacles which are not covered
by the weapons of other units, or he uses them to
reinforce the defense of his more vulnerable areas.
Mine fields and obstacles are covered by fire to pre-
vent the enemy from removing them before or
during a tank attack. They also are covered by

285
weapons capable of destroying immobilized tanks.
Mine fields are marked and a record of their loca-
tions is made and given to the next higher com-
mander. Guards are placed over antitank mine
fields to prevent casualties to friendly troops and
vehicles. Guards in front of the main line of re-
sistance are withdrawn when security elements
forward of the main line of resistance have with-
drawn.

287. HASTY DEFENSE. a. When speed in the occu-

pation of a position is necessary, the first consid-
erations are to get the troops on the position, to
provide for local security. and to start the organi-
zation of the ground. The company elements and
any attached weapons are located for all-around
defense of the company area. As time permits, a
more detailed coordination is made which may re-
quire a readjustment of positions and fires.
b. A front-line rifle company frequently is forced
to organize its position while in close contact with
a strong enemy. Such a defense may be character-
ized by all or part of the following: limited move-
ment of men, troops subjected to observed enemy
fire, defense of the position against hostile attack
during any or all stages of the organization, lim-
ited attacks to seize key terrain necessary to the
organization of the position, and limited withdraw-
als after the approval by the battalion commander
to strengthen the position. When organizing a
position under these conditions, the principles of
defense still apply. The extent to which these prin-
ciples apply varies with each situation. Troop lead-

286
ing procedure is applied to the extent that the sit-
uation permits. The company commander relies
heavily on the initiative of his leaders, since im-
mediate decisions by each platoon leader are neces-
sary before the company commander can make his
detailed coordination. To cover the organization
of the position, maximum use is made of available
supporting fires.

288. 'NIGHT DISPOSITIONS. a. It usually is neces-

sary to make adjustments at night to meet condi-
tions of reduced visibility. For the rifle company,
these adjustments include-
(1) Laying light machine guns on final pro-
tective lines and 60-mm mortars on bar-
rages.
(2) Readjusting troops and weapons to block
areas, usually open and exposed, which
favor a night attack and which are cov-
ered solely by fire during periods of good
visibility.
(3) Establishing night dispositions of local
security.
(4) Placing antipersonnel and antitank mines
across likely avenues of approach. These
mines should be removed at daylight.
(5) Preparing to illuminate the foreground
by flares.
b. Any company adjustments in fires or troop
location to meet conditions of reduced visibility
are coordinated with the battalion commander. All
men in the company are briefed on the battalion

287
night locations and on fire plans. Infrared equip.
ment may be used to increase the visibility.

289. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. As the enemy ap-

proaches the battle position, he is fired on. These
fires are delivered by outposts established well
forward of the battle position and by long-range
weapons located in rear of the front-line compa-
nies. They are controlled by air observers, by pa-
trols, and by ground observers located on the out-
post positions.
b. When the enemy comes within effective small-
arms range of the main line of. resistance (500
yards), individuals and crew-served weapons lo-
cated in front-line platoon areas open fire. As the
enemy advance continues, these fires are increased
in rate, and additional weapons open fire as targets
appear within their sectors. The 60-mm mortars
and long-range weapons execute fire missions on
appropriate targets within their effective ranges.
Tanks located to fire in front of the main line of
resistance open fire at enemy tanks at long range,
unless directed to withhold their fire until the
enemy is closer. Observers in each forward de-
fense area keep the foreground under continuous
observation to permit the adjustment of fire of
long-range weapons. As the enemy draws closer
to the battle position and delivers heavy fires in
preparation for his assault, the men occupying
front-line defense areas take cover in their fox
holes or emplacements.
c. When the massed fires of the enemy are lifted,
all weapons located within the forward platoon

288
defense areas open fire to inflict maximum casual-
ties and to stop the hostile attack before it reaches
their positions. Requests for supporting fires are
made directly to the nearest artillery, heavy mor-
tar company, or heavy weapons company forward
observer. Fire requests also are made by the com-
pany commander to the battalion commander.
d. If the enemy's attacking elements approach
the area covered by planned final protective fires,
machine guns shift their fires to final protective
lines, mortars and artillery fire their barrages, and
other weapons increase their rates of fire against
the most threatening targets. Authority to call
for final protective fires is a part of the battalion
coordinated fire plan. This authority normally is
delegated down to and including front-line platoon
leaders so that fires are delivered when needed.
When fires are called for, they are delivered with-
out delay. Higher unit commanders immediately
verify the need for these fires and call for rein-
forcing fires, if necessary. If the enemy assaults,
he is met by fire, grenades, and close combat. Men
in the threatened area do not withdraw except on
the verified order of their commander.
e. When the attacking force includes tanks as
well as infantry elements, the primary targets for
rifle company weapons, except antitank weapons,
are the hostile foot troops or other exposed enemy.
Fires are directed to separate the enemy foot
elements from the tanks. In exceptional cases,
when hostile infantry or other exposed enemy do
not offer a target, small-arms fire is directed
against the open hatches of enemy tanks. Defend-

289
ers using small arms against the accompanying in-
fantry or using antitank rifle grenade, rocket, and
57-mm rifle fire against hostile tanks continue to
fire until forced to take cover in order to protect
themselves and their weapons from the crushing
action of the tanks. They return to their firing
positions as soon as the tanks pass and fire on the
rear of the tanks. Defenders also fire on approach-
ing foot troops or exposed enemy riding on or
closely following other attacking tanks.
f. If the enemy succeeds in overrunning the de-
fense areas, the advance is resisted by fires from
adjacent and support platoon defense areas and
from supporting weapons. If a minor penetration
is made by a small enemy group and the main
line of resistance is not jeopardized, the company
commander may order the support platoon to elimi-
nate the hostile group. Such an action is a quick
assault and mop-up. A new support is reconsti-
tuted at the earliest opportunity.
g. In case the company is surrounded, the com-
pany commander redistributes his troops and
weapons in his area as necessary for a continued
all-around defense.
h. The conduct of a night defense resembles that
of a day defense except that it is characterized
by more close-in fighting. It can be expected that
some of the enemy will infiltrate the position. At
the same time, light machine guns, 60-mm mor-
tars, and other supporting weapons break up ele-
ments of the enemy which still are outside the po-
sition. Although machine guns are layed in readi-
ness on final protective lines and the mortars on

290
their barrage areas, crews of these weapons (when
not ordered to fire final protective fires) should
shift to more remunerative or more threatening
targets when visibility permits. Flares are used
forward of the position to assist in locating these
targets.

290. RELIEF. a. If the defense is prolonged or if

units on the battle position have suffered heavy
casualties, periodic relief of units in the line is
made. The front-line rifle company may be relieved
by the battalion reserve company, by a rifle com-
pany from a battalion other than its own, or by a
unit of different strength and organization. To
maintain secrecy and maximum security, the relief
of a front-line unit is executed at night.
b. Relief plans are detailed and executed with
a minimum of time and confusion. Incoming lead-
ers must know the organization of the position and
the plan of defense. This normally is done by the
incoming unit's sending leaders to inspect the po-
sition during daylight and by key personnel from
the incoming unit remaining on the position to
learn of any changes which occur after the initial
reconnaissance. Unit leaders of the company being
relieved are informed of the time, order of relief,
and the routes and check points by which they will
leave the position.
c. As it is relieved, each unit, to and including
squads and weapons crews, withdraws straight to
the rear. There the platoons normally are as-
sembled and led by guides over previously recon-
noitered routes to the company assembly area.

8:569:s.; 0o-49--2''o 291

During this movement, weapons and troops from
other units normally are attached to the platoon in
whose area they had been placed.
d. Commanders arrange for the mutual exchange
of weapons which cannot be moved easily or re-
placed during darkness. Communication lines and
extra supplies and equipment not essential to the
unit being relieved are left on the position.
e. Periodic reports are made to the next higher
commander. The incoming unit commander as-
sumes responsibility for defense of the area when
the major portion of his command is in position
and communication and control is established, or
when he is ordered to do so by the over-all com-
mander.
291. REVERSE SLOPE DEFENSE-GENERAL CONSID-
ERATIONS. The occupation of a reverse slope po-
sition may be dictated if control of the forward
slope is lost or not gained, or if the forward slope
cannot be held because of its extreme vulnerability
to enemy fire. The advantage of a reverse slope
defense is that the forward elements of the battle
position are protected from enemy ground observa-
tion and direct-fire weapons. This advantage per-
mits greater freedom of movement, more detailed
improvement of the position, ease of supply, and
rest for the troops. (See fig. 60.)
292. REVERSE SLOPE ORGANIZATION. The reverse
slope position generally is organized according to
the principles explained in paragraphs 270 to 288,
inclusive. Modifications of these principles and
additional considerations include the following:

292
 a. Observation posts are prepared on or just for-
ward of the topographical crest and are occupied

AR

~~~~~~~~I '~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Figrce60. Rifle company in a reverse slope defense

(schematic).

293
by unit commanders and forward observers. Small
groups of riflemen and weapon crews provide pro-
tection for these observers. Normally, these groups
are furnished by the support platoon. At night
they are strengthened to prevent hostile infiltra-
tion and surprise.
b. When possible, the forward slope and flanks
are covered by direct flanking fires of weapons
defiladed from the front.
c. A carefully laid field of antitank mines, trip
flares, and antipersonnel mines may be used on the
forward and reverse slope to slow the enemy at-
tack and thus allow the defender more time to
meet the assault.
d. Troops and weapons on the reverse slope are
located to permit the maximum fire on the crest,
in the approaches around the crest, and on the for-
ward slopes of adjacent terrain features.
e. If within effective range, the military crest
of the next high ground in rear is a desirable lo-
cation for the support platoon.
f. Final protective fires are planned to destroy
the enemy as he attempts to cross the crest. The
main line of resistance usually is located at least
200 yards from the crest of the hill to provide ade-
quate fields of fire and to permit the delivery of
final protective fires without endangering friendly
troops.

293. CONDUCT OF REVERSE SLOPE DEFENSE. The

conduct of a reverse slope defense generally is ac-
cording to the principles described in paragraph
289. The security detachments on the forward

294
slope give warning of an enemy approach, and they
delay and disorganize him by long-range fires. Dur-
ing periods of poor visibility, greater use is made
of warning and illuminating devices to give a bet-
ter coverage of the front; for example, flares,
searchlights, and antipersonnel mines. If the en-
emy drives in the security detachments and con-
tinues his advance, planned concentrations are de-
livered on the forward slope by the defending high-
angle weapons to disrupt the enemy's attempts to
mass for an assault. Direct-fire weapons within the
battle position withhold their fires until suitable
targets appear. If the enemy crosses the crest in
mass, final protective fires are delivered. If a
limited penetration of the main line of resistance
is made and a counterattack is ordered, the normal
principles of counterattack are applicable. Since
it is necessary to deny observation to the enemy
from the high ground overlooking the battle po-
sition, the counterattacking force seeks to reestab-
lish the security detachments on the forward slope.

Section III. RESERVE RIFLE COMPANY

294. GENERAL. The front-line battalion in defense

normally places two rifle companies on the main
line of resistance and one in reserve. (See fig. 61.)
The battalion order gives the missions for the re-
serve company and the priority of execution of as-
signed tasks. Upon receiving this order, the re-
serve company commander takes such troop lead-
ing steps, as described in paragraph 272, as are
applicable. The battalion commander directs the

295
 COMPANY
OEFENSE AREA

50R YARDS
s5o YARDS

I.
0·
PRIMARY PO, ·O

PRIMARY POSITIONS

__ _ _SUPPLEMENTARY POSITIONS

Figure 61. The battalion reserve company prepares pri-

mary positions on key terrain, normally with
three platoons across the battalion area in rear
of the front-line. companies.

296
use of the reserve company during the conduct of
the defense.

295. MISSIONS. Missions which may be assigned

to the reserve rifle company are-
a. Increasing the depth of the battalion defense
area.
b. Protecting the battalion's flanks and rear.
c. Acting as the counterattacking force.
d. Establishing a combat outpost.
e. Assisting in the organization of forward
areas.

296. INCREASING DEPTH OF BATTALION DEFENSE

AREA. The reserve company prepares primary po-
sitions on key terrain, normally with three platoon
areas on line across the battalion area in rear of
the front-line companies. These.positions are or-
ganized within rifle supporting distance (500
yards) of the support platoons of the forward com-
panies, and at least 150 yards from those pla-
toons, so that they will be outside the zone of dis-
persion of enemy fire directed at the front-line
companies. The platoon positions are organized
similar to front-line platoons. Their fires and po-
sitions are coordinated closely with those of sup-
porting weapons located in the rear of the battalion
area.

297. PROTECTING BATTALION'S FLANKS AND REAR.

Besides adding depth to the defense, the reserve
company protects the flank and rear of the bat-
talion. Since this protection seldom can be fur-

297
nished from primary positions alone, it usually is
necessary for the reserve company to prepare sup-
plementary platoon positions. If the battalion is
threatened from any direction other than the
front, the battalion commander may direct the re-
serve company to occupy a combination of platoon
positions which best protects the threatened area.
When the battalion has an unprotected flank, the
reserve company initially may be disposed to pro-
tect it.

298. COUNTERATTACKING. The counterattack is a

decisive element of defensive combat. The basic
element of the battalion counterattacking force is
the reserve company. To give maximum strength
to the counterattack, the battalion commander at-
taches to or places in support of the reserve com-
pany all available troops and weapons. These at-
tachments and supporting missions become effec-
tive upon the battalion commander's decision to
counterattack. The battalion order gives the areas
of likely penetrations against which counterattack
plans are prepared. The reserve company com-
mander prepares counterattack plans concurrently
with the organization of the defensive position.
He submits these plans to the battalion commander
for approval. The reserve company normally oc-
cupies its prepared positions before the enemy
starts its attack. Free movement of the reserve
company during the enemy attack is rare, as such
movement may result in an undue number of cas-
ualties. For this reason, the counterattacking com-
pany normally goes directly from its occupied po-

298
sition to the line of departure by previously recon-
noitered routes.

299. ESTABLISHING COMBAT OUTPOST. All or part

of the reserve company may be detailed initially
to establish a combat outpost. For a discussion of
combat outposts, see paragraph 320.

300. ASSISTING IN ORGANIZING FORWARD AREAS.

Working parties from the reserve company may
be detailed to the forward areas to assist in clear-
ing fields of fire, erecting obstacles, laying antitank
mines, trip flares, and antipersonnel mines, con-
structing emplacements and entrenchments, ex-
ecuting camouflage, and performing similar tasks.

301. WEAPONS PLATOON. a. When the reserve

company occupies prepared positions, the same
principles apply for the use of the 57-mm rifle sec-
tion as for a front-line company. The section's
plans to support a counterattack may include close
supporting fire from one or more positions, accom-
panying the counterattacking forces, or a combi-
nation of both.
b. Missions that may be assigned to the 60-mm
mortar section include-
(1) Attachment to the combat outpost. If the
reserve company furnishes the combat
outpost, all or part of the 60-mm mortars
may be attached to it.
(2) Support of the main line of resistance.
The 60-mm mortars may be emplaced
near the 81-mm mortars and used to rein-

299
 force their fires in support of the main
line of resistance. The use and location of
the 60-mm mortars to support the main
line of resistance are coordinated so that
their use with the reserve company is not
jeopardized.
(3) Limit penetrations. When the reserve
company is occupying its prepared po-
sitions, the fires of the 60-mm mortars
are used to limit penetrations by firing
into the penetrated area or on the edge
of the penetration to block it off.
(4) Support counterattacks. If the reserve
company is assigned a counterattack mis-
sion, the 60-mm mortars may accompany
the counterattacking force or furnish
supporting fires from their prepared po-
sitions.

302. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. Normally, the

reserve company first prepares its primary posi-
tions. It then prepares its supplementary positions
according to the priority prescribed by the bat-
talion commander, and it improves routes to its
lines of departure for counterattack, when neces-
sary. The organization of each position includes
clearing fields of fire and constructing and conceal-
ing individual shelters, weapon emplacements, and
obstacles.

303. COMPANY ASSEMBLY AREA. The battalion

commander's order specifies whether the reserve
company is to occupy prepared positions, whether

300
it is to be held in an assembly area ready to occupy
designated prepared positions, or to counterattack
on order. Rarely will the reserve company be or-
dered to occupy an assembly area in lieu of the
occupation of its prepared positions. If it occupies
an assembly area, the company is held in dis-
persed platoon groups. Shelters are prepared for
the men against air bombardment and long-range
fires.

304. OBSERVATION POST. The initial observation

post of the reserve company should be located in
coordination with the rear battalion observation
post to permit the maximum observation of the
battalion rear area. The company commander
needs to have early information of the situation
within the battalion area and to be in close touch
with the battalion commander. Subsequently, the
observation post is located to give the best obser-
vation of the area in which the company is used.

305. COMMAND POST. The reserve company com-

mand post is located in rear of its primary po-
sitions. If the company initially occupies an as-
sembly area, the command post is located within
that assembly area. The location selected should
possess the characteristics explained in paragraph
284. In addition, it preferably is located near the
battalion command post.

306. ANTITANK DEFENSE. When the reserve com-

pany occupies a prepared position, the principles
of antitank defense for a front-line company ap-

301
ply. If the company occupies an assembly area,
the rifle grenadiers, rocket-launcher teams, and 57-
mm rifle squads are located to cover likely tank
approaches.

307. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. As the enemy

approaches the battle position, elements (if any)
of the reserve company on the combat outpost
seek to delay and disorganize the enemy and then
withdraw. As the attack of the enemy progresses,
the reserve company commander keeps himself in-
formed of the situation. The probable use of the
reserve company is planned to permit the timely
alerting of troops to carry out their mission.
b. If the enemy penetrates the position and the
reserve company is ordered to defend from pre-
pared positions which block the threatened area,
the conduct of the defense is similar to that of the
front-line companies. Because final protective fires
are not planned to the immediate front of the re-
serve company, principal directions of fire to cover
avenues of approach inside the battle position are
assigned in place of final protective fires. Fire data
for high-angle weapons are prepared and closely
coordinated with front-line elements to permit the
rapid and accurate use of concentrations.

Section IV. OTHER DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

308. GENERAL. The principles outlined in sections

I through III, this chapter, govern the usual or-
ganization and defense by a rifle company. Fre-
quently, the rifle company takes part in a defen-

302
sive operation where the situation is different and
requires special considerations. Since the battalion
is the basic tactical unit, the rifle company rarely
is used as a separate unit. In all these situations,
the principles of defensive combat previously cov-
ered are followed, if practicable. The application
or modification depends on such factors as the ter-
rain, the tactical situation, and the size of the unit
involved. Those additional considerations which
apply particularly to the rifle company in such sit-
uations are described in the paragraphs which
follow.

309. DEFENSE ON WIDE FRONT. a. When a bat-

talion defends a wide front, emphasis is placed on
the organization of key terrain features. Fre-
quently, the rifle company, reinforced with sup-
porting weapons, is assigned the defense of such
a key feature. Units smaller than a rifle company
rarely are assigned a key terrain feature. When
assigned the mission of defending a key terrain
feature and providing assistance in covering gaps
between terrain features, the front-line company-
(1) Physically occupies a normal frontage.
(2) Emphasizes provisions for the defense of
the terrain feature against an attack
from any direction.
(3) Furnishes observation, security, and pa-
trols to cover the gaps.
(4) Familiarizes key persons with the plans
of higher units for covering the gaps by
fire.
b. The reserve rifle company, in an extended-

303
front situation, prepares more positions, is more
likely to counterattack, and more frequently oc-
cupies an assembly area initially.
310. PERIMETER DEFENSE. a. When a rifle company
or a smaller unit is on an independent mission or
when it is separated from the battalion and the
enemy location is not certain, it usually establishes
a perimeter defense. (See figs. 62 and 63.) In such
cases the company organizes its position as fol-
lows:

,/4

Figure 62. Perimeter defense of the rifle company in close

terrain (schematic).
304
 b. Each rifle platoon is assigned a part of the
outer perimeter to organize and defend. Each
rifle platoon leader normally organizes his assigned
sector by placing three rifle squads abreast. The
platoon leader places his light machine gun in a
position on the perimeter of the platoon sector
which allows the best coverage of the platoon front
and the best final protective line. He places his
rocket launcher on the perimeter where it best can
cover the most dangerous tank approach. Two-

· -__X

Figure 63. Perimeter defense of the rifle company in open

terrain (schematic).

305
man fox holes normally are dug 5 to 20 yards
apart, and 10 to 25 yards are allotted to crew-
served weapons.
c. The inner perimeter is organized by the 60-
mm mortar section and the headquarters personnel
of the company and of the weapons platoon. The
company commander may use part of a rifle pla-
toon to strengthen this inner perimeter, when
necessary. Normally, not more than one rifle squad
is used for this purpose.
d. The company commander closely supervises
the rifle platoon leaders' use of their weapons to
coordinate effective all-around defense of the com-
pany area. If the terrain dictates, he may attach
to one platoon the rocket launcher of another pla-
toon in order to give the maximum effective cov-
erage of the most likely tank approach. He usually
selects positions on the outer perimeter for all
three 57-mm rifles. The 60-mm mortars are em-
placed within the inner perimeter close enough to-
gether to permit the control from one location. To
permit the rapid delivery of fires in any direction,
each mortar is given a different sector; however,
each mortar is prepared to reinforce the fires of
either of the others. When the defensive position
is beyond effective range of the main force's sup-
porting weapons, the additional weapons may be
attached to the company. Attached machine guns
normally are used singly on the outer perimeter.
e. Security outside the perimeter is furnished by
small outguards located on likely approaches and
on observation points and by passive means such
as trip flares and booby traps. In dense terrain

306
local security detachments may be withdrawn
within the perimeter during periods of poor visi-
bility or darkness.

311. DEFENSE OF RIVER LINE. a. General. The con-

duct of a river line defense normally is decided by
commanders of large units. In the offensive type
of defense, a rifle company may be assigned the
mission of establishing small outguards along the
river to give warning and to delay and disorganize
the enemy if he attempts a crossing. A rifle com-
pany also may be part of a mobile counterattacking
force whose mission is to destroy the enemy when
he is astride the river or soon after he crosses. In
the position-type of defense, the rifle company may
be assigned a definite area to organize and defend
on or near the bank of the river, or it may be desig-
nated the battalion reserve.
b. Frontage. In the defense of a river line, a rifle
company normally is assigned a greater frontage
than in average terrain. This frontage is covered
by extending the intervals between platoons rather
than the intervals between men.
c. Employment of weapons. When the main line of
resistance is organized on the near bank of the
river, 60-mm mortar concentrations and barrages
are planned to cover likely avenues of approach to
the far bank and probable crossing sites. Machine
guns and other direct-fire weapons are assigned
wide sectors of fire, and they cover the avenues of
approach and areas which offer effective grazing
fire. Machine guns are sited to fire final protec-
tive lines that graze on the river or the far bank.

8si:;.((; /)-4:---2-- 1 307

Rifle grenades, rocket launchers, and 57-mm rifles
are used against enemy groups and equipment on
the far bank and on the river. When the main line
of resistance is organized back from the river bank,
weapons are used as for a normal defense. Final
protective fires of the 60-mm mortars and machine
guns are placed on the near bank to destroy the
enemy as he attempts to gain a foothold on the
near bank.

312. DEFENSE IN WOODS. Defense in woods is

characterized by short fields of fire and limited ob-
servation. To meet this situation, reliance is placed
on closely coordinated preplanned defensive fires,
obstacles, constant patroling, extensive use of local
security groups, and preparation of routes for the
rapid shifting of support and reserve units. Lim-
ited fields of fire within the position require the
reduction of distances and intervals between men
and units. Overhead cover is constructed for fox
holes and other emplacements for protection
against enemy fire and friendly close-in artillery
and mortar supporting fires. The support platoon
prepares to counterattack against small infiltrat-
ing groups which penetrate the position. Constant
patroling is maintained to the front and the flanks
and within the position. Local security groups are
equipped with rapid means of communication in
order to give immediate warning of the hostile
advance. A successful defense depends on vigi-
lance, accurate information of hostile movements,
final protective fires, and a rapid counterattack to
mop-up hostile groups which infiltrate the position.

308
313. ANTIAIRBORNE DEFENSE--GENERAL CONSID-
ERATIONS. a. Measures must be taken by all units
to protect themselves against an airborne assault.
A rifle company may be used against an airborne
attack as follows: if the company is occupying a
front-line defense area it defends in place; if com-
pany is within a regimental sector and not a front-
line company, it may be used as an immediate
counterattacking force.
b. Companies used in rear areas may be assigned
a definite sector of responsibility to organize
against airborne operations; they may organize,
occupy, and defend important key points; or they
may be a part of mobile striking force.

314. PRINCIPLES OF AIRBORNE DEFENSE. In or-

ganizing an area against airborne operations, the
following principles are applicable:
a. To counteract hostile air reconnaissance, cam-
ouflage and concealment are perfected. Alternate
positions for weapons and men are dug so that the
defense is flexible. Dummy positions are prepared
to confuse the enemy and prevent him from lo-
cating the exact positions.
b. To give warning of hostile landings, a warning
system consisting of warning station is established
to cover possible landing areas in the area of re-
sponsibility. It often is necessary to supplement
these warning stations with motorized patrols. All
communication means are used to give prompt
warning.
c. To provide initial protection against hostile
landings, small detachments are established in the

309
vicinity of landing areas, likely airborne objec-
tives, and critical terrain features. These detach-
ments form the local defense force. The purpose
of this force is to delay, disorganize, and contain
the airborne force until the mobile striking force
can counterattack to destroy the enemy. The size
of each force is determined by the importance of
the area and may vary in strength from a single
rifle squad to a rifle platoon reinforced with sup-
porting weapons. Obstacles to landing are con-
structed, with first priority given to landing areas
nearest probable airborne objectives.
d. To give maximum flexibility to the defense,
a mobile striking force is organized. The purpose
of this force is to destroy the enemy by counter-
attack. It preferably is motorized and strong in
fire power, and centrally located in a covered and
concealed position. Plans for its use are prear-
ranged and rehearsed.

315. CONDUCT OF AIRBORNE DEFENSE. During

hostile air reconnaissance, troops are concealed.
During the hostile air bombardment, men occupy
covered positions and prepare for the hostile at-
tack. During the initial landings, the defense is
aggressive. If low-flying transports or gliders come
within range, all weapons fire. Warning stations
and local defense forces determine the main land-
ing area and the direction of movement of the hos-
tile force. Maximum fires are directed on the en-
emy. Local counterattacks inflict maximum cas-
ualties and delay the reorganization of forces that
have landed. As soon as reliable reports of the

310
location and strength of an enemy landing are re-
ceived, the mobile striking force is committed be-
tween the enemy's landing area and probable air-
borne objective. It destroys or contains the enemy.
Aggressive and offensive action is necessary for
an effective defense against airborne attack.

316. OTHER DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS. For charac-

teristics of combat and tactical principles govern-
ing other defensive operations, see FM 100-5 and
other appropriate references listed in appendix
VIII.

Section V. SECURITY MISSIONS

317. GENERAL. A rifle company may be used for

security missions to include-
a. Assembly area outpost.
b. General outpost.
c. Combat outpost.
d. Local security.
e. Road blocks and defense of obstacles.
f. Defense of rear installations.
g. Rear guard.

318. ASSEMBLY AREA OUTPOST. a. When a force

occupies an unprotected assembly area, strong se-
curity measures are taken. This security normally
is furnished by an outpost. When the force is a
regiment or larger, a battalion usually is detailed
as the assembly area outpost, and rifle companies
occupy assigned sectors of the outpost. (See fig.
64.) When the force is a battalion, one rifle com-

311
pany (reinforced by supporting weapons) may es-
tablish the outpost, but more frequently each com-
pany furnishes the outpost protection in the sector
corresponding to its position in the assembly area.
(See fig. 65.)

PATROL ROUTE 2

Al\

·\ \ to

FOR REGT
OR LARGER FORCE

O OUTGUARD-USUALLY ONE SOUAD OR FRACTION THEREO

--- ROUTE OF VISITING PATROLS

Figure 64. Assembly area-company sector (schematic).

b. When a rifle company in a battalion assembly

area furnishes the outpost protection within an
assigned sector, it normally does so by means of a

312
series of small outguards and road blocks and by
patroling. These outguards are located approxi-
mately 200 to 500 yards from the assembly area,
with enough outguards and at such critical points

Ao 2 -.

O OUTGUARD-USUALLY ONE SQUAD OR FRACTION THEREOF

-- * ROUTE OF VISITING PATROLS

Figure65. When outposting a battalion assembly area,

each rifle company usually furnishes the out-
post for its sector.

as to permit long-range observation and fires and

to cover probable enemy approaches. Each out-

313
guard normally consists of part or all of a rifle
squad, reinforced with supporting weapons. Ob-
servers for supporting high-angle-tire weapons also
are posted with these outguards. Control and com-
munication with outguards is maintained by avail-
able means, including visiting patrols. The oC(t-
guards use maximum fire power to delay any ob-
served enemy. They give warning to the troops in
the assembly area and withdraw if threatened with
close combat or encirclement. Visiting patrols,
usually consisting of three men, maintain contact
with the outguards and detect enemy activity in
the areas between outguards. They are dispatched
at intervals not greater than 2 hours, and by routes
that cover the sector. To prevent an ambush, the
time and the route are varied. In case of an enemy
threat, the company occupies a defensive position
previously designated by the battalion commander.
This position is on the best defensive terrain close
to the assembly area. The company commander
often details one platoon to establish these out-
guards and to do the patroling.

319. GENERAL OUTPOST. a. The general outpost

usually is established approximately 6,000 yards
forward of the battle position and it is prescribed
by the division commander. It aids in securing the
front of the battle position and provides warning
for the main force and extended surveillance of
the area over which the enemy must advance. A
rifle company may be assigned an area on the out-
post line of resistance to organize and occupy, or

314
it may be designated as one of the reserve ele-
ments.
b. The outpost order may prescribe that the out-
post line of resistance be held for a definite time
or that the outpost conduct a delaying action. If
it is to be held for a definite period, the company
organizes its position as for a regular defense. If,
it is to conduct a delaying action, the principles
for a delaying action are used. (See par. 331.)
c. In the organization of the ground, dummy em-
placements are constructed to deceive the enemy
and to disperse his fire. The company organizes its
support position and covers its front with out-
guards and patrols similar to an assembly area
outpost. (See par. 318.)

320. COMBAT OUTPOST-GENERAL CONSIDERA-

TIONS. The combat outpost usually is from 800 to
2,000 yards forward of the battle position. It is
prescribed by the battalion or the regimental com-
mander. The mission of the combat outpost is to
delay, disorganize, and deceive the enemy. It aids
in securing the battle position, gains timely infor-
mation of the enemy, and inflicts maximum cas-
ualties on the enemy without engaging in close
combat. The responsibility for organizing and oc-
cupying this position may be assigned to front-
line rifle companies or to elements of the battalion
or the regimental reserve. The combat outpost for
each battalion varies in size from a rifle platoon
to a rifle company reinforced with machine guns,
mortars, antitank weapons, and tanks.

315
321. ORGANIZATION OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. a.
The combat outpost is organized as a series of out-
guards which vary in strength from a half squad
to a reinforced rifle platoon. These outguards or-
ganize defense areas on terrain features permit-
ting observation, long fields of fire, and close rifle
protection for supporting weapons. (See fig. 66.)
Outguards organize their positions covering a nor-
mal frontage. These positions preferably are lo-
cated within visual communicating distance of
each other. If the terrain prevents this, contact is
maintained by patrols or other means of communi-
cation. Sentinels and patrols are used to the front,
flanks, and rear to furnish security for the out-
guards. Patroling between outguards and sentinels
is carried on during periods of reduced visibility.
Weapons are placed where they can get long fields
of fire, and men are placed where they can get
maximum observation. This usually is on the
topographical crest of the terrain feature or-
ganized.
b. In addition to the advantages already stated,
such a position aids the withdrawal. A support
echelon ordinarily is not used and final protective
fires are not planned to protect the position since
the combat outpost withdraws before the attacker
comes within assaulting distance. Usual deceptive
measures are used. Communication is maintained
to the rear by wire, radio, and messenger. Routes
of withdrawal are selected and reconnoitered, and
all men are notified of the withdrawal plan.

316
 I lII

No.ONOG 2 O

ROUTE OF RTE OF 2000 YDS

RAWALWITDR YAWAL
WITDR

-M mLR

Figure 66. Comtbat outpost (schematic).

322. CONDUCT OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. When

there are no friendly troops forward of the combat
317
 outpost, contact is maintained with the enemy by
patrols. In order to inflict maximum casualties and
-confuse the enemy, fires of all weapons are opened
at long range. As the enemy advances, continuous
and increasing fire is directed on him. The next
higher commander is informed of the first ap-
proach of hostile forces and is kept advised of the
situation. If the attacker continues his advance
and approaches within assaulting distance or
threatens an envelopment, the combat outpost
withdraws.

323. WITHDRAWAL OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. The

decision to withdraw normally is made by the bat-
talion or the regimental commander; however, the
combat outpost commander may be given the au-
thority to make this decision. Predetermined and
previously reconnoitered routes of withdrawal are
used to offer maximum cover and concealment.
These routes permit the freedom of fire by flat-
trajectory weapons within the battle position and
tend to deceive the enemy as to. the true location
of-the battle position. Several plans for the with-
drawal are prepared. Normally, the least engaged
units withdraw first. Since the distance from the
battle position is short, there usually are no inter-
mediate delaying positions and the withdrawal is
made directly to positions within the battle posi-
tion. Friendly elements are kept informed of the
withdrawal progress.

324. LOCAL SECURITY. a. The establishment of

combat or general outposts,by a commander of a

318
larger unit does not relieve the company of the
responsibility of furnishing its own close-in pro-
tection. (See fig. 67.) During daylight, observers

400-
CD l ~YARDS

MLR ii MLR

O TWO TO FOUR MAN SENTINEL POSTS

---- * ROUTES OF WITHDRAWAL a

Figure 67. Local security forward of a front-line rifle

company.

319
are posted to observe the foreground and to give
warning of an enemy approach. The planned
routes of withdrawal of the outpost are included
within the areas of surveillance of these observers.
b. Security sentinels are placed on the nearest
terrain feature allowing observation of the com-
pany's front, generally not over 400 yards from
the position. The company commander may direct
each front-line platoon to furnish local security to
its front, or he may assign the security mission to
the support platoon. Security posts normally con-
sist of two to four observers. As the enemy ap-
proaches, local security elements give warning and
observe to determine the enemy strength, actions
and routes of approach. They withdraw to the bat-
tle position in time to prevent close combat. At
night, listening posts, supplemented by patrols, are
established on the likely avenues of enemy ap-
proach.
c. Within each squad area, at least one sentinel
is alert at all times. At night, double sentinels are
posted. Sentinels should be relieved every two
hours, or more frequently, to keep them alert.
d. The rifle company adds to its security by
passive measures to include control of movement,
camouflage, concealment, and light and noise dis-
cipline.

325. ROAD BLOCKS AND DEFENSE OF OBSTACLES.

(See fig. 68.) The rifle company often is assigned
the mission of establishing road blocks or of de-
fending obstacles. The size of the force necessary
for such a mission varies from a rifle squad to a

320
reinforced rifle company. Depending on the situa-
tion, the battalion commander may direct that the
defense be maintained at all costs until a specified
time or until the enemy pressure threatens to over-
run or outflank the position. Troops and weapons
are placed so that they can cover.effectively, by
fire, the road and the area on either side of the
obstacle and approaches to it. In periods of good
visibility, these positions are placed at such dis-
tance from the road or obstacle as to be outside
the zone of dispersion of enemy fire directed at
the road or obstacle. During periods of poor visi-
bility, positions are occupied closer to the obstacle
but beyond hand-grenade range. A small outguard

OUTGUARD

Figure 68. Road block or defense of an obstacle under con-

ditions of good visibility (schematic).

321
is established where it can give adequate warning
of the approach of an enemy torce. The leader
places guards to warn friendly troops of the ob-
stacle or to prevent unauthorized persons from
going beyond the obstacle or road block. The leader
maintains contact with his commander and
promptly notifies him of enemy action and de-
velopments.

326. DEFENSE OF REAR INSTALLATIONS. A rifle'

company or a smaller unit may be detailed to pro-
tect an installation in rear of the battle zone. Hos-
tile actions, against which this unit is prepared to
defend, include ground attacks, airborne attacks,
guerrilla raids, civilian uprisings, and sabotage.
Normally, the unit can provide this protection best
by placing security detachments throughout the
area and retaining the bulk of its strength mobile.
The security detachments may vary in size from
individual sentinels to reinforced squads. They
may include sentinel posts, outguards, and foot or
motorized patrols. Their numbers and locations
should permit prompt suppression of minor dis-
turbances or timely alerting of the mobile force
in the case of a more serious threat. The mobile
force is prepared to defend the installation by
attacking the hostile force or by defending from
prepared defensive positions.

327. REAR GUARD. a. Rear guards are used to pro-

tect a foot or motorized column which is marching
away from the enemy, and to protect the rear of a
column advancing toward the enemy if an attack

322
or a harassing action from the rear is possible.
b. When a battalion is the rear guard, its rear
rifle company is the support. The mission of the
support is to protect that element of the rear guard
which immediately precedes it in the direction of
march.
c. A company having the mission of support of a
rear guard battalion adopts a formation similar
to that of the support of an advance guard bat-
talion in the reverse order of march. The sup-
port is formed in three groups: the support proper,
the rear party, and the rear point. The company
details one rifle platoon to act as rear party. The
rear party platoon details a rifle squad to act as
rear point. The distances between elements of the
support vary with the situation, the terrain, and
the visibility; they correspond generally to the dis-
tances between elements of the advance guard
(par. 22). When the support is motorized, it moves
as a unit. When the column halts, the rear support
dismounts and forms a march outpost. When the
column moves, whether mounted or dismounted,
the support follows the preceding element at a dis-
tance set by the battalion commander.
d. When an enemy pursuit is close, elements of
the support delay the enemy to permit the next
preceding unit to make suitable dispositions. Fire
is opened at long range. Usually, elements do not
move toward the enemy to reinforce a lower ele-
ment. The larger element occupies a delaying po-
sition to cover the withdrawal of the smaller ele-
ment. The element in contact with the enemy then
withdraws under the protective fires of the ele-

853696 0-49-22 323

ment occupying the delaying position. The rate of
retirement is coordinated with the main body and
adjacent rear guard elements. In general, the com-
bat action of a company operating as the support
of a rear guard in close contact with the enemy
is conducted according to the principles of a de-
laying action (par. 331).
e. When the rear party is on foot, it is disposed
in a column of two's with one file on each side of
the road. The rear party commander marches be-
hind the rear party. From this position, he can
decide quickly what to do when the rear point re-
ceives fire. When the rear party commander de-
cides that it is necessary to fight in place, he se-
lects a firing position that provides long fields of
fire and is well along the route of march from the
position occupied by the point. He sends a runner
to the leader of the point to tell him where the po-
sition is and to lead the point back in its with-
drawal. The withdrawal of the rear party is cov-
ered by the support proper.
f. The rear point stops to fire only when enemy
action threatens to interfere with the march. It
signals the rear party commander when the enemy
is sighted. The rear point is not reinforced by
other troops. When the rear point is ordered to
withdraw by the rear party commander, it uses a
route that does not mask the fire of the rear party.

Section VI. RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

328. GENERAL. A retrograde movement is a move-

ment to the rear or away from the enemy. It may

324
be forced by the enemy, or it may be made volun-
tarily. Retrograde movements include withdraw-
als from action, retirements, and delaying actions.

329. WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION. a. A with-

drawal from action is the operation of breaking off
combat with a hostile force by a rearward move-
ment. It may be followed by a retirement or by
the occupation of a rear position or area from
which subsequent offensive or defensive action is
conducted. Withdrawals are classified as daylight
withdrawals or night withdrawals, according to
the time the movement is begun. Daylight with-
drawals usually result in excessive losses and are
avoided. Secrecy, careful planning, and rapid
movement are essential to success.
b. Orders from the battalion commander for
withdrawals include-
(1) Organization and location of the bat-
talion covering force.
(2) Attachments of elements of the heavy
weapons company and other supporting
units to the front-line rifle companies.
(3) Time of withdrawal .of each echelon.
(4) Initial point and zones or routes of with-
drawal for each company.
(5) Location of assembly areas and phase
lines.
(6) Route of withdrawal of the battalion com-
mand post and successive locations.
(7) Requirements for maintaining secrecy
and security.

325
 (8) Administrative details, including re-
moval or destruction of supplies.

330. RETIREMENT. A retirement is an orderly

withdrawal of troops according to their own plan
and without pressure by the enemy. It follows a
withdrawal from action and commences when con-
tact with the enemy is broken completely.

331. DELAYING ACTION. Delaying action is a form

of defensive action on one or more positions used
to retard the enemy's advance and to gain time
without becoming decisively engaged. This delay
usually is obtained by forcing the enemy to deploy
early and to consume time in preparation for
battle.

332. RETROGRADE MOVEMENT TACTICAL CONSID-

ERERATIONS. Retrograde movements are protected
by continuous ground reconnaissance to the flanks
and rear, by covering forces, by rapid movements
under cover of darkness, by strong antiaircraft
defense, and by continuous all-around antitank
defense. Obstacles and contaminations may be
used to protect the flanks and. to delay the hostile
advance.

333. RETROGRADE MOVEMENT ORDER. The follow-

ing information is included in a company retro-
grade order:
a. Information of enemy and friendly forces.
b. Company mission and details of coordination
applicable to the company as a whole, including

326
routes or zones of withdrawal, phase lines, forma-
tion, and location of the initial.point or comp/anyi
assembly area.
c. Tasks for lower units, such is elements of the
covering force, its composition, its commander and
the time he assumes command, and its route and
time of withdrawal. Also, specific tasks for each
unit to include attachments to rifle platoons, loca-
tion of assembly areas for each platoon, routes of
withdrawal for all units, and time of withdrawal
for all units.
d. Instructions relative to transportation, evac-
uation of casualties, and supply for covering force
elements and other units.
e. Limitations, if any, on radio and special pyro-
technic signals; present or future locations and
times of opening command posts; and location of
the company commander.

334. NIGHT WITHDRAWAL-GENERAL CONSID-

ERERATIONS. A front-line company executes a
night withdrawal by all company elements moving
to the rear at the same time, less those troops left
in place as a covering force. (See fig. 69.) The
success of the withdrawal depends on careful co-
ordination and secrecy. The withdrawal of troops
and weapons and their subsequent assembly is done
as quietly as possible. By their fires and patroling,
troops of the covering force simulate the normal
activities of the unit. Elements of supporting units
located within a front-line company defense area
may be attached to the company for the with-
drawal. In preparation for a night withdrawal,

327
special tactical measures may be used to confuse
and disrupt the enemy; for example, limited objec-
tive attacks, raids, and variation of fire plans.

335. COVERING FORCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.

a. The strength and composition of the covering
force is designated by the battalion commander.
It usually does not exceed one-third of the rifle
strength of the company with skeleton crews for
supporting weapons. Normally, one rifle squad is
left in each platoon defense area of the forward
rifle companies. As soon as the platoons are with-
drawn, men of the squad, left in place, move to
where they can cover the most likely enemy ap-
proaches to the platoon area and at the same time
furnish close protection for the supporting weap-
ons. The squad left in the support platoon area of
each front-line company patrols in the rear area.
One rifle platoon usually is left in place in the
reserve company area. It patrols, protects the cov-
ering force command post, and blocks the most
likely avenue of enemy approach into the battalion
rear area.
b. Machine guns as needed are attached to the
covering force. Not more than two 60-mm mortars
of each front-line company are left in position to
fire normal night missions. Rocket launchers as
needed are left in position to cover approaches
which can be used by hostile tanks at night.
c. Usually, the company executive officer com-
mands the rifle company elements left as part of
the covering force. He takes over the company

328
command post. He uses messengers, wire, and
radio to maintain communication.

336. RECONNAISSANCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.

If practicable, unit leaders, down to and including
the squad and selected guides, reconnoiter routes
to their assembly areas during daylight. If the
company organizes and occupies a rear position
following the withdrawal, reconnaissance of the
rear position is made. Each company places guides
at the forward and rear positions. To preserve se-
crecy, reconnaissance groups are limited in size.

337. EXECUTION OF NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. Rear-

ward movement of all rifle company elements, less
covering force elements, begins simultaneously at
the designated time. Men move back to squad as-
sembly areas, squads move to platoon assembly
areas, and platoons move to the company assembly
area. Small column formations, which aid control,
are used. Elements of the reserve company may
move directly to the company's assembly area.
The movement is timed so that there is no waiting
in platoon assembly areas or in the company as-
semly area. Company transportation meets the
company as far forward as practicable. The limit
of its forward movement is prescribed by the bat-
talion commander. Vehicles are moved singly or
in small groups, and all motor movements are
made without lights. Enough vehicles are left with
the covering force to move its supporting weapons.

338. SECURITY FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. The

covering force provides the primary security for

329
 Cu.. '
DURINGDAYLIGHT
DEFENSEAREA AS OCCUPIED
INITIAL COMPANY

XII ICOVEHINi;F'.IRCE

YISTll.I'itN OF COMPANY('OVERINGFORCELEFT IN POSITIOIN

Figure69. Night withdrawal of a front-line rifle company

(schematic).

330
the company's withdrawal. The company com-
mander provides additional close-in security for
the movement to the battalion assembly area.

339. SUPPLY FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. Ammuni-

tion supply of the front-line companies is replen-
ished before the beginning of the withdrawal, if
necessary. The company commander anticipates
his supply requirements for the rear position and
arranges to have those supplies moved to a loca-
tion which simplifies the supply of the company.

340. COMMUNICATION FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.

a. In a night withdrawal, the company command
post remains open in its old location until the com-
pany, less the covering force, leaves the company
assembly area. The time of displacement, the route
of movement, and the new location of the company
command post are announced in the company or-
der. A wire line may be laid from the assembly
area to the old command post to provide rapid com-
munication with the covering force and with the
battalion command post.
b. The covering force uses wire lines already
established in the old position. The old company
command post becomes the command post of the
covering force. For purposes of deception, the cov-
ering force maintains normal radio traffic. Upon
its withdrawal, it cuts wire circuits and removes
a portion of the wire to prevent its use by the
enemy.
c. During the company's movement from the
company assembly area to the battalion assembly

331
area, the company command post is with the
marching column. Radio silence is maintained ac-
cording to battalion orders. Maximum use is made
of existing wire circuits to the rear.

341. WITHDRAWAL OF COVERING FORCE AT

NIGHT. The battalion order specifies the condi-
tion or time for the withdrawal, the routes of with-
drawal, and the assembly area. If a rear position
is occupied by the main force, the covering force
usually is withdrawn in time to be under the pro-
tection of the outpost of the rear position by day-
light. All elements of the covering force usually
are withdrawn at the same time. The covering
force commander protects his movement to the
rear by the use of security groups.

342. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL. a. Daylight with-

drawals are accomplished best when the situation
prevents the enemy from seriously interfering;
however, in emergencies, daylight withdrawals
may be ordered when the enemy is in close con-
tact. A daylight withdrawal order normally is
oral, brief, and fragmentary.
b. In a daylight withdrawal, each echelon cov-
ers the withdrawal of the next echelon to the front.
(See fig. 70.) The support platoon covers the with-
drawal of the front-line platoons. The battalion
reserve covers the withdrawal of the support pla-
toon of the front-line companies.
c. The initial withdrawal consists of a thinning
out of the defense area troops. Men from front-
line platoons are sent to the rear of the support

332
platoon area, where a platoon noncommissioned
officer assembles them or sends them directly to the
company assembly area. Automatic weapons in
each area cover the withdrawal of the troops of

PROTECTS WITHDRAWAL OF
FRONT-LINE PLATOONS

TO DESIGNATED ASSEMBLY AREAS

Figure 70. Daylight withdrawal of a front-line rifle com-

pany (schematic).

that area. When withdrawn, these weapons move

directly to the company assembly area. As soon
as the last elements of the front-line platoons have
withdrawn, the support platoon similarly with-

333
draws under the protection of the battalion
reserve.
d. Supporting weapons in the rifle company area
normally are attached to the company for the with-
drawal. Some of these weapons, together with the
elements of the weapons platoon, may be used to
assist in covering the withdrawal. If 60-mm mor-
tars are located in the forward platoon areas, they
are attached to the rifle platoons and are with-
drawn with the initial elements of those platoons.
If the 60-mm mortars are used in the support pla-
toon area, they support the forward platoons and
withdraw with the support platoon. If 75-mm
rifles are located in the forward platoon areas,
they may be attached to these platoons for the
withdrawal.

343. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONS.

Since a delay in successive positions is based on
limited resistance at any one position, the company
may be given a frontage twice as wide as it would
have in a sustained defense. This frontage nor-
mally is covered by placing the three rifle platoons
abreast. Successive positions and routes of with-
drawal are prescribed by the battalion commander.
The company commander directs early reconnais-
sance of these positions and routes by his unit lead-
ers. The organization and the conduct of a delay-
ing position defense are according to the principles
governing a combat outpost. (See par. 321.) The
withdrawal to the next delaying position may be
made by withdrawing platoons alternately and
covering the gaps thus created by the fire of sup-

334
porting weapons, or by withdrawing all platoons
at the same time, with each platoon covering its
own withdrawal. Between the successive delaying
positions, intermediate positions offering good
fields of fire are occupied by detachments with au-
tomatic weapons.

344. DELAYING ACTION IN ONE POSITION. a. The

'nission of delay may require a force to hold a
certain position for a predetermined time. The
rifle company assigned a part of a sector on a de-
laying position with this mission distributes its
troops, organizes the position, and plans its final
protective fires as in a normal defense. Increased
frontages are covered by allowing greater inter-
vals between adjacent defense areas. Intervals
between men in platoon and smaller defense areas
are not increased. Gaps between units are covered
by flanking fire or by the fires of supporting weap-
ons. Mobility is preferable for the support platoon
so that it can provide support for the entire com-
pany forward area.
b. When the company is assigned the mission of
delaying the advance of the enemy along a road,
it should select a position where it can bring sur-
prise fire against the enemy maneuvering toward
the road block. This may be done by placing a
small company element astride the road or in the
immediate vicinity of it and dividing the greater
part of the company into groups to each side of
the road.

335
 CHAPTER 9

COMMUNICATION

345. REFERENCES. For references on the details of

installing, operating, and maintaining communica-
tions systems, see appendix VIII.

346. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL. a. Officers are

trained in the capabilities and the use of the com-
pany communication system, including radiotele-
phone procedure and security. They operate hand
or shoulder-carried portable voice sets.
b. The communication noncommissioned officer
is trained as a communication chief. He keeps his
company commander informed on matters pertain-
ing to communication. He supervises the installa-
tion, operation, and maintenance of the communi-
cation system. He assists in the procurement of
signal supplies for the company. He trains com-
pany communication personnel and other men des-
ignated by the company commander. Part of this
training is conducted by battalion and other head-
quarters.
c. The communication noncommissioned officer
supervises the maintenance of communication se-
curity in the company. He transmits information
contained in current communication orders; for
example, signal operation instructions (SOI) and

336
 standing signal instructions (SSI). He makes rec-
ommendations to his company commander on mat-
ters pertaining to communication.
d. The bugler is the principal assistant to the
communication noncommissioned officer. His du-
ties are assigned to him by the company command-
er and the communication noncommissioned offi-
cer. He is trained to install, operate, and main-
tain all items of communication equipment in the
company.
e. The radiotelephone operators operate and
maintain the back-packed radio sets in the com-
pany. Their training includes radiotelephone pro-
cedure and security. They also are trained to in-
stall, operate, and maintain all items of communi-
cation equipment issued to the company.
f. The messengers are selected for their sturdi-
ness, courage, and self-reliance. They must not be
subject to night blindness. They are trained to
carry written or verbal messages under all condi-
tions and to install, operate, and maintain all items
of communication equipment in the company. Mes-
senger training includes work on map reading and
organization and practice in recognizing com-
manders by sight.
g. Orderlies and other men designated by the
company commander are trained to install, oper-
ate, and maintain the company communication
system. These men are used to augment communi-
cation personnel, especially for installing, operat-
ing, and maintaining the wire system and back-
packed radio sets.

337
347. EQUIPMENT. a. Light-weight switchboards
which can service 6 single channels of wire com-
munication or approximately 24 party-line chan-
nels are issued to the company. Battery and sound-
powered telephones are provided. Light-weight
field wire is available to establish a command and
fire-control seystem. The wire is laid or recovered
by light reels which may be hand carried. The wire
also is laid by the wire dispenser in which it is
issued.
b. Radio equipment includes low-powered port-
able voice sets. Two types are issued; one is car-
ried in the hand or on the shoulder, and the other
is back-packed. Back-packed radios have a range
of approximately 3 miles and are frequency-modu-
lated (f-m) with a frequency (channel) which can
be changed by the operator. These radios will net
with similar type radios mounted in all tanks. The
hand or shoulder-carried radio has a range of ap-
proximately 1 mile.
c. Visual signal equipment consists of fluores-
cent marking panels with different color combina-
tions, pyrotechnics and smoke in various colors
and types, arm-and-hand signals, and improvised
lights and flags.
d. Sound signal equipment includes whistles,
horns, bugles, gongs, small arms, and other noise-
making devices.

348. USE OF COMMUNICATION. a. The company

commander directs the use of communication
available to the company. Communication i'sikept

338.
flexible to provide a means of contact during the
different tactical situations.
b. Wire communication depends on the time
available to install and recover the wire. (See fig.
71.) If enough wire is available, recovery need
not be made by the company. In fast-moving situa-
tions, time limitations may limit wire usage to
short fire-control lines which can be recovered

I WRE NET I

,-60 -6
WIRE NET OPR

BN

I * BATTERY-POWERED
TELEPHONE

I OSOUND'POWERED TELEPHON

r] SWITCHBOARD
C

Figure 71. Type rifle company 'wire net.

853696 0--49----23 339

quickly. In defensive situations, a complete wire
system is installed for fire control and control of
units.
c. Radio is limited only by the characteristics
of the sets, such as range, frequency and type of
modulation, security restrictions, and interference
from static, jamming, or terrain obstacles. (See
fig. 72.) Radio is an ideal means of communica-
tion for fast-moving situations. When wire is
available, radio normally is held in readiness only.
The details of net operation are contained in signal
operation instructions; for example, call signs, fre-
quencies, and codes. The efficiency of the radio
system depends on operator training.
d. Foot messengers operate between the com-
pany command post and the command post of bat-
talion and platoons. Messenger communication is
used within platoons by the use of platoon mes-
sengers or other men. The company sends two
messengers to the battalion command post, one of
whom returns to the company. This familiarizes
messengers with the locations of and routes to the
command posts. An exchange of messengers is
made when the battalion or company command
post displaces. Foot messengers may operate as
motor messengers by using company vehicles.
e. Visual and sound signals are limited only by
the signals themselves and by limitations placed
on their use for security reasons. They are a rapid
means of communication but are easily misunder-
stood. Messages must be simple. For effective use
of this means of communication, selected men are
assigned the duty of remaining on the alert to re-

340
 RADIO NETS

t /

*s.. *-.. .-
I -
I s 2 3 WPNS /

\ L … J

LCOMPNY COMM.ANDER

BN NET

TANK ' TLCMMAND POSTj-"- 81-MM OR HEAVY MORTAR

LEGEND

LIGHT WEIGHT*
PORTABLE

PACK TYPE
OR MTSEOUIVALENT

Figure 72. Type rifle company radio net.

341
 ceive them. The meanings of visual and sound sig-
nals are prescribed in the signal operations in-
structions. They are an auxiliary means of com-
munication.
(1) Panels, smoke, and pyrotechnics are used
for marking positions, for identifying
units and vehicles, and for sending short
prearranged messages. These visual sig-
nals are obtained from the signal opera-
tion instructions or may be originated by
the company commander after proper co-
ordination. Prearranged messages given
in the signal operation instructions usu-
ally include calls for fire, calls for lifting
fire, and objective reached. Improvised
lights and flags may be used for special
purposes. (For the use of arm-and-hand
signals, see app. III.)
(2) Sound signals are used chiefly to spread
an alarm, to attract attention, and to
transmit short, prearranged messages.
The sound signals used to warn of air,
tank, and gas attacks usually are given in
the signal operation instructions.

349. COMMUNICATION COORDINATION. The com-

pany communication system is part of the battal-
ion system The company installs, operates, and
maintains its system as part of the over-all bat-
talion communication plan. A pack-type radio set
is netted with the battalion command net. In de-
fensive situations and when time permits in attack
situations, the battalion communication platoon in-

342
stalls wire from the battalion command post to the
company command post.

350. QOMMIUNICATLON ORDERS. The rifle company

bmmmndei'sort~dr contains instructions for com-
munication. Frequently, such instructions consist
only of the location of the commander or of his
command post. Other instructions relative to com-
munication may be given in fragmentary form.
Such instructions include the allotment within the
company of the means of communication and the
signal operation instructions of larger units that
are applicable to the company. In the defense,
these instructions include the final protective fires
which may be called for by pyrotechnic signal.
Platoon leaders acquaint all men with this signal
and inform them of the location or locations from
which it may be fired. Standing operating proce-
dure may be used to simplify and abbreviate or-
ders. Because of . security reasons, the rifle com-
pany is not given the complete signal operation
instructions. Pertinent information is extracted
for the company by the battalion or a higher com-
mander.

343
 CHAPTER 10

ADMINISTRATION

Section I. PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION

351. GENERAL. The company is the basic unit in

the army having administrative functions. The
entire administrative system of the army, from
squad to the Department of the Army, depends
greatly on the initial actions of the company com-
mander. Personnel administration within the com-
pany involves personnel management and record
keeping and reporting.
a. Personnel management functions of the com-
pany commander are given in paragraphs 10
and 11.
b. Record keeping and reporting involve organ-
izational and individual records and reports. Or-
ganizational records and reports pertaining to per-
sonnel are the morning report, duty roster, sick
book, company punishment record, company corre-
spondence file, and a file of regulations including
Army Regulations, circulars, bulletins, and orders.
Individual records and reports based upon these
organizational records are furnished to the unit
personnel section of the regiment. This provides
the proper maintenance of each man's records,
such as the service record, the soldier's qualifica-

344
tion card, and the pay roll. To assist him in the
performance of these administrative functions, the
company commander delegates the over-all super-
vision of administration to his executive officer.
The company commander delegates the functions
of record keeping and reporting to the unit admin-
istrative warrant officer and the first sergeant.
The company commander signs or initials these
records and reports as required, and he constantly
verifies their accuracy to insure efficient adminis-
tration in his unit.

Section II. SUPPLY

352. GENERAL. a. Responsibility. The company com-

mander is responsible for all supplies and equip-
ment issued to his unit. Although the system for
accounting for these items may be informal in
combat, the company commander sees that his com-
pany is completely equipped, that equipment is
effectively used, and that equipment on hand is
actually needed. He enforces supply discipline
through constant care, supervision, maintenance,
preservation, and conservation of all types of sup-
plies and equipment.
b. Supply discipline. Good supply discipline pro-
motes combat efficiency. It includes proper main-
tenance, salvage, vehicle recovery, evacuation of
captured materiel, prevention of hoarding, and the
indoctrination of his men with the importance of
supply. Supply discipline is acquired only through
training and enforcement by the officers and the
noncommissioned officers of the unit. This training

345
stresses the proper use of food, clothing, weapons,
fuel, and motor vehicles, and the practice of hy-
giene and sanitation. The equipment given to and
carried by each man should be that which he ac-
tually needs. No individual should be permitted to
throw away prescribed equipment, to use transpor-
tation unnecessarily, or to handle supplies care-
lessly or wastefully.

c. Duties of company administrative group. The com-

pany commander makes timely requests for sup-
plies, distributes them to his men, and assists in
the supply of attached units. He is assisted by the
mess and supply personnel in supplying his unit.
(For supply procedures within the infantry regi-
ment, see FM 7-30.)
(1) The company mess personnel draw ra-
tions, check them, and divide them into
meals. The cooks prepare the meals and
distribute them and water to the com-
pany.
(2) The company supply personnel are the
supply sergeant, the armorers, and an
orderly. They request, draw, check, and
issue all company supplies except rations
and water. The armorers, in addition to
their supply functions, make minor re-
pairs on weapons and equipment. The
orderly drives the company headquarters
general utility vehicle. The normal duty
post of the supply personnel is at the com-
pany supply point.

346
353. TRANSPORTATION. Transportation for sup-
plies is provided by the rifle company's organic
transportation, by a kitchen truck and trailer
which is part of the regimental kitchen train, and
by battalion-section vehicles of the regimental am-
munition train. To centralize the control of these
vehicles and to relieve company commanders of
administrative detail, the kitchen and ammunition
train vehicles are assigned organically to the bat-
talion section of the regimental service company's
service platoon. Regimental and battalion vehicles
move supplies as far forward as practicable. The
company's lighter vehicles and carrying parties
move supplies the remaining distance to the troops.

354. FOOD AND WATER. a. Rations are issued to

the company automatically on the basis of
strength; however, in special situations, the com-
pany commander often submits an informal ration
request for the required quantity of specified types
of rations. Rations to be cooked are drawn from
the regimental class I supply point and divided
into meal lots at the company kitchen. 'Rations,
such as the five-in-one, or the individual type, may
be handled similarly, or they may be issued direct
to troops by unit supply personnel.
b. The company kitchen may be established in
the company area, in the battalion kitchen area, or
in the regimental train bivouac. The kitchen is
moved as far forward as is consistent with the
situation. In some situations, it may be necessary
for troops to prepare meals individually, by
squads, or by platoons.

347
 c. The company mess location is as near the
troops to be fed as tactical conditions permit. The
location should provide defilade from hostile flat
trajectory fires and concealment from hostile ob-
servation. Consideration is given to vehicular
routes and to the accessibility of the location to the
troops. As many men as practicable are given
water and hot food at mess locations, and others
are fed by carrying parties.
d. Distribution is accomplished with available
transportation. When the kitchen is not in the
company area, kitchen trucks or organic company
vehicles transport the prepared meal forward un-
der regimental or battalion control to a release
point where company guides meet their vehicles
and guide them to the company mess location.
355. FUEL. a. The battalion S-4 keeps the compa-
nies informed of the location and the time of open-
ing of the class III supply points. Gasoline and oil
for company transportation are obtained by filling
the empty tanks of the vehicles or by the exchange
of empty 5-gallon gasoline drums for full ones at
the class III supply points. Requisitions, either
formal or informal, usually are not required.
b. Gasoline for kitchen ranges or cooking sets is
obtained by exchanging 5-gallon gasoline drums at
the class III supply point.
356. CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT. a. The company
is issued clothing and equipment as authorized by
T/A 21, T/O&E 7-17, and other directives. Re-
placement of clothing and equipment is obtained
by informal requisition to the battalion S-4. He

348
notifies the company supply personnel when they
may obtain needed supplies.
b. The informal requisition to replace lost or
destroyed items such as radios, watches, or arms
is accompanied by a certificate of loss or destruc-
tion, which is informal and states the circum-
stances of the loss or destruction.
c. Damaged equipment is evacuated and re-
paired or replaced. Equipment which cannot be
repaired within the company is sent by the first
available means to the battalion S-4. The battal-
ion S-4 repairs and returns the item to the com-
pany, or procures and issues a replacement item
to the company. If the item cannot be repaired
within the regiment, the regimental S-4 replaces
the item with a serviceable one. The battalion S-4
is notified of the location and the damage of all
equipment which the company cannot evacuate to
the rear.

357. AMMUNITION. a. The basic load of ammuni-

tion for a rifle company is the number of rounds
by type carrier on the company's organic trans-
portation. This is a fixed quantity of ammunition
and is prescribed by the Department of the Army.
Issues from the basic load are made to weapons
crews and to the men. The basic load is maintained
by drawing on the battalion section of the regi-
mental ammunition train. The company command-
er is responsible for the availability and the ade-
quate supply of ammunition for his platoons.
Whenever the company is unable to draw enough
ammunition to maintain its basic load, this fact is

349
reported to the battalion commander. Platoon
leaders supervise the delivery of ammunition to
the weapons and to the men. Leaders keep their
commanders informed of the amount of ammuni-
tion on hand.
b. In most situations, each rifle company estab-
lishes a company ammunition supply point as close
to the forward elements as enemy fire, defilade, and
vehicular routes permit. From this supply point,
ammunition is delivered to the men or weapons.
The supply sergeant operates the company ammu-
nition supply point.
c. As ammunition from basic loads is used, it is
replaced by transferring and consolidating loads
so that vehicles thus emptied may be dispatched to
the battalion ammunition supply point for resup-
ply. Vehicles dispatched for ammunition carry an
informal request which states the amount, the,
type, and the caliber of ammunition needed. Bat-
tlefield recovery from casualties also is a source of
ammunition replenishment.
d. During offensive combat, ammunition supply
is mobile.. Before entry into combat, the company
commander may issue extra ammunition; the types
and quantities depend on the tactical situation.
Mobility is permitted by providing the company
with only the amount of ammunition needed until
a replenishment can be accomplished. Ammuni-
tion is replenished whenever needed, either di-
rectly from company vehicles, which are kept as
close to the troops and weapons as the tactical
situation permits, or by hand carry from this
transportation. Vehicles dispatched to the battal-

350
ion ammunition supply point follow the route of
ammunition advance so that the ammunition sup-
ply point may be found easily if it displaces for-
ward.
e. During defensive combat, it is essential to
have a continuity of fire; therefore, enough ammu-
nition is available to every gun position. Normally,
the company weapons carriers are under company
control. The placing of ammunition on position is
not a matter of routine. Ammunition to be placed
on positions is determined by careful estimates of
the amounts that will be expended before the time
that replenishment can be expected. Based on a
careful estimate of ammunition needs, the com-
pany commander issues instructions for ammuni-
tion to be placed at weapons positions. This must
be enough to permit continual fire by the weapon.
Basic loads are replenished immediately, and the
amount placed at weapons is considered as ex-
pended. If the ammunition at weapon positions is
not fired, it is picked up by the company, returned
to the basic load, and, if necessary, reported to
higher commanders as excess to the basic load.
Basic loads are reduced to their normal level by
firing excess amounts before they are replenished.
If covered routes are available, the ammunition ve-
hicles may move directly to the platoon defense
areas, where the loads are distributed to gun posi-
tions or to each man. When conditions prohibit the
movement of weapons carriers forward of the com-
pany supply point, the ammunition is distributed
by hand carry from that point.

351
358. ROLLS. a. Rolls contain articles needed by the
troops for their personal comfort. These include
such articles as shelter halves, blankets, or sleep-
ing bags. To avoid confusion and to aid delivery,
rolls may be made up uniformly for all men,
squads, or other small groups. Rolls usually are
carried on the company general utility vehicle.
b. Rolls are delivered when the duration of the
halt and the comfort of the troops warrant. Dur-
ing offensive combat, rolls may be sent forward
with the supper and collected by the mess person-
nel after breakfast. In defensive situations, the
rolls may be delivered and collected in the same
manner, or they may be left with the men. The
battalion supply officer supervises the delivery of
rolls to companies and recovers them at the time
prescribed by the battalion commander.

359. MISCELLANEOUS ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS.

During combat, many administrative matters are
deferred. When the company is in reserve or in
a rest camp, these matters are completed under
the supervision of the company commander.
a. Bathing of men. Normally, a division bath unit
is available to the company in the regimental area.
b. Replacement of clothing. Except for the ex-
change of socks, it may be impracticable to issue
clean clothing to companies in contact with the
enemy; consequently, the company commander ar-
ranges with the battalion S-4 to furnish his men
clean clothing when his company is in reserve or
in a rest area.
c. Repair and cleaning of clothing and equipment.

352
When the company is in reserve or in a rest area,
the company commander inspects his troops. He
has them make minor repairs to their clothing and
equipment. If laundry facilities are not available,
the men wash their own clothing.
d. Burial of the dead. By checking with the regi-
mental graves registration section, the company
commander verifies that his dead are found, evacu-
ated, and buried, and that their personal effects
are collected and forwarded.

360. ORDERS. Supply matters in the company order

may include the following:
a. Location of the company and the battalion
ammunition supply points.
b. Route of ammunition advances (in attack).
c. Amount of ammunition to be placed on po-
sition.
d. Disposition of company vehicles.
e. Amount of field fortification material or in-
fantry entrenching equipment to be available.
f. Plan for feeding.
g. Detailing of guides and hand carrying par-
ties.
h. Delivery of rolls.

Section III. MEDICAL SERVICE

361. GENERAL. The rifle company commander is

responsible for the functioning of medical service
to provide for the health and sanitation of his com-
mand. This service is provided by Medical Depart-
ment enlisted men from the battalion medical pla-

353
toon of the regimental medical company who are
attached to the rifle company.

362. PERSONNEL AND DUTIES. The Medical De-

partment enlisted men attached to the rifle com-
pany are called company aid men. They are at-
tached to the company when it is on the march, in
bivouac, or in combat. Their duties include the
following:
a. Administer emergency medical treatment.
b. Direct walking wounded to the battalion aid
station or previously arranged ambulance loading
posts.
c. Move those unable to walk to protected places,
to await litter bearers or cross country ambu-
lances.
d. Keep the rifle company commander informed
of the medical situation.
e. Keep the battalion surgeon informed of the
medical and tactical situations.
f. Attach an emergency medical tag to the dead,
when time and the tactical situation permit.
g. Assist the company commander in supervis-
ing sanitation within the company area.

363. MEDICAL EVACUATION. The battalion medi-

cal platoon operates the battalion aid station and
evacuates the sick and wounded to it. The battal-
ion surgeon commands the platoon. Litter bearers
or cross country ambulances accomplish the evacu-
ation. The litter bearers and ambulance drivers
also act as messengers, maintain contact with com-
pany aid men, and administer emergency medical

354
treatment to patients being evacuated to the bat-
talion aid station. Cross country ambulances are
used as far forward as the tactical situation per-
mits. When these ambulances are unable to reach
the casualties, litter bearers carry the seriously
wounded to the battalion aid station or to ambu-
lance loading posts.
364. ORDERS. The company order includes the lo-
cation of the battalion aid station.

365. SANITATION AND PERSONAL HYGIENE. Unit

commanders supervise the sanitation of their units
and of the areas their units occupy. (See AR
40-205 and 40-210.) Medical Department-person-
nel act as advisers in the technical aspects of sani-
tation, Each individual is responsible for the en-
forcement of personal sanitary measures to protect
the health of other men and to closely check his
own.well-being. The care of feet is particularly im-
portant in cold and wet weather. Poor discipline
regarding the care of feet may cause trench foot.
When shoes and socks are wet and no replacement
is available, the feet must be massaged to maintain
the necessary circulation of blood, and wet socks
wrung out twice a day. Leaders must exercise the
strongest discipline to enforce these health pre-
cautions.

Section IV. MOTOR MAINTENANCE

366. RESPONSIBILITY. The company commander is

responsible for the operation and maintenance of
his motor equipment. He discharges this responsi-

95:3696 o-49-24 355

bility by the selection of drivers and by personal
observation and frequent inspection of vehicles,
tools, and drivers.
367. DRIVERS. The company commander and his
leaders direct and supervise the activities of the
drivers. Each driver should be assigned to a defi-
nite vehicle and held responsible for its mainte-
nance. Drivers use their vehicle tools to perform
daily and weekly preventive maintenance services.
These services include inspecting, cleaning, tight-
ening, and the care of tools and accessories. The
driver does not lubricate any part of the vehicle
where overlubrication would result in damage. He
does not tighten any part of the vehicle that in-
volves an adjustment which should be made by a
mechanic. Drivers accompany their vehicles and
act as mechanic's helpers when maintenance is
performed on the company or regimental level.
368. MAINTENANCE. a. Company-level mainte-
nance on rifle-company vehicles is performed by
the mechanics of the battalion headquarters com-
pany. It includes repairs, run-in tests, lubrication
and adjustments, limited battlefield recovery, and
overflow from driver's maintenance. The monthly
preventive maintenance service is performed on
the company level.
b. Regimental-level maintenance is performed
by the maintenance section of the service com-
pany's service platoon. This section reinforces the
maintenance performed on the company level, and
it performs the semiannual preventive mainte-
nance service.

356
 CHAPTER 11

THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY

Section I. GENERAL

369. REFERENCES. For references on general dis-

cussion of airborne operations, data relative to
troop movements by air, tactical doctrine and plan-
ning procedures for airborne operations, tech-
niques of loading aircraft, and technical training
doctrine for parachutists, see appendix VIII.

370. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. This chapter covers the

tactical employment of the airborne rifle company
in its primary mission of air assault. After it reor-
ganizes following an airborne assault landing, the
airborne rifle company operates tactically the same
as the rifle company. Therefore, most of the tac-
tical doctrine of the rifle company applies to the
airborne rifle company's ground operations. This
chapter emphasizes doctrine peculiar to the air-
borne rifle company-the differences which result
from its arrival method in the combat area.

371. ROLE OF THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY.

The airborne rifle company is trained and equipped
to enter combat by parachute or glider. It nor-
mally uses the parachute. It can drop into unpre-

357
 pared areas on any terrain that is relatively free
from obstacles dangerous to a man. The company
can fight immediately upon landing; however, it
can fight most effectively after a time interval
which permits it to recover all combat equipment
and to assemble as a tactical unit under the control
of its company commander. The company usually
fights as a part of a battalion.

372. ORGANIZATION. The airborne rifle company

has about the same organization as the rifle com-
pany. (See fig. 1.) For minor differences in men
and equipment, see the current T/O&E.

373. EQUIPMENT. a. For ground combat, the air-

borne rifle company has practically the same equip-
ment as the rifle company, but it requires special
equipment to enter combat by parachutes; person-
nel parachutes, aerial delivery parachutes, and car-
go parachutes are required. Individual equipment
containers are used for the heavy or bulky items
of equipment and supplies that are carried on the
parachutist; each man carries his individual weap-
on. Aerial delivery containers are used to para-
chute the equipment and supplies not carried by
the men. Weapons carriers can be dropped in spe-
cial containers by cargo parachutes. Each para-
chutist carries as much equipment as possible so
that the company is ready to fight soon after
landing.
b. The airborne rifle company uses special sig-
nal devices to assist the rapid assembly of troops
following the assault landing. For a detailed dis-

358
 cussion of these signal devices, see the current field
manual and current technical manuals.
c. The weapons carriers of the company can be
delivered by' parachute, glider, or assault trans-
port. They may accompany the troops in the as-
sault landing, or they may land later under the
control of the regimental or higher commander.
Vehicles not moved by air join the company when
friendly ground forces are contacted. All air-
landed vehicles are combat-loaded with supplies
and equipment. During the initial phases of the
airborne operation, transportation may be limited
by a lack of aircraft or suitable landing areas. To
increase mobility, maximum use is made of cap-
tured transportation.
d. All communication equipment in the airborne
rifle company can be parachuted with the men; for
example, each operator carries his radio to permit
him to enter the radio net promptly on landing.
Telephones and some wire are carried by para-
chutists, and wire in bulk usually is dropped in
aerial delivery containers.
e. Company kitchens do not go with the com-
pany in the assault echelon, but are brought into
the airhead under the control of higher command-
ers as soon as the situation permits. Until the
company kitchens arrive, the troops use individual
rations and mess equipment.

374. SUPPLY AND EVACUATION. a. The supply and

evacuation of an airborne force is by air until a
link-up is made with friendly forces. Air supply

359
and evacuation usually are coordinated by the di-
vision commander or by a higher commander.
b. Accompanying supplies are supplies of all
classes which the airborne unit carries into the
airhead. The amount depends on the initial com-
bat requirements, the number and the allowable
cargo load of the aircraft allotted to the company,
and the logistical support to be given by higher
units after the company lands. These supplies usu-
ally are enough for 48 to 72 hours of combat with-
out a resupply. Therefore, accompanying supplies
may exceed the amount the company actually car-
ries with it in the ground attack. These additional
supplies usually are recovered by battalion or regi-
ment and placed in supply points.
c. Parachutists carry their own rations and the
ammunition for their individual weapons. Ammu-
nition for light crew-served weapons and limited
amounts of ammunition for the heavier company
weapons can be carried in equipment containers
on the parachutist. Ammunition for these crew-
served weapons also is dropped in aerial delivery
containers. Upon landing, the weapons crew or
other previously selected men promptly recover the
equipment and supplies which the company needs
to carry into combat.
d. Rolls carried by parachutists are kept small
and light to keep the troops mobile after they land.
Such items as toilet articles and extra socks are
carried by the individual in accordance with regi-
mental standard operating procedures.
e. The company aid men enter combat with the
company. Litter bearers from the battalion medi-

360
cal platoon may be attached for the air movement,
landing, and reorganization. Casualties are held
at medical installations of higher units until evac-
uation is possible.
f. When the airborne rifle company reorganizes
following the assault landing, its supply and evac-
uation become the same as the rifle company's.

375. SUPPORTING ARMS AND WEAPONS. a. Artillery.

Light artillery landed by parachute, glider, or as-
sault transport accompanies or closely follows the
assault landing of the infantry troops. Forward
observers land with their respective rifle compa-
nies. They keep abreast of the situation and are
ready to direct artillery fires when their artillery
units are in a firing position. When the airhead is
established, medium artillery may be landed. The
principles of field artillery employment generally
apply within the restrictions of limited transpor-
tation and ammunition, decentralized control, and
difficulty of reorganization after landing.
b. Combat aviation. Cooperating tactical aircraft
give air protection during the air movement, neu-
tralize targets in the objective area before the as-
sault landing, and give close support to airborne
units during the ground assault. During the ini-
tial stages of the attack, cooperating aircraft sup-
plement artillery, antiaircraft, and antitank weap-
ons-which usually are limited in number. Com-
bat aviation also supplements the striking power
of assault troops which is weakened by the absence
of friendly armor.
c. Tanks. Although the airborne division has no

361
organic tank units, it is normal to attach tank units
to the division for sustained combat. The attach-
ment of these units males the airborne division
equivalent to the infantry division in: tank
strength. Tank reinforcements usually join the
airborne division when it contacts friendly forces
after its airborne assault landing. Tanks attached
to or supporting the airborne rifle company are
used as prescribed in FM 17-32.
d. Regimental and battalion supporting weapons. Ex-
cept for their lack of organic tanks, the airborne
battalion and regiment have practically the same
supporting weapons as the infantry battalion and
regiment. As in all ground combat, the supporting
weapons give close support to the rifle companies.
During the initial stages of the ground attack, a
shortage of weapons carriers limits the displace-
ment of heavy supporting weapons and also limits
the amount of ammunition at firing positions.

376. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For defense against

an air attack, the airborne rifle company depends
chiefly on passive measures. (See par. 12.) Anti-
aircraft units attached to battalion or regiment
give additional security. Cooperating aircraft
maintain local air superiority.

377. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Airborne troops are

particularly vulnerable to an enemy tank attack
because of no friendly armor in the airhead. Ini-
tially, reliance is placed on antitank mines and
rocket launchers. The divisional and regimental
antitank weapons, which land with or soon after

362
the assault elements, give some of the antitank de-
fense usually given by tanks. The antitank weap-
ons and the antitank measures of the airborne rifle
company in ground combat are practically the
same as those of the rifle company. (See par. 13.)

Section II. PREPARATIONS FOR THE AIRBORNE

ATTACK

378. GENERAL. a. Airborne operations require de-

tailed planning at all levels. Plans which are co-
ordinated in detail with participating troop car-
rier units include the selection of drop and landing
zones, the allocation of aircraft, the air movement
plan, and the marshaling plan.
b. For coordination, airborne commanders usu-
ally participate in the detailed planning of the next
higher unit. The security requirements determine
the time the airborne rifle company commander is
informed of an airborne mission in which his com-
pany will participate. Until the units are sealed
in marshaling camps, operational information is
given only to those who need it to perform their
duties. The briefing plan of the division or higher
commander indicates when the unit commanders
will receive portions of the operations plan. The
company commander usually receives a warning
order at least one week before the operation.
c. For an airborne attack, the company does its
preliminary planning and preparing at its base
camp before moving to the marshaling camp. It
makes final plans and preparations in a marshaling
camp near the departure airfield. A base camp

363
near the departure airfield may serve also as the
marshaling camp.
d. Planning is continuous until the operation is
over. The company commander amplifies or
changes his plans to meet changes in the situation
or in the plans of higher commanders.
e. The company commander usually receives the
warning order while in the base camp. The warn-
ing order may be in the form of the battalion op-
erations plan. Under exceptionally strict security
requirements, the company commander may re-
ceive only general information until after the com-
pany is sealed in a marshaling camp.

379. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The bat-

talion order gives the company its mission and des-
ignates the supporting and attached units. If the
company is an assault company, it is given a defi-
nite terrain objective or a series of objectives, a
zone of action, a direction of attack, a line of de-
parture or attack position, and the time or condi-
tions to begin the attack. The battalion plans and
orders also include-
a. Information of the enemy and the terrain in
the area of operations.
b. Location of drop zones or landing zones for
the battalion.
c. Plan for reorganization after landing. This
includes the location of company assembly areas,
the assembly aids, the method of collecting strag-
glers, reports, and security measures.
d. Data on the air movement. This includes the
location of the departure airfield; allocation of air-
364
craft; composition of the aircraft serials; and the
time for the loading, the take-off, and the arrival
at the destination.
e. Data on marshaling. This includes the loca-
tion of the marshaling camp, the time and method
of movement to it, and the activities inside it; liai-
son with troop carrier units; and plans for loading
aircraft. Data on marshaling may be in a separate
order if security requires withholding the airborne
mission until arrival in the marshaling camp.
f. Communication within the battalion.
g. Plan for reconnaissance after the landing.
h. Coordination with adjacent units.
i. Antiaircraft and antitank security measures
taken on landing and during the attack.
j. Instruction to glider pilots attached to the
battalion on landings.
k. Recognition between airborne units and the
forces making the ground link-up, when applicable.
I. Details of air-sea rescue, when applicable.
m. Details of time and place of arrival and the
use of troops and equipment in the follow-up eche-
lon, when applicable.
n. Organization of and instructions to the rear
echelon.
o. Supply and evacuation plan, including the
method of recovering supplies and special meas-
ures for air resupply and air evacuation.
p. Alternate plans for accomplishing the mis-
sion.

380. ORGANIZATION FOR THE ATTACK. a. For

the airborne assault, the company adjusts its or-

365
ganization to meet the requirements of the bat-
talion plans and orders. The company may be
reinforced, particularly if it is to reorganize in a
separate assembly area or if it is to go on a sepa-
rate mission after landing. Attachments are exe-
cuted before the move to the marshaling camp or
immediately after arrival in it. This gives the
company commander time to coordinate the use of
his attached units and to control the preparations
for the air movement. In organizing for combat,
the company may be divided into assault, follow-
up, and rear echelons.
b. The assault echelon of the company consists
of the troops and equipment initially landed by
parachute or glider to seize the company objective.
The entire airborne rifle company, with its or-
ganic weapons and transportation, can enter com-
bat by parachute, glider, or assault transport;
however, it may be necessary to leave some per-
sonnel and equipment behind during the assault
landing.
c. The follow-up echelon is the combat portion
of the company which is not included in the as-
sault echelon because of an aircraft shortage or
because of the situation. It joins the assault eche-
lon as soon as possible after the airhead is estab-
lished or after a link-up is made between the as-
sault echelon and friendly ground forces.
d. When weapons carriers, company kitchens,
organic trucks, trailers, and their operating per-
sonnel cannot be included in the assault echelon or
later landings of the assault, they should be in-
cluded in the follow-up echelon.

366
 e. The rear echelon includes any portion of the
company not needed for combat. It remains be-
hind to do administrative work which cannot be
done efficiently in the combat area. This echelon
is kept as small as possible. Its organization and
functions usually are prescribed by the battalion
commander or by a higher commander. The rear
echelon may include guards for organizational
property, personnel temporarily disqualified physi-
cally for airborne assault landings, and, in some
instances, the company kitchens and mess person-
nel. The rear echelon normally operates under
regimental or higher control.

381. RECONNAISSANCE. a. The company command-

er's reconnaissance before the airborne assault
landing ordinarily is limited to a study of maps,
terrain models, and photographs of the objective
area. For other information of the enemy and
the terrain, he relies on higher commanders. He
seeks the following information on which to base
his attack plans:
(1) Nature of the drop zone, or landing zone
if landing in gliders.
(2) Nature of his assembly area.
(3) Location of critical points or areas held
by the enemy in or near his zone of
action.
(4) Location and types of obstacles in his
zone of action.
(5) Location of favorable routes of approach
to the company objective.
b. The company commander plans his after-

367
 landing reconnaissance before he begins the air
movement.

382. MARSHALING CAMP. a. Marshaling is the pro-

cess in which units participating in an airborne
operation move to temporary camps at or near de-
parture airfields, complete their combat prepara-
tions, and load into aircraft ready for departure.
b. A marshaling camp is a sealed area for the
final preparation of troops for combat. Communi-
cations zone personnel construct, maintain, and
operate this camp. During the marshaling, they
relieve participating airborne units of as many ad-
ministrative problems as possible. For secrecy,
the camp is inclosed by wire or other obstacles.
Airborne units enter marshaling camps for close
liaison with troop carrier units, for briefing troops,
for secrecy, and for control of their final prepara-
tions for the air movement. The company mar-
shals in one camp as a part of the battalion or
higher unit. The company normally has 4 days in
the marshaling camp to-
(1) Brief the troops.
(2) Establish liaison with troop carrier units
transporting the company.
(3) Conduct a final equipment inspection.
(4) Complete procurement of supplies and
equipment.
(5) Issue supplies and special items of equip-
ment.
(6) Complete the packing of aerial delivery
containers.

368
 (7) Complete operational and administrative
planning for the ground attack.
(8) Combat load aerial delivery containers
and other equipment and supplies into
the aircraft.

383. BRIEFING. a. The troops are not briefed until

they are sealed in the marshaling camp, where-
upon they are briefed in exact detail. Briefing aids
are used, including low-altitude photos of the op-
erations area, large-scale maps showing enemy
defenses and obstacles, and terrain models such
as rubber relief maps and sand tables.
b. Platoon leaders brief their troops to let each
man know enough of the platoon and company
plan to perform his duties. Troops and leaders also
are briefed on the plans of battalion and higher
units so that, in case of inaccurate landings or un-
expected enemy resistance during the landing and
reorganization, they can conduct themselves ac-
cording to the over-all plans of the higher units.
Forward observers and attached units are included
in the company briefing. Glider pilots are briefed
with the troops they transport, since they may
have to fight with them. All troops are briefed
on alternate plans for accomplishing the company
mission.
c. In briefing the troops, the reorganization plan
is stressed particularly because, upon landing, each
man's ability to orient himself on the ground and
to locate the assembly area is an important factor
in regaining command control of the troops.

369
384. LOADING-GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. a.
Loading troops, equipment, and supplies into air-
craft is a command responsibility. Aircraft load-
ing is planned in great detail because of the air-
craft characteristics and the restrictions for safety
in flight. The company loading plan is based on the
battalion loading plan. Loading is supervised by
troop carrier representatives, usually the pilots,
,who have final decision on matters affecting their
aircraft.
b. Stations is the hour the aircraft must be com-
pletely combat loaded, with all airborne and troop
carrier personnel in their places ready for the
take-off.

385. LOADING FORMS. a. The'loading forms used

by the company are the air loading table and the
flight manifest. The air loading table is a data
sheet which contains general information of the
load that actually goes into each aircraft. The
form usually is prepared by the company com-
mander and forwarded to battalion. When ap-
proved, this form is the basis for preparing flight
manifests.
b. The flight manifest is an exact record by
name, rank, and serial number of the personnel in
each aircraft. It also describes the loaded equip-
ment and supplies other than those carried on the
men. In addition, it shows the load computations,
the number of the aircraft, and other pertinent
information. The airborne commander in each air-
craft is responsible for preparing the flight mani-
fest; however, the company commander usually

370
prepares the form for all personnel and equipment
in his unit. A separate copy of the form is made
for each aircraft. The number of copies and their
distribution is prescribed by higher commanders.
(For a discussion and samples of these forms, see
FM 71-30.)

386. AIRCRAFT PARKING DIAGRAM. a. The com-

pany commander receives an aircraft parking dia-
gram from the battalion commander. This is a
diagram of the departure airfield. It shows the
exact location and number of each aircraft allotted
to the company. All aircraft are marked, usually
by chalk on both sides of the fuselage, with num-
bers corresponding to the aircraft numbers on the
flight manifests. For night loading, individual air-
craft or parking sites may be identified by lights or
luminous markers. Easily visible marking sym-
bols are used to speed identification and loading
and to reduce confusion on the airfield.
b. The aircraft parking diagram also shows the
location of the reserve aircraft kept at the de-
parture airfield to replace last-minute failures.
The loading plan is flexible, and alternate plans
are prepared to reload on a priority basis in case
of a last-minute shortage of aircraft.

387. LOADING EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. Equip-

ment and supplies not carried on the men are
loaded several hours before stations time. The men
assigned to ride in an aircraft load the equipment
into that aircraft. Air crews may assist in loading.
The troop carrier units provide loading aids such

853696 0-49 25 371

as ramps, cranes, load spreaders, and tie-down
equipment. The company commander determines
the adequacy of these aids. Transportation coordi-
nation to and from the departure airfield and the
loading schedule are made by the battalion or
higher commander. The company commander su-
pervises the loading of equipment and supplies for
his company and sees that every load is safely
balanced and securely lashed.

388. LOADING PERSONNEL. a. The movement from

the marshaling camp to the departure airfield is
planned and closely supervised to get the troops
into the right aircraft before stations time. This
movement usually is planned and coordinated by
the battalion or higher commander. Before the
movement, the men are organized into aircraft
load groups, and the airborne commander in each
aircraft supervises and controls his load group.
Routes to the airfield are reconnoitered and guides
are posted to prevent confusion or delay. Before
the march, the aircraft load commanders are con-
ducted on a reconnaissance of the route and the air-
craft parking area. Upon arrival at the aircraft
parking area, groups move to their assigned air-
planes or gliders and prepare to load.
b. In a motor march, personnel parachutes may
accompany the men. In a foot march, personnel
parachutes are dumped at the aircraft before the
troops arrive. Movement on the airfield is con-
trolled by the air force. Ground traffic is strictly
controlled on runways and taxi strips to prevent
confusion and accidents. Before entering the air-

372
craft, troops and equipment are given a final in-
spection by load commanders. Particular attention
is given to the parachutes, and extra parachutes
are kept available to replace last-minute defectives.
The company commander supervises the loading
of his company.
c. The following principles apply in loading air-
craft for airborne operations:
(1) Enough men ride in each glider to un-
lash and unload the glider at the destina-
tion. This prevents confusion after the
landing and permits the rapid assembly
and recovery of equipment.
(2) Commanders strive for tactical unity in
loading. Tactical unity of squad and pla-
toons usually can be achieved in indi-
vidual aircraft. The company is prefer-
ably intact in a single serial. Supporting
weapons and ammunition accompany
their crews.
(3) Key men and critical equipment are dis-
tributed throughout several aircraft.
Thus, the loss of any one aircraft does not
cause excessive casualties to these men or
excessive loss of such equipment.

Section III. AIR MOVEMENT, LANDING, AND

REORGANIZATION

389. AIR MOVEMENT. The air movement from the

departure airfield to the drop or landing zones is
controlled by the commander of the troop carrier
unit which transports the airborne units. During

373
this movement, the company commander relin-
quishes the tactical control of his troops and does
not regain it until after the landing. The air move-
ment is made according to the battalion or regi-
mental air movement table.

390. AIR MOVEMENT TABLE. a. The air movement

table is a form prepared by the ground force com-
mander in coordination with the air force com-
mander. It assigns aircraft to the airborne units,
designates the number and type of aircraft in each
serial, and specifies the departure area, time of
loading, time of take-off, and other pertinent data.
The air movement table of commanders down to
battalion is based-on that of the next higher unit.
The battalion may not prepare an air movement
table. (For discussion and samples, see FM 71-
30).
b. Pathfinder serials precede the main troop car-
rier column. They drop parachute pathfinder
teams who operate navigational aids. Parachute
serials normally precede glider serials. This per-
mits the parachutists to capture and clear the land-
ing zones. As the parachute serials approach the
drop zone, the pilots warn the troops in time for
them to make last-minute equipment inspections
and to prepare for exit. Before crossing the drop
zone, the air column reduces speed. The drop
is made on the pilot's signal.

391. ASSAULT LANDING. a. The company usually

lands as close as possible to the objective to pre-
vent exhaustion of the troops from carrying heavy

374
combat loads or manhandling heavy equipment.
Greater surprise is gained by landing directly on
the objective; however, this increases the problems
of reorganization and control when the objecti;e
is held by the enemy.
b. The airborne rifle company usually drops on
a single drop zone as part of the battalion. The
parachutists carry as much equipment as possible.
This increases their readiness for action and re-
duces the assembly time. Additional equipment
and supplies are dropped in separate containers.
(See par. 374.) During descent and upon landing,
each parachutist orients himself. Immediately up-
on landing, he removes his parachute and checks
his weapons and equipment. The company can be
dropped in approximately one minute. Ground dis-
persion in landing depends on the type and forma-
tion of airplanes, the jumping altitude, the wind,
and the skill of the pilots and parachutists.
c. When a company lands by glider, it usually
lands on a single landing zone as part of the bat-
talion. The time required for landing the company
in gliders depends on the aircraft type, altitude,
number, speed, and formation, the skill of the
glider pilots, the terrain, and the landing charac-
teristics of the gliders. The ground dispersion of
the gliders inside a landing zone depends on the
number of gliders, the obstacles to landing, the
landing characteristics of the gliders, and the skill
of their pilots. Assault transports have the same
relative characteristics as gliders.
d. After landing, the glider pilots come under
the command of the ground force commander. Up-
375
on landing, personnel in the glider promptly un-
load all equipment and supplies.
e. When the company enters combat by para-
chute, weapons carriers may land by glider. When
this is the case, they may land on the drop zone
used by the company and battalion-after the drop
zone is cleared of personnel and equipment that
would obstruct glider landings. The weapons car-
riers may land in separate landing zones under the
control of the regimental or higher commander.

392. REORGANIZATION. Reorganization after an

airborne landing consists of collecting equipment,
assembling the tactical units, and regaining com-
mand control of the units. During the reorganiza-
tion, the company is extremely vulnerable to enemy
ground attack; therefore, this critical phase is
executed with all possible speed-even to the ex-
tent of limiting security. The company reorganizes
according to a prearranged plan. It uses predesig-
nated assembly areas, assembly aids, and identifi-
cation markings for personnel and equipment.
Pathfinder teams already on the drop zone aid in
the assembly of troops.

393. ASSEMBLY AREA. The company assembly area

is designated by the battalion commander before
the drop. It usually is a part of the battalion as-
sembly area unless the company has an independ-
ent mission. Alternate plans for reorganization
are prepared in case enemy action denies the se-
lected assembly areas. The company assembly
area is as near the drop zone as practicable. For

376
daylight landings, it provides cover and conceal-
ment. For night landings, the assembly area may
be located on the drop or landing zone. It should
be free of enemy troops and small-arms fire, and
near favorable routes of approach to the objective.
Good assembly areas are identified easily on the
ground by woods, roads, railroads, hills, or other
prominent landmarks. An easily identified land-
mark serves as a reference point by which the as-
sembly area may be located, using specific dis-
tance and direction.

394. ASSEMBLY AIDS. Assembly areas are identi-

fied further by assembly aids installed by desig-
nated men immediately after the landing. For a
daylight assembly, these aids may be flags, smoke,
flares, panels, and special electronic devices. For
a night assembly, the aids may be flares, lights,
fluorescent panels, white tape, sound, and special
infrared and electronic devices. Battalion or regi-
mental personnel usually install these assembly
aids. When the company has a separate assembly
area, it may establish its own assembly aids. Path-
finder teams are equipped with aids and can iden-
tify assembly areas before the troops land.

395. CONTROL POINT. To direct the troops to their

unit areas, a control point is established by bat-
talion or regiment in or near the assembly area.
The control point is identified by assembly aids
and must be located easily. Predesignated guides
from the company report to the battalion or regi-
mental control point immediately after landing to

377
assist in directing the company to its area. The
company also establishes a company control point
in the company assembly area; and the platoon
usually establishes a platoon control point in the
platoon area. Guides from the platoon are sta-
tioned at the company control point. For night
assembly, company control points may be estab-
lished on the drop or landing zone.

396. IDENTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIP-

MENT. Positive, rapid identification of troops and
equipment contributes greatly to the speed and
precision of the reorganization. Personnel of vari-
ous units wear distinctive markings. For example,
colored cloth patches may be worn on headgear un-
til assembly is complete. Officers and other key
personnel wear additional distinctive markings.
Aerial delivery containers are marked in a simple,
easily recognizable manner so they can be identi-
fied readily by the unit to which they belong. Lumi-
nous markers or colored lights may be used in
night landings. Aerial delivery containers are
marked to identify the contents. Gliders and as-
sault transports may be marked to identify the
type of equipment they carry and the unit to which
that equipment belongs. The airborne division
usually standardizes the marking of its personnel
and equipment. Recognition aids must be unin-
telligible to the enemy.

397. ASSEMBLY. a. Using assembly aids according

to prearranged plans, parachutists assemble initi-
ally by plane loads right on the drop zone itself.

378
They check personnel and equipment. The groups
then move directly to the control point, carrying
with them the equipment needed for the attack.
When they reach the control point, they are di-
rected to their respective assembly areas.
b. Troops landed by glider or assault transport
promptly unload and move by aircraft loads di-
rectly to their assembly areas. Pilots accompany
their loads to the assembly area. There they are
organized into tactical units under their own offi-
cers. They pass to regimental or higher unit con-
trol as soon as the situation permits.

398. SECURITY. The first parachute elements to

land usually have security missions which include
rapidly gaining and maintaining the security of the
drop zone, and protecting the assembly of other
units. All commanders, however, are responsible
for their own security during reorganization, re-
gardless of the security provided by higher units.
The size of the security force depends on the ex-
pected enemy situation and the terrain, with par-
ticular emphasis on the enemy routes of approach.
A rifle company may be assigned such a security
mission. Having assembled on the drop zone, the
security force elements move out on the mission.
This lets security groups reach their assigned
areas in minimum time. Any enemy troops on or
near the drop zone are engaged by the nearest
parachute troops upon landing.

399. COMMUNICATION. To aid command control

and to speed up reorganization, radio nets are

379
opened upon landing. Until assembly is complete,
platoons and attached units periodically report
their status in personnel and equipment, and the
company sends similar reports to battalion. Wire
normally is not laid during the reorganization.
Messengers may be exchanged in, the assembly
area.

400. SEPARATED PERSONNEL. Troops landed in

wrong areas assemble rapidly under the senior
officer or noncommissioned officer present. He es-
tablishes contact with their respective headquar-
ters as soon as possible. Lacking other orders, such
groups direct their efforts toward accomplishing
the general mission. Individual stragglers join the
nearest unit and rejoin their own units as soon as
the situation permits.

401. RECONNAISSANCE. Ground reconnaissance

begins during the reorganization. Patrols are sent
to reconnoiter the objective and routes to it, and to
seek information of the enemy. The company com-
mander makes changes in platoon missions as in-
dicated by the ground reconnaissance, the disposi-
tion of his units, and the enemy situation.

402. COMPLETION OF REORGANIZATION. The com-

pany's reorganization is complete when its units
are assembled and command and fire control com-
munication channels are established. It then is
ready to accomplish its ground mission. Because
of inaccurate landings, enemy action, or excessive
scattering, the company may start the ground at-

380
tack before completing its assembly. The decision
to do this usually is made by the battalion or higher
commander. In the absence of other orders, the
company commander decides if enough of his com-
pany is assembled to accomplish his mission.

Section IV. ACCOMPLISHMENT OF GROUND

MISSION

403. MOVEMENT TO OBJECTIVE. a. The assault com-

pany moves on its missions when reorganized or
when ordered by the battalion commander. The
company commander moves his platoons as rapidly
as possible, capitalizing on surprise.
b. A line of departure, when used, is designated
according to standard doctrine for any ground
combat (see par. 177). Lack of detailed enemy
information and lack of ground reconnaissance be-
fore the landing may make it difficult to select a
suitable line of departure. The speed with which
the company moves toward the objective fre-
quently prevents a formal deployment along a pre-
viously selected line of departure. Company as-
sembly areas may serve as attack positions from
which assault companies move out in attack for-
mations. When the objective is a considerable dis-
tance from the assembly area and the enemy resist-
ance is expected to be light, assault companies or
battalions leave the assembly area in an approach
march formation with patrols protecting the flanks
and the rear. Adjacent units are contacted to se-
cure information of the enemy and the terrain.

381
404. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The principles
for the rifle company in the attack, as prescribed
in chapter 7, apply to the airborne rifle company.
However, limitations imposed by an airborne as-
sault require all airborne commanders to consider,
particularly during the initial stages of the attack,
the following:
(1) Possibility of combat immediately follow-
ing the landing, with the resulting diffi-
culties of control and reconnaissance.
(2) Lack of tanks.
(3) Lack of medium and heavy artillery sup-
port.
(4) Exposure to a counterattack on the flanks
and rear.
(5) Limited ammunition and other supplies.
(6) Limited transportation.
(7) Possible lack of reserves.
(8) Difficulty of control in fast-moving or ob-
scure situations.
(9) Inability to assemble quickly all or most
of their units, because of enemy action or
inaccurate landings.
b. The platoons attack according to the company
plan or as the plan is modified by the company
commander after landing. Changes in the original
attack plans are transmitted personally, by radio,
or by messenger. The company commander moves
to where he best can coordinate and influence the
action of his company.
c. The initial stages of the attack are marked
by the aggressive action of platoons and squads.
These units quickly seize critical points and de-

382
stroy organized resistance before the enemy re-
covers from the surprise of the assault landing.
d. Enemy information available before the land-
ing may not have disclosed strong enemy positions
short of the objective, thus requiring attacks not
previously planned. Platoon and squad leaders di-
rect aggressive local actions to meet unexpected
situations. The company commander keeps the at-
tack moving rapidly forward despite unexpected
enemy opposition. He accomplishes this by his
presence and example in critical areas, by shift-
ing supporting fires, by modifying his scheme of
maneuver, and by using his support.
e. Organic and attached antitank weapons cover
approaches favorable to enemy armor. They are
prepared for all-around defense. The use of the
company's antitank weapons is coordinated with
those of the battalion to prevent unnecessary du-
plication and to cover all favorable tank ap-
proaches. Company antitank weapons may be at-
tached to platoons or to security patrols, or they
may be kept under company control.
f. As in any attack, supporting weapons give
continuous close support to the assault echelon.
They also are prepared to fire on dangerous ap-
proaches into the flanks and rear. Artillery and
81-mm mortar observers move with the company
to coordinate and adjust the fires requested by the
company commander. The 60-mm mortar observ-
ers accompany each assault platoon. To simplify
control during the landing, the reorganization,
and the initial attack, battalion supporting weap-
ons may be attached to the company for these

383
periods, and company supporting weapons may be
attached to assault platoons.
g. A lack of weapons carriers delays the dis-
placement of supporting weapons and also may re-
quire strict economy of ammunition. When sup-
porting weapons and ammunition must be hand
carried a considerable distance, additional ammu-
nition bearers are provided.
h. The decision to hold out a support in the initial
attack depends on many considerations: the width
of the company zone, the distance to the initial ob-
jective, the size of the initial objective, the antici-
pated enemy opposition, the security to flanks and
rear provided by the battalion commander, the
size, location, and mission of the battalion reserves,
and whether it is a day or night attack. When the
company commander holds out a support at the
start of the attack, he keeps it close enough to the
assault echelon to permit its prompt use to main-
tain the momentum of the attack. The support is
used preferably as a complete unit; however, the
company commander does not hesitate to sacrifice
its tactical unity to repulse counterattacks from
the flanks or rear, to exploit a local success, or to
speed up the accomplishment of his mission.
i. The absence of ground reconnaissance before
the landing and the lack of detailed enemy in-
formation requires the company commander con-
stantly to keep informed of the situation. Changes
in the situation and new information of the enemy
and the terrain are reported promptly to the bat-
talion commander and disseminated to platoon
leaders, to company supporting weapons personnel,

384
and to forward observers. The company com-
mander also informs his security groups of
changes in the situation, and he makes necessary
adjustments in their dispositions.
405. ASSAULT. When the company launches its
assault, usual attack doctrine applies. (See par.
191.) Unexpected situations may result in more
or less independent attacks by one or more pla-
toons, each striving to reach the objective and
accomplish the company mission. In this case, a
platoon arriving within assaulting distance of the
objective arranges for the lifting of fires and for
the assault signal. Such arrangements are coordi-
nated through the company commander when pos-
sible; otherwise, the platoon leaders depend on the
forward observers in their areas. The company
commander and platoon leaders press the assault
with all possible speed and vigor. They capitalize
on the surprise gained in the landing, and on the
rapidity of the attack.
406. REORGANIZATION. The airborne rifle com-
pany reorganizes on the initial objective accord-
ing to the doctrine prescribed for the rifle com-
pany. (See par. 192.) Battalion supporting weap-
ons attached for the landing and the initial attack
may revert to battalion control; similarly, com-
pany supporting weapons attached to the rifle pla-
toons may return to company control. Security is
established against enemy counterattacks -from
the flanks and rear. Reorganization on the initial
objective is accomplished quickly to permit the
attack to continue exploiting surprise.

385
407. CONTINUATION OF THE ATTACK. After cap-
turing the initial objective, the assault company
continues the attack according to the battalion
plan. The attack continues until the airhead is es-
tablished. Combat during this phase follows the
doctrine outlined in chapter 7-within the air-
borne limitations on equipment, supplies, and sup-
porting arms and weapons.

408. RESERVE COMPANY IN ATTACK. The doctrine

of chapter 7 also applies to the reserve airborne
rifle company. The reserve company commander
is restricted in planning possible missions by the
lack of detailed enemy information and ground re-
connaissance before the assault landing. He there-
fore starts his ground reconnaissance promptly
after landing. He gives particular emphasis to
plans for protecting exposed flanks and the rear
of the battalion. He also is prepared to take over
the mission of either assault company.

409. DEFENSE. a. Defense of an airhead is based

on three prearranged lines:
(1) The reconnaissance and security line,
which marks the outer limit of the air-
head. It corresponds to the covering force
or outposts of any defense.
(2) The airhead line, which is inside the re-
connaissance and security line. It is oc-
cupied and organized according to the
principles of defense on a wide front,
which are stated in paragraph 309.
(3) The main line of resistance, which is in-
386
 side the airhead line. This line must be
held if the mission of the larger force is
to be accomplished. In the defense it is
occupied only as a last resort. It is main-
tained according to the principles of po-
sition defense.
b. When the company captures its final objec-
tive, which usually is the part of the airhead line
in its zone of action, it normally reverts to the
defense. The extent to which the airhead line ac-
tually is occupied and organized is determined by
the mission of the battalion or larger unit, the
enemy capabilities, and the terrain. The company
usually is given a wide sector on the airhead line.
Its conduct of the defense follows the defensive
doctrine in paragraphs 267-344.

410. SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONS. The airhead phase

of ground combat ends with the link-up with
friendly ground forces at which time the airborne
units may remain in sustained ground combat or
be relieved.

853696 0-49--26
--
387
 APPENDIX I

RIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FOR ATTACK

AND DEFENSE

Section I. ATTACK

1. GENERAL SITUATION. a. Information of the

enemy to include-
Composition.
Location.
Strength.
Identification.
b. Information of friendly troops to include
mission and location of-
Next higher unit.
Adjacent units.
Supporting units.
Covering forces.

2. MISSION. a. Statement of the task to be accom-

plished by the company.
b. Details of coordination to include-
Time of attack.
Frontage.
Direction of attack.
Line of departure.
Formation.

388
3. TASKS FOR LOWER UNITS (TACTICAL INSTRUC-
TIONS). a. These tasks are given under as many
lettered subparagraphs as may be necessary, as-
signing one paragraph to each platoon and at-
tached units in a sequence which designates the
forward elements first. The instructions given
include-
Attachment to each platoon, if any.
Mission (objective).
Frontage of attack.
Direction of attack.
Reorganization on the objective.
b. Tactical instructions or information (except
signal instructions) common to two or more units,
or to the entire company, not covered elsewhere
in paragraph 3 of the order. The instructions
include-
Security measures.
Special measures for control and coordination.

4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL MATTERS.

Instructions of immediate importance to tactical
units concerning personnel, supply, and evacuation
which are required for the operation. These in-
clude-
Arrangements for feeding.
Amount of ammunition to be carried.
Battalion ammunition supply point and route
of ammunition advance.
Disposition of vehicles.
Location of battalion aid station.

389
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS. a. Orders
relative to the use of communication means to
include-
Radio.
Wire.
Pyrotechnics.
Signal security.
b. Command posts to include-
Location of battalion command post.
Location of company command post or where
messages will be sent.
Tentative subsequent location of the company
commander during the attack.
c. Axis of signal communication, which is in-
dicated by subsequent tentative command post
locations.

Section II. DEFENSE

1. GENERAL SITUATION. a. Information of the

enemy to include-
Composition.
Location.
Movements.
Strength.
Identification.
Direction from which the enemy attack is
expected.
Time when the enemy attack is expected.
b. Information of friendly troops to include
mission and location of-
Next higher unit.

390
 Adjacent units.
Supporting units.
Security forces.

2. MISSION. a. Statement of the tasks to be ac-

complished by the company.
b. Details of coordination to include-
Formation.
Boundaries.
General trace of the main line of resistance.
Limiting points.

3. TASKS FOR LOWER UNITS (TACTICAL INSTRUC-

TIONS). a. These tasks are given under as many
lettered subparagraphs as may be necessary, as-
signing one subparagraph to each platoon and at-
tached unit in a sequence which designates the
forward elements first. The instructions include-
Areas and missions of each rifle platoon.
Location and missions of the 60-mm mortars,
57-mm rifles, and any additional weapons
attached to the company.
Fire control, to include details relative to call-
ing for final protective fires.
b. Tactical instructions (except signal instruc-
tions) common to two or more units, or to the
entire company, not covered elsewhere in para-
graph 3 of the order. The instructions given in-
clude-
Security measures.
Organization of ground to include type of em-
placements and priorities of work.
Location of mine fields and obstacles.

391
4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL MATTERS.
Instructions to tactical units concerning personnel,
supply, evacuation, and traffic details which are re-
quired for the operation. These include-
Arrangements for feeding.
Amount of ammunition to be placed on po-
sition.
Battalion ammunition supply point and ar-
rangements for distribution.
Disposition of vehicles.
Location of battalion aid station and com-
pany aid men.
Sanitation measures.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS. a. Orders

relative to the use of communication means to
include-
Radio.
Wire.
Pyrotechnics.
Signal security.
b. Command posts to include -
Location of company and platoon command
posts.
Alternate locations.

392
 APPENDIX II

COMBAT FORMATIONS

Section I. GENERAL

1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. This appendix is a guide

for the rifle company commander, platoon leaders,
and squad leaders in the training of the squad and
the platoon in combat formations. It covers the
various types of squad and platoon formations and
prescribes a uniform method of conducting drill
in these formations over open ground and varied
terrain. The formations are designed specifically
for the rifle squad and platoon as organized under
the current T/O&E 7-17. (For tactical uses of
the combat formations, see paragraphs 56 and
120.)

2. TRAINING. The initial training in squad and

platoon combat formations is conducted on open
terrain such as a parade ground. As soon as men
and units become proficient in assuming the for-
mations, the drill is conducted on varied terrain
to get practical training in the application of the
formations to the terrain. After completing the
training outlined above, the units take part in
tactical exercises involving an imaginary or a
simulated enemy.

393
 Section II. RIFLE SQUAD

1. ORGANIZATION. The rifle squad consists of the

squad leader, No. 1; five riflemen, Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 6; an automatic rifleman, No. 7; an assistant
automatic rifleman, No. 8; and an assistant squad
leader, No. 9. The automatic rifleman and his
assistant, No. 7 and No. 8, are referred to as the
AR team.
Note. The weapons squad consists of the squad leader,
No. 1; a light machine gun team consisting of the gun-
ner, No. 2; assistant gunner, No. 3; two ammunition bear-
ers, No. 4 and No. 5; and a rocket launcher team con-
sisting of the gunner, No. 6; assistant gunner, No. 7;
two ammunition bearers, No. 8 and No. 9. The weapons
squad may conduct drill in combat formations similar to
the rifle squad. When moving as a part of the rifle pla-
toon, the weapons squad usually moves in a march col-
umn formation (par. 4) this section.

2. CONDUCT OF DRILL. The instruction in combat

drill is conducted at ease. It stresses precision and
discipline. The initial training is conducted at a
walk. As soon as men understand the formation,
the training speed is increased progressively until
the movements are executed at a run. For drill
purposes, the normal interval between men is ap-
proximately 5 paces; however, this distance may
be varied. In the initial stages of instruction, the
squad leader gives oral commands accompanied
by the appropriate arm-and-hand signals (app.
III). Duties within the squad should be rotated
often to promote interest and to teach each man
the entire drill. When executing movements, the
rifle and automatic rifle are carried at port arms.

394
When the squad is halted, rifles are brought to or-
der arms and the automatic rifle to sling arms, and
all men remain at ease. The squad leader may
leave his normal position in the formation and go
where he best can control his unit. Men of the
squad base their positions and movements on the
number 2 man unless they are directed otherwise
by the squad leader.

3. OBSERVATION AND CONTROL. The squad al-

ways provides observation to the front, flanks, and
rear. When halted, men face and observe in the
directions indicated in figure 73(i) and 0. While
moving, men observe in the same direction. The
squad leader controls his squad by oral commands
or arm-and-hand signals (app. III). The men
often look toward the squad leader for instructions.

4. MARCH COLUMN. To form march column, the

squad leader commands and signals: 1. MARCH
COLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,
the squad forms as shown in figure 73 0.

5. SQUAD COLUMN. To form squad column, the

squad leader commands and signals: 1. SQUAD
COLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,
No. 2 man moves forward 30 paces and the other
men take positions as shown in figure 73 O. In
both squad column and squad diamond formations,
the even-numbered men move to the right and
the odd-numbered men move to the left of the
squad leader.

395
6. SQUAD DIAMOND. To form squad diamond, the
squad leader commands and signals: 1. SQUAD
DIAMOND, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,
No. 2 man moves forward 15 paces and other men
take positions as shown in figure 73 Q.

7. AS SKIRMISHERS. To form as skirmishers, the

squad leader commands and signals: 1. AS

m ]i

MARCH COLUMN

Figure 73. Squad formations.

396
0#1 T

Of
0

Figure 73. Squad formations--Continued.

397
397
SKIRMISHERS, 2. MOVE. At the command
MOVE, each man takes his position as shown in
figure 73 Q.

*t ~! t"~

SQUAD DIAMOND

Figure 73. Squad formations--Continued.

398
8. AS SKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT (LEFT). To
form as skirmishers, AR team right, the squad
leader commands and signals: 1. AS SKIRM-
ISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT, 2. MOVE. At the
command MOVE, the men take positions shown
in figure 7 ®(. To form as skirmishers with the
AR team on the left, the commands are: 1. AS
SKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM LEFT, 2. MOVE.

AS SKIRMISHERS

Figure 73. Squad formations-Continued.

399
At the command MOVE, the men take positions
shown in lower half of figure 73 ®.

9. MOVEMENT. a. After the squad executes forma-

tions promptly, training in movement is begun.
The squad then is trained to move in any direction
and, while moving, to change from one formation
to another upon command and signal of the squad
leader. Training progresses until a dispersed and

(9 ® A q §

AS SKIRMISHERS AR
TEAM RIGHT
m

0 ®

AS SKIRMISHERS
AR TEAM LEFT

Figure 73. Squad formations-Continued.

400
disorganized squad can assume a combat forma-
tion promptly upon a command and signal, show-
ing the direction it is to face and the desired for-
mation. The squad may move as a unit, by groups,
or by individuals. The movement may be made
by rushes, by walking, or by crawling.
b. To move the squad forward when it is in any
formation at a halt, the squad leader commands
and signals FORWARD. The squad then moves
forward, basing its rate and direction of movement
on the squad leader or a previously designated
man.
c. To halt the squad, the squad leader commands
and signals HALT. At the command HALT, the
squad stops in place.
d. To assemble the deployed squad, the squad
leader commands and signals ASSEMBLE. Men
move at a run and assemble in march column for-
mation facing the squad leader.

Section III. RIFLE PLATOON

1. ORGANIZATION. The rifle platoon consists of

a platoon headquarters, three rifle squads, and a
weapons squad. Squads within the rifle platoon
are the first squad, second squad, third squad, and
weapons squad. Symbols for the platoon leader,
platoon sergeant, assistant platoon sergeant, and
messenger are shown in figure 74.

2. CONDUCT OF DRILL. Training in combat for-

mations for the rifle platoon teaches the relative
positions of the squads in the platoon formations.

401
Platoon drill resembles that for the squad (par. 2,
sec. I, this app.). The platoon deploys with enough
distance between squads to permit movement. The
arm-and-hand signal PLATOON need not precede
arm-and-hand signals for the platoon. Signals

$ PLATOON LEADER

PLATOON SERGEANT

ASSISTANT PLATOON SERGEANT

i MESSENGER

Figure 74. Symbols representing platoon members.

given by the platoon leader are for the entire pla-

toon unless they are preceded by the arm-and-hand
signal SQUAD. Oral commands, accompanied by
appropriate arm-and-hand signals, are used for
this phase of instruction, as for squad drill. For
drill purposes, the distances between squads are
fixed for each formation, although they may be
altered to conform to the size of the drill field. The
drill is conducted AT EASE. The squads move at
a run when changing formation. When three
squads are abreast, the center rifle squad is the
base squad. In all other formations, the leading or
right leading rifle squad is the base squad. The

402
squad formations within the platoon formation
may vary; however, the weapons squad ordinarily
uses the march column formation.

3. OBSERVATION AND CONTROL In platoon drill,

each squad within the platoon observes to its front,
flanks, and rear as in squad drill. Squad leaders
observe and control their squads and maintain eye
contact with the platoon leader. The platoon leader
goes where he best can control the platoon. The
platoon sergeant and assistant platoon sergeant
assist the platoon leader in the control of the pla-
toon. Their positions are not fixed.

4. MARCH COLUMN. To form a march column, the

platoon leader commands and signals: 1. MARCH
COLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,
the platoon forms as shown in figure 75 (.

5. PLATOON COLUMN. To form platoon column,

the platoon leader commands and signals: 1. PLA-
TOON COLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command
MOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure
75 0.

6. PLATOON LINE. To form platoon line, the pla-

toon leader commands and signals: 1. PLATOON
LINE, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE, the
platoon forms as shown in figure 75 (.

7. PLATOON VEE. To form platoon vee, the pla-

toon leader commands and signals: 1. PLATOON

853696 0-49-27 403

 0 R SQUAD

F31 m25
['1 YARDS
R SQUAD_ __
o[]7[ [ ] WPNS SQUAD

· ··
it · 25 YARDS

LT F
F[1-
LMG
WWPNS
TEAM
SQUAD
I 3 R SQUAD

Jr1
RL TEAAM M 25 YARDS
RI--AM
W WR SOUAD Syimbol

[] -- 0 RSOUAD
M7RCH
R6LUMN O PLATOON COLUMN 0
R SQUAD R SQUAD R SQUAD

40 40

g [] RSOUAD - r
~.

] []8 .;
Sybl WPNS SOUAD
~~~[Symlbol
MARCH COLUMN -PLATOON LINE

Figure 75. Platoon formations.

404
VEE, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE, the pla-
toon forms as shown in figure 75 ®.

8. PLATOON WEDGE. To form platoon wedge, the

platoon leader commands and signals: 1. PLA-
TOON WEDGE, 2. MOVE. At the command
MOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure 75 0.

9. PLATOON ECHELON RIGHT (LEFT). To form

R SQUAD R SQUAD

40 YARDS

-- WPNS SQUAD

40 YARDS

-R SQUAD

X[•~~ ~ SYMBOL

PLATOON VEE

Figure 75. Platoon formations-Continued.

405
platoon echelon right (left), the platoon leader
commands and signals: 1. PLATOON ECHELON
RIGHT (LEFT), 2. MOVE. At the command
MOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure
75 ®.

10. MOVEMENT. After the platoon is trained to

execute the basic formations promptly on com-
mand, it is trained to move and, while moving,
to change from one formation to another. The
rules for moving and halting are similar to those
for the squad. In changing from one formation to
another, the base squad sometimes changes in or-
der to conform to the rules as explained in para-
graph 2, this section. For example, in changing
from platoon vee to platoon line, the right leading
rifle squad remains the base squad until the line
formation is completed, then the center rifle squad
becomes the base squad. The redesignation of the
base squad takes place upon completion of the
movement. A suggested sequence for drill in
changing formations is indicated in figure 76. The
sequence takes the platoon successively from pla-
toon column through platoon echelon, wedge, vee,
line, and back to column.

406
 R SQUAD

40 YARDS

40 YARDSf 1- YARDS-Y

R SQUAD 9 R SQUAD

WPNS SQUAD

Symbol

PLATOON WEDGE A

R SQUAD _YARDSO

140 YARDS

WPNS SQUADj YAi DS0

R SQUAD r
140 YARDS

R SQUAD

z SymbWl
PLATOON ECHELON
RIGHT (LEFT)

Figure 75. Platoon formations-Continued.

407
 (BASER SQUAD

\ 0

WPNS SQUAD

I o

.,K

o PLATOON COLUMN TO PLATOON ECHELON RIGHT

Figure 76. Platoon movements.

408
 0

BAS R SQUAD

$0

WPNS R SQUAD

QI U R SQA D R UAD

PLATOON ECHELON TO PLATOON WEDGE

Figure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.

409
 ElssE

I--

PLATOON WEDGE TO PLATOON VEE

Figure 76. Platoon movements--Continued.

410
 R SOUAD A S R SQUAD

PLATOON VEE TO PLATOON LINE

Figure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.

411
 0

{ )R SQUAD * R SOAD RSOUAD

/ '
I 'WPNS SQUAD
I I
L-J

PLATOON LINE TO PLATOON COLUMN

Figure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.

412
 APPENDIX III

SIGNALS

1. PURPOSE. Signals are used for transmitting es-

sential commands and warning under conditions
which make verbal commands or warning inade-
quate. Visual arm-and-hand signals are used habi-
tually with oral Icommands during instruction in
combat formations in order that men become thor-
oughly familiar with the meaning of the signal
used.

2. KINDS. The kinds of signal ordinarily used

are sound and visual.
a. Sound signals include signals by bugles,
whistles, sirens,, vehicle horns, or other sound de-
vices; for example, fire alarms, gas alarms (FM
21-40), or the firing of weapons. Special sound
signals may be used on night patrols as prescribed
by the patrol leader or higher authority. (See FM
21-75.)
b. Visual signals include signals made by using
the arms and hands, flags, lights, panels, and pyro-
technics. Pyrotechnic signals usually are pre-
scribed in operation orders. Tanks may use flag
signals. (See FM 17-5.) Military police use arm-
and-hand and light signals to direct traffic. (See
FM 19-5.) Motor vehicle operators' signals, and

413
signals for use in motor marches or drill with
vehicles are published in TM 21-305. Additional
signals may be improvised and used appropriately.
Visual signals within the scope of this appendix
do not include semaphore flag codes, blinker light
codes, and panel codes.

3. GENERAL RULES. Unit leaders repeat signals

or give appropriate commands to their units when-
ever necessary to insure prompt and correct execu-
tion. Unless the signal is preparatory, execution
of the movement indicated commences as soon as
the signal is completed and understood.

4. AIR OR TANK WARNING. a. The following sig-

nals are used by observers of all arms and services
in transmitting the warning of the approach or
presence of enemy aircraft, parachute troops, or
tanks: Three long blasts of a whistle, vehicular
horn, klaxon, or siren repeated several times; three
equally spaced shots with rifle or pistol; or three
short bursts of fire from machine gun or other au-
tomatic weapon.
b. In daylight, the man giving the signal points
in the direction of the danger. At night, the sig-
nal is supplemented by voice warning to indicate
the direction of danger.

5. WHISTLE SIGNALS. Whistle signals are limited

to ATTENTION TO ORDERS, CEASE FIRING,
and AIR or TANK WARNING.
a. For attention, blow a short blast with the.
whistle. The signal is used to fix the attention of

414
troops or of their commanders and leaders pre-
paratory to giving commands, orders, or other
signals.
b. For cease firing, blow a long blast with the
whistle. This signal is verified at once by an arm-
and-hand signal or by other means.
c. For air or tank warning, repeat three long
blasts several times.

6. ARM-AND-HAND SIGNALS. If a movement is to

be executed by a particular unit or units of a com-
mand, a signal designating the unit or units is
given before the signal for the movement. Usually,
the person giving the signal faces the unit or per-
sons for whom the signal is intended.
a. ATTENTION. Extend the arm sideward
slightly above the horizontal, palm to the front,
and wave toward the head several times.
b. READY? REPORT WHEN READY; I AM READY.
Extend the arm slightly above the horizontal, to-
ward the leader or man for whom the signal is
intended, hand raised, fingers extended and joined,
palm toward the leader.
c. FORWARD; TO THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK; TO
THE REAR. Face and move in the desired direction
of march; at the same time, extend the hand verti-
cally to the full extent of the arm, palm to the
front, and lower the arm and hand in the direc-
tion of movement until horizontal.
d. HALT or STOP. Thrust the hand upward verti-
cally to the full extent of the arm, and hold it in
that position until the signal is understood.
e. DOUBLE TIME; INCREASE SPEED; RUSH. Carry

415
the hand to the shoulder, fist closed; rapidly thrust
the fist upward vertically to the full extent of the
arm, and back to the shoulder several times.
f. QUICK TIME. Extend the arm horizontally
sideward, palm to the front, and wave downward
several times, keeping the arm straight.
g. CHANGE DIRECTION; SHIFT FIRE. Carry the
hand (that is on the side toward the new direc-
tion) across the body to the opposite shoulder and,
with the palm turned in the direction of shift,
swing the forearm in a horizontal arc, extending
the arm and hand to point in the new direction.
For slight changes in direction, wave hand from
the final position in the desired direction.
h. ACTION (FRONT, RIGHT, LEFT, OR REAR);
ASSAULT FIRE; FIGHT ON FOOT. Thrust the fist
several times in the desired direction of action.
i. OUT OF ACTION. Rapidly strike the closed fist
of one hand several times against the open palm
of the other.
j. JOIN ME; FOLLOW ME. Point toward the ve-
hicle, person, or persons desired, and beckon them
to you by holding your arm horizontally, palm up,
fingers extended and joined, and waving your hand
and forearm toward you.
k. COVER OUR ADVANCE. Repeatedly strike top
of helmet with open hand.
I. COLUMN. Describe complete circles by swing-
ing one arm to the rear in a plane perpendicular
to the body.
m. MARCH COLUMN. Describe complete circles
by swinging both arms to the rear in planes per-
pendicular to the body.

416
 n. AS SKIRMISHERS; LINE. Raise both arms lat-
erally until horizontal, arms and hands extended,
palms down.
o. AS SKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT (LEFT).
Raise both arms laterally until horizontal; swing
arm, on side toward which AR team is to move,
upward until vertical and back immediately to the
horizontal position; repeat movement several
times; hold the other arm steadily in the horizontal
position until signal is completed.
p. VEE. Extend both arms downward and to the
side at an angle of 45 ° below the horizontal.
q. WEDGE. Extend both arms upward and to the
side at an angle of 45 ° above the horizontal.
r. ECHELON RIGHT (LEFT). Face the unit and
extend the arm, on the side toward which the
column is to be echeloned, downward to the side
at an angle of 45° below the horizontal; extend the
other arm upward and to the side at an angle of
45° above the horizontal.
s. DIAMOND. Raise both arms over the head,
elbows slightly bent and fingertips touching.
t. ASSEMBLE. Raise the hand vertically to the
full extent of the arm, fingers extended and joined,
and describe large horizontal circles with the hand
and arm.
u. ENEMY IN SIGHT. Hold the rifle horizontally
above the head with the arms extended.
v. RANGE OR BATTLE SIGHT. With the fist
closed, extend the arm fully toward the leader or
men for whom the signal is intended. This is the
signal that the range is to be announced. If no
other signal follows, it means that the setting will

417
be battle sight. If a range other than battle sight
is desired, open the fist, and expose one finger for
each 100 yards of range.
w. COMMENCE FIRING. Extend the arm and
hand waist high in front of the body to their full
extent, palm of hand down; move them several
times through a wide horizontal arc.
x. ELEVATE; DEPRESS. Extend one arm toward
the gunners concerned, with the palm of the hand
toward the ground. Move the hand in a short
upward (downward) movement by flexing it at
the wrist, exposing one finger for each mil (or for
each 100 yards of range) the gun is to be elevated
(depressed).
y. CEASE FIRING. Raise the hand in front of the
forehead, palm to the front, and swing it and the
forearm up and down several times in front of the
face.
z. FIX BAYONETS. Simulate the movement of
the right hand in removing a bayonet from its
scabbard and fixing it on a rifle.
aa. MOUNT. Beginning at the side, raise one
arm upward in the plane of the body, palm up,
to a position 45 ° from vertical. Repeat several
times.
ab. DISMOUNT; DOWN; TAKE COVER. Extend
one arm upward at an angle of 45 ° in the plane
of the body and lower it to the side. Repeat sev-
eral times.

418
 APPENDIX IV

SUPPORTING FIRES

Section I. GENERAL

1. INTRODUCTION a. This appendix is a guide for

the rifle company commander. It is concerned with
the general composition, missions, capabilities,
communication, and methods of requesting fires of
the supporting weapons which are available to the
company. The standard procedure for requesting
the fires of supporting weapons is contained in
FM 23-85 and FM 23-90.
b. The organization of the infantry division in-
corporates supporting weapon elements within
each echelon. An infantry battalion has a heavy
weapons company; a regiment has a heavy mortar
company and a heavy tank company; and the di-
vision has a tank battalion and the division artil-
lery consisting of three battalions of 105-mm
howitzers and one battalion of 155-mm howitzers.
Normally, one 105-mm howitzer battalion is placed
in direct support of each infantry regiment. When
an infantry regiment is in reserve, the 105-mm
howitzer battalion which normally supports this
regiment, together with the 155-mm howitzer bat-
talion, are placed in general support of the other
regiments.

2. MISSION OF SUPPORTING WEAPONS. The mis-

853696 0---- 28 419

sion of all supporting weapons is to deliver fire
to assist or protect a unit in combat.

3. COMBAT CONTROL. a. General support. Support-

ing units are in general support when the next
higher commander controls their fires in support
of any or all combat elements. They usually con-
tinue in general support as long as this control
can be exercised to provide maximum support.
The heavy weapons company is considered to be
in general support when its fires are controlled by
the battalion commander, the heavy tank and
heavy mortar companies by the regimental com-
mander, the tank company and the battalions of
the division artillery by the division commander.
b. Direct support. Supporting units are consid-
ered to be in direct support when their unit com-
manders are given the responsibility for control of
their fires in support of a specific combat element.
A supporting unit may be placed in direct support
when its fires cannot be controlled effectively by
the next higher commander, or when it becomes de-
sirable to allot its fires exclusively to a specific
combat unit. However, an artillery battalion in
direct support of an infantry regiment remains
under division artillery command. While this bat-
talion executes fires for the infantry regiment it
supports, its fires may be massed elsewhere in an
emergency.
c. Attachment. When a supporting unit is at-
tached to a combat unit, command and control
passes to the commander of the supported unit.
He becomes responsible for its tactical employ-

420
ment, control of its fires, and its combat supply.
Attachment may be made when it becomes imprac-
ticable or undesirable to use the supporting unit in
general support or in direct support.

Section II. HEAVY WEAPONS COMPANY

1. ORGANIZATION. a. The heavy weapons com-
panV consists of .a company headquarters, a ma-
chine gun platoon, an 81-mm mortar platoon, and
a 75-mm rifle platoon.
b. The machine gun platoon has a platoon head-
quarters and two sections, each consisting of two
squads.
c. The 81-mm mortar platoon has a platoon
headquarters and two sections, each consisting
of two squads.
d. The 75-mm rifle platoon has a platoon head-
quarters and two sections. There are no squads.
2. MACHINE GUN PLATOON. a. Missions for the
machine gun platoon include-
(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces by
neutralizing enemy positions.
(2) Protecting the flanks when they have be-
come exposed by the advancing of the
battalion.
(3) Protecting rifle units during reorganiza-
tion and consolidation of an objective.
(4) Assisting in repelling enemy counterat-
tacks.
(5.) Firing in support of outposts.
(6) Firing along final protective lines in a de-
fensive position.

421
 (7) Firing long-range overhead fire to harass
the enemy.
b. The effective range of the machine gun is
limited by observation. Ground observation rarely
is effective beyond 2,000 yards.
c. Suitable targets for the machine gun platoon
include-
(1) Point targets, such as enemy crew-served
weapons and embrasures of enemy pill-
boxes.
(2) Targets in width, such as an enemy
skirmish line.
(3) Targets in depth, such as enemy column
moving toward or away from the front.
d. When the machine gun platoon is in direct
support of or attached to the rifle company, the
instrument corporal of the machine gun platoon
usually acts as a liaison agent between his unit
and the rifle company. This liaison agent trans-
mits fire requests desired by the rifle company
commander.
e. The communication facilities available to the
heavy machine gun platoon are radio, wire, mes-
senger, and visual signals. Ordinarily, there is no
direct radio or wire communication between the
rifle company and the machine gun platoon. How-
ever, both the rifle company and heavy weapons
company are in the battalion command net.
f. Fire requests by the rifle company are trans-
mitted through the liaison agent. In his absence,
requests are made by direct contact with machine
gun unit leaders in the company area or through

422
command channels. In an emergency, the machine
gun platoon can be contacted directly by radio.

3. THE 81-mm MORTAR PLATOON. a. Specific mis-

sions include-
(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces by
neutralizing enemy positions.
(2) Firing countermortar fires, smoke mis-
sions, interdiction fires, harassing fires,
defensive fires, and protecting rifle units
during reorganization and consolidation
on an objective.
(3) Repelling enemy counterattacks.
(4) Supporting outposts.
b. Maximum effective range: HE light ammuni-
tion approximately 4,000 yards (effective bursting
radius 17 yards), HE heavy ammunition approxi-
mately 2,600 yards, and WP approximately 2,400
yards.
c. Suitable targets for the 8-mm mortar platoon
include-
(1) Grouped personnel.
(2) Reverse slopes and defilade areas.
(3) Crew-served weapons.
(4) Light fortifications.
d. A forward observer party, usually consisting
of a section leader and a radiotelephone operator,
goes forward with each front-line rifle company.
They control the fire of the platoon as required by
the rifle company. The forward observer does not
necessarily remain with the rifle company com-
mander at all times; however, the rifle company
commander remains in communication with the

423
forward observer. Having a forward observer with
each rifle company permits fire requests to go to
the mortar platoon by the most direct channel.
e. The communication facilities available to the
81-mm mortar platoon are radio, wire, messenger,
and visual signals. One radio is operated in the
heavy weapons company command net. The re-
mainder of the radios are operated in a platoon
fire control net, one with each forward observer
and one at the platoon fire control point.
f. Fire requests by the rifle company normally
are transmitted by or through the forward ob-
server of the mortar platoon. However, fire re-
quests may be transmitted through command chan-
nels if the forward observer cannot be contacted
readily. Initial fire requests by other than a
trained forward observer include, as a minimum,
the following elements, in the sequence indicated:
(1) The observer identifies himself usually by
the use of a code word or words: UNION
BAKER ONE.
(2) The observer alerts the fire control point
by saying: FIRE MISSION.
(3) The azimuth is given to the target by the
observer from his position; example:
AZIMUTH 2760.
(4) The target location is designated by giv-
ing first the azimuth from the observer
to the target and then by giving a shift
in yards from a known point to the tar-
get (fig. 77) (shift is given in the se-
quence. Known point, deflection, and

424
 range-example: FROM CR 695, LEFT
200, ADD 400) ; or by giving coordinates
referring to a map; or by requesting a
marking round from which the observer
can shift to the target (observer may say:
MARK CENTER OF SECTOR or MARK
BASE POINT).

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Z
;~.
4O~

OBSERVER.-.
TARGET

OBSERVER ~~~~~~GUN
Figure 77. Tariget designation.

425
 g. The nature of the target consists of a descrip-
tion of the enemy installation, personnel, equip-
ment, or activity which is observed; example:
MACHINE GUN.
h. The observer's designation of control consists
of the term: WILL ADJUST or FIRE FOR EF-
FECT if the observer believes the target is located
accurately enough to be hit without adjustment.
i. An example of an initial fire request is as
follows:
UNION BAKER ONE
FIRE MISSION
AZIMUTH 2760
FROM CR 695, LEFT 200, ADD 400
MACHINE GUN
WILL ADJUST

4. THE 75-mm RIFLE PLATOON. a. Specific mis-

sions include-
(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces by
neutralizing enemy positions.
(2) Protecting rifle units during reorganiza-
tion and consolidation of an objective.
(3) Assisting in repelling enemy counterat-
tacks.
(4) Firing indirect fire on interdictory and
harassing missions.
(5) Providing antitank protection in the bat-
talion zone of action.
b. Maximum effective range: HE ammunition
6,955 yards, HE-AT ammunition 1,700 yards, and
WP ammunition 7,020 yards.
c. Effective bursting area: 15 yards by 45 yards

426
 (long axis perpendicular to the direction of fire).
d. Armor penetration: 4 inches up to 30 ° angle
of incidence.
e. The 75-mm rifle platoon is used most effec-
tively to fire on the following targets: grouped
personnel, automatic weapons, casement embra-
sures, antitank guns, tanks, and vehicles.
f. The communication facilities of the 75-mm
rifle platoon are radio, wire, messenger, and visual
signals. Ordinarily, there is no direct radio or
wire communication between the rifle company
and the 75-mm rifle platoon.
g. Fire requests by the rifle company for fire
are made by direct contact with the 75-mm rifle
unit leaders in the company area.

Section III. HEAVY MORTAR COMPANY

1. ORGANIZATION. The heavy mortar company

consists of a company headquarters and three pla-
toons. Company headquarters includes an opera-
tions and fire direction section which establishes
and operates a company fire direction center. Each
platoon has a platoon headquarters and four mor-
tar squads.

2. SPECIFIC MISSIONS. The heavy mortar company

is charged with the following specific missions:
a. To support advancing friendly forces by neu-
tralizing enemy positions.
b. To fire countermortar fires, smoke missions,
interdiction fires, harassing fires, and defensive
fires.
427
 c. To protect rifle units during reorganization
and consolidation on an objective by repelling
enemy counterattacks. To support outposts.

3. MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RANGE. The maximum

effective range is HE 4,400 yards (effective burst-
ing radius 20 yards), WP 4,260 yards.

4. TARGETS. Suitable targets for the heavy mortar

platoon include grouped personnel, reverse slopes
and defilade areas, crew-served weapons, and light
fortifications.

5. FORWARD OBSERVERS. Forward observers from

the mortar platoons operate in the zones of action
of the front-line battalions. The forward observers
transmit requests for and adjust the heavy mortar
fires.

6. LIAISON. One man in each platoon headquarters

is designated as a liaison agent for the supported
battalion. He receives and transmits fire requests
and advises the battalion commander of the capa-
bilities of the heavy mortars.

7. COMMUNICATION. Within the company, there

are two radio nets. One net includes the forward
observers and the fire direction center; the other
net includes the firing positions and the fire direc-
tion center. There is no direct radio or wire com-
munication between the rifle company and the mor-
tar company except by prearrangement.

428
 8. FIRE REQUESTS. Requests for fire by the rifle
company are made by direct contact with a for-
ward observer operating in the rifle company zone
of action or through command channels. In an
emergency, the heavy mortar company can be con-
tacted directly by radio. For the technique of re-
questing fire, see paragraph 3, this section.

Section IV. TANK COMPANY

1. ORGANIZATION. The regimental tank company

consists of a company headquarters and four tank
platoons. There are two M45 tanks in company
headquarters. Each tank platoon consists of two
sections. The first section contains the platoon
leader's tank and two tanks; the other section
contains two tanks. Platoons are equipped with
M26 tanks.

2. MISSIONS. Missions of the regimental tank com-

pany are to-
a. Support the advance of infantry by direct
fire, maneuver, and shock action.
b. Provide antitank protection.
c. Protect rifle units during reorganization and
consolidation of an objective.
d. Assist in repelling enemy counterattacks.
e. Engage in exploitation and pursuit operations
supported by infantry.

3. ARMAMENT. a. The M26 tank is equipped with

one 90-mm gun, two caliber .30 machine guns, and
one caliber .50 machine gun.
429
 b. The M45 tank is equipped with one 105-mm
howitzer, two caliber .30 machine guns, and one
caliber .50 machine gun.
c. Maximum effective ranges-
(1) 90-mm gun: HE ammunition 19,560
yards (effective bursting area 40 yards
by 12 yards); HVAP ammunition, 2,400
yards (armor penetration, 7.8 inches up
to 30 ° angle of incidence at 1,000 yards);
APC ammunition, 2,400 yards (armor
penetration, 4.8 inches up to 30 ° angle
of incidence at 1,000 yards).
(2) 105-mm howitzer: HE ammunition,
12,205 yards (effective bursting area, 50
x 15 yards); HE-AT ammunition, 1,500
yards (armor penetration, 51/2 to 6
inches).
(3) Caliber .30 machine gun: 2,000 yards.
(4) Caliber .50 machine gun: 2,000 yards for
ground fire; 1,000 yards for antiaircraft
fire.

4. TARGETS. Tank fires are most effective against

the following targets: enemy tanks and other ve-
hicles; direct-fire weapons emplacements; fortifi-
cations; and personnel.

5. COMMUNICATION. Communication between

the tanks and infantry is by radio, external tank
telephone, or visual signals.
a. Each tank has two radios, one of which op-
erates in the supported unit net and the other in
the tank unit net.

430
 b. Each tank has an external tank telephone over
which a man outside the tank can talk to a man
inside the tank.
c. Visual communication between infantry and
tanks is by arm-and-hand signals, tracer bullets,
pyrotechnics, colored smoke, and panels.

6. FIRE REQUESTS. Fire requests are transmitted

directly to the tank unit or single tank by any of
the available means of communication.

Section V. ARTILLERY

1. MISSIONS. a. To give close support to combat

units.
b. To fire long-range interdiction, harassing, and
counterbattery fires.
c. To isolate enemy positions.

2 RANGE. a. 105-mm howitzer: 12,200 yards (ef-

fective bursting area; 15 yards by 50 yards).
b. 155-mm howitzer: 16,400 yards (effective
bursting area, 18 yards by 60 yards).

3. TARGETS. The artillery is used most effectively

to fire on the following targets: grouped person-
nel, reverse slopes and defilade areas, light fortifi-
cations, tanks, vehicles, and crew-served weapons.

4. FORWARD OBSERVERS. An artillery forward

observer party normally goes forward with each
rifle company to adjust needed artillery fire. The

431
 forward observer party is not attached to the rifle
company.

5. LIAISON. With each infantry battalion there is

an artillery liaison officer. He supervises the for-
ward observers assigned to that infantry battal-
ion, advises the supported unit commander of the
capabilities and limitations of the artillery, and
transmits fire requests of the battalion commander.

6. COMMUNICATION. The communication facili-

ties of the forward observers and liaison officer are
radio and wire. Wire is the primary means of com-
munication. Radios in the artillery fire direction
net supplement the wire. The artillery installs,
maintains, and operates its radio and wire com-
munication.

7. FIRE REQUESTS. Requests for fire by the rifle

company normally are transmitted through the
forward observer; however, requests may be trans-
mitted through command channels if the forward
observer cannot be contacted readily. For methods
of requesting fire, see paragraph 3, section II, this
appendix.

432
 APPENDIX V

WEAPONS EMPLACEMENTS

1. GEN ERAL. All men are trained to seek individual

protection when halted. When the halt is expected
to be brief, troops take advantage of natural pro-
tection allowed by the terrain, such as ditches or
holes in the ground. When the situation tempo-
rarily is stabilized, they dig intrenchments for
their individual protection and emplacements for
their weapons. Intrenchments and weapons em-
placements are located to cover a selected area with
fire. At the same time they provide maximum con-
cealment and protection from air and ground ob-
servation and fire. They are developed as rapidly
as combat conditions permit. In order to confuse
the enemy, decoys or dummy positions are used.
For the construction of individual prone shelters
and fox holes, see FM 5-15.

2. TOOLS. Tools normally used for hasty fortifi-

cation work are carried by individual soldiers.
These may be supplemented by additional tools
obtained from engineer supplies. Under unusual
terrain conditions (frozen or rocky ground, for
example), engineers furnish equipment such as
air compressors, bulldozers, and explosive charges.

433
3. OBSERVATION POSTS. a. Initially one-man fox
holes or two-man fox holes make good observation
posts. Both of these positions are well camouflaged
for this purpose. (See fig. 78.)

OBSERVATION
POSTIN STANDINGTYPE DOUBLEFOXHOLE

CROSSI~ S-~EC~T LONG~ LIGHT BRANCHES

TO

ELIGHT BRANCHES

A ANAI
INEI

SFRON OP UT INTO HIEW

-SHOWING
Op BUILT INTO HILLSIDE)
.1 ,

Figure 78. Tuwo-mann fox hole observation post.

b. When positions are occupied for considerable

time, it may be desirable to construct a sturdier
type observation post for greater protection. Such
an observation post is shown in figure 79.

434
 Irz
00
Or 0
vr F 4~~~~-
U) O4 : e
04 ZW~~
m wm o
0<~~~~~O
z 00
LL~~~~~~~~~~I
a.

w~~
u~
>
~ -- th >~~~~
a~~~~~~
0 i0
8 6 3
irw L>L w
n'O i .,
Z

a O~~~~~(
0 z co~~~a
u) ~ ~
~~~zo~~~~~~~ ~ ~
et..I~~~~~~~
If)

8536960---429 '35

i ,

853696. (3--49--29 435

4. OVERHEAD COVER. (See fig. 79.) Individual sol-
diers and crew-served weapons require overhead
cover for protection from air bursts. Such protec-
tion must not interfere with the use of weapons,
nor be so bulky as to make it impossible to main-
tain the camouflage of the position. Local materi-
als are used, supplemented by any additional ma-
terials available. In a fully developed position,
overhead cover consists of a minimum of 11/2 feet
of earth supported by 4-inch logs.

5. EMPLACEMENT FOR LIGHT MACHINE GUN. a.

Initial stage. The initial stage in the development
of this emplacement is the excavation of an open
shallow pit. (See fig. 80.)
b. Horseshoe emplacement.
(1) The emplacement is developed further by
digging out a horseshoe-shaped trench,
about 2 feet wide, along the rear and sides
of the pit. A chest-high shelf to the cen-
ter and front is left to serve as a gun plat-
form. The spoil is piled around the em-
placement to form a parapet at least 3
feet thick and low enough to permit all-
around fire. The parapet is camouflaged
carefully. (See fig. 81.)
(2) This emplacement furnishes protection
against small-arms fire and shell or bomb
fragments except from air bursts. In
firm soil, this emplacement offers protec-
tion against the crushing action of tanks.
In loose soil, logs about 8 inches in diam-
eter, placed across front, rear, and sides
436
 HEAVY MG - ITOI i FT.

Figure 80. Initial stage of emplacement for the caliber .30

light machine gun.

437
 SECTION

. PARAPET 3 FT THICK
ALL AROUND

BERM ABOUTI FT WIDE

GUN PLATFORM
t Xe7 ~\3V2
FT WIDE
3Vz FT LONG
TRENCH 2 FT WIDE CHEST HIGH

PLAN

Figure 81. Horseshoe-type emplacement for the caliber .30

light machine gun (camouflage not shown).

438
 of the emplacement and embedded flush
with the top of the ground, help to make
the emplacement resistant to the crushing
action of tanks. When tanks are about to
overrun the position, the gunners pull
the weapon to the bottom of the trench
at the rear of the emplacement and then
crouch down to either side.
c. Overhead cover. The final step in the develop-
ment of the light machine gun emplacement is to
provide overhead cover following the principles
already discussed. In open ground, concealment
may be difficult due to the high silhouette created
by the overhead cover. In broken ground, the en-
tire emplacement may be excavated as a cave in
an embankment or beneath a large tree or rock.
6. EMPLACEMENT FOR ROCKET LAUNCHER. a. Ini-
tial stage. This emplacement initially is a circular
pit, 3 feet in diameter and about 31/2 feet deep.
It is large enough for two men. It permits the as-
sistant gunner to move as the gunner traverses the
weapon. This permits the assistant gunner to
avoid being in rear of the weapon when it is fired.
It is deep enough that the rear end of the rocket
launcher, at the launcher's maximum elevation in
any direction, is clear of the parapet. Thus, the
back blast from the rocket will not be deflected into
the emplacement, burning the occupants. Except
in firm soil, the requirement for depth can be met
only by an emplacement which is too shallow to
give protection against the crushing action of
tanks. Therefore, fox holes for the gunner and
for the assistant gunner are dug near by.

439
 b. Pit emplacement. In firm soil, the circular pit
can be enlarged from 3 feet to 4 feet in diameter,
with an additional circular pit 2 feet deep and 2
feet in diameter dug in the center. This results in
a circular fire step 1 foot wide and about 31/2 feet
below the surface. When tanks appear about to
overrun the position, the gunner and assistant
crouch down into the lower pit. (See fig. 82.)

l0| l
Figure 82. Pit-type emplacement for the rocket launcher
team.

440
 c. Overhead cover. When heavy logs are available,
the pit emplacement is completed by constructing
two one-man fox holes with overhead cover (see
fig. 83.) This method is practical only when there
is no danger of the overhead cover deflecting the
back blast into the firing pit. To prevent this pos-
sibility, it may be necessary to raise the fire step
approximately 1 foot. The alternate method is to
provide overhead cover for nearby fox holes.

7. EMPLACEMENT FOR 57-mm RIFLE. a. Initial stage.

First, dig an open shallow pit, as shown in figure
80.
b. Oval emplacement. Next, dig an oval-shaped
trench around a waist-high firing platform which
supports the tripod. In most types of soil, it is
necessary to revet the firing platform. It must be
high enough to let the back blast escape over the
parapet. The oval emplacement permits fire in all
directions.
c. Overhead cover. The oval emplacement is com-
pleted by providing overhead cover and conceal-
ment for the gunner, his assistant, and the rifle.
Space can be provided under cover on one side of
the emplacement for two men, and on the other
side for the rifle. (See fig. 84.) The emplacement
is camouflaged by stretching a suitably colored net
over the entire position at least 18 inches above
the rifle. Unless the soil is exceptionally firm, it is
necessary to dig nearby fox holes for the gunner
and assistant gunner to protect them from the
crushing action of tanks.

441
 t

L .:---I-

Figure 83. Rocket launcher position with overhead cover

(camouflage not shown).

442
 SIDE ELEVATION I MAN FOXHOLE
(MODIFIED)

I_

Figture 84. The 57-mm rifle position with overhead cover

(camouflage omitted).

8. EMPLACEMENT FOR 60-mm MORTAR. a. Initial

stage. Partial protection from direct fire can be ob-
tained by digging two one-man fox holes near the
mortar position. (See fig. 85.) In defiladed posi-
443
tions, this emplacement is satisfactory when com-
pleted by adding overhead cover and camouflage
for each fox hole.
b. Pit emplacement. If the position is exposed, en-
large one of the fox holes to form a pit emplace-
ment (fig. 86). This gives a rectangular pit large
enough to hold the mortar, the gunner, and the
assistant gunner. Keep the emplacement small
enough to give protection from bomb and shell
fragments, but allow room for firing the mortar
and for storing necessary ammunition. The front
edge is sloped so that there is mask clearance, and
the aiming stake, at least 10 yards to the front, is
visible through the sight. Pile the spoil all around
the pit to form a low parapet. Fox holes for mem-
bers of the mortar squad not required at the gun
are prepared near the emplacement. Additional
ammunition is placed in nearby shelters.
c. Overhead cover. (See fig. 87.) The pit emplace-
ment is completed by digging an additional area
in the rear of the open pit and by covering this
area, as well as part of the open pit, with logs and
earth.

9. CAMOUFLAGE. a. Camouflage is of prime impor-

tance in concealing defensive works. Before any
excavation is started, all turf, sod, leaves, or forest
humus is removed carefully from both the area to
be excavated and from the area on which spoil is
to be piled. This material is set aside and later re-
placed over the spoil when the work is completed.
The workers confine their activities to the area be-
neath the camouflage net. The net is suspended

444
 ,,/I 1r i
I,, jj
1 ./,. '/
~ i Ii

~tI P

Ilr~~~~~~
"/1 1

445
 ABOUIUT
5 FT.

i·- BEXCAVATION
BERM IFT WIDE ABOUT 3 2FT.
DEEP
SPOIL

PLAN
LINEOF IGHit Ito£ IS.STAE-

GUNEER
A S

GOTE:
SPIL PILED
ALLAOGOG AGO
C..OUFLAOEO

Figure 86. Open emplacement for the 60-mm mortar.

446
 TOP

SIDE ENEMY

14H Y

SLOPED AS SHOWN
BY DOTTED LINE

ENEMY

Figure87. A 60-mm mortar position with overhead cover

(camouflage omitted).

447
 high enough above the ground to permit excava-
tion without snapping equipment or entrenching
tools.
b. After the excavation is completed and the
spoil covered with sod or other natural camouflage
material, the net is lowered close to the ground so
'that it is inconspicuous when observed from the
ground. Nets. are kept in position when the weap-
on is not being fired. Arrangements are made to
withdraw or lift the net during action. Figure 88
illustrates the basic principles of camouflage.

WRONG RIGHT

ORIGINAL SITE UNNATURAL OBJECTS MAKE POSITION BLEND

DISCLOSE EMPLACEMENTS WITH NATURAL
SURROUNDINGS

WRONG \ RIGHT
/ 3\\.\ . , \.

GRASS STREWN IN AN UNNATURAL COVER SPOIL WITH GRASS

FLAT MANNER REFLECTS LIGHT OR OTHER NATURAL
AND CAN EASILY BE DETECTED GROWING VEGETATION

WRONG RIGHT

BRANCHES AND BRUSH PILED HORIZONTALLY BRANCHES AND BUSHES PLACED IN

ARE UNNATURAL AND CAN EASILY NATURAL GROWINGPOSITION
BE DETECTED

Figure 88. Camouflage.

448
10. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL. Complete removal of spoil
aids in concealing an excavation. When this is
done, the excavation is made somewhat deeper in
order to obtain the same protection that is given
when the spoil is used to construct a parapet. In
disposing of spoil, care is taken not to create paths
or vehicle tracks which might disclose the position.
The spoil is dumped in inconspicuous locations, as
at the base of trees, along natural drainage ditches,
or along hedgerows.
11. REVETMENT. (See fig. 89.) Revetment is nec-
essary in soft or sandy soil to prevent caving. It
consists of lumber, wire netting, small branches,
brush, sandbags filled with earth, or other avail-
able materials. The dimensions of the excavation
are modified slightly to provide for the space occu-
pied by the revetment.

PAPRAPET

STRUTS

_
GROUND LINE
IN MEDIUM SOFT SOIL
LOWER PIT ONLY WILL
REQUIRE REVETMENT

Figur 8. STRUTS
SUMP

Figure 89. Cut-timber rcvetment.

449
12. DRAINAGE. Provision is made to take care of
rain water, surface drainage, and seepage. In gen-
eral, a shallow ditch a few inches deep around the
excavation will carry off surface water. Water
which falls into an excavation or seeps in through
the ground is removed by bailing.

450
 APPENDIX VI

TRAINING PROGRAM

Section I GENERAL

1. PURPOSE. This appendix is a general guide for

the tactical training of the rifle company and its
squads, sections, and platoons (in preparation for
further training on the battalion level).
2. APPLICATION. Tactical training within the com-
pany is conducted according to the doctrine and
procedures described in FM 21-5. Unit tactical
training begins after the men have completed in-
dividual training, including the performance of
their principal duty; care, operation, and use of
their individual and crew weapons; and general
instructions in the use of other platoon weapons.
Throughout the training period, the application of
prior instruction to current training is stressed.
Each man is conditioned mentally for the shock of
battle; every opportunity is taken to subject per-
sonnel to overhead fire, fire past their flanks, and
the movement of tanks over fox holes and weapons
emplacements. The development of leadership and
initiative in unit leaders is kept in mind constantly
throughout tactical training.
853696 0-49-30 451
3. MODIFICATION. As in any program, it is neces-
sary to modify details of the program to meet
changes in the training time available, to make the
best use of existing training facilities, and to con-
form to the weather. The general sequence of sub-
jects and the general balancing of time among sub-
jects should be preserved.

4. TACTICAL TRAINING. a. General conduct of train-

ing. When possible, the training should follow this
sequence: conference, demonstration, practical
work, and critique.
(1) The conference is an explanation of the
principles to be taught.
(2) The demonstration or a tactical walk
shows how it is done. When it is imprac-
ticable to present a demonstration or tac-
tical walk, a sandtable exercise can be
used. Training films also are used as an
aid in the conference or as a substitute
or supplement for the demonstration or
tactical walk.
(3) Practical work of the most value is in
field exercises by the units concerned.
Leaders observe execution and correct
errors without discouraging enthusiasm
and initiative. There are pauses in the
exercises to allow corrections to be made.
(4) A critique discusses the good and bad
points of the exercise. It includes both
commendation for proper application of
tactical principles and constructive criti-
cism for failure to apply those principles.

452
 If the phases of training represented by
the exercise is completed satisfactorily,
the fact should be stated. Deficiencies are
noted and corrective measures initiated.
b. Explanation of terms.
(1) A field exercise is an exercise conducted
in the field under simulated combat con-
ditions, in which troops and armament of
one side actually are present in whole or
in part, while those of the other side are
imaginary or represented.
(2) A conference is a directed discussion of a
subject. In the initial exercises in com-
bat training, each exercise or phase of
the exercise is preceded by a conference
treating briefly the points to be covered
during the exercise or phase. When a
demonstration is used, part of the con-
ference may be given concurrently with
the demonstration. A conference includes
class participation; a lecture includes lit-
tle or none.
(3) A demonstration is an accurate portrayal
of a subject or procedure to be taught.
During the demonstration, personnel re-
ceiving training are assembled on com-
manding ground to observe, and the in-
structor explains the lessons and princi-
ples being illustrated. While a demon-
stration is a valuable aid to the instruc-
tion, particularly in the early stage of
combat training, it is not a substitute for
practical work.

453
 (4) A tactical walk is an exercise in which a
series of military operations are stated
and solved on the ground, the troops be-
ing imaginary. A tactical walk can be
used to supplement or replace a demon-
stration when it is impossible to prepare
troops to present the demonstration. The
instructor conducts the personnel receiv-
ing the instruction over suitable terrain,
explaining and pointing out on the ter-
rain the principles and situations in-
volved. When a field exercise on the same
subject is to follow, a tactical walk, the
most value can be obtained from the tac-
tical walk when it is conducted over the
same terrain on which the field exercise
is to be held.
(5) A sand table is a shallow box containing
sand used to reproduce terrain in scale
models. When it is impracticable to pre-
sent a demonstration or tactical walk, the
tactical principles can be presented ef-
fectively on a sand table. For details on
the construction of a sand table, see FM
21-8.
c. Field exercises.
(1) The greater portion of the training pro-
gram prescribes a series of field exercises
on the squad, platoon, and company level.
The subjects listed and the hours shown
should be used as guides for the minimum
required to prepare the company progres-
sively for training on the battalion level.

454
 (2) Appendix VII contains a series of type
field exercises for the subjects outlined in
the training program. For some subjects,
time has been allotted to conduct more
than one field exercise. For example, in
the training program (see par. 2, sec. II,
this app.), 15 hours are given to the rifle
squad in the attack. These 15 hours
should be given over to a. series of squad
attack problems similar to the type field
exercise (see par. 3, sec. II, app. VII)
outlined for the rifle squad in the attack.

5. PHASES. The training program divides the-train-

ing as follows:
Phase Hours
Squad --------------------------------------- - 44
Platoon ------------------------------------------
_ 64
Company --------------------------------------- - 100

Total ---------------------------------------- 208

Section II. SQUAD PHASE

1. GENERAL. The training program for the rifle

squad is outlined in paragraph 2, this section. A
program is not outlined for the other squads of the
company (weapons, 57-mm rifle, and 60-mm mor-
tar) because they ordinarily are not used as inde-
pendent units. The rocket launcher team and the
light machine gun team of the weapons squad usu-
ally operate with elements of the rifle platoon and
on divergent missions; the 57-mm rifle squad or-

455
dinarily is placed in direct support of or attached
to a rifle platoon; and the 60-mm mortar squad
usually functions directly under section control.
In the squad phase, these elements are given train-
ing which prepares them to operate efficiently dur-
ing the platoon phase. This training includes as
much of the following as is applicable to the vari-
ous squads:
a. Selection, occupation, and organization of po-
sitions in normal terrain, in woods, and in towns.
b. Preparation of range cards.
c. Establishment of observation posts.
d. Use of communication.
e. Ammunition supply.
f. Displacement.
g. Night occupation of positions.
h. Night movement.

456
 ag c t a -~~~~~4 r= <, r cE ,, =E
0

_4 4)~
3
~~~~~~~~~4 b

oo E ~ ~ E
C 0 O0 a
Y. ~~~~~~~~~~~~'oc

m 0C

Ii
LL 18 4)~ ~F.m ~~~4
:., Io crtpe.
:3 a e m

d bd Cs U =

o k

H fJ ~ coJloa F~C~~ rU"

.
1m
rJ2
:~
0 O O O 00~~~~~~~45
z~~~~~~~~~~~~

_) c; 44
Z YcU U)
ad 0 h< Z u P C
00v 0 to U)~~~~~0
4 4 4
*la - Z

_~~~~~~~~c
_I C} C

4)~~~~~~~~~~~~5
 0

o8d
8l d

_ o: o. c C

-U aU . 0

.0 0

0 c, o
-E a ~0
w ~ r

u~~~~~~~0

LU~ ~~
a 2 0
u aG11 ~~~~~k
U
04
~s
458 o

458
 Section III. PLATOON PHASE

1. GENERAL. The training program for the rifle

platoon is outlined in paragraph 2, this section.
A unit training program is not provided for the
weapons platoon because the platoon does not op-
erate as a unit; during combat the sections of the
platoon function independently of each other on
divergent missions. During the platoon phase, sec-
tions of the weapons platoon receive tactical train-
ing as indicated below.
a. The squads of the 57-mm rifle section train
with the rifle platoons in their normal role of at-
tachment.
b. The training program for the 60-mm mortar
section is outlined in paragraph 3, this section.
Of its total time (64 hours), 36 hours are allotted
to the section for independent training, and 28
hours are allotted for combined training with rifle
platoons. The section functions in direct support
of a rifle platoon during specified field exercises.

459
 0 ~ ~4~
~~~~~~~~~~~~4
k ; :

pw npr n.

o
0 0 .
F~~~ ~~~Cm,,
E t b X; a, P P P

· . o' *. ~; . ~ -S=.sr
0 0 4

> -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C

Z *H t X 0 *H X Q C* tS YID ell 0
_e
z
I
o PeQ<.
o
a
V

>
ES
(D~
0 ~
r-
Ca
E
UO
00
cn
ol
C.)
.XY=<

E
u =
s.-
O uO E
9
^o o
O C)
t
LU J co sM9Ut n 00-~*L z
E
460 a Ca6
O
cC:
21°
:ulcD[ x
au

iz~~~~~~~~~

460~~~~~~~~~~~~v

460
 41

Pk r rk .

_~~Si . .. .. _

o b o o o

O O
.

.~~o~~s
o4o
*

o
e * x

c
S _

*"o
I _ cqI X _ I q . . I *

b~~~~~~c : t- ^C;
N
In
s Cs
J tD~ t
)O 1d Y
I
- _O
2
v Cd - O CaO-
O

ws ~ Er Er R R

Co
0~~~~~~~~~~~~0

·l
ItD CO CI 00
0
Z

3 u;
o£ H Q
c) O3
~~~~H E o X; Q O
41
S $~~~~~~~~~~~~~6
S ,C
00
*- O o Cl o

461
 V I w QI
~
4)0Ck'
as
bo
0
41 -0
- .
Q
oS i· 4~ ~ J az
Cs aS-
r. d
· Os·CaB"

0 coc
co
r~
44 T4rX4
E:~~~C

d coE*
4 4141a
o-0 Cs A
a.

c C1 t-
0

~ e o~~~~0 o .t
o ~~~~~~~~ 4) r
uiU

t '0N
y

C3~~0
P

z 0 ;
Z

z cd
zs ·s~~~~~~~~~~~OsW
z

~~~~C ~~~~~~U S. 4

U U -0E
00 0
Lb1 r r
bD~~mEr

0 z
0
E
LU E~~~
-i
U.~g

462
 U' n; ' d , CEC=
a n a) 4e ·-

O _I o 0 4o

o 5

~
r~~ o
1ssK| q

Ige~~·S EB CA OFII
Y

pe r4 co co P.
0 *

=E~~a s 5·- ° - "S +1 *

CO .. ' ~ .0.-.

c C o 03 z 03 t-

-S~~~d -·r~~~~ -co @~~c

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ rn
@ _;X
'"
CO ,.el 1 . p -4~
-4 '; . ~

a ° el s. G - 4) '- t O'

X ~ ~ A ~ ~~~
CO0 -

C11 . LOc

~~ ao~~~~1
~~ a~~~~ orcE o46 OEJE 00 ~ 6

N ~ ~~~~~~C Ca 4 1
 co

,3 =.~E'~ " 03" $

a8E; W
rs a c 4 B

0~~~~~~~
n ~0

JI r ., r 4C

U
o z.o Er 1 zo z
6! ~ O ° = ,l a

n~
Z _' 'E 0 o

464 0 0 0
CA E Z 2

l 0 o
Z o~~~~
P, CO P

l=
0 o m 3I

_O .,. ,, S: Ts4
,~'~ r E ~P--. s@ AAC
46 X
¢ b Xc o

0~~~~~~~~~
2 0 01 0
E Hr:O O~ Ep W~
Co,
%D I 0
Hi~ ~, E (
464 ~ ac
 9 : co

C) b :3 r C 0 c
Ob-4

e M ·F 4

bo e O 13b ,: o ° r C

alX
O C CO O:
0B&
CaP

b Sd o ,b o

k F~~~o

;I ~~~~o
4 14
c
F

Om .$A
s:4~~~~~~~~~~~~6
co '
g 4 " r

2;~~~~~U

465
 Section IV. COMPANY PHASE

1. GENERAL The training program for the rifle

company is outlined in paragraph 2, this section.
During this phase, the company is trained as a
fighting team to execute battle missions under
varying conditions.

466
 ,0 '"'0
oO · g a$~, o
&4

C>~ . 4 ,,~ °2 ..

I ~ , to " o o
LO la,

r74 44
Ld

0 ; CI
O

co g o' coQr
I s.I

_- , ,, b ~ ' Wk4O
A
~ °=@ W 4 $) .~X
0 co P. d0 ' 0 0 o
z g o n
' C
0 000 l
*
j
eZ
-i
LL.OYIaO
~ · · : 3I
k 7O·

50 C F.
0-a49
853696 31 467~e

853696 0- .31
 Q o

_~ Q Eo 9 4--.

.= vw _ ,- E _

O _
v :3 S ECaQ) S d O
d~~~~CM

CZ C

oooa~~~~~~~c

x * co C 4) 0

0 00 .0
U~~~~~~~er

u 00~~~
LA.v " ·

Ci L c

468
469~~~~~t-I - ~c
 t c x ,i, A. ,i

0 o r.
0 nbo; Ya 8 co 00 o^ -

la b

o cq O
= N = O c 1 I

b~~~~ t b 4b > > rC

'd Ird~ I L, 2

'b~· '- -'- -· *c)_

C)~ ~~~~ E: E1 S
,,: - O O -< _ X O Y _ O
-Y _ 3

0o toElf Ca o
¢ t~d n, $ i~$

0 0 00 *
Ca 0 co A 0 Ca

00 00 00Q)
coal~ au~
a F R a~~~~~~~~~~~6

4) 0~~~~~~~~~~~~6
 E.

CC 0

41 ~ ,

M N '.4 CID M c

. Cb= co coY
co Q

O * d 0 N _C
z b F o b W b
ms~~~~~~~~0
0 C,1.u r a v

O=~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
i" T' CV rimw .2
3C~~V
CO
I o S°w
r°- o3 X= - * 0
° C)co
o E. b O
Cd E 4 C$

_~~~~~~ }x, L 5x><xw E vxw

u O
> *4J=; sdo @ E =r: v w E
Z tS Q C4
x co in
> U to~
w C) FU2
·
-4 -4,
47 "

470~~~~~,C
 APPENDIX VII

FIELD EXERCISES

Section I. GENERAL

1. GENERAL. This appendix is a guide for the

preparation and conduct of field exercises for the
rifle company and its units. The exercises outlined
cover most of the actions in which a rifle company
is involved during combat. These exercises should
be modified as local situations and the particular
needs of individual units warrant.

2. PREPARATION. a. General. For a general discus-

sion of the preparation of field exercises, see FM
21-5 and TF 7-295. For the control and conduct
of field exercises, see FM 21-5. Officers and non-
commissioned officers who are to participate in the
exercise are instructed and oriented in the princi-
ples and methods of troop leading in advance of
each field exercise. All personnel charged with the
conduct of tactical training should study not only
the text references listed in appendix VI, but also
should read other pertinent literature concerning
the subject. Preparation by instructors is essen-
tial. Provision is made for the absence from
scheduled training of the minimum number of

471
officers and noncommissioned officers when such
absence is for the preparation of instruction.
b. Tactical situation. The tactical situations are
made logical and simple. The general situation
furnishes the background information for the ex-
ercise, describing the situation as it exists at the
beginning of the exercise. It states, in general
terms, the information that the participants would
know if they actually were in combat. The initial
situation starts the action and normally consists
of an order from the next higher commander. The
initial requirement indicates in general terms
what is expected of the unit. Subsequent or addi-
tional situations are prepared to continue the ac-
tion through a definite phase of combat. A re-
quirement similar to the initial requirement is pre-
pared for each subsequent situation. In preparing
exercises, it is kept in mind that teamwork of the
unit in executing essential tactical operations is
emphasized throughout the exercise, and that the
exercise is for the benefit of all men. Terrain per-
mitting, it often is advantageous for related exer-
cises to be based on a continuing tactical situation.
For example, separate exercises are fitted into one
continuing situation for successive training in the
approach march, attack, assault, and reorgani-
zation.
c. Terrain. After preparing a brief written out-
line of the scope of the exercise, the instructor
makes a thorough reconnnaissance of available
terrain. This reconnaissance includes the selection
of the most suitable area--one offering the largest
variety of terrtain features for a continuous de-

472
 velopment of the exercise. For instance, training a
unit in the defense requires a terrain which offers
observation for smaller units and permits the de-
livery of effective fires. For the attack, it is desir-
able to have rolling terrain with open fields, thick-
ets, woods, hedges, and buildings. In the area se-
lected, the zone of action is checked beginning at
the starting point and ending at the objective.
Motor reconnaissance of the terrain is not suffi-
cient. The instructor walks over the entire area
and often assumes the prone position to examine
the terrain as it will be seen through the eyes of
both friendly and enemy troops. In such a man-
ner, a general plan of the exercise-the place for
the initial situation, the zone of action, and the
position of the enemy-takes shape. Considera-
tion is given to the effect which distant command-
ing terrain, in the direction of the enemy, may
have on the tactical situation.
d. Representation of enemy. For details of the Ag-
gressor Army, see FM's 30-101, 30-102, 30-103,
and 30-104. The conduct of the enemy is confined
to definite actions corresponding to the plan of the
exercise. Aggressor tactics are planned in advance
to provide as much realism and detail as are con-
sistent with safety and the availability of person-
nel and materials. The enemy shows himself, fires,
digs in, conceals himself, ceases fire, and screens
himself by smoke in the manner and at the time
and place ordered by the instructor. Artillery and
mortar fires are represented best by explosive
charges; fountains of earth rising into the air are
a spectacular substitute for supporting artillery

473
 fire. To represent hostile small-arms fire, the in-
structor or his assistants use signals or words to
indicate the area covered by fire, showing whether
the unit itself or some adjacent unit is the target.
Communication between the instructor and the
enemy leader, to bring about the desired action of
the enemy at the proper time, is established best
by radio or by prearranged flag signals. It is not
desirable to prescribe the action of the enemy on a
time schedule. Telephone, radio, and prearranged
signals help the instructor to maintain firm con-
trol over the exercise at all times and permit brief
interruptions of the exercise for timely correc-
tions.
e. Ammunition. Fire as much ammunition as per-
mitted. Field targets are used and scored. Blank
ammunition is used when the use of live ammuni-
tion is not feasible. The ammunition supply plan
is simulated realistically by the use of substitutes
representing the volume and weight of ammuni-
tion requirements.
f. Equipment. The unit uses all weapons, vehicles,
and other equipment authorized.
g. Administrative arrangements. In his written plans
for the exercise, the instructor preparing the prob-
lem states when, how, and by whom the adminis-
trative arrangements for all units will be made.
Such arrangements include familiarizing the um-
pires and the enemy personnel with the problems
and with their own functions; arrangements for
procuring and placing targets, procurement of am-
munition; range guards and safety precautions;
transportation, uniforms and equipment of par-

474
ticipating units; road closures, and permission to
use the area.

3. CONDUCT. a. General. A field exercise is pre-

pared as a realistic situation in which the enemy
is represented. It is executed forcefully as one
coherent operation and is followed by a critique.
Combat missions are executed by the application
of tactical principles and not by following arbi-
trary rules. In the tactical training of small units,
combat procedures are stressed. Unit umpires
closely observe the use of defiladed routes, indi-
vidual cover and concealment, response to orders
and signals, proper technique of fire, fire and ma-
neuver, and exploitation of supporting fires.
b. Umpires. For the responsibilities, duties, and
conduct of umpires, see FM 105-5. Umpires sup-
ply the elements of action which are lacking under
simulated conditions, especially the effect of fire.
Keeness, enthusiasm, and imagination are essen-
tial to effective umpiring. All umpires are in-
formed in advance of the object of each exercise,
the situation, the plan of action, the type of as-
sumed fire actions, and any special duties. During
the exercise, umpires make notes of points to be
covered in the critique. Umpires and their assist-
ants should be marked distinctively by white hel-
met bands or shoulder loops.
c. Instructor. The instructor directs the exercise
and is chief umpire. He does not command the
unit undergoing the instruction. The company
commander umpires exercises involving his pla-

475
toons. Platoon leaders umpire exercises involving
the sections and squads of their platoons.
d. Assistants. In small units, umpires usually are
noncommissioned officers who observe the course
of the action and guide it through its phases which
are coordinated by the instructor. One umpire
with an assistant, if available, is assigned to each
squad and platoon. The assistant checks the execu-
tion of the tactical phases and such technical mat-
ters as safety regulations and proficiency in the
technique of fire.
e. Orientation. On the day of the exercise, the
enemy troops are concealed in position before the
units undergoing training arrive in the training
area. Following any necessary conference on the
exercise, the instructor orients the unit on the
ground and announces the initial situation to the
assembled unit. The exercise is begun on orders
or by a prearranged signal from the instructor.
f. Development of the action.
(1) The plan of conducting the exercise in-
cludes the progressive development of the
action as to time and space; the represen-
tation of troops and fires; use of smoke;
use of explosive charges and other noise
producers; use of gas masks; use of road
block signs; arrival of messages and or-
ders; occurrence of simulated casualties
essential to the conduct of the exercise;
replacement of leaders; cooperation with
supporting weapons; appearance of
friendly and hostile aircraft and tanks;
and progressive maneuvers of the enemy

476
 forces represented by troops or prear-
ranged signals.
(2) During the conduct of the exercise, lead-
ers are allowed a reasonable time for re-
connaissance, decisions, plans, and issu-
ance and execution of orders. Excessive
speed in the execution of an exercise usu-
ally destroys training values. Properly
conducted progressive training in combat
technique teaches unit leaders to make
rapid decisions when a quickly changing
situation requires such action.
(3) When necessary, the exercise is inter-
rupted for correction of errors or for
brief discussion. Pauses are announced
by a prearranged signal and are conduct-
ed under nontactical conditions-which
may be indicated by having the men re-
move their headgear. This method of in-
terrupting the exercise for brief discus-
sion is recommended especially for early
periods of combat training in order to
emphasize principles while the actions
still are fresh in the minds of the men, to
ascertain the right and wrong of orders
issued by leaders, and to insure that each
individual understands the situation. At
the conclusion of the exercise, as well as
at the end of each phase, men are assem-
bled for a critique.
g. Critique. While personnel are assembling for
a critique, the instructor holds a brief discussion
with the umpires and consolidates their notes pre-

477
pared during the exercise. An essential factor of
good instruction in combat training is tactful and
constructive criticism. In his critique, conducted
on the ground immediately after each field exer-
cise, the instructor discusses the performance in
each phase of the exercise and makes comparisons
with other possible solutions. To state merely that
a certain part-of the exercise was well done, or
poorly or incorrectly done, has no instructional
value. Instead, the why and the probable conse-
quences in actual combat are emphasized in regard
to the possible solutions. Praise and criticism are
weighed carefully at the critique. Recognition in-
creases the self-reliance of any man or leader. On
the other hand, tactical errors and their conse-
quence are discussed in detail. In making criti-
cisms, the instructor avoids ridicule, sarcasm, and
any remarks which might be harmful to initiative
or which might lead, in the minds of men, to a dis-
like of assuming responsibility. The critique is
concise and factual so that the men leave the cri-
tique feeling that they have benefited by it.

478
 4) 'a s. h h-E 43
WW0
"2 co .. Cd 0 cW c 0 W ","I
C
co3

a)·~rCa ·
0W0 co Ca a. cd Io

W :J0 4~
o'a - CD> Q
Q~d
vm W 0 Ca 4~
o+a o
d, o 0+4 a r W (D

-a E- 0 .1 a3
P~~~~m L d
Ca co
~ lam
:S
c
F~4 oto , ed
Q) CD v c

Of cov10 W= : C O Ca ;4

,w ·~ o
el 5?
geb GO .. ,.c
b : : :E. C) 'ao a
o,~~~caE, ,
o 1 co
a~~* C

0 CZ k ~(
W 4 O>o Cd a,
-1 E0 4d-j1 0 I~

< z z 4-4
dCO44b `1

d 'C~~~4= 4 c
W 0 4E
0 4~~~~~~~~~~~~7
E r
W3~ o Car Fcd
ucb~~o

1.4 4 14 b'd 42
. :z 0 IC =~
I..
o b , co
rC a
~~ F( II)~~~~47
 I b 1 )4) ·

lt 8 0a co~?
49 40
co
&'

0 ba edF.

8 ,vQ Q)o 0I ~ o
0 co M =.- j~
h
U2 Co V =
0da~~ F
9~~~~~~13
d 0 LIEa
Q~~~0

CO".

·d a4a,
09 d I= OJ r

bo Cd cl A-.E

~a Qja a
> CH

O ce

cl o ed ~bo
: a,

ob : o
I~~~~~~~c
O~~~~cdc,

(d ~ ~ d Ok. C

480 m :
 c°
Il .A ~ I ooY
- gF ~I6I m
I 0 s" I brFl"E-
= l °
k= b Ca.=
"a ' Fo 0 4:.j : ac
od, M55owB= o ww=0=
<2

0 Ok <o A c = w
· '-2 , - 4.. ~
14 Ca p,d O 4

°a .- -- C °
d 4eq

Ca 0 ce F:C CaE
3L d A c654
M Ca o a4 kc4 -
0 C -a "
s QQ
Cd
a,Cd
= .tO~~~~~~C
a P OC* s d t 1
Lo
o 4 o= o I
;
ae a

P,, 1.4co
~8~~IV
X g
C*
m
Ca A k
0
mo Cd a-4: t C3-d = 4j O
0 Cca c m,

,d r. 4ce bo ,Cd4)
&: v o. 5 7
" ~~~~~~aC
.' 4 )
bo
Ej 7 1 = s
w w Q -4 Cd
d Ca O

~~~
d °n s > m gVi V ¢ 4.
d 0 r.-4 =
= 9 " ~ 4,4 ~Q
Q 0 0 Ca cd
ti)
DO
> 0 M 0 k a) 4 1 L!~~~~~~8 Cd
CO -+J ed 4i
0q- c o

Cd 41 d

bo. d Go m &4

Cd V 0 "
" 0 Oo
0F
o~aF
bsL~~~~
ok a, ,h o ~ ~ ~ 48
 cd,= C0 o d " Z

D4 3L s D)
C) -
3 cd 2 ° ' -Cj== 4@t =O
Z00 CZ

S O 0 'O ce I

0-r C- , -.o ,, oC-C

z - 1'-

Cd C)d C)

aa aa ~~~~

C Qcoh~Ca

482 lo~C1CCPCE ,c.

482
 Cao < Q @ o = Q

V cd
"
"~0
0

r. E., c t Y Qr r
b o :
bo odCg 3 r. -fO8
>.3.ww ) J f 'c =
W
o > ~~~~42
E0 0 = o
4 · n Ca d

ao ta k Co C) >
so Ca
4: ;*~XYP a) 0
co w k c '( a
,..¢n =Cd al
- a) .
4) -B ce;
Cd med7
~~~UI...
y~~Ld
0ai~~~~~~ >*.
=a)=a
co w 0
0~~~ 0 0
4~~~~~~~4 . r :3
~~
~
c
(d ul
b '
cp~~ *p 0
9 10 Ca 9

Cd
v w dh~
aarI ~' ~
·- ~ E.>

, - , 0 C
Caa

o 0 d
bo
0

0k ~~m M
Ca;.

· . . £, Qo Q
0 0

853696
0-9---32 48

853696 9 2 3
 toxm~ oQ()WD4 ~ a, q,~j

w Q 0 l:,-~°

~o~= > ,~ CaM ~'

co
Io c, E FC
a -4.~ 0
,~V ac:o.,c·-. '' o
Ca Cd -rc co

1, 4-~ 0 ~ ~, · ~> - ~,~..~ C>

ist g, 0 '-~ . .b
a, u Qp , ·E~ w
EE 4J n
0 ca F~~ b
Ca " 4,1
C Z e Co d o ; V a a o
9 [_
Mo
$4 C
>4 .d~ 9 ~o 0m·C
, =

= Q)
C.)= az 0
a)Ld0
4 1 a
F
a4 ;
to
a

_ ~,.
cdm~~~~~~C

4ac~~ ~~~mco 0c ba

Cd,
O ~ ja p~ a d
CQ ac~m CI0>0=c 1 O Qc. (1
I~~~~~~~~~4
rCF~OF~o
OQ)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c
a~~g" ocl E- d 3 E-
a, aoo~~~~~c c
o 4-4

484~4 E:O c
o I o= =; ·- * E
> a aV 4 4° 4@t)>X 4>a m o

Cd0 ~Cd
~ -4i: ~C°d ~ ~ ~ ~~. 0 I
o 4,
X a ° r
al'o ob o V:I
Cg oCY
4, ° t4 * oo

CUccm . = t*
90 E3 , Y la o
rX°

0CZ~c C 02d ~~,,,~~ . ~..,,:

Q bceI
4
e . r2. , . . ,
=ca (1) 02 a.0
L~~~~~C

bo * al · i as

~-~ P. ~~~o
· r a~~o,
c ,d ~ f~'

· ~
.~4 cis acd "'a
P4"9 Ca wb -d o

a,a
-,.~ ~~
a, o m
Izi c~ a)0 cl 9 cl0

o~ H u a, 0tE~~r.0
· n
Cd 4i
~~d O a co
1
co
bo 14
o

41 o m ;-1

h la"d 4"
Ca 4 Oo~§
4-;
a) cd 4cd
1
(1) (L) a rA 4)c 40

0 - cd EA da
C* d o
E,
00 .-,e'
C c*~~~~~~~~r
oa ao d C;
U 0~ ~ of a . ~f?
., t~~~~~~~~~~~b
o k~~~~~~~~170~~U24
boz
a~c~ ,,,C~fX~c
d 0
~~crv
~~~~~~48
 · ~ P ~ ,c: ~ .'4,0 ~
0 yl C.) a) ;.OF O0
w- Ca - , --.
" ': '
&4 O =E-(jc
4~ QO bO -, :;f

4E~ ~ .?~
O O~a ~ e

bo 4w,a o
., =0
-- ;=
O W
G bo
~ C)
0 la 0

cd E .-
a~~, =
o~a
O o
r1C~a
Cnl :
E 4
C* 48 r
Cabo r.~
o ~
-44
o L
w
v 0
4J a l~~E: 0

0 ~~~41 71
o-- .a,~~~~~a ._.

0 Cd 9 C

o o oa b0> Q 'Z
0~~~~r

§ Cd
o cl O
w~
a~~~b
a~4

C~~~~0
. 0 0.C · ,
4-S ;4= A ,

co 4)

"0 co c

O Cd la
04 z 44 >
0
.4 , >O Z

0 " ao

486
O~*-. I i,

>
0
m ao 0
o 4j -4j- -Im .c

,- 0 . . , o . C

r. GI .ob-o 0
r. 0~~~
.. OO.
0 =s~~~~~~~
> '""4 M,
C. b
a Fa EOH
o, s EF, o ·EI E bb
c,~~~"
·W ~.? c lak
~) Ld
~~ a., Q)
z 4
W .--C0 WU m0 )
· W ce
-PJ cd o r
cd o 0a c

C "E·-a~~~bpp
io0 Cd i E~. % 4
M >b cd 9 a e a
cd w. - > . ( R 4 >
Cd · P4
0 -.A &a 0 F4
.- oW~~~~~~~ o
0 Waa)

02~~~~~ fn C · " 4~
~~~~~~~~~~~ h~~~~~~
o~ ... c ab
cd 'a 0 C-) 0 4-I ~
Q) 'a () cd a-
co . - -S

cd . ", - O) rL
m
., 4(d r.- C** a I) CC~
I> bOa
u ;~
ODCaed
U m aa a
"le
.0+~W
e
w r=)J
~ ~~0,-~ ~ ~r3~~(
&
-+~ 0 rn
41 Ca Ca i
rd (y~~~F~~L~A~~ceCd U

a4 d 1· 0 d
a ~~~~~~~la"
a 0 o" B a48

487
 co ba r.~
o
O )
OC)P7 O
Ca a a d ~ c~
cd oz QC

p O I oa Q.,o,
Q) ~ 0
cd Oo c
0C's
4~
7~,

0't: nf ~E k ) c~ · 0 0." .'-- 0

q+ C.) CZu
Oa ~v0 cd
0
CD 2C ) ) k a
~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
F,~ o ~~ o C

0 Cd cl Cd 0 ;
0U2~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 +
cl Ca C*

Q04H CZ bo
04 Q(1) S
oYo~~~~~~N.,-,".
cd CZ~~~
t
4-4 a U2
0w l>ci Q) 0 a). P C')
1 c~~~~~~
~c~ Ca rn04- > +j W

oa Cd la N,

> c, t : o Ca'
= ,
Cd0
4j U2 bo CS C*
488~~~4
h
y~~~cfo u aj m d
4j ~ 4-c ~C =Cd a dQ-
41
-4
4o ,
4=1

488a
 '~~~~~~~~
0 0
0 0
., 9 Cd 41

a,~~~~~~~ 0~~~~~
i,, B ,~
o k lo~~oC=-bS .
cdUIc 0
'"o V2 j; : bO~~~~. rn: o
(I
kr4 ct: 0 Ca~
CZ CZ cd dr
cd~ c
CU
4I
0,'.2 '~ ;4 (V n
-
C-- ~ o,.. Ca
0
4J
0

> F: P 0 ) d s~om o '~

.~ob ~, id
uC W o
EO·
(L a) 4
m m
'"0
~o F 0
~
02 4::: n o
., a4~ a .~o a0 '. E ~ , k d-6
a mb ~f a ek l i o bo

cH 4 0 C c

I C E d ) 0 0 .( Elb
.Td rCa
b A -d 4 aa,
S cd k M d da
H um c 4b
C
1-4 a 4) = -

rA 41 Q) &
1:1 u g0 .,-, A~..
0 c
4, 0
rcl c~~~~~~~~~~k d t

bo -4 /) Cj L
*7 CN a 4 a, a C~
74

0 Cd ,
4~ c, O

a ed .Z? v ~~~c, O o ~ 48
 9~i k (1 ). ~
0 0 r 1)00 t
1. "0
C a . - o

ak
~
4a .C:
0 c~ .~~0 ce 0
oO cl E;L 8 4 fd

.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c
Cl 4Cda Ca

cl 4
c(c,

cl
ed , a,~~~d
-1Q
Cd =S s. U2~~~
4 tre Cd kcd
ed I a) aF~
d 0 Cd~~~~.
piW

o a) a re a 7 C
d d
a) E Dcr aad
k ola
or
4jo w.! >
eo ~~C "CF..' o O~~ri l
Q) F~~~ cco 4 ~ 5 ; &+O.LdC d
~~ a, a, P C e~~~aa
d Owm
Clud 4 4 a a d

F~~ m ~- o~ ~~eE-4 1 ~ r &4 a C -Q

cd
a;3 C
F Ca o
c, ·
co
a,3
'
0 C
a E Z
0
0 o~ ~'~
Q.o a)
4J = ca E-4 O E
Q)41boC
~~~4L.- a) C = 2
Cd 4~ ) 4 ~
41 o E 0 "&, co o~
+

bo Co C*.

Ca . k4
R dcd c~o 41. 4-

Ca ~. d.~
494O c~~7 MCdC) 9 kj
,a

d
:- ') 4- 1

o k oC
rE C' 4 ~
0 ~~~c
41~ o1) 0

490~ ,a dma~ c :1 !~$-

a z
, a 7<o
3 v, $ =a w @~~~l cdl >, c~';..
@ -.
aosw
.,a~co
ha
=~ °
.. 1 r
0
aQ
~0.4 "-' °' "-~W
,
,,
o
o;V £;
. ~a Er
.@

4 =5pz .
4; *J r

>
'Z
-
> a 0c lr.0 ..
E
0O < 4-@ ..Sc:
-
w $O
l
obo
o: U 4J '- . >0; 0Ymw

·0 l

R: 0-
o,=°
:
u,
.> L3
E° )
> *-B U
Os
,EM aL
=° =° ¢
Q
O e .4 ;.4 E
o ° o W ,: . '$°
O ed aSk B -a o C co m

0 . UO8 ~ ~~ ~
· ~4-Hb .Z?
; g'
Cc ~n
41
00 o
Q
CC
>C
a
1
m 4.,jf
3
4
~
(1)
0~
00~ cd v C) c.3U~E
co~~~~~~~(
m~o
Ca02 ~~~oo. c ~
.

4-1 1+ ;, V. ag o a
0 Cma 0 4 Q() 0
D 3 0

0 Ca

4O z
co o 1 boP

44 '
0 w Ca o -+ b

71~~~~~~u( P'D~~~~49

~Z 4
 (v la L4)
w E
Cd la ,Cd I '
Cd .6i M
C* Cd C) 0 Ur C
= o 0 U2 - , Cd
Ca '

Ca 9 a) 0 0 J~ 0()4,.-,
4a os cd o.

4J a) r. Cd da
3 ed
s F:o~~~~~~~~
t~~ I O
d r7

,~~7
4n
O~~
4J rn
k 4~~
E:
-
" ~.,~~ ~ ~ V
k
~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~. ,_(1
bo 4J >
O)
k IC .

~~I+,cl
_0 'l
4~ r. " ' . .r- co
(0
bo C's ; w o i r g · ' B 'C ' ijd
; M
a~~~~c,
E k H O~~~~~0
) cd·

r. ., Ocdmc,
Qcb~~~~,
bo 4 r.
ce Cd a)
o C~
c~~~ u ~ ~~~~~~~
e
>Me 5 C 4 4 3

Y1b ~F f 'i.jk F: h.~

0 1 ~.
VI 42, Ca o e

0 Ca boC* kV UD

cd .,~~~~ ~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
_ 4 g
.,.-,
·co I a) 42
ma
E 0 .=aa
~~~~ o I ~~~~o
ed 4J as U
Q cd 43
t: co > I 0
4-3 0 z Q cd 0
o boO~~;.4
Q) w Cd 3 .
o 2 .
;j. 0 H a U

nta~~~~~o 4) .-
49~~~~~~~~~~~~42 r
Cd -4 4) 0 C.
ce = Ca > 0 E1 vw a

la
0
4J .&.I r.C) d a) Cd 0
k z -a-.2 c
492~EnlOo t
 S o1 b4
n. ) 0 0 ' 0 , c'cC 4.0
U
g ~ ,~~0 o~.-,~
. . o. ~ *-, o

> -J 4'

D2 bO 'a 4-- r '.4

z4J0E. o .
Og b . -4-- o r -O >X
,. o -
o ~.= a,. 'a n .- o Ca
¢ + 0 u Xl
go aa LO f~r· r.
* --
' , la"

· *:: : 'o r.

o . C0.g , 4

;- )
04-1 rFwc,

o- C0 0 c-

=S bO0~~~~~4=r.49

493
 co b-
4-' o

~~~~~~~~.0
0
>
o. . 45 Ca0
-
.~~~'G
44 C. a a
Clla
o t'

o v~~'.~ c co-"
co.
ts Q
,.cog~
B~~~~~~F~ CZ -4 a Ca

0_e-.~ .- C*0 Sr4woM 0 bo 0 d W 0-

'~o 41C

0 Ca Z v 3 w
od o,iz.) C) g o X 4a, W 44
0 0. .' 0
.-
q-4 - 0 450Wa) 0

ood 0~,C

a ~ ~ 0o Cd
0 U F~~~~ E~~ U I k a) ir~~~~a

49';

%) 9-P
=
0C c ce
>4-4

o ~ ~ >~
c~ r.~

z o" O t
Lt a; c.0

Ca 0 kd~ i

494
 04w0

lo0 e0

clSC i,' o" '

0 4 Ju 'O:
10 O Qa 4i
I)

·. o ,
a~~
Ca

g
~O r,

c
m0 a ;'~10

Wco 4i
02 a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
r - r,-,o
4)4 L) Q F13C
C* ob o EcaJ ·

4 O7 Q,
c~ I

cd C , a, o
.,
Obo a a,· rd. 2d
· J3 k O Ca F0c

~~c ~a Ca + g

O
0 41

Oz ~ o M g; (P CL). 4
k c & 9 .
o Oa r~c
·
0 Cd co bo P
p, " ~c~~k
d 00
O CO a (d~~0
V4
r 4O
Ca 4J

Fr d OO a)4a d

Y-r O CO ) 4O

495
 '~ Cc:,. "O .~" .~ 4: ~. r~ o "
- ) " "O00' ~4 0 0 ~' '"" 0= Q I ..
.c::

&02r o ' ,-.ci

F
~-~
'.u
~ 0"q
- Ca
" -"- -
t=> 4~a Q) b o
Ca 0 = E--
cd -m 0.= .. , .J o(L)40 Ca " 0~E

O a-WCa
04
~~.~.~.c Q" ©
+. m~, O2 k : L
+- C.

0Z''"
0-+j
o~ w) j0=&,
a4 C. ~." R.~n,
4~ c
=% g 0, co P
?S Q -j004 I a 4mJm

Itsla Cc~ k )
0eo =
bo d
' Ca
.. .. bo
glO~
~C~
Q) F( Q~
la)= = z B),, 43
"
0Ca 0 9 = 4 4J
0I. c caj
4 ; bO Cq Z 04 44 co (n cis
00bo Ca $ 1 Ca Cd d 02 41
0( )0 d o:
· rO nfbO > Ca 0
7
ce~r-)";. "
0 7C1 bO Oa) O l

w == Ca d w O4 a

d· ~ I, O
02= 7,~,
. ,0d
~o o4z
c
.,r'-E: "
m ."Ca ?C1oa o
k
Ca0 oso=cE c
~~~~~bo = E
Q mr 4)F
E
%)
0O = aP- 4
~ c 0O c

Aco 0
a ~· ~~~~~~
ao ~ ~_~ oE ~+3;"o~~~in
t~~
on o~~~C)~~~~5U C a oz
C O~~~~
I. m ~~~~~~~~_
nf b I$

O " ~~Cd C* '"00

496c, a o B
t; &n
X2>~ _ °oE =
cX sd ;: & ot *= iQ

nO Xo Z~~-cs PC. s .
o
*
O
Y '"SO e·
',° a a .Y
~ O~
OWs·
r .tlrd~abo
tH~
C- , ._ o0 0
cd
A
a SAEmv Ua F 4
4-, cdo O~~'m~ to a
Cd , (d,r: E '¢a

-'
mo ~ ~ 6~
,4 G ,
t4-E~ o ° ., a a,a eelI
~ ,~ Lo r.&o
E. E~' S~ Cd Q ~; Ca &02~ °
&O d 0 " . -~~~~~~~~~~~c
04" Qr." S. a
4 1 ·-
s.o ZLI,~oo;:~c
a1
~ 4E: ,. ~. E-4 :::
~o. °ca~~0 -" ~ t~_ o<
0
~d o
,, .Ro (dFdCnO
E
=
,d ;
ed
oO.E Cboo:
,4
o
c :e
0
F
4d

a 0
C0 acr cl =~~~~~~~~P .- '" p r-1

Cd 4
cd 14- C

< bo 4
asa c d 0 Q

cd
Ca 4S~~
Dw4O. Od 'i0
C5a- -.r.*e. Cd0= '
4-10 o
k i ~~aa .2
1. - a

"a~~aB "
cll~~~ a, u(Q

uR V1 F~~~~~~~ PO49
 r 42 = h
0@

l S a -- o. b. r
. S

m o
R,,
R S
' p, cw t ,S °

bo S E 'a S

'° 'F a "= 0 o 4, o=

oo

"_ S _ f < O .
"
Q. Q) w b 4.44- ou ¢ 3d b

4984
OQcis 403 'o %Hr 0
0-8
0 0 =M

m~~~~0c
498 :a -·F
 c, a o a, E caCo c
Ca ad Q) 0 C) (d aq

Co4 w 1 E A 0

cd w >.. E Ou~. O· m(
&02 0 4o a o

$~~dF~h 0 > 0
wa gs 4 bOk 0 F 4
ro
~~C~~:OF~~~o · c~~~~p~
oa Co
c.E-E:
o :E
o ed Ca > S C)
~4 oo, ~!!E ·! (d Q WE >
1, Q Co o ~
>b 4 0 C o b = r
4 1 a E ~4r W

~~, ed k" 71
O·- aba 0 o
M 'C. q$

4m
F4E- Cabo 0
bo 0 r:
1
s 4 :-~!" cwE- a ge 4,
4
w
02 a w &

cdM >~~~e

0 0,~
8~~~~ ~~~~dC
0F od C

0~ ~ Ca
0
Ca m '.00 0 ) - C 0
0 hB
I'B ~0 9
41)~o o W
C 9d OD giF~W
ri4

w 0 ad Go

853696 0--49-33~449
 >1 1- o $ w 4) 0 -
-4 - o Ca +d -4c p, C
w 4- A a U

=~ . 4 , E .E.
.~~ aa o a co a)
cd %-4 CaO 0
bo
4a Q

C* bo
P~~ ~ ~
s ~~d
ou~~~~a r . a.0C
O Q, O ag~~4- n--
u~ CQ oa~

o ~
u
n :~-t-~F Ca O~
o o~ bo
o c~> I ·0c: o
I C~aa
0 IoM'k7
0 C) 2 , :$ 1 4
0 4~~ pQ 10 0 ;4 -+a E 4'" e
ECa C e ~Fa o a a

~~~C~ ~~g 'C r\ o Vbo

a o
4.2 d coF
~~~~~~~'k
aa
c~ O
a C
'+ c c

·r o
4~~~~~
u4 'a

u
' ~ co 4J
u Ca0
C*
5001~
M bO .0 ( O .4 =
;4 Ca Ca Q

la 4 E

0 4Jco C
Ca a F

CD C) Cd V(d
500sm
 41o~ co
rA > 0 00

mo ~ m o ~

o hcb~~~~ W o b

0 0
ril7 .4. 0 Q kddc

U
e Cao
CD u
-a = 0 02 rn
= 0

.4a ,..0.~ 0o
bD
0
i J
0
0

oI~ao
C* 4~
co M m

cd'ja a ,s an Ca 0

r, co o gE DIIIC~~ .~i· . o' , y

z C* e Ca C).,

0, o 1) + Cd

o o? aF: t: ~ co 0
Q)~~~~~~~~~~~~~C
ak
"I sk 4 ·
ca I

.d ~t: $ aaB
02
a,
~~ ~~ ~,W
~ ~ ~~)-4.
0~~~
o
1 0 -- C*,Oa
4
&B

.U '"0
.w
14' PuE'"a.~
~~~~~~~-
O 4
1 c
C) a
o Cd

00 ~~~~~~~~0
0
04
4
0 4

Ca Co 4 O' ad

a, u '"~~~~;4
o Ca co F$4
r. > no 0 0)
co W~~~~~0 C*

C)Ca s
4 -1
c r. 0 4
r
a ~~~~~~~E
hr 2. Z 7
a~~~~~~~~
F: ~ 4 ~~~E 0 4m
bo co : o 4

C14~~~~~~)
 ~. mo C 'Fc ~ ~ a
,-, o4) d
~m &· P,, o- &d
0~,~ o0~ w coam ' A' ' e .,m
'10u
0 0 a,Co 1 o . o g3 ~'
4-1 oF4 o
.~ .'Q (, co,,L)
'~~ II) k~~4 0 ~c
4 o w wo co (L) 0
o· o
._._ ,~, o o S 0.
E Facl a E " E w 0
E5 0 i~~0'~'~
~ g
M 00 c~ ~ 02 b04:~. c
co 0 0 . 0 -- G'o "

,o
4- 43 to

· 0 co
aa >u
C.)il a
C.) oo $-4 W" o 43 " c

boo
'~o co C o co,
co

o 0
$4 4- 0
0 .-o o C1 0 C

U2 4 + 4 a

ooE~
co
r. 0 C5col l~~a
r k 'a
V4 0 CS o 0 a C3 C*

.. 4 5 P.
Q o E e
i 2id P u 0 b 7i

m,0 cd 1
Q

502
b co , o N O
Oo "0 b:o C4
w ' x °0
a B a s
v U A C w w a *_

v2 o O
CD
~'°
0r'.4 :m B aG

Z *d C : p, Cd
~0~~-' C 0 -~ c 0 co

co° ' R. o R .

G) 0 .0 ,0

Qi · .. A 4

_ 0

0 Ca
'vibO ·c~oEIFh4 I

~ ~uE:a D
af~""'id

U p~~~4Jr.C

Eo~d b~503

503
 'z o o'~4
tO , co F0)
gc,~~~~~~~~~I~ a a cl~~~~4)

kC Q~~~~~$
) 4J 4 =
:~ .AImo ' 2
F~~~ a E~~~d
4 0

a 44-o cd§~ a -
>,

· a ~~~~·cl
~~~a C

*IurCIS a ua
o w. Z)Cd 'a -
E up a, ed O
" 19
O .

~ aE: C) aI Q,
U 1 W a I
· .,,-
'.4~~~~~ss
4o ~h :~
A4 t 1 · c~ a
Ca 0 Cd
p
$4
4bO~~o
.-
4
O4eL M
m

0(D.6 1 4 .4 $
r. 2Zm cd a

0 ~6 w Co
0 bo
:3 : w co-&
s~~~~~~~~o¢
IB 0 1~~~0PC
tgc~1 co

o rn o I M ca
Cs bo r bao

10 P , 4-a 0COD

M 0 0 m m j L

Ca a u~c
cd $4 Cd
0un LA a)

504~~
 0o
02 a(I E 4

I=:E
c~ ~.., :
,- . o .,
."', ~ .o 4j : :
n. Po,..~
=.
'-o r P +O
r a io
E. "'~ v ' -~
Cd Cd a) CZ 3 a C02
&0 d I) 0
4J 1 P, d Q )

de
0C*
o 4L %
Q
p ~a

::ceoCd is. ° 4

,d coo Ca :~2la
Eo o
EQ)
W4 -4 c &cc
L.E eV
,
4-E
0 E- q,~
c

F:ka' r. 9 a r a d 0·) a)
cd
ce a

0
Cd
4-)l4~
~Frak
r4

w=
4J

.~
CH V
r. cd
W
r.
bOc .- ,
0
r.
d CQ -6 Q)
U2
= o~ Q

0 b 4ka

Cd 4Q (X r 0 c

(1 o -jcd P, P4,Q
u
'au : Oi

-6z 4 al C P64 cd cl :
J o 4O q
0c
a ,P a vlP

~~w
Ld h~ WU kF~~ ~~ O o " 0
 c, O~~~~~ a 4t) C .

cd,~~~s ~~~~
"'"eos,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~J.m TC~~~~k

a lk 0 :

4 1) Cd V - ). .
Q e O 4 ,
~
Ca =~ ~ ~ aE

>I0 my, ~~~~bo4~0

a= = Ed" , Qa -
+ C
=C 4a ,Z k 4'= M on .
0 k 0 () 4-l C

P4 0

10 a) = a ~ o
4c ~·~
l~ p(
ox SMC

44) 41 a F~ 4
' 4-4
0
0
L
0
6- 4~
4-4Cd
04
) C
V
I4 4
.

,
o
0
Cd
uc~~~~~~~a 4~~~dp
&
0 0 ce 'i

boCd4- Cd 4k
0 Q .-
"0 w 0 -w b
P4 0 P4 '-
t ~ 3
o .4(L
mao
45.
) l a
O -4,C
W~0

Go C -4a .> -4 4

w O~~~~~~~

00 a k~~~0O $

~~~~m"" F~~" Cn

Cd vO Cd % F.,
506 o
o4o bOi4)
Ubo ~ '~ =~ ^-0 n
onw:a:i)a ==°O
X=o
.o

Q~~~~Q OQ nl m
OeEX *
>E- go gE .
m-~
A" +.~ F~,~
o ',
).

5 Xd .=
Cd E O
J .- Q

= Ea zw b svo
'W $6 &4
o S+s<r
t r
Od
,r
m
-bo *
B m o
0 0E=
w+ ;.o = bo X, da
=~ C~~a
EZ o ~C a 0
co k bo (1)

~· m a
r~l 4 an
= co C
|~~~~7 ce:o 30X
cd .
5, a *>
OC4C
BrE-~~~~
w a; g .
a
. >=<
C.)d · cd Cd U2!4 tEEQ CaOaC
0 * E O=
02
=;
bo
E > 1. o M(dc,
bmo
= bOm V.

U a F 4 O'
F2 og "~2 .. ~

· ,k Cd r a .0-
0a o o~ d o -65 a

*S- Q)r.d
-

~~ ~=~
cdw
a FFo -,

C)
ot -

Ed O F~~~~~~~O
sez
>0D ' -
E-z

50
°9

O0 0

cdw cl u4)
_ 0 Cd _ 14 4i -4

= ~~~~~0
7
r. E I4J
4. " Ur
'rQ
d 14 r- O
tH"o
bo r. co O
a cC(
. ) ad O
0 to
Ca -2 - a
Q 4a = $W1
4 g 0 E
=a,

C)~~~~~~~~~~~~~a

507
 Ca-1 k

a) Ca 0 0) ~0
-45~~ .. ~
. ah (dk
k col~
0 Q >a -9 O
a ~~~~~~~moP
c, a
co - Fm 4E,P, a Q n·
&4
E3 'o CO a cd
4i Zcao~
Im o~,o
~,
~
~~'
E,,¢, j~ ~~.~~o" Ca w rp
tsVS0 .= o ceo -w wZ '--
c :
Cs cd 4 4
FL a po~oX4 Ca4-
F~ ~ Ed c I0cd
7! 0, 0J.a m aic 4) 6i
.a aC)c Fm~~W

aD 5~~~~~~tr 4-~ 'g co 0:

Cd
Cd
i'

o w
4-4 C: , Cd ~aoh
a ~~~~~o >c

E: m P .- .~~~~~~~~~c1
~o, o 4 2 -
(Da cdolckr
lQ ~Omo
· 1 0 0 0 '" 0 l
0, Z

> Ca 4o
0 la
o . 0 oC 4
o a0
co~~~
I d co co u
C ,,,~~~? a o -
4i Mc
C3 a~~~~~~ai
ti4#

508
 O I * '

. bO O ,- 8 o w
Q c° * Cd :o N

'a > ° Po ·

Z E

:~..~r~.~ ~ ,,. ,- .o~

g *w , ga 13 w
C)~C
g5 , o
· 0- I0 $.
U ~
4 .o ' Cdm r- b m CE

0 "3 'd '

 'L-4 '.4
o A~ ~
.~ ~A ~ ~
0 o = ,
o 0
Cld boZ c
Z2 0 Z Qc U
k ~ E ·~ n.O ·
a~C1

-4,
4J
- 0- o
bo~t

-d 0 A0 1. 0C
ZI, 4B C.)l
aoe, a l

11 , > n
Ca o A U 0
>
(1)~~~~~~~ P cd
co co 02 anU o
>~~~~~
.,~·rr
0d 0 a

cd p co
<ro
ashb 4tF:c

540+~7co "5~~~~~~~~~~ w I- ca~~~~o4

I:-gQ < CO 0 0
0 C,

co4) 0 02

h7 0
 ,~ . -
o
wbo sk W co

c o Ca,

C. WI.co 0 ° 5
o ~ c, M

o sc
0 A N 'a A~ao
,~> " 0 Ei: P

O ~~) d
4--l 0
Ca co o
4
m~~~
CJ )
k 'o
W
'g
Cd n4
~e
~
0 co c
A I "A bo v boE

:3 s E

4J 4 r. 2
5e11

a p E a (d4-a00

4a F4

a 8 '" aL Z~~~~~~E
Cd~~
0 co o C

=3m
0 'r.
43
~?m'
02 .4jm
r. Z 4- cd ·
co ~~~~~oO a~~0
W 0 :3
E o~~~~~~1
 ChD~RI)C,
a,~~~~~;
o c~~~~d o'
4-5 ,
40q S~~

4) S4-a 0

Za~ ~~~mma

co 0 L)'Q 4
c . co 14 u- ,~
4Z 4 2 m-

E o~~~~~~~~~~~0c

0 k XO O
p~c
coc c3 M
~~7J
F: a o ~~a 'w g

So OL J l
coco $1 M 0 0

9 ,h0 a F 4 h 3~~CD9

Ca co 8 ac· (2

tm~~ 0F O 0 o Q

5121
 0 w w a '
o)q
$4 W W W0 .2

45 co > o·r
$4 Ca

1u 'I:c~~od CVI V P coE

Z 45.4 0 10
oo bO + c

C! 0 C*
'd ~ 8 w t4j~r co F
lo Cd N W &

0 0
+5 o 0k 0 F 4 41
c= co 4, , e
Co

r. E 42 0 > 0

r d $Z.
0p L~Z 00 & 0

bo
Iaoc
d~ Eo ~ ,o,of
·. F: 0 a
C tr.,
Z A aw w 4) :

Cd
Cmd ' 0
1

0
h O:
&J P
w8 a c110
4- C, 0- r 144 ) 4-1
4i 4i ce
ej A co

go .,
4
0 4
~~~~~ o~~~~uc
$4
W S4-
~~ d3 Wg& > O g -5

0 c,~ o 100
$4 $ - (1) k
W r. 0a 4:
CD
-+ r.
$4 t) d"w d, W
o '
co
C Q
4)'C & +

4J --
3 #
F:~~~~~~~~1
obr. 8 om

(d o~~~~

> co > 44

Oo · ~~~~~~d O cod
r- 0
>b 4~ El .- " +
 '. 5'o ' 0a4- = c 44

, ~ °D ~.,
0E. Yc O , ' = O °
, CO . 44.4

on o
(d~~
~.
~~.=. 1
o -, c
o ,.

0M
oono.

O0 aa
51'4

514··
 @
i ; e C4
;4 h W ,4 w = + 'aA4 _

W0 >>W 0 A O

~00
.
d4* c*) U 'j Q 0 CO

. o _ . O,
O

*. ° O O
0 ° ~EO
2 0-
0* 0 .
41U:

~ 0'.f
W '.4O
r
V0
0 4a M 0
0

o
,0.- 0

.. ~ ;,
UE
~F A

8o *_ *4 40

o
o - )

aa a U ~U2
6 49
E .-
0--
~ Q) d'~.>09- CZ 0
"4569f 4 . , - 51c

S53696
0-- 9 -- 34 51
 ,,, g " ~~~~~~~t 9~~~~
0 CONO.- m 4 bi

Cdd
F: bo Cd a h~~~~~~~~~~~k: u(,Cd0
0 I

q) cd dc'O~ ~
xw d a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
·a a T 4U'C
a

41 o 0)
9 -Q d

a
O ~~g .^ 1 S T~~~~
Ca ~~~r~~ Ed #

cdLEcd~i
W ~~~~~~~C~~~C)
~~~~~~ 74
C E
ed O 4, ac, 4Zo aE:

Ed ~~~~
O B , f: a E
4, a~~~~~~~C
c

"e ~~~
~~~-'
7 Eda, ." E~~~d co >~

~~~EE ~~~~m~-
co Q · o

4-: ' C" Q~

4f cd 5~e

a3 ce

p d
94
cDUO , ,IV- w
d C3

> U~lt~ E
R.
U" ~~~~~ FL a
8'6 cl
Ed
~~~~~~~~~a
~~0 .) k a~~~~~~~~~~~~:zC
0

~~
E:YI j" E~dC) 4~
Q)..~'~3 ' wR
.4 ls: :

Z ~~~~i~~cdw of~~c

516
 m) 4~M0) r/(44 j)J ~ 0 0) Sz

$4 a)
0CH0 ~ )
C
Cd
o)
Uo
Cd
0
Z
x,:a
.-.
4
o
)0

,. 0)o
-.
U0 C~0k4 . >
~~~~~~~~~~~~~n~~~~~~~~~~~-
a) C, .~~~~~~~C
~~4Cd da 43 d
E~'4ao~~"Eo
t= Ed
,~4r.. .a.
0,
bo w O,
- ~.
-%
g - CZ 0
O

P4'4-j 0 o P, o -4j oa 4rr-d

~~ ~
Cd -4J d CU Cd Q 0) ~l C..4 cl 4) d C
Wr) Q) F
0 0P4F a Q (k a) P40 h Go
C
EJ F W
14 Z0 0 w 00
Cd Q)Q) F 4 c 43

u1 d u E u l Ed
44
4 4U
C Q)- CZU+
ce

4 ~ 0)7~

CU0
ukoCd0 C) h
u 0 a) E mI
0
U ~ 0
Cd C 1a · d·? E
Cd oo Zor-)
Cd -4
c~~~o" 1 oct~~~~~~51
cd4-D Cd
4-.I

C0 C ' $
0
4 oa~ah m ~;" ~o Cj : " u o ~f' 1
bio z40 4CU CZ
 1- >1 I > w >~ Q, L
0 F0 .O V=

k 4i 0· +;:Ca t= r. N
co bog$
.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r
m, 0 Eo
;o '"0>CH 4.C QW0 0k
mW C
Ece co O* Cd co
m .

o 4,7=
bo 0 t)0
(d
r,'o
ce

c
-4-)
aa
cd
Q)

.
i

o
0~
a °J
4
O
r, V.
F
8 ,n 0
Q1 a
-1

Co 0t O c0" A
P·C~a 7 ed ce . Ca C'd a,

Od 'aa =4a a
E- ..c~ 0 , , 0.
,m oiO
Ea U El·Ctnl
d~O 4 la Cd
a, a~~~~c a
V.~
0 ( da o

4)Ca4 0 C Q . -j a
,- co ."" ' i 4J
a,,~ ~,, .~~.
0 = n .- O , o
< +j-CdC SO w
0 oa o) o o W4 )

r.4-1.~'C, ·
co co
I
a.c n ack·

Cd o 'a bo
c) od
a A a l
r-: 4i 4.) e

518 ~
bo~~~ 0
cov q~
 ~·1 1 P1" ~ 4-1 C bO

·. ~~ ,< ~ ' 'b 0

~ ~,§~~~~~~~~
~,~ ~ ~
-~~~~~- ~ a

... 0~ , .. 0
Q d
C~ M ",

. 04 -0) n W
0 . §'

Cdt *- 4 ~0) + .~- ew 0

o 4
o 4- 4 '
0
0 cd co
bO~ ')
a
~~~~~~~c
co~
45~

bO 0
U -:
0~~~~~~~

Cd 44
Wo (d
M~~
_r:Coc~C~bw
E B ba aa. E 0)
cco +

Cd 03 z

" ~~"9351
i~~~
coc5
4 0
 ~B · ~ ~I i o,
~ · 8 I $

'" i> c~ c. . o
bo ,o . oC 9c o Sd -a
a· z
o - : F- -I., F: o
~0~4
"~1a
o~~cd t, -' 0 "0 - cd ".2
U

4,- 4i
Co 0 0 ~4J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~d-C
0
(1) C.)4j
Z-
4 >4O -a bo 7
o Cd X cd
=~~~X·C:
o
8 o m lad l4~.
~'~
cdz
o c" bo ' d . bo

, a ..,"
X06bo c. o
.- ~uc
E ..--
:,
$.4
"0

o Cd
ElC P O dC
a p+
b24 ~o
l C
a0m a,4- 7,
0 rl 0 4j Cd d Li
C~,u O
cl g 4 bo c d co 0·

S 4 z cou
3k O~~fl E0 cl l 4
bO cd E- c

C~~~~~~~~
O~~~~~C

~~4
Cm o ~o~~~~~~

· '=
CP
-~~~~44>
E 0 4
bo~
uE .o
4
dL~

52 a 01)
0 = t - = 4s

bo cd
m- z Ca
0 ° ~ f.
d Q)
4a

0 OF~~~~Oc
o,~~~~~b
0 p -4--
.- 'j . . '-

w 0 Cd -4c ., >c
520bp !, '
 X
,c 3o ·
SC4 W E a F d >
og oPs edd Cd C
) uZ 0b C . , - ., c F: ao
O Q Do 4"

to

SC u : CDCa

4-4 ' +, .° (.w

1) e *- U -

0 0- . C 4o; C6

+~ 0

P4 P4 4Ba
19" a a··
Ccc, o~~ n CD t

O ~~~I=~5Z
 '
C a)
.-
.- 0
°.
o
J.P
B
0
A

C,
R. -dW d_W e4-4 w4
d *<tp C4 wW W°

0 b,
3a 4 =EEx cd @C
4 Do

0 C0 CD

Cts 0 z = ~ 0 CU C P-
;. -4.) ts a> 0a

" Cd =
c~ bo 0 0 L CU
.~ o o m
+ ba EC ; 4 a
.-
o~ boo 0 ~I4 c- "~ o

maa,E ·r, oed 0 C

gd
od· 'o " .-.
~ E: a
O ~a p, (d 4 F
>(,a P e9 4
O n m4 0 0

I~ c"- a ~cdI O~
· ~8 ra
o c~ c¢4
-~ ~ I~ (da·?
c4D~ ~
tn0 $4 ~~~~~b
: h 0 *.

' . - * E ,. ,- -
wl
Q(1 . _ , ~ o "t..0l ,~ 0 ' -
~ ".-
o Ca ~ ::
0
$4Mm
p-~°~
d
2
Cd
a 0$dEm
0
P4 . a o0 W 1

C* ~~
Cd0~ 4 0o0O w'c u_.
Cd; 4 4 CH 0 .- L c
Ed F d P
- Ca
C >& am
w
> 8k C
ce oI= > C 4 ~~ a ·2
~~ a,
OtH
E 0
U4-
C vr,

m m a Cd ~ 3,4
Cd Cd 0~~~~m ~~Em r aEdc

0u a Q a C)A d
r. (9
0 l a 4
C~~ ~~~~~d
CaL

F: ( bOE 4 0 bo
cd 14 4 S.;.
,C 0 , 0 Q

CCw p; Ca
C.)
o
0
F 1. 1) .9
cl0 -0
Ed v, 00 .0 0
ao ' -S 4'- -
m ~~~c+3
~~~p " lu -4

S -0 "O Y~~~
g) C, O m 2 4
m go

r.0>aobo a (
v E4cd0 UmE

Ca cd o-
4(dO rd V hi c

k V~~~~~~~~~~~~2
 o~ ~a o ~ Io E a o ,-- S
CO 3w E C* r, o

b a); aCd
co d Cd ¢ o

la ° 4.
$b o c, e

b4 1i) = RiE d Q, P: bO OC "

Cd
Cd~

. _ Dco-§ .r

co
I Q o * c~.

. >, o .° R 0 o
 °Q bg =.S.= - S
°d O O
- ~., W C X.

0ocdW °° 4 ~
O
Q) , cgc

d oo .) O 0
"~,-r~j I~, m~ iJ ' a
~

~o 00C5
_.a . '_ ·

0 0 w ; El CdE--.

(1)0, 00
· i .i CZ
.,_,
,
.

O 00

-o

525
 0° o ,c 0
.m O 0 E
Y bQb4 n =Q 2n S= C)° =E .
$4 0O P. =dC
cd acl( ) ; E
* bo P, = 0 oE o

m
C 4J C)
Q U m
_
02
=
.- ", z
* o cs
0
C) 2o
4? cou 5 'a
.== co
CU

a) C)
'ISC.- C)C .-

~o
-~~,~
rm h

Io
00 0 0

Uh a

526
 ·II ~Ea)I W MI
Elou MZ =pu = 6 "0
0
o o~

ij =t) Q Wf
00 =q .Z
L 43
M F al
.~E r & 4J O : o~ E

F: rd~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C
-ij
= = CL a F
' C
3 cs a
CZ :: 2 E
E Er, V
boV ccl a).2==-~:C

'd o v v cd bo 0
ce VC 0
w Ac o
M a a( 0 ww =
>
r. a o

cl 0 W-w
cewC:
V g > c M Cd~~~~~~~~~~~~
Q CZ Q X .E; A > U d
0o 0 o o
Ca~
S~~aa~o-a
cw 9b C4·
BS u

0
· ~~~
d d0 ~cl
E~~~ a

F
:
VE
=-4a)
:b
-P so.E IS
ao d
u
W 0,
omE~~~kC
oZ

w Mu

00 bo

Ca aOm >~Oc

Ca 0 m E
cd . ) % MW
Cd J 4o > d- C*
00cd a C
a o (d a · ~~~0 c c

527
 a -0
._ - 9L
>

o"
-6)E ;S 2 0 ° a

s CX o > * -Q u
>,w
h , ~ El
°c O o b ° s

.,_ > 3l Md " o M B 4tJ0

b9 C.) zD q, CX g= Md O

oo o

0 U2 u ~
4-a .- 0''

·E~ ._ -.o iVry o

la 'i ;. v o -r '
d0 ,.' ,o. 0 '; :1

> :, O.>2 °+ ~'a .o ·VOo

=0

V d C .>>o CU M02
a4!_ CZ

u Wu~~~~~~k ~~~~OQ>no
¢ OU

CH Ee
0
C)~l~O ac
> 0
$4t V(8)ouu
0o I

528
 a
Cj
oS g
0 -44
° OS.o ;

mC > ;= bo 4j EE b &

a:.S Go .0 . _.e
Cd 4-o r 'd

·- ,O
O) oc
fl r'
~, o,.., ~, ~ .D-
W '~o *_

0 ,0 c.,
~d

OS.~

i; ' SoE.
YT/0 ) T
 tn ^ 4D
rVI - I m 0 U\S X°

· <! F0 >o a- ~~ a,- m ( b<O 4J 0

C* hs o a b >
m-3 ;r o >, *;, °S m
4- bo $4.
W 0
-4 --mX rA.- = C*
_" C)! co O tW A 0)

m
4--l
10 N: d m
4'h~ 44~e
w

o ~~
,C.,C
Wo o k 4 0
"O 4s cdw m
cV Q= pdq)
Q =
d 3 0; C0aa
d d C 4° >< d° g
aa Cd
~~~~~~~~~
c °
o*
E
o
cF 1 ) o .s
,-
F -
,
d
P,
'a
4j
=
1
P._
a
4
P
7s
0L cd
l
o 1 C* · 0

o o '~ ~
o
530tr. 'a E
R oo co. 5w
0 z El o F~0C~ C
m
-4a4) 1 l

Co o i to0'gl " C
d o
Ca
o t
Cd~
r. c~,c~~ ~.~2 0 0·> 4c~ a F

o Ed~~~C
0
o P4
d o W

~~w o~
0 ) cd r 0 .~

M
m a 0
Rg,a a, E~d 4-)

cd d 0
00 ao~

a, C) 0
530nt
 * al - U>

0
0'lo ' .
c4
o
C) _) co
.-.- p d+ .- w
0 4) .
tm b >89 0- m

Cd C.)z A Ca o 4 X.

~ct
F:
G) oE3 - a)44)4UO
0ah o
o v - -d (
Ca ~~o r.
cJw0
d
w
M~~~~~o 01
Q ) A0"
~ ,~ i o
1-oo o
be
'-d .4.) oo 4)
C4.)
0
r S-a IA..

4-E-'
OS
.
0
OS'
Q U
.
" c0 bO bOS4 Zh
4J OS:
~ ~0 ~.
4-a
0 S
a .5! 0. a)
4 9 ~U
4 ) 0 b4 C
4) cC
0 laGo no d o co
Cd k ( Cm boE
.In
*Ca.
4. 4.
~5 >
C~O BA
04
fl..
0 4~~~
~ 4- .) 4 > E LU
E X~~~~~m
4 5I6
ti! PC4 0 Cd
-
E
ku

0 b c
c C~ Q, 'C Q 0 ol ~E Z_ C*
bo &4 :3 < bo
0 I4 0 rnn Q ~O O 0 w o
r. 4~k Cd W 40 6 ~ .4-

O-oj a E 0 9 '0
L
bO I r Cj
co 0 Q co
u . o >u
~~- 0'" coCa a "Cd.-
4 4- CAR

.- S a -v E .

zg 'a Cdr-

tA
~ Pld w
4
a
o

85369
0-49 35 53
 .4
4-4o m·0r
Goo aE

4) F2 F 4 =mc, r bor u

o M0) ~ ~~
~
-, 5 0 00 4
ka 4· u0
CH
Z5
~C~ 9
§oC
O
0D
~~~.-C" "~
4) o Ea

s~~ co
· cr~~a c Po,
c o 0o C
C h h
44

u1 b 0
co E lao
02 .- C4a 4Z

iso Ca
> C)
I
C) co co
GQ S.., kU r.0 B.
co4
Ca oP

t5 0 44 u &4 co
0 co co(
co
-2 & ~ ". 0j 1
CA
CU.-
.~~~&o~c a
co :5 o r
r. CaFq W* 4.)

b# ~o QX0
co
l0
.5 r.;a - 1 oa
0 co

$: oo .N, m0 W .
4" Ca (r. 0:~
0 4 e Xo co 0e
bo '~a 45

C*Ca 0,W 4~I

532 F:7

532
 .~
co ciscU,
wo
" .0 E,E
Gk .~ C

~
,~C .,. ' >"0

'Uf~
a:
o J0 co~
~c~o S. o

450 be '4 4-5

G4 Cd

533
 APPENDIX VIII

REFERENCES

1. MILITARY TERMS.
TM 20-205, Dictionary of United States Army
Terms.
Dictionary of United States Military Terms
for Joint Usage.

2. LIST OF TRAINING PUBLICATIONS.

FM 21-6.

3. TRAINING FILMS, FILM STRIPS,

AND FILM BULLETINS.
FM 21-7, List of War Department Films, Film
Strips, and Recognition Film Slides.

4. TRAINING AIDS.
FM 21-8, Military Training Aids.

5. MEDICAL.
AR 40-205, Military Hygiene and Sanitation.
AR 40-210, Prevention and Control of Com-
municable Diseases of Man.

6. CHEMICAL. '
FM 3-5, Characteristics and Employment of
Ground Chemical Munitions.

534
7. INFANTRY.
T/O&E 7-17, Infantry Rifle Company.
FM 7-24, Communication in the Infantry Di-
vision.
FM 7-30, Supply and Evacuation, The Infan-
try Regiment: Service Company and Medi-
cal Detachment.
FM 7-35, Antitank Company, Infantry Regi-
ment and Antitank Platoon, Infantry Bat-
talion.
FM 7-37, Cannon Company, Infantry Regi-
ment.

8. ARMORED.
FM 17-32, Tank Company.

9. INDIVIDUAL SOLDIER.
FM 21-7, List of War Department Films, Film
Strips and Recognition Film Slides.
FM 21-8, Military Training Aids.
FM 21-10, Military Sanitation.
FM 21-75, Scouting, Patrolling, and Sniping.

10. BASIC WEAPONS.

FM 23-5, U.S. Rifle, Caliber .30 M1.
FM 23-7, U.S. Carbine, Caliber .30 M1 and
M1A1.
FM 23-15, Browning Automatic Rifle, Caliber
.30, M1918A2.
FM 23-25, Bayonet.
FM 23-30, Hand and Rifle Grenades, Rocket,
AT, HE, 2.36-inch.
FM 23-32, Rocket Launchers.

535
 FM 23-35, Pistols and Revolvers.
FM 23-55, Browning Machine Guns, Caliber
.30, M1917A1, M1919A4, and M1919A6.
FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun, Caliber
.50, HB, M2.
FM 23-80, 57-mm Rifle, M18.
FM 23-85, 60-mm Mortar, M2.

11. COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES.

FM 24-16, Signal Orders, Records and Re-
ports.
FM 24-17, Signal Center and Message Center
Procedure.
FM 24-18, Radio Communication.
FM 24-20, Field Wire Systems.

12. SPECIAL OPERATIONS.

FM 31-5, Landing Operations on Hostile
Shores.
FM 31-25, Desert Operations.
FM 31-40, Supply by Air in Combat Opera-
tions.
FM 31-50, Attack on a Fortified Position and
Combat in Towns.

13. MOUNTAIN AND WINTER.

FM 70-10, Mountain Operations.
FM 70-15, Operations in Snow and Extreme
Cold.

14. AIRBORNE.
FM 71-30, Employment of Airborne Forces.

536
 TM 71-210, Air Transport of' Troops and
Equipment.
TM 71-220, Technical Training of Parachu-
tists.

15. JUNGLE.
FM 72-20, Jungle Warfare.

16. FIELD SERVICE REGULATIONS.

FM 100-5, Operations.

17. STAFF OFFICERS.

FM 101-10, Organization, Technical and Log-
istical Data.

537
 INDEX

Paragraph Page
Action, zones of ........ 178 192
Administrative group, company 4, 11,352 2, 10,345
Advance guard:
Advance party ...... 22, 24 20,24
Point ........... 22, 25, 52 20,24,46
Road space ........ 22 20
Support . . . . . . . ... 22, 23, 26, 31 20, 23, 24,29
Advance party:
Characteristics ...... 22, 24 20, 24
Contact established .... 121 116
Mission .......... 117 112
Aid men, company ....... 111, 362 119, 354
Airborne assault ....... 391 374
Airborne defense .... . 313-315 309
Airborne rifle company:
Communication ...... 399 379
Equipment ....... . 373 358
In attack. (See Attack.)
Role ........... 371 357
Supply and evacuation . 374 358
Supporting arms ..... 375 361
Air-loading table ....... 385 370
Air movement ......... 389 373
Air movement table ...... 390 374
All-around defense ...... 268 263
Alternate firing position .... 7 7
Ammunition .......... 357 349
Ammunition supply:
Rifle company ...... 357 349
Rifle platoon ....... 113 111
Rifle squad ........ 48 45
River crossing . 239 245
Weapons platoon ..... 148 159
Weapons squad ...... 88 96

539
 Paragraph Page
Antiaircraft security:
Rifle company ...... 12 11
Rifle company (airborne) . 376 362
Rifle platoon ....... 114 111
Rifle squad ........ 49 45
Weapons platoon ..... 149 160
Weapons squad ...... 89 96
Antitank defense:
Airborne rifle company.. 377 362
Front-line company . . . 13, 286 12, 285
Reserve company ..... 306 301
Rifle platoon ....... 115 111
Rifle squad ........ 50 45
Weapons platoon ..... 150 160
Weapons squad ...... 90 96
Approach march (see also
movement to contact):
Rifle dompany ...... 18 16
Rifle platoon ....... 116-121 112
Weapons platoon ..... 152 161
Weapons squad ...... 91-92 96
Artillery .......... 181, app. IV 194, 419
Assault:
Airborne rifle company.
(See Airborne assault.)
Night attack ....... 224 231
Rifle company ...... 191 209
Rifle platoon ....... 129 134
Rifle squad ........ 71 76
Assault fire ........... 72 78
Assault landing ........ 391 374
Assembly aids (airborne rifle
company) . ....... . 394, 397 377, 378
Assembly area:
Airborne rifle company.. 393-394,397 376, 377
Rifle company 37, 303 35,300
Rifle platoon 122 118
River crossing ...... 228 235
Weapons platoon ..... 153 161

540
 Pafagraph Page
Assistant platoon sergeant .. 111 110
As skirmishers ........ 56 55
Attack:
Airborne rifle company:
Assault ....... 405 385
Conduct ....... 404 382
Organization ..... 380 365
Preparations ..... 378-388 363
Reorganization . .. 406 385
Reserve company . . . 408 386
Separated personnel . 400 380
Reserve company:
Committed .. ..... 199 216
Initial position ... . 195 214
Missions ....... 197 215
Reconnaissance ... . 198 216
Successive reserve
positions ...... 196 215
Rifle company:
Assault ........ 191,224 209, 231
Conduct ....... 189 205
In woods ....... 241-244 245
Movement to line of
departure ..... 188 205
Night attack ..... 200-225 217
Pursuit ........ 194 212
Reorganization ... . 192, 224 211, 231
River line ...... 226-240 234
Rifle platoon:
Assault ........ 129 134
Conduct ....... 128 131
Movement across line
of departure .... 127 131
Preparations ..... 122-126 118
Reorganization ... . 130 136
Support platoon . . . 131,280 137,279
Rifle squad:
Assault ........ 71 76
Conduct ....... 70 72

541
 Attack-Continued Paragraph Page
Rifle squad-Continued
Connecting files . . . 53 48
Connecting groups . . 75 81
Duties ........ 41, 65-67 41, 66
Flank patrols ..... 74 81
Flank guard . . . 54 52
Movement across line
of departure . ... 69 72
Preparations ..... 61-68 61
Reorganization .... 73 81
Support squad ... . 76 82
Weapons platoon:
Displacement ..... 162 171
Firing positions . . 157 166
Preparations .... . 153-159 161
Reorganization ... . 163 172
Supporting fires . . 161 171
Weapons squad:
Displacement ..... 102 103
Firing positions . . . 100, 160-163 102, 170
Preparations ..... 93-99 97
Reorganization .... 103 103
Supporting fires . . . 101 102
Attack position:
Night attack ....... 212 224
Rifle company ....... 38 38
River crossing ...... 228, 234 235, 242
Attack, special operations ... 266 262
Automatic rifle ........ 6 5
Avenues of approach ..... 269 265
Bayonet .... 5 3
Boundaries .......... 178, 276 192, 274
Briefing for airborne attack.. 383 369
Bugler . ..... 11, 346 10, 336
Burial of dead . ........ 359 352
Carbine .......... . 5 3
Challenge and password. . . . 220 229
Characteristics of infantry . . . 3 2
542
 Paragraph Page
Clothing and equipment .... 356 348
Column:
March .......... App. II 393
Platoon .......... 120; app. II 114; 393
Route and tactical ... . 18 16
Squad .......... 56; app. II 55, 393
Combat formations ...... 120; app. II 114; 393
Combat outpost ........ 320-323 315
Command group, company. .. 4 2
Command post:
In attack ......... 185 202
In defense:
Front-line company 284 284
Reserve company . 305 301
Rifle platoon ..... 138 149
Communication:
Airborne rifle company . 399 379
Attack in woods ..... 243 247
Night attack ....... 222 230
Night withdrawal ..... 340 331
Rifle company:
Communication coordi-
nation ....... 349 342
Equipment ...... 347 338
In attack ....... 187 204
Orders ........ 350 343
Personnel ...... 346 336
Use of communication . 348 338
Rifle platoon ....... 112 111
River crossing ...... 240 245
Communication sergeant . . . 11,346 10, 336
Company:
Clerk .......... . 11 10
Headquarters ...... 4, 10-11 2, 8
Messengers . . . . . ... 11, 346, 348 10,336, 338
Records .......... 351 344
Concealment .......... 70, 269 72, 265
Connecting files ....... . 53 48

543
 Paragraph Page

Connecting groups:
Rifle company ....... 183 201
Rifle platoon ....... 128 131
Rifle squad ........ 75 81
Continuation of attack ..... 407 386
Control:
March objectives; .... . 19 18
Phase lines ........ 19 18
Rifle company:
In attack ....... 190 206
In infiltration ... . 263 257
In woods ....... 243 247
Rifle platoon ....... 112 111
Weapons platoon:
57-mm rifle section . 145 157
60-mm mortar section. 145 157
Control point (airborne) ... . 395 377
Counterattack ......... 298 298
Cover and concealment ... . 70,269 72, 265
Covering force ......... 335, 341 328, 332
Cover position ......... 7 7
Crew-served weapons:
Automatic rifle ...... 6 5
Caliber .50 machine gun .. 6 5
Light machine gun ... . 6 5
60-mm mortar ...... 6 5
57-mm rifle ........ 6 5
Rocket launcher ..... 6 5
Critical terrain features ... . 269 265
Defense:
Airborne rifle company . 409 386
Antiairborne ...... . 313-315 309
Front-line company:
Antitank ....... 286 285
Boundaries ...... 276 274
Command post ... . 284 284
Company order . .. 273; app. I 273; 388
Conduct ....... 289 288

544
Defense-Continued Paragraph Page
Front-line company-Continued
Depth ........ 275 274
Employment ..... 267 263
Fire plan ....... 282 282
Frontage ....... 274 274
Limiting points . . . 277 275
Local security ... . 324 318
Mission ........ 270 268
Night dispositions . 288 287
Observation posts . 283, 292 283, 292
Organization of ground 285 284
Relief ........ 290 291
Reverse slope ..... 291-293 292
Support platoon . . . 280 279
Troop leading pro-
cedure ....... 272 269
In woods ......... 312 308
On a river line ....... 311 307
On a wide front ...... 309 303
Perimeter ......... 310 304
Reserve rifle company:
Antitank ....... 306 301
Assembly area ... . 303 300
Command post ... . 305 301
Conduct ....... 307 302
Counterattacking . . 298 298
Missions ....... 295-300 297
Observation posts . . 304 301
Organization of ground 302 300
Weapons platoon . . . 301 299
Rifle platoon:
Command post ... . 138 149
Conduct ....... 140 151
Distribution of squads 136 146
Fire plan ...... 137 147
Frontage and depth . 135,279 145, 277
Order ........ 134 144
Organization of ground 139 150
Security ....... 141 152

545
 Defense-Continued Paragraph Page
Rifle platoon-Continued
Tactical employment 132 141
Troop-leading pro-
cedure ....... 133 142
Rifle squad:
Conduct ....... 82 89
Firing positions . . 79 87
Mission ....... 78 85
Order ........ 80 88
Organization of
position ...... 81 89
Security ....... 83 91
Weapons platoon:
Conduct ....... 170 182
Leaders ....... 168 179
Occupation of positions 169 180
Orders ....... 1 167 177
Sectors of fire .... 166 176
Selection of positions. 165 175
Tactical employment . 164 174
Target areas ..... 166 176
'Weapons squad:
Conduct ....... 109 107
Firing positions . . . 106 105
Mission ... ... . 105 105
Order . ........ 107 106
Organization of
position ...... 108 106
Defense, principles of ..... 268,314 263,309
Delaying action ........ 331, 343-344 326, 334
Depth in defense . . . . . . 135, 275 145, 274
Diamond, squad ........ 56; app. II 55; 393
Displacement:
60-mm mortar section in
attack ......... 162 171
57-mm rifle section in
attack ......... 162 171
Weapons squad ...... 102 103
Drivers ........... . 143, 367 155,356

546
 Paragraph Page
Duties:
Administrative group . . . 11, 352 10, 345
Aid men ......... 111,362 110, 354
Company commander . . . 10, 352, 359 8, 345, 352
Company headquarters . 11 10
Rifle platoon:
Aid man ....... 111 110
Assistant platoon
sergeant ...... 111 110
Messengers ..... 111 110
Platoon leader ... . 111 110
Platoon sergeant . . . 111 110
Rifle squad:
Assistant squad leader 41, 58, 66 41, 58, 68
Squad leader ..... 41, 58, 65 41, 58,66
Squad members . . . 67 68
Weapons platoon:
Headquarters .... 143, 168 155, 179
Section and squad
leaders ...... 144 155
Weapons squad:
Leaders ....... 85 94
Echelon, right (left) ...... 120; app. II 114; 393
Emplacement, weapons .... App. V 433
Equipment (airborne rifle
company) .......... 373 358
Equipment, communication.
(See Communication.)
Estimate of situation:
Company commander , . . 173 185
Platoon leader ...... 124 119
Evacuation of wounded .... 363 354
Executive officer, company.. . 11 10
Field exercises ........ App. VII 471
Fields of fire .......... 269 265
Fire and maneuver ....... 3,46, 70 2, 44, 72
Fire, conduct of:
60-mm mortar section... 146 158

853696 0--49 -- 547

 I'aragraph Page
Fire, conduct of-Continued
57-mm rifle section .... 146 158
Light machine gun team . 86 95
Rocket launcher team... 86 95
Fire control .......... 43 41
Fire discipline ........ 44 42
Fire distribution ....... 45 42
Fire plan:
Rifle company ...... 282 282
Rifle platoon ....... 137 147
Fires, supporting ....... 181; app. IV 194; 419
Firing positions:
Light machine gun team 7, 97-100, 7, 100, 102
106, 160-163 105, 170
60-mm mortar section... 7, 157 7, 166
57-mm rifle section .... 7, 157 7, 166
Rifle squad ....... 79 87
Rocket launcher team . . . 7, 97 7, 100
First sergeant ........ 11 10
Flank guard:
Rifle company ...... 28 27
Rifle platoon ....... 118 114
Rifle squad ........ 54 52
Flank security:
Advance guard ...... 26 24
On raids ......... 256 254
Rifle platoon ....... 128 131
Flexibility . ......... 268 263
Flight manifest ........ 385 370
Food and water ..... ... 354 347
Foot marches ......... . 20 20
Formations (see also Combat
formations, app. II):
TRifle company:
Movement to contact . 18 16
Night attack ..... 210 222
River crossing .... 232 241
Woods ........ 243 247
Rifle platoon ....... 120 114

548
 Paragraph Page
Formations-Continued
Rifle squad ....... . 56 55
Support of advance guard. 22, 23, 26, 31 20, 23, 24, 29
Frontages:
In defense ........ 135, 274, 145,274
279,309 277,303
Fuel ............. 355 348
General outpost ........ 319 314
Grenade:
Hand ........... 5 3
Rifle . .......... 5 3
Ground, organization of:
Front-line company . . . 285 284
Reserve company ..... 302 300
Hasty defense ........ 287 286
Heavy weapons company . . . App. IV 419
Identification (airborne) . . . 396 378
Illuminated night attack . . . . 203, 225 218, 233
Illuminating devices ...... 211 224
Individual weapons:
Bayonet ....... ... 5 3
Carbine .......... 5 3
Hand grenade ....... 5 3
Pistol . .......... 5 3
Rifle . .......... 5 3
Rifle grenade ........ 5 3
Sniper's rifle ....... 5 3
Infantry-tank team ...... 181 194
Infiltration .......... 263-265 257
.Key terrain .......... 268 263
Kitchen, company ...... . 354 347
Limiting points ........ 277 275
Limit of advance ....... 217 228
Line of departure (see also
Point of departure):
Rifle company . . . . .. 177, 188,213 191,205, 225

549
 Paragraph Page
Line of departure-Continued
Rifle platoon ....... 127 131
Rifle squad ........ 64, 69 64, 72
Line of deployment ....... 216 228
Line, platoon . . . . . . ... 120; app. II 114; 393
Listening post ......... 324 318
Litter bearers ......... 363 354
Loading (airborne) ...... 384,387-388 370, 371
Local security ......... 324 318
Machine gun:
Light ........... 6 5
Caliber .50 ........ 6 5
Maneuver, scheme of . . . . .. 175 189
Marches:
Foot ........... 20 20
Motor .......... 29-34 29
March objectives ....... 19 18
March outpost:
Rifle platoon ....... 119 114
Rifle squad ........ 55 52
Marshalling camp ....... 382 368
Medical platoon ........ 363 354
Medical service:
Evacuation ........ 363 354
Orders .......... . 364 355
Personnel and duties . .. 361-362 353
Sanitation ........ 365 355
Messengers:
Rifle company ...... 11, 346 10, 336
Rifle platoon ....... 111 110
Weapons platoon ..... 143 155
Mess location ......... 354 347.
Mission:
Front-line company ... . 270 268
Infiltration forces ..... 263 257
Reserve company ..... 197, 295-300 215, 297
Rifle company ...... 2 1
Support platoon ...... 131 137
Mortar, 60-mm ....... . 6 5

550
 Paragraph. Page
Mortar company, heavy . . . . 181; app. IV 194; 419
Motorized detachment .... . 34 31
Motor maintenance:
Drivers .......... 367 356
Higher echelon ...... 368 356
Responsibility ...... 366 355
Motor marches. (See Marches.)
Movement at night:
Covered ......... . 36 35
Uncovered ....... . 35 32
Movement to contact:
Classification ...... . 16 15
Covered ......... 16 15
Definition ........ 15 15
Phases .......... 17 16
Rifle company . . . . .. 15,35 15, 32
Rifle platoon:
Actions when contact
is established .... 121 116
Advance party .... 117 112
Combat formations . . 120; app. II 114; 393
Flank guard ..... 118 114
March outpost . . .. 119 114
,Rifle squad ........ 51 45
Uncovered ........ 16 15
Weapons platoon ..... 151-152 160
Weapons squad ...... 91-92 96
Mutual support ........ 268 263
Night attack:
Considerations in planning:
Attack positions . . 212 224
Communication . . . 222 230
Company order .... 223 230
Formations ..... 210 222
Identification .... 220 229
Illumination devices . 211 224
Limit of advance... 217 228
Line or point of de-
parture ...... 213 225

551
Night attack-Continued Paragraph Page
Considerations in planning
-Continued
Maneuver ...... 221 230
Platoon release point. 215 225
Probable line of dep-
ployment ...... 216 228
Routes to objective. . 214 225
Secrecy measures . 219 229
Time of attack ... . 209 221
Rifle company:
Characteristics ... . 202 217
Conduct ....... 224 231
Control ........ 208 220
Illuminated .... . 225 233
Plan of attack ..... 207 219
Purpose ...... . 201 217
Reconnaissance ... . 206 219
Supported or un-
supported ..... 204,205 219
Types ........ 203 218
Night dispositions in defense . 288 287
Objectives .......... 19, 174,403 18, 188, 381
Observation and fields of fire. 269, 283 265,'283
Observation post (see also
Defense):
Front-line company . . . 173, 283, 292 185, 283,292
Reserve company ..... 304 301
Rifle platoon ....... 138 149
Obstacles ........... 269 265
Off-carrier position ...... 7 7
Orderly ....... .... 11,346 10,336
Orders:
Battalion:
For a raid ...... 249 251
In attack ..... ... 172 184
Rifle company ....... 173 185
For retrograde move-
ment ........ 333 326

552
Orders-Continued Paragraph Page
Rifle company-Continued
In a raid ...... . 249 251
In attack . . . ... . 123; app. I 118; 388
In defense . . . . . . 273; app. I 273; 388
In night attack .... 223 230
In river crossing . . . 233 241
Rifle platoon .... . . 134 144
Rifle squad ....... . 68, 80 70, 88
Weapons platoon ... . 94, 159, 167 98, 168, 177
Weapons squad ..... . 94, 99,107 98, 101, 106
Orders, operations ...... App. I 388
Organization:
Airborne rifle company .. 372 358
Combat outpost ...... 321 316
For a raid ....... . 251 252
Rifle company ...... . . 4 2
Rifle platoon .... .. ·. 4, 110 2, 110
Rifle squad ....... . 40 41
Weapons platoon:
60-mm mortar section. 4, 142 2, 154
57-mm rifle section . . 4, 142 2,154
Weapons squad ...... 84 94
Organization in depth ..... 268 263
Organization of ground ... . 81, 108 89, 106
139, 285, 302 150, 284, 300
Outguard .......... . 83 91
Outposts ........... 317-323 311

Parking diagram (airborne) . 386 371

Password. (See Challenge and
password.)
Patrols ........... . 74, 83, 256 81, 91, 254
Perimeter defense ....... 310 304
Personnel:
Communication ...... 346 336
Medical ......... . 362 354
Mess ........... 352 345
Supply ......... . 352 345
Phase lines .......... 19 18

553
 Paragraph Page
Pistol ............. 5 3
Platoon column. (See Column,
platoon.)
Platoon leader .... .. ... 111 110
Platoon line .......... 120; app. II 114; 393
Platoon release point ..... 215 225
Platoon sergeant . . . . . .. 111 110
Platoons of heavy weapons
company .......... 181; app. IV 194; 419
Point of advance guard .... 22 20
Point of departure ...... 69, 127, 72, 131
177, 188, 213 191,205, 225
Position, organization of:
Reverse slope ....... 292 292
Rifle squad ........ 81 89
Weapons squad ...... 108 106
Positions:
Alternate ......... 7 7
Attack .......... 38 38
Cover ........... 7 7
Off-carrier ........ 7 7
Primary ......... 7 7
Supplementary ...... 7 7
Positions and duties of:
Assistant squad leader . . 41, 66 41,68
Squad leader ....... 41, 65, 85, 41, 66, 94
144, 168 155, 179
Primary fiiing position ... . 7 7
Principles of defense ..... 268 263
Pursuit ............ 194 221

Radio ............ . 347 338

Radiotelephone operators . . . 11,346 10,336
Raids:
Characteristics ...... 247 250
Defined .......... 245 250
Purpose ......... 246 250
Supported ........ 249-260 251
Types ........... 248 250
Unsupported ........ 261 256

554
 Paragraph Page
Rallying points ........ 255 254
Range estimation ....... 87 95
Rations ............ 354 347
Rear guard .......... 327 322
Rear party .......... 327 322
Rear point .......... 327 322
Reconnaissance:
Airborne rifle company.. 381, 401 367, 380
Night attack ....... 206 219
Raid ........... 250 251
Reserve company ..... 198 216
Rifle company ....... 173, 272 185, 269
Rifle platoon ....... 124, 133 119; 142
River line attack ..... 227 235
Records, company ...... . 3651 344
Rehearsal for a raid ...... 258 255
Relief in defense ........ 290 291
Reorganization:
Airborne rifle company . 392,402, 406 376, 380, 385
Rifle company ...... . 192, 224 211, 231
Rifle platoon ....... 130 136
Rifle squad ........ 73 81
Weapons platoon ..... 163 172
Weapons squad ...... 103 103
Reserve company ...... . 195-199 214
Retirement .......... 330 326
Retrograde movements:
Daylight withdrawals . 329, 342 325, 332
Defined .......... 328 324
Delaying actions ..... 331,343,344 326, 334, 335
Night withdrawals ... . 334-341 327
Retirement ........ 330 326
Reverse slope ......... 291-293 292
Rifle ............. 5 3
Rifle, 57-mm ........ . 6 5
Rifle company, airborne. (See
Airborne rifle company.)
Rifle company:
As advance guard . . .. 27, 32 27,30

555
 Paragraph Page
Rifle company-Continued
As flank guard ...... 28 27
As motorized detachment . 34 31
As part of the main body. 21 20
Attack preparations . . . 171-173 184
In attack. (See Attack.)
In defense:
Employment ..... 267 263
Principles of defense . 268-269 263
Terrain study ... . 269 265
Organization ....... 4 2
Rifle platoon: ·
Ammunition supply . . . 113 111
Antiaircraft defense . . . 114 111
Antitank defense .... 115 111
As support ........ 131, 280 137, 279
Control and communication 112 111
Duties .......... 111 110
In attack. (See Attack.)
In defense. (See Defense.)
Movement to contact. (See
Movement to contact.)
Organization ...... . 4, 110 2, 110
Rifle, sniper's ......... 5 3
Rifle squad:
Ammunition supply . . 48 45
Antiaircraft security . . . 49 45
Antitank defense ..... 50 45
Connecting files ...... 53 48
Duties .......... 41, 65-66 41, 66
Fire control ....... 43 41
Fire discipline ...... 44 42
Fire distribution ..... 45 42
Flank guard ....... 54 52
Formations ........ 56;'app. It 55; 393
In attack. (See Attack.)
In defense. (See Defense.)
March outpost .... . . 55 52
Movement to contact . . . 51 45

556
 Paragraph Page
Rifle squad-Continued
Organization ....... 40 41
Point of advance guard . 22, 24-25 20,24
Security ......... 59 58
Support ......... 96 99
Target designation ... . 42 41
River line. (See Attack and
defense.)
Road blocks .......... 325 320
Rocket launcher ........ 6 5
Rolls ............. 358 352
Route column ......... 18 16
Sanitation .......... . 365 355
Security:
Airborne rifle company.. 398 379
In assembly area ..... 39 40
In attack ......... 59, 131, 183 58, 137, 201
In defense ........ 317-327 311
Local ........... 141, 324 152, 318
Night withdrawal ... . 338 329
Of advance guard .... 26 24
Perimeter defense ... . 310 304
River crossing ...... 238 244
Security missions, rifle com-
pany:
Assembly area outposts 318 311
Combat outpost ..... 320-323 315
Defense of rear installa-
tions .......... 326 322
General outpost ..... 319 314
Local security ...... 141, 324 152, 318
Rear guard ........ 327 322
Roadblocks and defense of
obstacles ........ 325 320
Sentinel post ......... 324 318
Sergeant:
Communication ...... 11, 346 10, 336
Rifle platoon ....... 111 110
Weapons platoon ..... 143 155

557
 Paragraph Page
Shock action ......... 3 2
Signal communication. (See
communication.)
Signal equipment ...... . 347 338
Signals ............ 347, 348; 338; 413
app. III
Skirmishers .......... 56 55
Snipers ............ 47 45
Sniper's rifle ......... 5 3
Squad column. (See Column,
squad.)
Squad diamond. (See Diamond,
squad.)
Supplementary firing position. 7 7
Supply:
Airborne rifle company . 374 359
Rifle company:
Administrative group
duties ....... 352 345
Ammunition and explo-
sives ........ 357 349
Clothing and equipment 356 348
Food and water . . . 354 347
Fuel ......... 355 348
Miscellaneous admin-
istration ...... 359 352
Orders ........ 360 353
Rolls ......... 358 352
Transportation ... . 353 347
Supply discipline ....... 352 345
Support of-
Advance guard . . . . .. 22-23, 26 20, 24
Rear guard ........ 327 322
Rifle company ....... 131, 179, 137, 194,
190,280 206,279
Supporting arms (airborne
rifle company) ....... 375 361
Supporting fires (see App. IV):
Heavy mortar company.. 181 194

558
 Paragraph Page
Supporting fires-Continued '
Heavy weapons company . 181 194
Rifle company ...... 70, 190 72, 206
Tanks .......... 181 194
Weapons platoon ...... 161 171
Weapons squad ...... 101 102
Switchboards ......... 347 338
Tactical column ........ 18 16
Tactical employment:
Light machine gun team . 96 99
Rifle company ...... 9, 132, 267 8, 141, 263
Rifle platoon ....... 96, 132 99, 141
Rocket launcher team. .. 96 99
Weapons platoon:
In attack ....... 156 165
In defense ...... 164 174
Tank company, heavy ..... 181; app. IV 194; 419
Target areas:
60-mm mortar section . 166 176
57-mm rifle section ... . 166 176
Target designation ...... 42 41
Targets:
Light machine gun section 98 121
60-mm mortar section . . 158 168
57-mm rifle section ... . 158 168
Rocket launcher section.. 98 121
Terrain study ........ -. 269 265
Training program ...... App. VI 451
Transportation ....... . 8, 353 7, 347
Troop leading procedure:
Rifle company:
In attack ...... 173 185
In defense ...... 272 269
Rifle platoon:
In attack ...... 124 119
In defense ...... 133 142
Rifle squad ........ 63 63
Weapons platoon ... . 155 163
Weapons squad ...... 95 98

559
 ~."¢: Paragraph Page

Vee, platoon .... or. , ;' app. II 114; 393

Water ......... 354 347
Weapons emplacements ... . App. V 433
Weapons platoon:
Ammunition supply . . . 148 159
Antiaircraft security . . . 149 160
Antitank defense ..... 150 160
Conduct of fire ...... 146 158
Control .......... 145 157
Duties of personnel ... . 143-144 155
In attack (see also Attack) 180 194
In defense (see also
Defense) . . . . . ... 301 299
Movement to contact. (See
Movement to contact.)
Observation ....... 147 158
Organization ....... 4, 142 2, 154
Weapons squad: *
Ammunition supply . . . 88 96
Antiaircraft security . . . 89 96
Antitank defense ..... 90 96
Conduct of fire ...... 86 95
Duties of leaders ..... 85 94
In attack. (See Attack.)
In defense. (See Defense.)
Organization ....... 84 94
Range estimation ..... 87 95
Wedge, platoon ........ 120; app. II 114; 393
Withdrawal:
Daylight ........ . 342 332
Defined ........ '.. 329 325
From action ....... 329 325
From combat outpost . .. 323 318
In a raid ......... 257 254
Night .......... 334-341 327
Zones of action ........ 178 192

560
* U.S. WoI NTIN
OMFFNGICE: 0-1949